This is a modern-English version of A Treatise on Painting, originally written by Leonardo, da Vinci. It has been thoroughly updated, including changes to sentence structure, words, spelling, and grammar—to ensure clarity for contemporary readers, while preserving the original spirit and nuance. If you click on a paragraph, you will see the original text that we modified, and you can toggle between the two versions.

Scroll to the bottom of this page and you will find a free ePUB download link for this book.

The cover image was created by the transcriber based on the original cover and is placed in the public domain.

The cover image was made by the transcriber based on the original cover and is now in the public domain.

A
TREATISE
ON
PAINTING,

BY

BY

LEONARDO DA VINCI.

LEONARDO DA VINCI.


Printed by S. Gosnell,
Little Queen Street, Holborn, London.

Printed by S. Gosnell,
Little Queen Street, Holborn, London.


Leonardo Da Vinci

A

A

TREATISE

Essay

ON

ON

PAINTING,

ARTWORK,

BY

BY

LEONARDO DA VINCI.

Leonardo da Vinci.

FAITHFULLY TRANSLATED FROM THE

FAITHFULLY TRANSLATED FROM THE

ORIGINAL ITALIAN,

Below is a short piece of text (5 words or fewer). Modernize it into contemporary English if there's enough context, but do not add or omit any information. If context is insufficient, return it unchanged. Do not add commentary, and do not modify any placeholders. If you see placeholders of the form __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_x__, you must keep them exactly as-is so they can be replaced with links. ORIGINAL ITALIAN,

AND NOW FIRST DIGESTED UNDER PROPER HEADS,

AND NOW FIRST ORGANIZED UNDER PROPER HEADINGS,

By JOHN FRANCIS RIGAUD, Esq.

By John Francis Rigaud, Esq.

ACADEMICIAN OF THE ROYAL ACADEMY OF PAINTING AT LONDON, AND
ALSO OF THE ACADEMIA CLEMENTINA AT BOLOGNA, AND THE ROYAL
ACADEMY AT STOCKHOLM.

ACADEMICIAN OF THE ROYAL ACADEMY OF PAINTING IN LONDON, AND
ALSO OF THE ACADEMIA CLEMENTINA IN BOLOGNA, AND THE ROYAL
ACADEMY IN STOCKHOLM.

Illustrated with twenty-three Copper-plates, and other Figures.

Illustrated with twenty-three copper plates and other images.

TO WHICH IS PREFIXED

PRECEDED BY

A NEW LIFE OF THE AUTHOR,

A NEW LIFE OF THE AUTHOR,

DRAWN UP FROM AUTHENTIC MATERIALS TILL NOW INACCESSIBLE,

DRAWN UP FROM REAL MATERIALS UNTIL NOW UNAVAILABLE,

By JOHN SIDNEY, HAWKINS, Esq. F.A.S.

By John Sidney Hawkins, Esq. F.A.S.

Ars est habitus quidam faciendi verâ cum ratione.

Ars is a certain skill of doing things with true reasoning.

ARISTOT. ETHIC. LIB. 6.

ARISTOT. ETHIC. BOOK 6.

London:

London:

PRINTED FOR J. TAYLOR,

PRINTED FOR J. TAYLOR,

AT THE ARCHITECTURAL LIBRARY, HIGH HOLBORN.

AT THE ARCHITECTURAL LIBRARY, HIGH HOLBORN.

M.DCCC.II.

1802


TABLE OF CHAPTERS.


The Number at the End of each Title refers to the corresponding Chapter in the original Edition in Italian.

The number at the end of each title refers to the corresponding chapter in the original edition in Italian.


DRAWING.
PROPORTION.
Chap.
1. What the young Student in Painting ought in the first Place to learn. Chapter 1.
2. Rule for a young Student in Painting. 3.
3. How to discover a young Man’s Disposition for Painting. 4.
4. Of Painting, and its Divisions. 47.
5. Division of the Figure. 48.
6. Proportion of Members. 49.
7. Of Dimensions in general. 173.
8. Motion, Changes, and Proportion of Members. 166.
9. The Difference of Proportion between Children and grown Men. 169.
10. The Alterations in the Proportion of the human Body from Infancy to full Age. 167.
11. Of the Proportion of Members. 175.
12. That every Part be proportioned to its Whole. 250.
13. Of the Proportion of the Members. 185.
14. The Danger of forming an erroneous Judgment in regard to the Proportion and Beauty of the Parts. 42.
15. Another Precept. 12.
16. The Manner of drawing from Relievos, and rendering Paper fit for it. 127.
17. Of drawing from Casts or Nature. 31.
18. To draw Figures from Nature. 38.
19. Of drawing from Nature. 25.
20. Of drawing Academy Figures. 30.
21. Of studying in the Dark, on first waking in the Morning, and before going to sleep. 17.
22. Observations on drawing Portraits. 188.
23. The Method of retaining in the Memory the Likeness of a Man, so as to draw his Portrait, after having seen him only once. 189.
24. How to remember the Form of a Face. 190.
25. That a Painter should take Pleasure in the Opinion of every Body. 19.
ANATOMY.
26. What is principally to be observed in Figures. 213.
27. Mode of Studying. 7.
28. Of being universal. 22.
29. A Precept for the Painter. 5.
30. Of the Measures of the human Body, and the bending of Members. 174.
31. Of the small Bones in several Joints of the human Body. 229.
32. Memorandum to be observed by the Painter. 57.
33. The Shoulders. 171.
34. The Difference of Joints between Children and grown Men. 168.
35. Of the Joints of the Fingers. 170.
36. Of the Joint of the Wrist. 176.
37. Of the Joint of the Foot. 177.
38. Of the Knee. 178.
39. Of the Joints. 179.
40. Of the Naked. 220.
41. Of the Thickness of the Muscles. 221.
42. Fat Subjects have small Muscles. 222.
43. Which of the Muscles disappear in the different Motions of the Body. 223.
44. Of the Muscles. 226.
45. Of the Muscles. 224.
46. The Extension and Contraction of the Muscles. 227.
47. Of the Muscle between the Chest and the lower Belly. 230.
48. Of a Man’s complex Strength, but first of the Arm. 234.
49. In which of the two Actions, Pulling or Pushing, a Man has the greatest Power, Plate II. 235.
50. Of the bending of Members, and of the Flesh round the bending Joint. 236.
51. Of the naked Body. 180.
52. Of a Ligament without Muscles. 228.
53. Of Creases. 238.
54. How near behind the Back one Arm can be brought to the other. Plate III. and IV. 232.
55. Of the Muscles. 225.
56. Of the Muscles. 194.
57. Of the bending of the Body. 204.
58. The same Subject. 205.
59. The Necessity of anatomical Knowledge. 43.
MOTION AND EQUIPOISE OF FIGURES.
60. Of the Equipoise of a Figure standing still. 203.
61. Motion produced by the Loss of Equilibrium. 208.
62. Of the Equipoise of Bodies, Plate V. 263.
63. Of Positions. 192.
64. Of balancing the Weight round the Centre of Gravity in Bodies. 214.
65. Of Figures that have to lift up, or carry any Weight. 215.
66. The Equilibrium of a Man standing upon his Feet, Plate VI. 201.
67. Of Walking, Plate VII. 202.
68. Of the Centre of Gravity in Men and Animals. 199.
69. Of the corresponding Thickness of Parts on each Side of the Body. 269.
70. Of the Motions of Animals. 249.
71. Of Quadrupeds and their Motions. 268.
72. Of the Quickness or Slowness of Motion. 267.
73. Of the Motion of Animals. 299.
74. Of a Figure moving against the Wind, Plate VIII. 295.
75. Of the Balance of a Figure resting upon its Feet. 266.
76. A Precept. 350.
77. Of a Man standing, but resting more upon one Foot than the other. 264.
78. Of the Balance of Figures, Plate IX. 209.
79. In what Manner extending one Arm alters the Balance. 198.
80. Of a Man bearing a Weight on his Shoulders, Plate X. 200.
81. Of Equilibrium. 206.
82. Of Motion. 195.
83. The Level of the Shoulders. 196.
84. Objection to the above answered, Plate XI. and XII. 197.
85. Of the Position of Figures, Plate XIII. 89.
86. Of the Joints. 184.
87. Of the Shoulders. 172.
88. Of the Motions of a Man. 207.
89. Of the Disposition of Members preparing to act with great Force, Plate XIV. 233.
90. Of throwing any Thing with Violence, Plate XV. 261.
91. On the Motion of driving any Thing into or drawing it out of the Ground. 262.
92. Of forcible Motions, Plate XVI. 181.
93. The Action of Jumping. 260.
94. Of the three Motions in jumping upwards. 270.
95. Of the easy Motions of Members. 211.
96. The greatest Twist which a Man can make, in turning to look at himself behind, Plate XVII. 231.
97. Of turning the Leg without the Thigh. 237.
98. Postures of Figures. 265.
99. Of the Gracefulness of the Members. 210.
100. That it is impossible for any Memory to retain the Aspects and Changes of the Members. 271.
101. The Motions of Figures. 242.
102. Of common Motions. 248.
103. Of simple Motions. 239.
104. Complex Motions. 240.
105. Motions appropriated to the Subject. 241.
106. Appropriate Motions. 245.
107. Of the Postures of Women and young People. 259.
108. Of the Postures of Children. 258.
109. Of the Motion of the Members. 186.
110. Of mental Motions. 246.
111. Effect of the Mind upon the Motions of the Body, occasioned by some outward Object. 247.
LINEAR PERSPECTIVE.
112. Of those who apply themselves to the Practice, without having learnt the Theory of the Art. 23.
113. Precepts in Painting. 349.
114. Of the Boundaries of Objects called Outlines or Contours. 291.
115. Of linear Perspective. 322.
116. What Parts of Objects disappear first by Distance. 318.
117. Of remote Objects. 316.
118. Of the Point of Sight. 281.
119. A Picture is to be viewed from one Point only. 59.
120. Of the Dimensions of the first Figure in an historical Painting. 91.
121. Of Objects that are lost to the Sight, in Proportion to their Distance. 292.
122. Errors not so easily seen in small Objects as in large ones. 52.
123. Historical Subjects one above another on the same Wall to be avoided. 54.
124. Why Objects in Painting can never detach as natural Objects do. 53.
125. How to give the proper Dimension to Objects in Painting. 71.
126. How to draw accurately any particular Spot. 32.
127. Disproportion to be avoided, even in the accessory Parts. 290.

INVENTION or COMPOSITION.
128. Precept for avoiding a bad Choice in the Style or Proportion of Figures. 45.
129. Variety in Figures. 21.
130. How a Painter ought to proceed in his Studies. 6.
131. Of sketching Histories and Figures. 13.
132. How to study Composition. 96.
133. Of the Attitudes of Men. 216.
134. Variety of Positions. 217.
135. Of Studies from Nature for History. 37.
136. Of the Variety of Figures in History Painting. 94.
137. Of Variety in History. 97.
138. Of the Age of Figures. 252.
139. Of Variety of Faces. 98.
140. A Fault in Painters. 44.
141. How you may learn to compose Groups for History Painting. 90.
142. How to study the Motions of the human Body. 95.
143. Of Dresses, and of Draperies and Folds. 358.
144. Of the Nature of Folds in Draperies. 359.
145. How the Folds of Draperies ought to be represented, Plate XVIII. 360.
146. How the Folds in Draperies ought to be made. 361.
147. Fore-shortening of Folds, Plate XIX. 362.
148. Of Folds. 364.
149. Of Decorum. 251.
150. The Character of Figures in Composition. 253.
151. The Motion of the Muscles, when the Figures are in natural Positions. 193.
152. A Precept in Painting. 58.
153. Of the Motion of Man, Plate XX. and XXI. 182.
154. Of Attitudes, and the Motions of the Members. 183.
155. Of a single Figure separate from an historical Group. 212.
156. On the Attitudes of the human Figure. 218.
157. How to represent a Storm. 66.
158. How to compose a Battle. 67.
159. The Representation of an Orator and his Audience. 254.
160. Of demonstrative Gestures. 243.
161. Of the Attitudes of the By-standers at some remarkable Event. 219.
162. How to represent Night. 65.
163. The Method of awakening the Mind to a Variety of Inventions. 16.
164. Of Composition in History. 93.
EXPRESSION and CHARACTER.
165. Of expressive Motions. 50.
166. How to paint Children. 61.
167. How to represent old Men. 62.
168. How to paint old Women. 63.
169. How to paint Women. 64.
170. Of the Variety of Faces. 244.
171. The Parts of the Face, and their Motions. 187.
172. Laughing and Weeping. 257.
173. Of Anger. 255.
174. Despair. 256.

LIGHT and SHADOW.
175. The Course of Study to be pursued. 2.
176. Which of the two is the most useful Knowledge, the Outlines of Figures, or that of Light and Shadow. 56.
177. Which is the most important, the Shadow or Outlines in Painting. 277.
178. What is a Painter’s first Aim and Object. 305.
179. The Difference of Superficies, in regard to Painting. 278.
180. How a Painter may become universal. 10.
181. Accuracy ought to be learnt before Dispatch in the Execution. 18.
182. How the Painter is to place himself in regard to the Light, and his Model. 40.
183. Of the best Light. 41.
184. Of drawing by Candle-light. 34.
185. Of those Painters who draw at Home from one Light, and afterwards adapt their Studies to another Situation in the Country, and a different Light. 46.
186. How high the Light should be in drawing from Nature. 27.
187. What Light the Painter must make use of to give most Relief to his Figures. 55.
188. Advice to Painters. 26.
189. Of Shadows. 60.
190. Of the Kind of Light proper for drawing from Relievos, or from Nature. 29.
191. Whether the Light should be admitted in Front or sideways; and which is the most pleasing and graceful. 74.
192. Of the Difference of Lights according to the Situation. 289.
193. How to distribute the Light on Figures. 279.
194. Of the Beauty of Faces. 191.
195. How, in drawing a Face, to give it Grace, by the Management of Light and Shade. 35.
196. How to give Grace and Relief to Faces. 287.
197. Of the Termination of Bodies upon each other. 294.
198. Of the Back-grounds of painted Objects. 154.
199. How to detach and bring forward Figures out of their Back-ground. 288.
200. Of proper Back-grounds. 141.
201. Of the general Light diffused over Figures. 303.
202. Of those Parts in Shadows which appear the darkest at a Distance. 327.
203. Of the Eye viewing the Folds of Draperies surrounding a Figure. 363.
204. Of the Relief of Figures remote from the Eye. 336.
205. Of Outlines of Objects on the Side towards the Light. 337.
206. How to make Objects detach from their Ground, that is to say, from the Surface on which they are painted. 342.
CONTRASTE AND EFFECT.
207. A Precept. 343.
208. Of the Interposition of transparent Bodies between the Eye and the Object. 357.
209. Of proper Back-grounds for Figures. 283.
210. Of Back-grounds. 160.
REFLEXES.
211. Of Objects placed on a light Ground, and why such a Practice is useful in Painting. 159.
212. Of the different Effects of White, according to the Difference of Back-grounds. 139.
213. Of Reverberation. 75.
214. Where there cannot be any Reverberation of Light. 76.
215. In what Part the Reflexes have more or less Brightness. 79.
216. Of the reflected Lights which surround the Shadows. 78.
217. Where Reflexes are to be most apparent. 82.
218. What Part of a Reflex is to be the lightest. 80.
219. Of the Termination of Reflexes on their Grounds. 88.
220. Of double and treble Reflexions of Light. 83.
221. Reflexes in the Water, and particularly those of the Air. 135.

COLOURS and COLOURING.
COLOURS.
222. What Surface is best calculated to receive most Colours. 123.
223. What Surface will shew most perfectly its true Colour. 125.
224. On what Surface the true Colour is least apparent. 131.
225. What Surfaces shew most of their true and genuine Colour. 132.
226. Of the Mixture of Colours. 121.
227. Of the Colours produced by the Mixture of other Colours, called secondary Colours. 161.
228. Of Verdegris. 119.
229. How to increase the Beauty of Verdegris. 120.
230. How to paint a Picture that will last almost for ever. 352.
231. The Mode of painting on Canvass, or Linen Cloth. 353.
232. Of lively and beautiful Colours. 100.
233. Of transparent Colours. 113.
234. In what Part a Colour will appear in its greatest Beauty. 114.
235. How any Colour without Gloss, is more beautiful in the Lights than in the Shades. 115.
236. Of the Appearance of Colours. 116.
237. What Part of a Colour is to be the most beautiful. 117.
238. That the Beauty of a Colour is to be found in the Lights. 118.
239. Of Colours. 111.
240. No Object appears in its true Colour, unless the Light which strikes upon it be of the same Colour. 150.
241. Of the Colour of Shadows. 147.
242. Of Colours. 153.
243. Whether it be possible for all Colours to appear alike by means of the same Shadow. 109.
244. Why White is not reckoned among the Colours. 155.
245. Of Colours. 156.
246. Of the Colouring of remote Objects. 339.
247. The Surface of all opake Bodies participates of the Colour of the surrounding Objects. 298.
248. General Remarks on Colours. 162.
COLOURS IN REGARD TO LIGHT AND SHADOW.
249. Of the Light proper for painting Flesh Colour from Nature. 36.
250. Of the Painter’s Window. 296.
251. The Shadows of Colours. 101.
252. Of the Shadows of White. 104.
253. Which of the Colours will produce the darkest Shade. 105.
254. How to manage, when a White terminates upon another White. 138.
255. On the Back-grounds of Figures. 140.
256. The Mode of composing History. 92.
257. Remarks concerning Lights and Shadows. 302.
258. Why the Shadows of Bodies upon a white Wall are blueish towards the Evening. 328.
259. Of the Colour of Faces. 126.
260. A Precept relating to Painting. 284.
261. Of Colours in Shadow. 158.
262. Of the Choice of Lights. 28.
COLOURS IN REGARD TO BACK-GROUNDS.
263. Of avoiding hard Outlines. 51.
264. Of Outlines. 338.
265. Of Back-grounds. 334.
266. How to detach Figures from the Ground. 70.
267. Of Uniformity and Variety of Colours upon plain Surfaces. 304.
268. Of Back-grounds suitable both to Shadows and Lights. 137.
269. The apparent Variation of Colours, occasioned by the Contraste of the Ground upon which they are placed. 112.
CONTRASTE, HARMONY, AND REFLEXES, IN REGARD TO COLOURS.
270. Gradation in Painting. 144.
271. How to assort Colours in such a Manner as that they may add Beauty to each other. 99.
272. Of detaching the Figures. 73.
273. Of the Colour of Reflexes. 87.
274. What Body will be the most strongly tinged with the Colour of any other Object. 124.
275. Of Reflexes. 77.
276. Of the Surface of all shadowed Bodies. 122.
277. That no reflected Colour is simple, but is mixed with the Nature of the other Colours. 84.
278. Of the Colour of Lights and Reflexes. 157.
279. Why reflected Colours seldom partake of the Colour of the Body where they meet. 85.
280. The Reflexes of Flesh Colours. 81.
281. Of the Nature of Comparison. 146.
282. Where the Reflexes are seen. 86.
PERSPECTIVE OF COLOURS.
283. A Precept of Perspective in regard to Painting. 354.
284. Of the Perspective of Colours. 134.
285. The Cause of the Diminution of Colours. 136.
286. Of the Diminution of Colours and Objects. 356.
287. Of the Variety observable in Colours, according to their Distance or Proximity. 102.
288. At what Distance Colours are entirely lost. 103.
289. Of the Change observable in the same Colour, according to its Distance from the Eye. 128.
290. Of the blueish Appearance of remote Objects in a Landscape. 317.
291. Of the Qualities in the Surface which first lose themselves by Distance. 293.
292. From what Cause the Azure of the Air proceeds. 151.
293. Of the Perspective of Colours. 107.
294. Of the Perspective of Colours in dark Places. 148.
295. Of the Perspective of Colours. 149.
296. Of Colours. 152.
297. How it happens that Colours do not change, though placed in different Qualities of Air. 108.
298. Why Colours experience no apparent Change, though placed in different Qualities of Air. 106.
299. Contrary Opinions in regard to Objects seen afar off. 142.
300. Of the Colour of Objects remote from the Eye. 143.
301. Of the Colour of Mountains. 163.
302. Why the Colour and Shape of Objects are lost in some Situations apparently dark, though not so in Reality. 110.
303. Various Precepts in Painting. 340.
AERIAL PERSPECTIVE.
304. Aerial Perspective. 165.
305. The Parts of the smallest Objects will first disappear in Painting. 306.
306. Small Figures ought not to be too much finished. 282.
307. Why the Air is to appear whiter as it approaches nearer to the Earth. 69.
308. How to paint the distant Part of a Landscape. 68.
309. Of precise and confused Objects. 72.
310. Of distant Objects. 355.
311. Of Buildings seen in a thick Air. 312.
312. Of Towns and other Objects seen through a thick Air. 309.
313. Of the inferior Extremities of distant Objects. 315.
314. Which Parts of Objects disappear first by being removed farther from the Eye, and which preserve their Appearance. 321.
315. Why Objects are less distinguished in proportion as they are farther removed from the Eye. 319.
316. Why Faces appear dark at a Distance. 320.
317. Of Towns and other Buildings seen through a Fog in the Morning or Evening. 325.
318. Of the Height of Buildings seen in a Fog. 324.
319. Why Objects which are high, appear darker at a Distance than those which are low, though the Fog be uniform, and of equal Thickness. 326.
320. Of Objects seen in a Fog. 323.
321. Of those Objects which the Eye perceives through a Mist or thick Air. 311.
322. Miscellaneous Observations. 308.

MISCELLANEOUS OBSERVATIONS.
LANDSCAPE.
323. Of Objects seen at a Distance. 313.
324. Of a Town seen through a thick Air. 314.
325. How to draw a Landscape. 33.
326. Of the Green of the Country. 129.
327. What Greens will appear most of a blueish Cast. 130.
328. The Colour of the Sea from different Aspects. 145.
329. Why the same Prospect appears larger at some Times than at others. 307.
330. Of Smoke. 331.
331. In what Part Smoke is lightest. 329.
332. Of the Sun-beams passing through the Openings of Clouds. 310.
333. Of the Beginning of Rain. 347.
334. The Seasons are to be observed. 345.
335. The Difference of Climates is to be observed. 344.
336. Of Dust. 330.
337. How to represent the Wind. 346.
338. Of a Wilderness. 285.
339. Of the Horizon seen in the Water. 365.
340. Of the Shadow of Bridges on the Surface of the Water. 348.
341. How a Painter ought to put in Practice the Perspective of Colours. 164.
342. Various Precepts in Painting. 332.
343. The Brilliancy of a Landscape. 133.
MISCELLANEOUS OBSERVATIONS.
344. Why a painted Object does not appear so far distant as a real one, though they be conveyed to the Eye by equal Angles. 333.
345. How to draw a Figure standing upon its Feet, to appear forty Braccia high, in a Space of twenty Braccia, with proportionate Members. 300.
346. How to draw a Figure twenty-four Braccia high, upon a Wall twelve Braccia high. Plate XXII. 301.
347. Why, on measuring a Face, and then painting it of the same Size, it will appear larger than the natural one. 297.
348. Why the most perfect Imitation of Nature will not appear to have the same Relief as Nature itself. 341.
349. Universality of Painting. A Precept. 9.
350. In what Manner the Mirror is the true Master of Painters. 275.
351. Which Painting is to be esteemed the best. 276.
352. Of the Judgment to be made of a Painter’s Work. 335.
353. How to make an imaginary Animal appear natural. 286.
354. Painters are not to imitate one another. 24.
355. How to judge of one’s own Work. 274.
356. Of correcting Errors which you discover. 14.
357. The best Place for looking at a Picture. 280.
358. Of Judgment. 15.
359. Of Employment anxiously wished for by Painters. 272.
360. Advice to Painters. 8.
361. Of Statuary. 351.
362. On the Measurement and Division of Statues into Parts. 39.
363. A Precept for the Painter. 11.
364. On the Judgment of Painters. 273.
365. That a Man ought not to trust to himself, but ought to consult Nature. 20.

PREFACE
TO THE
CURRENT TRANSLATION.

The excellence of the following Treatise is so well known to all in any tolerable degree conversant with the Art of Painting, that it would be almost superfluous to say any thing respecting it, were it not that it here appears under the form of a new translation, of which some account may be expected.

The excellence of the following treatise is widely recognized by anyone with a decent understanding of the art of painting, so it would almost be unnecessary to say anything about it if it didn't come in the form of a new translation, which deserves some explanation.

Of the original Work, which is in reality a selection from the voluminous manuscript collections of the Author, both in folio and quarto, of all such passages as related to Painting, no [Pg vi] edition appeared in print till 1651, though its Author died so long before as the year 1519; and it is owing to the circumstance of a manuscript copy of these extracts in the original Italian, having fallen into the hands of Raphael du Fresne; that in the former of these years it was published at Paris in a thin folio volume in that language, accompanied with a set of cuts from the drawings of Nicolo Poussin, and Alberti; the former having designed the human figures, the latter the geometrical and other representations. This precaution was probably necessary, the sketches in the Author’s own collections being so very slight as not to be fit for publication without further assistance. Poussin’s drawings were mere outlines, and the shadows and back-grounds behind the figures were added by Errard, after the drawings had been made, and, as Poussin himself says, without his knowledge.

Of the original work, which is actually a selection from the extensive manuscript collections of the author, both in folio and quarto, of all the passages related to painting, no edition was printed until 1651, even though the author passed away much earlier in 1519. This was due to a manuscript copy of these extracts in the original Italian falling into the hands of Raphael du Fresne; as a result, it was published in Paris that year in a thin folio volume in that language, along with a series of illustrations based on the drawings of Nicolo Poussin and Alberti. Poussin designed the human figures, while Alberti focused on the geometrical and other representations. This effort was likely necessary because the sketches in the author’s own collections were so minimal that they weren’t suitable for publication without additional help. Poussin's drawings were just outlines, and the shadows and backgrounds behind the figures were added by Errard after the drawings were made, and as Poussin himself noted, without his knowledge.

In the same year, and size, and printed at the same place, a translation of the original work into French was given to the world by Monsieur de Chambray (well known, under [Pg vii] his family name of Freart, as the author of an excellent Parallel of ancient and modern Architecture, in French, which Mr. Evelyn translated into English). The style of this translation by Mons. de Chambray, being thought, some years after, too antiquated, some one was employed to revise and modernise it; and in 1716 a new edition of it, thus polished, came out, of which it may be truly said, as is in general the case on such occasions, that whatever the supposed advantage obtained in purity and refinement of language might be, it was more than counterbalanced by the want of the more valuable qualities of accuracy, and fidelity to the original, from which, by these variations, it became further removed.

In the same year, and with the same size, a translation of the original work into French was released by Monsieur de Chambray (who is well known by his family name, Freart, as the author of an excellent comparison of ancient and modern architecture in French, which Mr. Evelyn translated into English). The style of this translation by Monsieur de Chambray was considered too outdated a few years later, so someone was hired to revise and modernize it. In 1716, a new edition was published that had been polished; it can be honestly said, as is often the case in such instances, that while some might argue that the changes brought advantages in purity and refinement of language, these were more than offset by a loss of the more valuable qualities of accuracy and fidelity to the original, as the work became further distanced from it through these variations.

The first translation of this Treatise into English, appeared in the year 1721. It does not declare by whom it was made; but though it professes to have been done from the original Italian, it is evident, upon a comparison, that more use was made of the revised edition of the French translation. Indifferent, however, [Pg viii] as it is, it had become so scarce, and risen to a price so extravagant, that, to supply the demand, it was found necessary, in the year 1796, to reprint it as it stood, with all its errors on its head, no opportunity then offering of procuring a fresh translation.

The first English translation of this Treatise came out in 1721. It doesn't specify who made it, but while it claims to be translated from the original Italian, it's clear that it relied heavily on the revised version of the French translation. Still, even with its flaws, [Pg viii] it became so rare and expensive that to meet the demand, it was necessary to reprint it as is in 1796, errors and all, since there was no chance to get a new translation at that time.

This last impression, however, being now also disposed of, and a new one again called for, the present Translator was induced to step forward, and undertake the office of fresh translating it, on finding, by comparing the former versions both in French and English with the original, many passages which he thought might at once be more concisely and more faithfully rendered. His object, therefore, has been to attain these ends, and as rules and precepts like the present allow but little room for the decorations of style, he has been more solicitous for fidelity, perspicuity, and precision, than for smooth sentences, and well-turned periods.

This final version, now that it’s also been dealt with, called for a fresh take, prompting the current translator to step up and take on the task of translating it anew. In comparing the previous versions in both French and English with the original, he found many passages that could be expressed more clearly and accurately. Therefore, his goal has been to achieve these objectives, and since guidelines like this leave little room for stylistic flourish, he focused more on being faithful, clear, and precise than on crafting smooth sentences and well-structured phrases.

Nor was this the only advantage which it was found the present opportunity would afford; for the original work consisting in fact of a[Pg ix] number of entries made at different times, without any regard to their subjects, or attention to method, might rather in that state be considered as a chaos of intelligence, than a well-digested treatise. It has now, therefore, for the first time, been attempted to place each chapter under the proper head or branch of the art to which it belongs; and by so doing, to bring together those which (though related and nearly connected in substance) stood, according to the original arrangement, at such a distance from each other as to make it troublesome to find them even by the assistance of an index; and difficult, when found, to compare them together.

Nor was this the only benefit that the current opportunity offered; the original work, which actually consisted of a[Pg ix] series of entries made at different times, without consideration for their topics or any systematic approach, could instead be seen as a jumble of information rather than a coherent study. Therefore, for the first time, an effort has been made to organize each chapter under the right category or field of the art it relates to; by doing this, those chapters that, although related and closely connected in content, were originally arranged so far apart that it was challenging to locate them even with an index, can now be brought together. Additionally, when located, comparing them will be easier.

The consequence of this plan, it must be confessed, has been, that in a few instances the same precept has been found in substance repeated; but this is so far from being an objection, that it evidently proves the precepts were not the hasty opinions of the moment, but settled and fixed principles in the mind of the Author, and that he was consistent in the expression of his sentiments. [Pg x] But if this mode of arrangement has in the present case disclosed what might have escaped observation, it has also been productive of more material advantages; for, besides facilitating the finding of any particular passage (an object in itself of no small importance), it clearly shews the work to be a much more complete system than those best acquainted with it, had before any idea of, and that many of the references in it apparently to other writings of the same Author, relate in fact only to the present, the chapters referred to having been found in it. These are now pointed out in the notes, and where any obscurity has occurred in the text, the reader will find some assistance at least attempted by the insertion of a note to solve the difficulty.

The result of this plan, it must be admitted, has been that in a few cases the same principle has been found repeated in essence. However, this is far from being a drawback; it clearly shows that the principles were not just impulsive thoughts but well-established and consistent beliefs in the mind of the Author, demonstrating his coherence in expressing his views. [Pg x] While this method of organization has revealed things that might have been overlooked, it has also led to more significant benefits. Besides making it easier to locate specific passages (which is important), it shows that the work is a much more comprehensive system than those familiar with it previously realized, and that many references that seem to point to other writings by the same Author actually pertain only to the current work, as the mentioned chapters have been found within it. These are now highlighted in the notes, and where there has been any confusion in the text, the reader will find some effort made to provide clarity through the inclusion of a note to address the issue.

No pains or expense have been spared in preparing the present work for the press. The cuts have been re-engraven with more attention to correctness in the drawing, than those which accompanied the two editions of the former English translation possessed (even though they had been fresh engraven for the impression of [Pg xi] 1796); and the diagrams are now inserted in their proper places in the text, instead of being, as before, collected all together in two plates at the end. Besides this, a new Life of the Author has been also added by a Friend of the Translator, the materials for which have been furnished, not from vague reports, or uncertain conjectures, but from memoranda of the Author himself, not before used.

No effort or cost has been spared in getting this work ready for publication. The illustrations have been re-engraved with greater attention to accuracy in the drawing than those that came with the previous two editions of the English translation (even though they were freshly engraved for the 1796 edition); and the diagrams are now placed in their correct positions in the text, rather than being grouped together in two plates at the end. Additionally, a new biography of the Author has been added by a Friend of the Translator, using materials that come not from vague reports or uncertain guesses, but from the Author's own notes that have never been used before.

Fortunately for this undertaking, the manuscript collections of Leonardo da Vinci, which have lately passed from Italy into France, have, since their removal thither, been carefully inspected, and an abstract of their contents published in a quarto pamphlet, printed at Paris in 1797, and intitled, “Essai sur les Ouvrages physico-mathematiques de Leonard de Vinci;” by J. B. Venturi, Professor of Natural Philosophy at Modena; a Member of the Institute of Bologna, &c. From this pamphlet a great deal of original intelligence respecting the Author has been obtained, which, derived as it is from his own information, could not possibly be founded on better evidence.

Fortunately for this project, the manuscript collections of Leonardo da Vinci, which have recently moved from Italy to France, have been thoroughly examined since their arrival. An abstract of their contents was published in a quarto pamphlet printed in Paris in 1797, titled “Essai sur les Ouvrages physico-mathematiques de Leonard de Vinci” by J. B. Venturi, Professor of Natural Philosophy at Modena, a Member of the Institute of Bologna, etc. This pamphlet has provided a lot of original insight about the Author, which, since it comes from his own information, could not be based on better evidence.

To this Life we shall refer the reader for a further account of the origin and history of the present Treatise, conceiving we have already effected our purpose, by here giving him a sufficient idea of what he is to expect from the ensuing pages.

To this Life we will direct the reader for more information about the origin and history of the current Treatise, believing we have already achieved our goal by providing a clear idea of what to expect in the following pages.


THE LIFE
OF
Leonardo da Vinci.

Leonardo da Vinci, the Author of the following Treatise, was the natural son of Pietro da Vinci, a notary of Vinci, in Tuscany[i1], a village situated in the valley of Arno, a little below Florence, and was born in the year 1452[i2].

Leonardo da Vinci, the author of this treatise, was the illegitimate son of Pietro da Vinci, a notary from Vinci, Tuscany[i1], a village in the Arno valley, just south of Florence, and he was born in 1452[i2].

Having discovered, when a child, a strong inclination and talent for painting, of which he had given proofs by several little drawings and sketches; his father one day accidentally took up some of them, and was induced to shew them to his friend Andrea Verocchio, a painter of some reputation in Florence, who was also a [Pg xiv] chaser, an architect, a sculptor, and goldsmith, for his advice, as to the propriety of bringing up his son to the profession of painting, and the probability of his becoming eminent in the art. The answer of Verocchio was such as to confirm him in that resolution; and Leonardo, to fit him for that purpose, was accordingly placed under the tuition of Verocchio[i3].

As a child, he discovered a strong interest and talent for painting, demonstrated through various small drawings and sketches. One day, his father came across some of these and decided to show them to his friend Andrea Verocchio, a well-known painter in Florence who was also a metalworker, architect, sculptor, and goldsmith, to get his opinion on whether it would be appropriate to train his son as a painter and the chances of him becoming successful in the field. Verocchio's response encouraged him to pursue that path, and to prepare Leonardo for this future, he was placed under Verocchio's guidance.

As Verocchio combined in himself a perfect knowledge of the arts of chasing and sculpture, and was a deep proficient in architecture, Leonardo had in this situation the means and opportunity of acquiring a variety of information, which though perhaps not immediately connected with the art to which his principal attention was to be directed, might, with the assistance of such a mind as Leonardo’s, be rendered subsidiary to his grand object, tend to promote his knowledge of the theory, and facilitate his practice of the profession for which he was intended. Accordingly we find that he had the good sense to avail himself of these advantages, and that under Verocchio he made great progress, and attracted his master’s friendship and confidence, by the talents he discovered, the sweetness of his manners, and the vivacity of his[Pg xv] disposition[i4]. Of his proficiency in painting, the following instance is recorded; and the skill he afterwards manifested in other branches of science, on various occasions, evidently demonstrated how solicitous he had been for knowledge of all kinds, and how careful in his youth to lay a good foundation. Verocchio had undertaken for the religious of Vallombrosa, without Florence, a picture of our Saviour’s Baptism by St. John, and consigned to Leonardo the office of putting in from the original drawing, the figure of an angel holding up the drapery; but, unfortunately for Verocchio, Leonardo succeeded so well, that, despairing of ever equalling the work of his scholar, Verocchio in disgust abandoned his pencil for ever, confining himself in future solely to the practice of sculpture[i5].

As Verocchio had a perfect understanding of metalwork and sculpture, and was also highly skilled in architecture, Leonardo had the chance to gain a wealth of knowledge that, while maybe not directly related to the main art he focused on, could, with someone as brilliant as Leonardo, support his larger goals, enhance his understanding of theory, and improve his practical skills in the profession he was meant for. It’s clear that he wisely took advantage of these opportunities and made significant progress under Verocchio. He earned his master’s friendship and trust thanks to his talents, friendly demeanor, and lively personality. One notable example of his painting skills is recorded. His later expertise in various fields clearly showed how eager he was to learn and how careful he was in his youth to build a solid foundation. Verocchio had taken on a commission for the Vallombrosa monks just outside Florence to paint a picture of the Baptism of Christ by St. John and entrusted Leonardo with the task of adding an angel figure holding up the drapery based on the original drawing. Unfortunately for Verocchio, Leonardo did such an outstanding job that Verocchio, feeling he could never match his student’s work, quit painting in frustration and decided to focus solely on sculpture from then on.

On this success Leonardo became sensible that he no longer stood in need of an instructor; and therefore quitting Verocchio, he now began to work and study for himself. Many of his performances of this period are still, or were lately to be seen at Florence; and besides these, the following have been also mentioned: A cartoon of Adam and Eve in the Garden, which he[Pg xvi] did for the King of Portugal[i6]. This is highly commended for the exquisite gracefulness of the two principal figures, the beauty of the landscape, and the incredible exactitude of the shrubs and fruit. At the instance of his father, he made a painting for one of his old neighbours at Vinci[i7]; it consisted wholly of such animals as have naturally an hatred to each other, joined artfully together in a variety of attitudes. Some authors have said that this painting was a shield[i8], and have related the following particulars respecting it.

After this success, Leonardo realized that he no longer needed a teacher, so he left Verocchio and began to work and study on his own. Many of his works from this time can still be seen in Florence, and among them is a cartoon of Adam and Eve in the Garden, which he[Pg xvi] created for the King of Portugal[i6]. This work is praised for the exquisite grace of the two main figures, the beauty of the landscape, and the incredible accuracy of the shrubs and fruit. At the request of his father, he painted for one of his old neighbors in Vinci[i7]; it featured various animals that naturally despise each other, cleverly arranged in different poses. Some authors have claimed that this painting was a shield[i8] and have provided the following details about it.

One of Pietro’s neighbours meeting him one day at Florence, told him he had been making a shield, and would be glad of his assistance to get it painted; Pietro undertook this office, and applied to his son to make good the promise. When the shield was brought to Leonardo, he found it so ill made, that he was obliged to get a turner to smooth it; and when that was done, he began to consider with what subject he should paint it. For this purpose he got together, in his apartment, a collection of live animals, such as lizards, crickets, serpents, silk-worms, locusts, bats, and other creatures of that kind, from the multitude of which, variously[Pg xvii] adapted to each other, he formed an horrible and terrific animal, emitting fire and poison from his jaws, flames from his eyes, and smoke from his nostrils; and with so great earnestness did Leonardo apply to this, that though in his apartment the stench of the animals that from time to time died there, was so strong as to be scarcely tolerable, he, through his love to the art, entirely disregarded it. The work being finished, Leonardo told his father he might now see it; and the father one morning coming to his apartment for that purpose, Leonardo, before he admitted him, placed the shield so as to receive from the window its full and proper light, and then opened the door. Not knowing what he was to expect, and little imagining that what he saw was not the creatures themselves, but a mere painted representation of them, the father, on entering and beholding the shield, was at first staggered and shocked; which the son perceiving, told him he might now send the shield to his friend, as, from the effect which the sight of it had then produced, he found he had attained the object at which he aimed. Pietro, however, had too much sagacity not to see that this was by much too great a curiosity for a mere countryman, who would never be sensible of its value; he therefore privately bought for his friend an ordinary [Pg xviii] shield, rudely painted with the device of an heart with an arrow through it, and sold this for an hundred ducats to some merchants at Florence, by whom it was again sold for three hundred to the Duke of Milan[i9].

One day in Florence, one of Pietro's neighbors ran into him and mentioned that he had been working on a shield. He asked Pietro for help in getting it painted. Pietro agreed and turned to his son for assistance. When the shield arrived with Leonardo, he found it so poorly made that he had to hire a turner to smooth it out. Once that was done, he began to think about what to paint on it. To do this, he gathered a collection of live animals in his studio, like lizards, crickets, snakes, silk-worms, locusts, bats, and other similar creatures. From this assortment, he created a horrifying and terrifying animal that breathed fire and poison from its jaws, shot flames from its eyes, and emitted smoke from its nostrils. Leonardo was so dedicated to this project that, despite the unbearable smell from the animals that occasionally died in his workspace, his passion for art allowed him to ignore it. When the artwork was complete, Leonardo told his father he could finally see it. One morning, when Pietro came to Leonardo's room for that purpose, Leonardo placed the shield in the right light coming from the window before he opened the door. Completely unaware of what to expect and not realizing that what he was seeing was just a painted version of the creatures, Pietro was initially shocked and taken aback upon entering and seeing the shield. Noticing his father’s reaction, Leonardo suggested that he could now send the shield to his friend, as the effect it had on Pietro confirmed he had achieved his goal. However, Pietro was too wise not to realize that this impressive piece would be too much for a simple countryman who wouldn’t appreciate its true value. So, he discreetly bought a plain shield, crudely painted with a heart pierced by an arrow, and sold it for a hundred ducats to some merchants in Florence, who then sold it for three hundred to the Duke of Milan.

He afterwards painted a picture of the Virgin Mary, and by her side a vessel of water, in which were flowers: in this he so contrived it, as that the light reflected from the flowers threw a pale redness on the water. This picture was at one time in the possession of Pope Clement the Seventh[i10].

He later painted a picture of the Virgin Mary, with a vessel of water beside her that held flowers. He skillfully arranged it so that the light reflecting off the flowers cast a soft red tint on the water. This painting was once owned by Pope Clement the Seventh[i10].

For his friend Antonio Segni he also made a design, representing Neptune in his car, drawn by sea-horses, and attended by tritons and sea-gods; the heavens overspread with clouds, which were driven in all directions by the violence of the winds; the waves appeared to be rolling, and the whole ocean seemed in an uproar[i11]. This drawing was afterwards given by Fabio the son of Antonio Segni, to Giovanni Gaddi, a great collector of drawings, with this epigram:

For his friend Antonio Segni, he created a design featuring Neptune in his chariot, pulled by sea horses and accompanied by tritons and sea gods; the sky was filled with clouds, being tossed around by strong winds; the waves looked like they were crashing, and the entire ocean seemed chaotic[i11]. This drawing was later given by Fabio, the son of Antonio Segni, to Giovanni Gaddi, a well-known collector of drawings, along with this epigram:

Pinxit Virgilius Neptunum, pinxit Homerus,
Dum maris undisoni per vada flectit equos.
Mente quidem vates illum conspexit uterque,
Vincius est oculis, jureque vincit eos[i12].

In English thus:

Please provide the text you want me to modernize.

Virgil and Homer, when they Neptune shew’d,
As he through boist’rous seas his steeds compell’d,
In the mind’s eye alone his figure view’d;
But Vinci saw him, and has both excell’d[i13].

To these must be added the following: A painting representing two horsemen engaged in fight, and struggling to tear a flag from each other: rage and fury are in this admirably expressed in the countenances of the two combatants; their air appears wild, and the drapery is thrown into an unusual though agreeable disorder. A Medusa’s head, and a picture of the Adoration of the Magi[i14]. In this last there are some fine heads, but both this and the Medusa’s head are said by Du Fresne to have been evidently unfinished.

To this, we should add the following: A painting showing two horsemen fighting and struggling to grab a flag from each other; their faces express rage and fury excellently. They look wild, and the drapery is arranged in an unusual but appealing disarray. There's also a Medusa’s head, and a depiction of the Adoration of the Magi[i14]. In the latter, there are some striking faces, but both this piece and the Medusa’s head are said by Du Fresne to be clearly unfinished.

The mind of Leonardo was however too active and capacious to be contented solely with the practical part of his art; nor could it submit to receive as principles, conclusions, though confirmed by experience, without first tracing them to their source, and investigating their causes, and the several circumstances on which they depended. [Pg xx] For this purpose he determined to engage in a deep examination into the theory of his art; and the better to effect his intention, he resolved to call in to his aid the assistance of all such other branches of science as could in any degree promote this grand object.

The mind of Leonardo was too active and capable to be satisfied with just the practical side of his art; he couldn't accept conclusions, even if they were backed by experience, without first tracing them back to their origins, investigating their causes, and examining the various circumstances they relied on. [Pg xx] To achieve this, he decided to dive deep into the theory of his art; and to better accomplish his goal, he chose to seek help from all other areas of science that could in any way support this grand objective.

Vasari has related[i15], that at a very early age he had, in the short time of a few months only that he applied to it, obtained a deep knowledge of arithmetic; and says, that in literature in general, he would have made great attainments, if he had not been too versatile to apply long to one subject. In music, he adds, he had made some progress; that he then determined to learn to play on the lyre; and that having an uncommonly fine voice, and an extraordinary promptitude of thought and expression, he became a celebrated improvisatore: but that his attention to these did not induce him to neglect painting and modelling in which last art he was so great a proficient, that in his youth he modelled in clay some heads of women laughing, and also some boys’ heads, which appeared to have come from the hand of a master. In architecture, he made many plans and designs for buildings, and, while he was yet young, proposed conveying [Pg xxi] the river Arno into the canal at Pisa[i16]. Of his skill in poetry the reader may judge from the following sonnet preserved by Lomazzo[i17], the only one now existing of his composition; and for the translation with which it is accompanied we are indebted to a lady.

Vasari has noted[i15] that at a very young age, in just a few months of study, he gained a strong understanding of arithmetic. He mentions that in literature, he could have achieved significant success if he hadn't been too scattered to focus on one topic for long. He also adds that he made some progress in music, deciding to learn to play the lyre. With a remarkably beautiful voice and quick thinking and expression, he became a well-known improvisatore. However, his interest in these areas did not lead him to neglect painting and modeling, where he excelled so much that in his youth, he created clay models of laughing women and boys' heads that looked like they were crafted by a master. In architecture, he produced many plans and designs for buildings, and while still young, he suggested redirecting the Arno river into the canal at Pisa[i16]. You can evaluate his poetry skills based on the following sonnet preserved by Lomazzo[i17], which is the only one of his works that still exists, and we owe the accompanying translation to a lady.

SONNETTO MORALE.

Moral Sonnet.

Chi non può quel vuol, quel che può voglia,
Che quel che non si può folle è volere.
Adunque saggio è l’uomo da tenere,
Che da quel che non può suo voler toglia.
Però ch’ogni diletto nostro e doglia
Sta in sì e nò, saper, voler, potere,
Adunque quel sol può, che co ’l dovere
Ne trahe la ragion suor di sua soglia.
Ne sempre è da voler quel che l’uom puote,
Spesso par dolce quel che torna amaro,
Piansi gia quel ch’io volsi, poi ch’io l’ebbi.
Adunque tu, lettor di queste note,
S’a te vuoi esser buono e a ’gli altri caro,
Vogli sempre poter quel che tu debbi.

TRANSLATION.
A MORAL SONNET.

TRANSLATION.
A MORAL SONNET.

The man who cannot what he would attain,
Within his pow’r his wishes should restrain:
The wish of Folly o’er that bound aspires,
The wise man by it limits his desires.
Since all our joys so close on sorrows run,
We know not what to choose or what to shun;
Let all our wishes still our duty meet,
Nor banish Reason from her awful seat.
Nor is it always best for man to will
Ev’n what his pow’rs can reach; some latent ill
Beneath a fair appearance may delude
And make him rue what earnest he pursued.
Then, Reader, as you scan this simple page,
Let this one care your ev’ry thought engage,
(With self-esteem and gen’ral love ’t is fraught,)
Wish only pow’r to do just what you ought.

The course of study which Leonardo had thus undertaken, would, in its most limited extent by any one who should attempt it at this time, be found perhaps almost more than could be successfully accomplished; but yet his curiosity and unbounded thirst for information, induced him rather to enlarge than contract his plan. Accordingly we find, that to the study of geometry, sculpture, anatomy, he added those of[Pg xxiii] architecture, mechanics, optics, hydrostatics, astronomy, and Nature in general, in all her operations[i18]; and the result of his observations and experiments, which were intended not only for present use, but as the basis and foundation of future discoveries, he determined, as he proceeded, to commit to writing. At what time he began these his collections, of which we shall have occasion to speak more particularly hereafter, is no where mentioned; but it is with certainty known, that by the month of April 1490, he had already completely filled two folio volumes[i19].

The course of study that Leonardo had taken on, even in its most limited scope by anyone attempting it today, would probably be found to be almost more than could be successfully handled. However, his curiosity and relentless desire for knowledge led him to expand rather than limit his plan. As a result, he added the study of architecture, mechanics, optics, hydrostatics, astronomy, and nature in all her operations to geometry, sculpture, and anatomy[Pg xxiii]. He decided to write down the results of his observations and experiments, which were meant not just for immediate use, but also as a foundation for future discoveries. It’s not specified when he began these collections, which we will discuss in more detail later, but it is known for certain that by April 1490, he had already filled two complete folio volumes[i19].

Notwithstanding Leonardo’s propensity and application to study, he was not inattentive to the graces of external accomplishments; he was very skilful in the management of an horse, rode gracefully, and when he afterwards arrived to a state of affluence, took particular pleasure in appearing in public well mounted and handsomely accoutred. He possessed great dexterity in the use of arms: for mien and grace he might contend with any gentleman of his time: his person was remarkably handsome, his behaviour so perfectly polite, and his conversation so charming, that his company was coveted by[Pg xxiv] all who knew him; but the avocations to which this last circumstance subjected him, are one reason why so many of his works remain unfinished [i20].

Despite Leonardo’s dedication and commitment to learning, he also paid attention to external achievements; he was very skilled at handling a horse, rode elegantly, and when he later became wealthy, he took particular pleasure in appearing in public well-mounted and stylishly dressed. He had great skill in using weapons: for style and grace, he could compete with any gentleman of his time. He was exceptionally handsome, his manners were perfectly polite, and his conversation was so engaging that everyone who knew him desired his company; however, the demands of this last aspect are a big reason why so many of his works remain unfinished[Pg xxiv][i20].

With such advantages of mind and body as these, it was no wonder that his reputation should spread itself, as we find it soon did, over all Italy. The painting of the shield before mentioned, had already, as has been noticed, come into the possession of the Duke of Milan; and the subsequent accounts which he had from time to time heard of Leonardo’s abilities and talents, induced Lodovic Sforza, surnamed the Moor, then Duke of Milan, about, or a little before the year 1489[i21], to invite him to his court, and to settle on him a pension of five hundred crowns, a considerable sum at that time [i22].

With such advantages in mind and body, it was no surprise that his reputation quickly spread across all of Italy. The painting of the shield mentioned earlier had already come into the possession of the Duke of Milan. The stories he heard from time to time about Leonardo's skills and talents prompted Lodovic Sforza, known as the Moor, who was the Duke of Milan around or just before the year 1489[i21], to invite him to his court and grant him a pension of five hundred crowns, which was a significant amount back then [i22].

Various are the reasons assigned for this invitation: Vasari[i23] attributes it to his skill in music, a science of which the Duke is said to have been fond; others have ascribed it to a design which the Duke entertained of erecting a brazen statue to the memory of his father [i24]; but others conceive [Pg xxv] it originated from the circumstance, that the Duke had not long before established at Milan an academy for the study of painting, sculpture, and architecture, and was desirous that Leonardo should take the conduct and direction of it[i25]. The second was, however, we find, the true motive; and we are further informed, that the invitation was accepted by Leonardo, that he went to Milan, and was already there in 1489 [i26].

There are various reasons given for this invitation: Vasari[i23] attributes it to Leonardo's talent in music, which the Duke is said to have enjoyed; others suggest it was due to the Duke's intention to create a bronze statue in memory of his father[i24]; but some believe [Pg xxv] it came about because the Duke had recently established an academy in Milan for the study of painting, sculpture, and architecture, and wanted Leonardo to lead and oversee it[i25]. However, it seems the second reason was the actual motive, and we also learn that Leonardo accepted the invitation, traveled to Milan, and was already there by 1489 [i26].

Among the collections of Leonardo still existing in manuscript, is a copy of a memorial presented by him to the Duke about 1490, of which Venturi has given an abridgment [i27]. In it he offers to make for the Duke military bridges, which should be at the same time light and very solid, and to teach him the method of placing and defending them with security. When the object is to take any place, he can, he says, empty the ditch of its water; he knows, he adds, the art of constructing a subterraneous gallery under the ditches themselves, and of carrying it to the very spot that shall be wanted. If the fort is not built on a rock, he undertakes[Pg xxvi] to throw it down, and mentions that he has new contrivances for bombarding machines, ordnance, and mortars, some adapted to throw hail shot, fire, and smoke, among the enemy; and for all other machines proper for a siege, and for war, either by sea or land, according to circumstances. In peace also, he says he can be useful in what concerns the erection of buildings, conducting of water-courses, sculpture in bronze or marble, and painting; and remarks, that at the same time that he may be pursuing any of the above objects, the equestrian statue to the memory of the Duke’s father, and his illustrious family, may still be going on. If any one doubts the possibility of what he proposes, he offers to prove it by experiment, and ocular demonstration.

Among the manuscripts still attributed to Leonardo is a copy of a memorial he presented to the Duke around 1490, which Venturi has summarized [i27]. In it, he proposes to create military bridges that would be both lightweight and very sturdy, and to teach the Duke how to set them up and defend them securely. If the goal is to capture a location, he claims he can drain the water from the ditch; he also mentions that he knows how to build an underground tunnel underneath the ditches themselves, leading directly to the desired spot. If the fort isn't built on solid rock, he guarantees he can bring it down and states that he has new designs for siege weapons, artillery, and mortars, some of which can launch projectiles, fire, and smoke at the enemy; along with other devices suitable for a siege and for warfare, whether at sea or on land, depending on the situation. In times of peace, he asserts he can assist with building construction, water management, bronze or marble sculpture, and painting; he notes that while working on any of these projects, the equestrian statue honoring the Duke’s father and his notable family can still be in progress. If anyone doubts the feasibility of his proposals, he offers to demonstrate it through practical tests and visual evidence.

From this memorial it seems clear, that the casting of the bronze statue was his principal object; painting is only mentioned incidentally, and no notice is taken of the direction or management of the academy for painting, sculpture, and architecture; it is probable, therefore, that at this time there was no such intention, though it is certainly true, that he was afterwards placed at the head of it, and that he banished from it the barbarous style of architecture which till then had prevailed in it, and introduced[Pg xxvii] in its stead a more pure and classical taste. Whatever was the fact with respect to the academy, it is however well known that the statue was cast in bronze, finished, and put up at Milan, but afterwards demolished by the French when they took possession of that place [i28] after the defeat of Lodovic Sforza.

From this memorial, it’s clear that the main goal was the casting of the bronze statue; painting is only mentioned in passing, and there’s no mention of the management of the academy for painting, sculpture, and architecture. It’s likely that there was no intention to develop it at that time, although he was later put in charge of it, where he eliminated the crude architectural style that had been common up until then and replaced it with a more refined and classical taste. Regardless of what was happening with the academy, it’s well known that the statue was cast in bronze, completed, and erected in Milan, but it was later destroyed by the French when they took control of the city after defeating Lodovic Sforza.

Some time after Leonardo’s arrival at Milan, a design had been entertained of cutting a canal from Martesana to Milan, for the purpose of opening a communication by water between these two places, and, as it is said, of supplying the last with water. It had been first thought of so early as 1457 [i29]; but from the difficulties to be expected in its execution, it seems to have been laid aside, or at least to have proceeded slowly, till Leonardo’s arrival. His offers of service as engineer in the above memorial, probably induced Lodovic Sforza, the then Duke, to resume the intention with vigour, and accordingly we find the plan was determined on, and the execution of it intrusted to Leonardo. The object was noble, but the difficulties to be encountered were sufficient to have discouraged any mind but Leonardo’s; for the distance was no less than two hundred miles; and before it could be completed,[Pg xxviii] hills were to be levelled, and vallies filled up, to render them navigable with security [i30].

Some time after Leonardo arrived in Milan, there was a plan to build a canal from Martesana to Milan, aiming to establish a waterway between the two locations and, as some say, to supply Milan with water. This idea was proposed as early as 1457[i29]; however, due to the anticipated challenges in making it happen, it seems to have been put on hold, or at least moved slowly, until Leonardo showed up. His offer to serve as an engineer likely encouraged Lodovic Sforza, the Duke at the time, to revive the project with enthusiasm. As a result, the plan was finalized, and Leonardo was given the responsibility for its execution. The goal was ambitious, but the challenges ahead would have discouraged all but someone like Leonardo; the distance was a staggering two hundred miles, and before it could be completed,[Pg xxviii] hills had to be leveled and valleys filled in to make them safely navigable[i30].

In order to enable him to surmount the obstacles with which he foresaw he should have to contend, he retired to the house of his friend Signior Melzi, at Vaverola, not far distant from Milan, and there applied himself sedulously for some years, as it is said, but at intervals only we must suppose, and according as his undertaking proceeded, to the study of philosophy, mathematics, and every branch of science that could at all further his design; still continuing the method he had before adopted, of entering down in writing promiscuously, whatever he wished to implant in his memory: and at this place, in this and his subsequent visits from time to time, he is supposed to have made the greater part of the collections he has left behind him [i31], of the contents of which we shall hereafter speak more at large.

To help him overcome the challenges he anticipated facing, he withdrew to the home of his friend, Signior Melzi, in Vaverola, not far from Milan. There, he reportedly dedicated several years to studying philosophy, mathematics, and every branch of science that could aid his goal. However, it seems he did this only intermittently, depending on the progress of his work. He continued his previous practice of writing down anything he wanted to remember. At this location, during this and his later visits, he is believed to have compiled most of the collections he left behind, the contents of which we will discuss in more detail later.

Although engaged in the conduct of so vast an undertaking, and in studies so extensive, the mind of Leonardo does not appear to have been so wholly occupied or absorbed in them as to incapacitate him from attending at the same time to other objects also; and the Duke therefore being[Pg xxix] desirous of ornamenting Milan with some specimens of his skill as a painter, employed him to paint in the refectory of the Dominican convent of Santa Maria delle Gratie, in that city, a picture, the subject of which was to be the Last Supper. Of this picture it is related, that Leonardo was so impressed with the dignity of the subject, and so anxious to answer the high ideas he had formed of it in his own mind, that his progress was very slow, and that he spent much time in meditation and thought, during which the work was apparently at a stand. The Prior of the convent, thinking it therefore neglected, complained to the Duke; but Leonardo assuring the Duke that not less than two hours were every day bestowed on it, he was satisfied. Nevertheless the Prior, after a short time, finding the work very little advanced, once more applied to the Duke, who in some degree of anger, as thinking Leonardo had deceived him, reprimanded him in strong terms for his delay. What Leonardo had scorned to urge to the Prior in his defence, he now thought fit to plead in his excuse to the Duke, to convince him that a painter did not labour solely with his hands, but that his mind might be deeply studying his subject, when his hands were unemployed, and he in appearance perfectly idle. In proof of this, he told the Duke[Pg xxx] that nothing remained to the completion of the picture but the heads of our Saviour and Judas; that as to the former, he had not yet been able to find a fit model to express its divinity, and found his invention inadequate of itself to represent it: that with respect to that of Judas, he had been in vain for two years searching among the most abandoned and profligate of the species for an head which would convey an idea of his character; but that this difficulty was now at length removed, since he had nothing to do but to introduce the head of the Prior, whose ingratitude for the pains he was taking, rendered him a fit archetype of the perfidy and ingratitude he wished to express. Some persons have said [i32], that the head of Judas in the picture was actually copied from that of the Prior; but Mariette denies it, and says this reply was merely intended as a threat[i33].

Although involved in such a vast project and extensive studies, Leonardo's mind doesn't seem to have been completely consumed by them, allowing him to focus on other tasks as well. The Duke, wanting to beautify Milan with examples of Leonardo's painting skills, commissioned him to paint a picture of the Last Supper in the refectory of the Dominican convent of Santa Maria delle Grazie in that city. It's said that Leonardo was so struck by the significance of the subject and so eager to meet the high expectations he had for it that his progress was very slow. He spent a lot of time in meditation and thought, during which the work seemed to stall. The Prior of the convent, thinking it was being neglected, complained to the Duke. However, Leonardo assured the Duke that he dedicated at least two hours each day to it, which satisfied him. Still, the Prior, noticing little advancement after some time, approached the Duke again, who, feeling somewhat angry and thinking Leonardo had misled him, reprimanded him harshly for the delay. What Leonardo had chosen not to mention to the Prior in his defense, he decided to present to the Duke to show that a painter doesn't work solely with his hands; his mind might be deeply engaged in studying the subject, even when his hands appear idle. To prove this, he told the Duke that the only parts left to finish were the heads of Jesus and Judas. As for Jesus, he hadn't found a suitable model to capture His divinity and felt his imagination didn't do justice to it. Regarding Judas, he had spent two years searching among the most disreputable individuals for a face that would convey his character but had finally resolved this issue by deciding to use the Prior's head, whose ingratitude for Leonardo's efforts made him a fitting representation of the betrayal and ungratefulness Leonardo wished to portray. Some people have claimed that the head of Judas in the painting was actually modeled after the Prior's, but Mariette refutes this, stating that this response was merely a threat.

A difference of opinion has also prevailed concerning the head of our Saviour in this picture; for some have conceived it left intentionally unfinished [i34], while others think there is a [Pg xxxi] gradation of resemblance, which increasing in beauty in St. John and our Saviour, shews in the dignified countenance of the latter a spark of his divine majesty. In the countenance of the Redeemer, say these last, and in that of Judas, is excellently expressed the extreme idea of God made man, and of the most perfidious of mortals. This is also pursued in the characters nearest to each of them [i35].

A difference of opinion has also arisen regarding the head of our Savior in this painting; some believe it was intentionally left unfinished[i34], while others think there’s a [Pg xxxi] gradual resemblance, which increases in beauty in St. John and our Savior, showing in the dignified expression of the latter a hint of his divine majesty. Those who think this say that in the expressions of the Redeemer and Judas, the ultimate idea of God becoming man and the most treacherous of mortals is brilliantly captured. This idea is also reflected in the characters closest to each of them [i35].

Little judgment can now be formed of the original beauty of this picture, which has been, and apparently with very good reason, highly commended. Unfortunately, though it is said to have been in oil, the wall on which it was painted not having been properly prepared, the original colours have been so effectually defaced by the damp, as to be no longer visible[i36]; and the fathers, for whose use it was painted, thinking it entirely destroyed, and some years since wishing to heighten and widen a door under it, leading out of their refectory, have given a decided proof of their own want of taste, and how little they were sensible of its value, by permitting the workmen to break through the wall on which it was painted, and, by so doing, entirely to destroy the lower part of[Pg xxxii] the picture[i37]. The injury done by the damp to the colouring has been, it is true, in some measure repaired by Michael Angelo Bellotti, a painter of Milan, who viewing the picture in 1726, made an offer to the Prior and convent to restore, by means of a secret which he possessed, the original colours. His proposition being accepted, and the experiment succeeding beyond their hopes, the convent made him a present of five hundred pounds for his labour, and he in return communicated to them the secret by which it had been effected [i38].

It's hard to judge the original beauty of this painting, which has been praised for good reason. Unfortunately, although it was supposedly painted in oil, the wall wasn’t properly prepared, leading to the original colors being ruined by dampness and becoming invisible[i36]; and the monks, for whom it was painted, mistakenly thought it was completely destroyed. A few years ago, when they wanted to enlarge and raise a door beneath it that led out of their dining hall, they showed a lack of taste and appreciation for its value by allowing the workers to break through the wall it was painted on, completely destroying the lower part of[Pg xxxii] the painting[i37]. The damage done by the dampness was partially repaired by Michael Angelo Bellotti, a painter from Milan, who saw the painting in 1726 and offered to restore the original colors using a secret technique he knew. His proposal was accepted, and the experiment exceeded their expectations, so the convent rewarded him with five hundred pounds for his work, and in return, he shared the secret of how he achieved it[i38].

Deprived, as they certainly are by these events, of the means of judging accurately of the merit of the original, it is still some consolation to the lovers of painting, that several copies of it made by Leonardo’s scholars, many of whom were very able artists, and at a time when the picture had not been yet injured, are still in existence. [Pg xxxiii] A list of these copies is given by P. M. Guglielmo della Valle, in his edition of Vasari’s Lives of the Painters, in Italian, vol. v. p. 34, and from him it is here inserted in the note [i39]. Francis the [Pg xxxiv] First was so charmed on viewing the original, that not being able to remove it, he had a copy made, which is now, or was some years since, at St. Germains, and several prints have been published from it; but the best which has yet appeared (and very fine it is) is one not long since engraven by Morghen, at Rome, impressions of which have found their way into this country, and been sold, it is said, for ten or twelve guineas each.

Deprived, as they certainly are by these events, of the means to accurately assess the value of the original, it’s still somewhat comforting for painting enthusiasts that several copies made by Leonardo’s students, many of whom were highly skilled artists, and created when the artwork had not yet been damaged, still exist. [Pg xxxiii] A list of these copies can be found in P. M. Guglielmo della Valle’s edition of Vasari’s Lives of the Painters, in Italian, vol. v. p. 34, and it is included here in the note [i39]. Francis the [Pg xxxiv] First was so captivated upon seeing the original that he couldn’t take it with him, so he had a copy made, which is currently, or was a few years ago, at St. Germains. Multiple prints have been published from it; however, the best one that has emerged (and it’s very impressive) was recently engraved by Morghen in Rome. Impressions of it have made their way to this country and have reportedly sold for ten or twelve guineas each.

In the same refectory of the Dominicans at Milan is, or was, also preserved a painting by Leonardo, representing Duke Lodovic, and Beatrix his duchess, on their knees; done no doubt about this time[i40]. And at or near this period, he also painted for the Duke the Nativity, which was formerly, and may perhaps be still, in the Emperor of Germany’s collection[i41].

In the same dining hall of the Dominicans in Milan, there was also a painting by Leonardo featuring Duke Lodovic and his duchess Beatrix, both on their knees; this was likely created around this time[i40]. Around this same period, he also painted the Nativity for the Duke, which used to be, and might still be, part of the Emperor of Germany’s collection[i41].

As Leonardo’s principal aim, whenever he was left at liberty to pursue the bent of his own inclination, seems to have been progressive improvement in the art of painting, he appears to have sedulously embraced all opportunities of increasing his information; and wisely perceiving, that without a thorough acquaintance with anatomy, a painter could effect but little, he was particularly desirous of extending his knowledge in that branch. For that purpose he had frequent conferences on the subject with Marc Antonio della Torre, professor of anatomy at Pavia[i42], and not only was present at many dissections performed by him, but made abundance of anatomical drawings from Nature, many of which were afterwards collected into a volume by his scholar Francisco Melzi[i43].

As Leonardo's main goal, whenever he had the freedom to follow his interests, seemed to be the continuous improvement of painting, he actively took advantage of every chance to expand his knowledge. Recognizing that a painter could achieve very little without a solid understanding of anatomy, he was especially eager to deepen his expertise in that area. To achieve this, he often discussed the topic with Marc Antonio della Torre, the anatomy professor at Pavia[i42], and not only attended many dissections done by him but also created a wealth of anatomical sketches from real life, many of which were later compiled into a book by his student Francisco Melzi[i43].

Such perseverance and assiduity as Leonardo’s, united as they were with such uncommon powers as his, had already formed many artists at that time of distinguished reputation, but who afterwards became still more famous, and might probably have rendered Milan the repository of some of the most valuable specimens of painting, and raised it to a rank little, if at all, inferior to that which Florence has since held with the admirers of the polite arts, had it not happened that by the disastrous termination of a contest between the Duke of Milan and the French, all hopes of further improvement were entirely cut off; and Milan, at one blow, lost all the advantages of which it was even then in possession. For about this time the troubles in Italy began to break in on Leonardo’s quiet, and he found his patron, the Duke, engaged in a war with the French for the possession of his dukedom; which not only endangered the academy, but ultimately deprived him both of his dominions and his liberty; as the Duke was, in 1500, completely defeated, taken prisoner, and carried into France, where, in 1510, he died a prisoner in the castle of Loches[i44].

Leonardo's perseverance and dedication, combined with his exceptional talents, had already produced many artists of notable reputation by that time, who later became even more famous. They could have made Milan a center for some of the most valuable works of art, elevating it to a status that was, if not equal to, then very close to what Florence holds today among art enthusiasts. However, the disastrous end of a conflict between the Duke of Milan and the French completely crushed any hopes for further progress; Milan, in one fell swoop, lost all the advantages it had even then. Around this time, troubles started to disrupt Leonardo’s peaceful life, as he saw his patron, the Duke, caught in a war with the French over his dukedom. This situation not only threatened the academy but ultimately cost the Duke both his territory and his freedom. In 1500, the Duke was decisively defeated, taken prisoner, and brought to France, where he died in 1510 while imprisoned in the castle of Loches[i44].

By this event of the Duke’s defeat, and the consequent ruin of the Sforza family, all further progress in the canal of Martesana, of which much still remained to be done[i45], was put a stop to; the academy of architecture and painting was entirely broken up; the professors were turned adrift, and the arts banished from Milan, which at one time had promised to have been their refuge and principal feat[i46]. Italy in general was, it is true, a gainer by the dispersion of so many able and deeply instructed artists as issued from this school, though Milan suffered; for nothing could so much tend to the dissemination of knowledge as the mixing such men among others who needed that information in which these excelled. Among the number thus separated from each other, we find painters, carvers, architects, founders, and engravers in crystal and precious stones, and the names of the following have been given, as the principal: Cesare da Sesto, Andrea Salaino, Gio. Antonio Boltraffio, Bernardino Lovino, Bartolommeo della Porta, Lorenzo Lotto[i47]. To these has been added Gio. Paolo Lomazzo; but Della Valle, in a note in his edition of Vasari, vol. v. p. [Pg xxxviii] 34, says this last was a disciple of Gio. Battista della Cerva, and not of Leonardo. Du Fresne mentions besides the above, Francis Melzi, Mark Uggioni Gobbo, an extraordinary painter and carver; Annibal Fontana, a worker in marble and precious stones; and Bernazzano, an excellent painter of landscapes; but omits Della Porta, and Lorenzo Lotto.

Due to the defeat of the Duke and the resulting downfall of the Sforza family, all further work on the Martesana canal, which still had a lot to be completed[i45], came to a halt. The academy of architecture and painting was completely disbanded; the professors were left without jobs, and the arts were driven out of Milan, which had once seemed like their safe haven and main center[i46]. Italy as a whole did benefit from the dispersal of many talented and knowledgeable artists from this school, even though Milan suffered; because nothing could spread knowledge as effectively as bringing together those skilled artists with others who needed their expertise. Among those separated, we find painters, sculptors, architects, metalworkers, and engravers of crystal and precious stones, and the main names mentioned include: Cesare da Sesto, Andrea Salaino, Gio. Antonio Boltraffio, Bernardino Lovino, Bartolommeo della Porta, and Lorenzo Lotto[i47]. Gio. Paolo Lomazzo is also included; however, Della Valle notes in his edition of Vasari, vol. v. p.[Pg xxxviii] 34, that Lomazzo was a disciple of Gio. Battista della Cerva, not Leonardo. Du Fresne also mentions, in addition to the above, Francis Melzi, Mark Uggioni Gobbo, an exceptional painter and sculptor; Annibal Fontana, a marble and precious stone worker; and Bernazzano, an excellent landscape painter; but he leaves out Della Porta and Lorenzo Lotto.

In 1499, the year before Duke Lodovic’s defeat, Leonardo being at Milan, was employed by the principal inhabitants to contrive an automaton for the entertainment of Lewis XII. King of France, who was expected shortly to make a public entry into that city. This Leonardo did, and it consisted of a machine representing a lion, whose inside was so well constructed of clockwork, that it marched out to meet the King, made a stand when it came before him, reared up on its hinder legs, and opening its breast, presented an escutcheon with fleurs de lis quartered on it [i48]. Lomazzo has said that this machine was made for the entry of Francis the First; but he is mistaken, that prince having never been at Milan till the year 1515 [i49], at which time Leonardo was at Rome.

In 1499, the year before Duke Lodovic’s defeat, Leonardo was in Milan, where the main citizens hired him to create an automaton for the entertainment of Louis XII, King of France, who was expected to make a public entrance into the city soon. Leonardo succeeded, designing a machine that looked like a lion, cleverly built with clockwork inside so that it could walk out to greet the King, stop in front of him, rise on its hind legs, and open its chest to reveal a shield adorned with fleurs de lis. [i48]. Lomazzo claimed that this machine was made for the arrival of Francis the First, but he was wrong; that prince didn’t visit Milan until 1515 [i49], by which time Leonardo was in Rome.

Compelled by the disorders of Lombardy, the [Pg xxxix] misfortunes of his patron, and the ruin of the Sforza family, to quit Milan, Leonardo betook himself to Florence, and his inducements to this resolution seem to have been the residence there of the Medici family, the great patrons of arts, and the good taste of its principal inhabitants[i50], rather than its vicinity to the place of his birth; for which, under the circumstances that attended that event, it is not probable he could entertain much, if any predilection. The first work which he here undertook was a design for an altar-piece for the chapel of the college of the Annunciati. Its subject was, our Saviour, with his mother, St. Ann, and St. John; but though this drawing is said to have rendered Leonardo very popular among his countrymen, to so great a degree, that numbers of people went to see it, it does not appear that any picture was painted from it, nor that the undertaking ever proceeded farther than a sketch of a design, or rather, perhaps, a finished drawing. When Leonardo some years afterwards went into France[i51], Francis the First was desirous of having a picture from this drawing, and at his desire he then put it into colours; but whether even this last was a regular picture, or, which is more proba[Pg xl]ble, only a coloured drawing, we are not informed.

Driven by the troubles in Lombardy, the misfortunes of his patron, and the downfall of the Sforza family, Leonardo left Milan and went to Florence. His reasons for this decision seem to be the presence of the Medici family, great supporters of the arts, and the refined taste of the local people, rather than any strong attachment to his birthplace; given the circumstances of his early life, it’s unlikely he felt much fondness for it. The first project he took on there was a design for an altar piece for the chapel of the college of the Annunciati. The subject featured our Savior with his mother, St. Ann, and St. John. Although this drawing made Leonardo quite popular among his fellow citizens, to the extent that many came to see it, it appears that no painting was ever created from it, nor did the project progress beyond a sketch, or perhaps a finished drawing. Years later, when Leonardo went to France, Francis the First wanted a painting based on this drawing and requested that Leonardo add color to it; however, it’s unclear if this was a complete painting or just a colored drawing.

The picture, however, on which he bestowed the most time and labour, and which therefore seems intended by him as the completest specimen of his skill, at least in the branch of portrait-painting, was that which he did of Mona Lisa, better known by the appellation of la Gioconda, a Florentine lady, the wife of Francisco del Giocondo. It was painted for her husband, afterwards purchased by Francis the First, and was till lately to be seen in the King of France’s cabinet. Leonardo bestowed four entire years upon it, and after all is said to have left it unfinished[i52].

The painting that he spent the most time and effort on, and which seems to be his most complete example of skill, especially in portrait painting, was of Mona Lisa, also known as la Gioconda, a woman from Florence who was married to Francisco del Giocondo. It was painted for her husband and later bought by Francis the First, and until recently, it was displayed in the King of France’s cabinet. Leonardo took four full years to work on it, and after all that, it is said to have been left unfinished[i52].

This has been so repeatedly said of the works of this painter, that we are here induced to inquire into the evidence of the fact. An artist who feels by experience, as every one must, how far short of the ideas of perfection he has formed in his own mind, his best performances always fall, will naturally be led to consider these as but very faint expressions of his own conceptions. Leonardo’s disposition to think nothing effected while any thing remained to be done, and a mind like his, continually suggesting successive [Pg xli] improvements, might therefore, and most probably did produce in him an opinion that his own most laboured pieces were far from being finished to that extent of beauty which he wished to give them; and these sentiments of them he might in all likelihood be frequently heard to declare. Comparing his productions, however, with those of other masters, they will be found, notwithstanding this assertion to the contrary, as eminent in this particular also, as for the more valuable qualities of composition, drawing, character, expression, and colouring.

This has been said so often about this painter's work that we feel compelled to look into the evidence behind it. An artist, who knows from experience how far their best efforts fall short of their vision of perfection, will naturally see their creations as only faint reflections of their true ideas. Leonardo’s belief that nothing is truly complete while there’s still work to be done, combined with his mind constantly generating new improvements, likely led him to think that his most painstaking pieces were far from achieving the level of beauty he aimed for. He might have often expressed these feelings. However, when we compare his works to those of other masters, we find that, despite his claims, they are just as outstanding in this regard as they are in terms of composition, drawing, character, expression, and coloring.

About the same time with this of la Gioconda, he painted the portraits of a nobleman of Mantua, and of la Ginevra, a daughter of Americus Benci[i53], much celebrated for her beauty; and is said to have finished a picture of Flora some years since remaining at Paris[i54]; but this last Mariette discovered to be the work of Melzio, from the circumstance of finding, on a close inspection, the name of this last master written on it[i55].

Around the same time as the Mona Lisa, he painted portraits of a nobleman from Mantua and la Ginevra, the daughter of Americus Benci, who was well-known for her beauty. It's said he completed a painting of Flora a few years ago that is still in Paris; however, Mariette found out that this painting was actually by Melzio because he discovered the name of that artist written on it upon closer inspection.

In the year 1503, he was elected by the Florentines to paint their council-chamber. The subject he chose for this, was the battle against Attila [i56]; and he had already made some progress [Pg xlii] in his work, when, to his great mortification, he found his colours peel from the wall[i57].

In 1503, the people of Florence chose him to paint their council chamber. The topic he picked was the battle against Attila [i56]; and he had already made some progress [Pg xlii] on the project when, to his great dismay, he discovered that his paint was peeling off the wall [i57].

With Leonardo was joined in this undertaking, Michael Angelo, who painted another side of the room, and who, then a young man of not more than twenty-nine, had risen to such reputation, as not to fear a competition with Leonardo, a man of near sixty[i58]. The productions of two such able masters placed in the same room, begun at the same time, and proceeding gradually step by step together, afforded, no doubt, occasion and opportunity to the admirers and critics in painting to compare and contrast with each other their respective excellencies and defects. Had these persons contented themselves simply with comparing and appreciating the merits of these masters according to justice and truth, it might perhaps have been advantageous to both, as directing their attention to the correction of errors; but as each artist had his admirers, each had also his enemies; the partisans of the one thinking they did not sufficiently value the merit of their favourite if they allowed any to his antagonist, or did not, on the contrary, endeavour to crush by detraction the too formidable reputation of his adversary. From this conduct was produced [Pg xliii] what might easily have been foreseen; they first became jealous rivals, and at length open and inveterate enemies [i59].

With Leonardo was joined in this project, Michelangelo, who painted another side of the room. At just twenty-nine, he had gained such a reputation that he wasn't afraid to compete with Leonardo, who was almost sixty. The works of these two talented masters, started at the same time and progressing together, surely gave fans and critics the chance to compare their strengths and weaknesses. If these critics had simply focused on evaluating their merits fairly, it might have benefited both artists by encouraging them to correct their mistakes. However, since each artist had supporters, they also had detractors; the fans of one believed they couldn’t fully appreciate their favorite if they acknowledged any merit in their rival, or they tried to undermine the impressive reputation of the other. This behavior led to what could have been easily predicted: they became jealous rivals and, eventually, open and bitter enemies.

Leonardo’s reputation, which had been for many years gradually increasing, was now so firmly established, that he appears to have been looked up to as being, what he really was, the reviver and restorer of the art of painting; and to such an height had the curiosity to view his works been excited, that Raphael, who was at that time young, and studying, thought it worth his while to make a journey to Florence in the month of October 1504 [i60], on purpose to see them. Nor was his labour lost, or his time thrown away in so doing; for on first seeing the works of Leonardo’s pencil, he was induced to abandon the dry and hard manner of his master Perugino’s colouring, and to adopt in its stead the style of Leonardo [i61], to which circumstance is owing no small portion of that esteem in the art, to which Raphael afterwards very justly arrived.

Leonardo’s reputation, which had been gradually growing for many years, was now so well established that he was clearly regarded as what he truly was: the reviver and restorer of painting. The curiosity to see his works had grown to such an extent that Raphael, who was young and studying at the time, felt it was worth it to make a trip to Florence in October 1504 [i60] specifically to see them. His effort was not wasted, as upon first seeing Leonardo’s artworks, he was inspired to abandon the dry and rigid style of his teacher Perugino’s coloring and instead adopt Leonardo’s style [i61]. This change contributed significantly to Raphael’s later reputation and esteem in the art world.

His father having died in 1504 [i62], he in consequence of that event became engaged with his half-brothers, the legitimate sons of Pietro da Vinci, in a law-suit for the recovery of a share of his father’s property, which in a letter from[Pg xliv] Florence to the Governor of Milan, the date of which does not appear, he speaks of having almost brought to a conclusion [i63]. At Florence he continued from 1503 to 1507 [i64], and in the course of that time painted, among other pictures of less note, a Virgin and Child, once in the hands of the Botti family; and a Baptist’s head, formerly in those of Camillo Albizzi[i65]; but in 1508, and the succeeding year, he was at Milan, where he received a pension which had been granted him by Lewis XII. [i66]; and in the month of September 1513, he, in company with his scholar Francesco Melzi, quitted Milan[i67], and set out for Rome (which till that time he had never visited), encouraged perhaps to this resolution by the circumstance that his friend Cardinal John de Medicis, who was afterwards known by the assumed name of Leo X. had a few months before been advanced to the papacy[i68]. His known partiality to the arts, and the friendship which had subsisted between him and Leonardo, held out to the latter a well-founded expectation of employment for his pencil at Rome, and we find in this expectation he was not deceived; as, soon after his arrival, the Pope actually signified his intention of setting him to [Pg xlv] work. Upon this Leonardo began distilling oils for his colours, and preparing varnishes, which the Pope hearing, said pertly and ignorantly enough, that he could expect nothing from a man who thought of finishing his works before he had begun them [i69]. Had the Pope known, as he seems not to have done, that oil was the vehicle in which the colours were to have been worked, or been witness either to the almost annihilation of the colours in Leonardo’s famous picture of the Last Supper, owing to the damp of the wall, or to the peeling of the colours from the wall in the council-chamber at Florence, he probably would have spared this ill-natured reflection. If it applied at all, it could only be to a very small part of the pursuit in which Leonardo was occupied, namely, preparing varnish; and if age were necessary to give the varnish strength, or it were the better for keeping, the answer was in an equal degree both silly and impertinent; and it is no wonder it should disgust such a mind as Leonardo’s, or produce, as we find it did, such a breach between the Pope and him, that the intended pictures, whatever they might have been, were never begun.

His father passed away in 1504 [i62], and as a result of that event, he got involved in a legal dispute with his half-brothers, the legitimate sons of Pietro da Vinci, to reclaim a portion of his father’s estate. In a letter from[Pg xliv] Florence to the Governor of Milan, the date of which is not mentioned, he mentioned that he was close to resolving this matter [i63]. In Florence, he remained from 1503 to 1507 [i64], during which time he painted a Virgin and Child, once held by the Botti family, and a head of the Baptist, previously owned by Camillo Albizzi[i65]. However, in 1508 and the following year, he was in Milan, where he received a pension granted to him by Louis XII. [i66]. In September 1513, he left Milan[i67] with his student Francesco Melzi and set off for Rome, a city he had never visited until then. Perhaps he was encouraged by the recent elevation of his friend Cardinal John de Medici—later known as Leo X—to the papacy[i68]. Given the Pope's known fondness for the arts and their past friendship, Leonardo had a reasonable expectation of finding work in Rome, which turned out to be true; soon after he arrived, the Pope indicated his intention to put him to work [Pg xlv]. Leonardo then started distilling oils for his paints and preparing varnishes. Upon hearing this, the Pope foolishly remarked that he couldn’t expect much from a man who thought about finishing his projects before he even started them [i69]. If the Pope had realized, as he apparently did not, that oil was the medium for the paints, or witnessed the nearly complete fading of the colors in Leonardo’s famous Last Supper due to the wall’s dampness, or the peeling colors in the council-chamber at Florence, he likely would have avoided such a mean-spirited comment. If it applied at all, it would only relate to a minor aspect of Leonardo's work, specifically the preparation of varnish. If aging was needed to strengthen the varnish or improve its longevity, then the Pope’s comment was equally foolish and offensive. It’s no surprise that it would upset someone like Leonardo, creating such a rift between him and the Pope that the intended paintings, whatever they were, were never realized.

Disgusted with his treatment at Rome, where the former antipathy between him and Michael Angelo was again revived by the partisans of each, he the next year quitted it; and accepting an invitation which had been made him by Francis the First, he proceeded into France[i70]. At the time of this journey he is said to have been seventy years old[i71], which cannot be correct, as he did not live to attain that age in the whole. Probably the singularity of his appearance (for in his latter years he permitted his beard to grow long), together with the effect which his intense application to study had produced in his constitution, might have given rise to an opinion that he was older than he really was; and indeed it seems pretty clear, that when he arrived in France he was nearly worn out in body, if not in mind, by the anxiety and application with which he had pursued his former studies and investigations.

Disgusted with how he was treated in Rome, where the old rivalry between him and Michelangelo flared up again thanks to their supporters, he left the city the following year. Accepting an invitation from Francis the First, he went to France[i70]. At the time of this trip, he was said to be seventy years old[i71], which can't be right since he didn't live to reach that age. It's likely that his unusual appearance (he let his beard grow long in his later years) and the toll his intense focus on study took on his health made people think he looked older than he was. In fact, it seems clear that by the time he got to France, he was nearly worn out physically, if not mentally, from the anxiety and effort he had put into his previous studies and research.

Although the King’s motive to this invitation, which seems to have been a wish to profit by the pencil of Leonardo, was completely disappointed by his ill state of health, which the fatigues of his journey and the change of the climate produced,[Pg xlvii] so that on his arrival in France no hopes could be entertained by the King of enriching his collection with any pictures by Leonardo; yet the French people in general, and the King in particular, are expressly said to have been as favourable to him as those of Rome had been injurious, and he was received by the King in the most affectionate manner. It was however unfortunately too soon evident that these symptoms of decay were only the forerunners of a more fatal distemper under which for several months he languished, but which by degrees was increasing upon him. Of this he was sensible, and therefore in the beginning of the year 1518, he determined to make his will, to which he afterwards added one or more codicils. By these he first describes himself as Leonardo da Vinci, painter to the King, at present residing at the place called Cloux, near Amboise, and then desires to be buried in the church of St. Florentine at Amboise, and that his body should be accompanied from the said place of Cloux to the said church, by the college of the said church, and the chaplains of St. Dennis of Amboise, and the friars minor of the said place; and that before his body is carried to the said church, it should remain three days in the chamber in which he[Pg xlviii] should die, or in some other; he further orders that three great masses and thirty lesser masses of St. Gregory, should be celebrated there, and a like service be performed in the church of St. Dennis, and in that of the said friars minor. He gives and bequeaths to Franco di Melzio, a gentleman of Milan, in return for his services, all and every the books which he the testator has at present, and other instruments and drawings respecting his art: To Baptista de Villanis, his servant, the moiety of the garden which he has without the walls of Milan; and the other moiety of the said garden to Salay his servant. He gives to the said Francesco Meltio the arrears of his pension, and the sum of money owing to him at present, and at the time of his death, by the treasurer M. Johan Sapin; and to the same person all and singular his clothes and vestments. He orders and wills, that the sum of four hundred crowns of the sum which he has in the hands of the chamberlain of Santa Maria Nuova, at Florence, should be given to his brethren residing at Florence, with the profit and emolument thereon. And lastly, he appoints the said Gia. Francesco de Meltio, whole and sole executor[i72].

Although the King’s reason for this invitation, which appears to have been a desire to benefit from Leonardo's talent, was completely thwarted by his poor health—caused by the strain of his journey and the change in climate—so that upon his arrival in France, the King had no hope of adding any works by Leonardo to his collection; still, the French people, and especially the King, are said to have treated him much more favorably than the people of Rome had, and the King welcomed him with great affection. Unfortunately, it soon became clear that these signs of decline were just the indicators of a more serious illness that left him weak for several months and gradually worsened. He was aware of this, and so at the beginning of 1518, he decided to draft his will, to which he later added one or more codicils. In these documents, he first identifies himself as Leonardo da Vinci, painter to the King, currently living at a place called Cloux, near Amboise, and then requests to be buried in the church of St. Florentine at Amboise. He wishes for his body to be accompanied from Cloux to the church by the clergy of that church, the chaplains of St. Dennis in Amboise, and the Minor Friars of that area. Before his body is taken to the church, he specifies that it should rest for three days in the room where he dies, or elsewhere. He also orders that three great masses and thirty smaller masses of St. Gregory be held there, and similar services performed in the church of St. Dennis and that of the Minor Friars. He bequeaths to Franco di Melzio, a gentleman from Milan, as a reward for his services, all the books he currently owns and other art-related instruments and drawings. To Baptista de Villanis, his servant, he gives half of the garden he has outside the walls of Milan, and the other half to Salay, another servant. He also grants Francesco Melzio the unpaid portion of his pension and the money owed to him by the treasurer, M. Johan Sapin, at the time of his death, along with all of his clothing and garments. He instructs that four hundred crowns from the funds held by the chamberlain of Santa Maria Nuova in Florence be given to his brothers residing in Florence, along with any profits from that sum. Finally, he names Gia. Francesco Melzio as the sole executor.

This Will bears date, and appears to have been executed on the 23d of April 1518. He however survived the making of it more than a year; and on the 23d of April 1519[i73], the day twelvemonth on which it had been originally made, he, though it does not appear for what reason, re-executed it; and the next day added a codicil, by which he gave to his servant, Gio. Battista de Villanis, the right which had been granted him in return for his labours on the canal of Martesana, of exacting a certain portion of all the wood transported on the Ticino[i74].

This Will is dated and seems to have been signed on April 23, 1518. He, however, lived for more than a year after making it; and on April 23, 1519[i73], one year to the day after it was originally created, he, for reasons that are unclear, re-signed it. The next day, he added a codicil giving his servant, Gio. Battista de Villanis, the right granted to him in exchange for his work on the Martesana canal to collect a certain share of all the wood transported on the Ticino[i74].

All this interval of time between the making and re-execution of his will, and indeed the whole period from his arrival in France, he seems to have been struggling under an incurable illness. The King frequently during its continuance honoured him with visits; and it has been said, that in one of these Leonardo exerting himself beyond his strength, to shew his sense of this prince’s condescension, was seized with a fainting fit, and that the King stooping forward to support him, Leonardo expired in his arms, on the 2d of May 1519[i75]. Venturi has taken some pains to disprove this fact, by shewing[i76], [Pg l] that though in the interval between the years 1516 and 1519, the French court passed eleven months at different times at Amboise; yet on the 1st of May 1519, it was certainly not here, but at St. Germains. History, however, when incorrect, is more frequently a mixture of true and false, than a total fabrication of falsehood; and it is therefore not impossible, or improbable, that the King might shew such an act of kindness in some of his visits when he was resident at Amboise, and that Leonardo might recover from that fit, and not die till some time after; at which latter time the Court and the King might be absent at St. Germains. This is surely a more rational supposition than to imagine such a fact could have been invented without any foundation for it whatever.

All the time between creating and redoing his will, and really the entire time since he arrived in France, he seemed to be suffering from an incurable illness. The King often honored him with visits during this period; and it’s said that during one of these visits, Leonardo pushed himself too hard to show his appreciation for the prince’s kindness, collapsed, and when the King leaned down to support him, Leonardo died in his arms on May 2, 1519[i75]. Venturi has worked hard to refute this claim by showing[i76], [Pg l] that although the French court spent eleven months at various times in Amboise between 1516 and 1519, on May 1, 1519, they were definitely not there, but at St. Germains. However, when history is inaccurate, it is often a mix of truth and falsehood rather than a complete fabrication; so it’s not impossible or unlikely that the King could have shown such a gesture of kindness during one of his visits while he was in Amboise, and that Leonardo might have recovered from that incident, not dying until some time later when the court and the King could have been absent in St. Germains. This seems like a more reasonable assumption than thinking that such a fact could have been fabricated without any basis.

It is impossible within the limits that can here be allowed, to do any thing like justice to the merits of this extraordinary man: all that can in this place be effected is to give the principal facts respecting him; and this is all, therefore, that has been attempted. A sufficient account, however, at least for the present purpose, it is presumed has been given above of the Author, and the productions of his pencil, and it now remains therefore only to speak of those of his pen.

It’s not possible, given the constraints here, to fully do justice to the achievements of this remarkable man. What can be done here is to present the main facts about him, and that’s all that has been attempted. It’s assumed that a sufficient overview, at least for the current purpose, has been provided above about the Author and the works of his brush, and now we only need to discuss the works of his pen.

With what view the Author engaged in this arduous course of study, how eager he was in the pursuit of knowledge, how anxious to avail himself of the best means of obtaining complete information on every subject to which he applied, and how careful to minute down whatever he procured that could be useful, have been already shewn in the course of the foregoing narrative; but in order to prevent the necessity of interrupting there the succession of events, it has been reserved for this place to describe the contents and extent of his collections, and to give a brief idea of the branches to which they relate.

With what purpose the Author undertook this challenging study, how eager he was to learn, how determined to use the best resources to gain complete information on every topic he explored, and how diligent he was to record anything useful he found, has already been demonstrated in the previous narrative; however, to avoid interrupting the flow of events, this section will describe the contents and scope of his collections and provide a brief overview of the subjects they cover.

On inquiry then we learn, that Leonardo’s productions of this kind consist of fourteen manuscript volumes, large and small, now in the library of the National Institute at Paris, whither they have been some few years since removed from the Ambrosian library at Milan; and of one folio volume in manuscript also, in the possession of his Majesty the King of Great Britain. Of those at Paris, J. B. Venturi, Professor of Natural Philosophy at Modena, and of the Institute of Bologna, &c. who was permitted to inspect them, says[i77], that “they contain speculations in those branches of natural philosophy [Pg lii] nearest allied to geometry; that they are first sketches and occasional notes, the Author always intending afterwards to compose from them complete treatises.” He adds further, “that they are written backwards from right to left, in the manner of the oriental writers, probably with intention that the curious should not rob him of his discoveries. The spirit of geometry guided him throughout, whether it were in the art of analysing a subject in the connexion of the discourse, or the care of always generalizing his ideas. As to natural philosophy, he never was satisfied on any proposition if he had not proved it by experiment.” From the extracts given from these manuscripts by Venturi himself, and which he has ranged under the different heads mentioned in the note[i78], the contents of these volumes appear to be extremely miscellaneous; and it is evident, as Venturi has marked by references where each extract is to be found in the original, that[Pg liii] from the great distance at which passages on the same subject are placed from each other, they must have been entered without any regard to method or arrangement of any kind whatever.

On inquiry, we learn that Leonardo's works of this kind consist of fourteen manuscript volumes, both large and small, now housed in the library of the National Institute in Paris, where they were moved a few years ago from the Ambrosian library in Milan; and one folio manuscript volume that belongs to His Majesty the King of Great Britain. Among those in Paris, J. B. Venturi, a Professor of Natural Philosophy at Modena and a member of the Institute of Bologna, who was allowed to examine them, says[i77], that “they include ideas in those areas of natural philosophy[Pg lii] closest to geometry; they are initial sketches and random notes, with the author always intending to later develop them into complete treatises.” He further mentions, “that they are written backward from right to left, similar to how oriental writers do, probably to ensure that the curious wouldn’t steal his ideas. The principles of geometry guided him throughout, whether he was analyzing a subject in the context of the discourse or carefully generalizing his thoughts. Regarding natural philosophy, he was never satisfied with any statement unless he had validated it through experimentation.” From the excerpts provided from these manuscripts by Venturi himself, organized under the categories noted[i78], the content of these volumes seems to be highly diverse; and it is clear, as Venturi has indicated with references to where each excerpt can be found in the original, that[Pg liii] due to the considerable distance between passages on the same topic, they must have been recorded without any consideration of method or organization.

The volume in the possession of his Britannic Majesty is described as consisting “of a variety of elegant heads, some of which are drawn with red and black chalks on blue or red paper, others with a metal pencil on a tinted paper; a few of them are washed and heightened with white, and many are on common paper. The subjects of these drawings are miscellaneous, as portraits, caricatures, single figures, tilting, horses, and other animals; botany, optics, perspective, gunnery, hydraulics, mechanics, and a great number of anatomical subjects, which are drawn with a more spirited pen, and illustrated with a variety of manuscript notes. This volume contains what is of more importance, the very characteristic head of Leonardo, as it was sketched by himself, and now engraved by that eminent artist Mr. Bartolozzi[i79].” Specimens from this volume have been published some years since by Mr. Dalton, and more recently and accurately by Mr. Chamberlaine; and though it must be confessed, that the former are extremely ill [Pg liv] drawn, and betray the grossest ignorance of the effect which light and shadow were intended to produce, yet some of the subjects which the volume contains may be ascertained by them; and among them is also a fac simile of a page of the original manuscript, which proves this, like the other volumes, to be in Italian, and written backwards. The latter is a very beautiful work, and is calculated to give an accurate idea of Leonardo’s talents as a draughtsman [i80]. From these two publications it appears, that this volume also is of a very miscellaneous nature, and that it consists of manuscript entries, interspersed with finished drawings of heads and figures, and slight sketches of mechanical engines and anatomical subjects, some of which are intermixed with the writing itself.

The volume belonging to His Britannic Majesty is described as containing “a variety of elegant heads, some drawn with red and black chalk on blue or red paper, others with a metal pencil on tinted paper; a few are washed and enhanced with white, and many are on plain paper. The subjects of these drawings vary widely, including portraits, caricatures, single figures, knights jousting, horses, and other animals; as well as topics like botany, optics, perspective, gunnery, hydraulics, mechanics, and a large number of anatomical subjects, which are rendered with a more dynamic style and annotated with various handwritten notes. This volume includes something even more significant: the very distinctive head of Leonardo, sketched by himself and now engraved by the renowned artist Mr. Bartolozzi[i79].” Several years ago, Mr. Dalton published specimens from this volume, and more recently and accurately, Mr. Chamberlaine has done so; and although it must be acknowledged that the former are extremely poorly drawn and show a complete lack of understanding of how light and shadow are meant to work, some of the subjects in the volume can still be identified through them; among those is also a facsimile of a page from the original manuscript, which shows that this, like the other volumes, is in Italian and written backwards. The latter is a beautifully executed work that effectively conveys Leonardo’s skills as a draftsman[i80]. From these two publications, it is clear that this volume is also quite varied, consisting of handwritten notes mixed with finished drawings of heads and figures, as well as rough sketches of mechanical devices and anatomical subjects, some of which are intertwined with the text itself.

It has been already seen, that these volumes were originally given by the will of Leonardo to Francisco Melzi; and their subsequent history we are enabled to state on the authority of John Ambrose Mazenta, through whose hands they passed. Du Fresne, in the life prefixed to the edition which he published in Italian, of Leonardo da Vinci’s Treatise on Painting, has, in a[Pg lv] very loose way, and without citing any authority, given their history; but Venturi has inserted[i81] a translation into French, from the original manuscript memoir of Mazenta; and from him a version of it into English is here given, with the addition of Venturi’s notes, rendered also into English.

It has already been noted that these volumes were originally bequeathed by Leonardo to Francisco Melzi; we can outline their subsequent history based on the account of John Ambrose Mazenta, through whom they passed. Du Fresne, in the life included at the beginning of the Italian edition he published of Leonardo da Vinci’s Treatise on Painting, has provided their history in a[Pg lv] rather vague manner, without citing any sources. However, Venturi has included[i81] a translation into French from Mazenta's original manuscript memoir; from this, we present an English version along with Venturi’s notes, also translated into English.

“It is near fifty years [i82] since there fell into my hands thirteen volumes of Leonardo da Vinci in folio and quarto, written backwards. Accident brought them to me in the following manner: I was residing at Pisa, for the purpose of studying the law, in the family of Aldus Manutius the younger, a great lover of books. A person named Lelio Gavardi, of Asola, Prevost of S. Zeno, at Pavia, a very near relation of Aldus, came to our house; he had been a teacher of the belles lettres in the family of the Melzi of Milan, called de Vavero, to distinguish them from other families of the same name in that city. He had, at their country house at Vavero, met with several drawings, instruments, and [Pg lvi] books of Leonardo. Francisco Melzi [i83] approached nearer than any one to the manner of De Vinci; he worked little, because he was rich; his pictures are very much finished, they are often confounded with those of his master. At his death he left the works of Leonardo in his house at Vavero, to his sons, who having tastes and pursuits of a different kind, neglected these treasures, and soon dispersed them; Lelio Gavardi possessed himself of as many of them as he pleased; he carried thirteen volumes to Florence, in hopes of receiving for them a good price from the Grand Duke Francis, who was eager after works of this sort; and the rather as Leonardo was in great reputation in his own country. But this prince died [i84] as soon as Gavardi was arrived at Florence. He then went to Pisa, to the house of Manutius. I could not approve his proceeding; it was scandalous. My studies being finished, I had occasion to return to Milan. He gave me the volumes of Vinci, desiring me to return them to the Melzi: I acquitted myself faithfully of my commission; I carried them all back to Horatio, the chief of the family of Melzi, who was surprised [Pg lvii] at my being willing to give myself this trouble. He made me a present of these books, telling me he had still many drawings by the same author, long neglected in the garrets of his house in the country. Thus these books became my property, and afterwards they belonged to my brothers[i85]. These latter having made too much parade of this acquisition, and the ease with which I was brought to it, excited the envy of other amateurs, who beset Horatio, and obtained from him some drawings, some figures, some anatomical pieces, and other valuable remains of the cabinet of Leonardo. One of these spungers for the works of Leonardo, was Pompeo Aretin, son of the Cavalier Leoni, formerly a disciple of Bonaroti, and who was about Philip II. King of Spain, for whom he did all the bronzes which are at the Escurial. Pompeo engaged himself to procure for Melzi an employment to the senate of Milan, if he succeeded in recovering the thirteen books, wishing to offer them to King Philip, a lover of such curiosities. Flattered with this hope, Melzi went to my brother’s house: he besought him on his knees to restore him his present; he was a fellow-collegian, a friend, a benefactor: seven volumes [Pg lviii] were returned to him [i86]. Of the six others which remained to the Mazenta family, one was presented to Cardinal Frederic Borromeo, for the Ambrosian library [i87]. My brother gave a second to Ambrose Figini, a celebrated painter of his time, who left it to his heir Hercole Bianchi, with the rest of his cabinet. Urged by the Duke of Savoy, I procured for him a third; and in conclusion, my brother having died at a distance from Milan [i88], the three remaining volumes came also into the hands of Pompeo Aretin; he re-assembled also others of them, he separated the leaves of them to form a thick volume[i89], which passed to his heir Polidoro Calchi, and was afterwards sold to Galeazzo Arconati. This gentleman keeps it now in his rich library; he has refused it to the Duke of Savoy, and to other princes who were desirous of it.”

“It’s been nearly fifty years since I came into possession of thirteen volumes of Leonardo da Vinci's works, written backwards, in folio and quarto. They were brought to me quite by chance: I was living in Pisa, studying law, with Aldus Manutius the younger, a true lover of books. A man named Lelio Gavardi from Asola, who was a close relative of Aldus, came to our home. He had been a teacher of literature in the Melzi family of Milan, known as de Vavero to separate them from other families with the same name in the city. During his time at their country house in Vavero, he discovered various drawings, instruments, and books by Leonardo. Francisco Melzi was the closest to De Vinci’s style; he worked sparingly since he was wealthy. His paintings are well-finished and often mistaken for those of his master. Upon his death, he left Leonardo's works at his home in Vavero to his sons, who had different interests and soon neglected and scattered these treasures. Lelio Gavardi took as many as he wanted and brought thirteen volumes to Florence, hoping to sell them for a good price to Grand Duke Francis, who had a keen interest in such works, especially since Leonardo was highly regarded in his homeland. However, this prince passed away just after Gavardi arrived in Florence. He then went to Pisa to Aldus’s house. I couldn’t support his actions; they were disgraceful. After finishing my studies, I needed to return to Milan. He handed me the volumes of Vinci, asking me to return them to the Melzi family. I fulfilled my duty honestly and took them all back to Horatio, the head of the Melzi family, who was surprised that I would bother to do this. He gifted me these books, saying he still had many drawings by the same author, long overlooked in the attics of his country home. So, these books became mine, and later they belonged to my brothers. My brothers' flaunting of this acquisition and the ease with which it came to me sparked envy among other collectors, who pressed Horatio and obtained some drawings, figures, anatomical pieces, and other valuable remnants from Leonardo's collection. One such opportunist was Pompeo Aretin, the son of Cavalier Leoni, who was once a student of Bonaroti and worked for Philip II of Spain, for whom he created all the bronze works at the Escorial. Pompeo promised to secure an appointment for Melzi in the Milan senate if he could recover the thirteen books, intending to present them to King Philip, a collector of such curiosities. Encouraged by this hope, Melzi went to my brother’s house, begging on his knees to have his gift back; he was a fellow student, a friend, a benefactor. Seven volumes were returned to him. Of the remaining six that stayed with the Mazenta family, one was given to Cardinal Frederic Borromeo for the Ambrosian library. My brother gifted another to Ambrose Figini, a well-known painter of his time, who passed it on to his heir, Hercole Bianchi, along with the rest of his collection. At the request of the Duke of Savoy, I managed to get a third for him, and ultimately, after my brother died away from Milan, the last three volumes ended up with Pompeo Aretin. He gathered others, separated their pages to create a thick volume, which went to his heir Polidoro Calchi, and was later sold to Galeazzo Arconati. This gentleman currently keeps it in his extensive library; he has turned down offers from the Duke of Savoy and other princes who wanted it.”

In addition to this memoir, Venturi notices[i90], that Howard Earl of Arundel made ineffectual efforts to obtain this large volume, and offered for it as far as 60,000 francs, in the name of the King of England. Arconati would never part with it; he bought eleven other books of Da Vinci, which came also, according to appearance, from Leoni; in 1637 he made a gift of them all to the Ambrosian library[i91], which already was in possession of the volume E, from Mazenta, and received afterwards the volume K from Horatio Archinto, in 1674[i92].

In addition to this memoir, Venturi notes[i90] that Howard, the Earl of Arundel, made unsuccessful attempts to acquire this large volume, offering as much as 60,000 francs on behalf of the King of England. Arconati would never give it up; he purchased eleven other books by Da Vinci, which also seemingly came from Leoni. In 1637, he donated them all to the Ambrosian library[i91], which already held volume E from Mazenta and later received volume K from Horatio Archinto in 1674[i92].

Venturi says, this is the history of all the manuscripts of Vinci that are come into France; they are in number fourteen, because the volume B contains an appendix of eighteen leaves, which may be separated, and considered as the fourteenth volume[i93].

Venturi says this is the history of all the manuscripts from Vinci that have come to France; there are fourteen in total because volume B includes an appendix of eighteen leaves, which can be separated and considered as the fourteenth volume[i93].

In the printed catalogue of the library of Turin, one does not see noticed the manuscript which Mazenta gave to the Duke of Savoy: it has then disappeared. Might it not be that which an Englishman got copied by Francis[Pg lx] Ducci, library-keeper at Florence, and a copy of which is still remaining in the same city [i94]?

In the printed catalog of the Turin library, the manuscript that Mazenta gave to the Duke of Savoy isn’t mentioned: it has since vanished. Could it be the same one that an Englishman had copied by Francis Ducci, the librarian in Florence, and a copy of which still exists in that city?

The Trivulce family at Milan, according to Venturi[i95], possess also a manuscript of Vinci, which is in great part only a vocabulary.

The Trivulce family in Milan, according to Venturi[i95], also has a manuscript of Vinci, which is mostly just a vocabulary.

Of the volume in the possession of his Britannic Majesty, the following account is given in the life of Leonardo, prefixed to that number already published from it by Mr. Chamberlaine: “It was one of the three volumes which became the property of Pompeo Leoni, that is now in his Majesty’s cabinet. It is rather probable than certain, that this great curiosity was acquired for King Charles I. by the Earl of Arundel, when he went Ambassador to the Emperor Ferdinand II. in 1636, as may indeed be inferred from an instructive inscription over the place where the volumes are kept, which sets forth, that James King of England offered three thousand pistoles for one of the volumes of Leonardo’s works. And some documents in the Ambrosian library give colour to this conjecture. This volume was happily preserved during the civil wars of the last century among other specimens of the fine arts, which the munificence of[Pg lxi] Charles I. had amassed with a diligence equal to his taste. And it was discovered soon after his present Majesty’s accession in the same cabinet where Queen Caroline found the fine portraits of the court of Henry VIII. by Hans Holbein, which the King’s liberality permitted me lately to lay before the public. On the cover of this volume is written, in gold letters, what ascertains its descent; Disegni di Leonardo da Vinci, restaurati da Pompeo Leoni.”

Of the volume owned by his Britannic Majesty, the following account is provided in the life of Leonardo, which is included at the beginning of the edition already published by Mr. Chamberlaine: “It was one of the three volumes that belonged to Pompeo Leoni, and is now in his Majesty’s cabinet. It is more likely than not that this significant curiosity was obtained for King Charles I by the Earl of Arundel when he served as Ambassador to Emperor Ferdinand II in 1636, as suggested by an informative inscription above the location where the volumes are stored, which states that James, King of England, offered three thousand pistoles for one of Leonardo’s works. Moreover, some documents in the Ambrosian Library support this theory. This volume was fortunately preserved during the civil wars of the last century among other examples of fine art that the generosity of Charles I had gathered with diligence equivalent to his taste. It was found shortly after the accession of his current Majesty in the same cabinet where Queen Caroline discovered the fine portraits of Henry VIII’s court by Hans Holbein, which the King’s generosity allowed me to present to the public recently. On the cover of this volume, it is inscribed in gold letters, confirming its lineage: Disegni di Leonardo da Vinci, restaurati da Pompeo Leoni.”

Although no part of the collections of Leonardo was arranged and prepared by himself, or others under his direction, for publication, some extracts have been made from his writings, and given to the world as separate tracts. The best known, and indeed the principal of these, is the following Treatise on Painting, of which there will be occasion to say more presently; but besides this, Edward Cooper, a London bookseller, about the year 1720, published a fragment of a Treatise by Leonardo da Vinci, on the Motions of the Human Body, and the Manner of drawing Figures, according to geometrical Rules. It contains but ten plates in folio, including the title-page, and was evidently extracted from some of the volumes of his collections, as it consists of slight sketches and verbal[Pg lxii] descriptions both in Italian and English, to explain such of them as needed it.

Although no part of Leonardo's collections was arranged and prepared by him or anyone else under his direction for publication, some excerpts have been taken from his writings and published as separate works. The most well-known and indeed the main one is the Treatise on Painting, which will be discussed further later; in addition to this, Edward Cooper, a London bookseller, published a fragment of a Treatise by Leonardo da Vinci around 1720, focusing on the Motions of the Human Body and the Method of drawing Figures using geometrical Rules. It includes only ten plates in folio, including the title page, and was clearly extracted from some of his collection volumes, as it comprises simple sketches and written descriptions in both Italian and English to clarify those that needed it.

Mr. Dalton, as has been before noticed, several years since published some engravings from the volume in our King’s collection, but they are so badly done as to be of no value. Mr. Chamberlaine therefore, in 1796, took up the intention afresh, and in that year his first number came out, which is all that has yet appeared.

Mr. Dalton, as previously mentioned, published some engravings from the book in our King’s collection several years ago, but they are poorly done and have no value. Mr. Chamberlaine decided to try again in 1796, and that year saw the release of his first issue, which is the only one that has been published so far.

Of the Treatise on Painting, Venturi[i96] gives the following particulars: “The Treatise on Painting which we have of Vinci is only a compilation of different fragments extracted from his manuscripts. It was in the Barberini library at Rome, in 1630[i97]: the Cav. del Pozzo obtained a copy from it, and Poussin designed the figures of it in 1640[i98]. This copy, and another derived from the same source, in the possession of Thevenot, served as the basis for the edition published in 1651, by Raphael du Frêne. The manuscript of Pozzo, with the figures of Poussin, is actually at Paris, in the valuable collection of[Pg lxiii] books of Chardin [i99]. It is from this that I have taken the relation of Mazenta; it is at the end of the manuscript under this title: “Some Notices of the Works of Leonardo da Vinci at Milan, and of his Books, by J. Ambrose Mazenta of Milan, of the Congregation of the Priests Regular of St. Paul, called the Barnabites.” Mazenta does not announce himself as the author of the compilation; he may however be so; it may also happen, that the compilation was made by the heir himself of Vinci, Francisco Melzo. Vasari, about 1567, says [i100], that a painter of Milan had the manuscripts of Vinci, which were written backwards; that this painter came to him, and afterwards went to Rome, with intention to get them printed, but that he did not know what was the result. However it may be, Du Frêne confesses that this compilation is imperfect in many respects, and ill arranged. It is so, because the compiler has not seized the methodical spirit of Vinci, and that there are mixed with it some[Pg lxiv] pieces which belong to other tracts; besides, one has not seen where many other chapters have been neglected which ought to make part of it. For example, the comparison of painting with sculpture, which has been announced as a separate treatise of the same author, is nothing more than a chapter belonging to the Treatise on Painting, A. 105. All this will be complete, and put in order, in the Treatise on Optics[i101]. In the mean time, however, the following are the different editions of this compilation, such as it is at present:

Of the Treatise on Painting, Venturi[i96] provides the following details: “The Treatise on Painting that we have from Vinci is just a collection of various fragments taken from his manuscripts. It was in the Barberini library in Rome, in 1630[i97]: the Cav. del Pozzo got a copy from it, and Poussin illustrated the figures for it in 1640[i98]. This copy, along with another one from the same source owned by Thevenot, served as the basis for the edition published in 1651 by Raphael du Frêne. Pozzo's manuscript, with Poussin's illustrations, is currently in Paris, in the valuable collection of[Pg lxiii] books belonging to Chardin[i99]. It is from this that I have taken the account of Mazenta; it is at the end of the manuscript under the title: “Some Notices of the Works of Leonardo da Vinci at Milan, and of His Books, by J. Ambrose Mazenta of Milan, of the Congregation of the Priests Regular of St. Paul, known as the Barnabites.” Mazenta doesn’t claim to be the author of the compilation; he might be, but it’s also possible that the compilation was made by Vinci’s heir, Francisco Melzo. Vasari, around 1567, mentions[i100] that a painter from Milan had Vinci’s manuscripts, which were written backwards; this painter visited him and then went to Rome, intending to get them published, but the outcome is unknown. Regardless, Du Frêne admits that this compilation is incomplete in many ways and poorly organized. This is because the compiler didn't capture Vinci's systematic approach, and some[Pg lxiv] pieces that belong to other writings are mixed in with it; furthermore, many other chapters that should be included have been overlooked. For instance, the comparison of painting with sculpture, which has been presented as a separate treatise by the same author, is nothing more than a chapter from the Treatise on Painting, A. 105. All this will be completed and organized in the Treatise on Optics[i101]. In the meantime, here are the various editions of this compilation as it currently stands:

“Trattato della Pittura di Leonardo da Vinci, nuovamente dato in Luce, con la Vita dell’ Autore da Raphaele du Frêne, Parigi 1651, in fol.; reprinted at Naples in 1733, in folio; at Bologna, in 1786, in folio; at Florence, in 1792, in 4to. This last edition has been given from a copy in the hand-writing of Stephano della Bella.

“Treatise on Painting by Leonardo da Vinci, newly published with the Life of the Author by Raphaele du Frêne, Paris 1651, in folio; reprinted in Naples in 1733, in folio; in Bologna, in 1786, in folio; in Florence, in 1792, in 4to. This last edition was produced from a copy handwritten by Stephano della Bella.”

“——Translated into French by Roland Freart de Chambray, Paris 1651, fol. reprinted ibid. 1716, in 12mo, and 1796, in 8vo.

“——Translated into French by Roland Freart de Chambray, Paris 1651, fol. reprinted ibid. 1716, in 12mo, and 1796, in 8vo.”

“——Translated into German, in 4to. Nuremberg 1786, Weigel.

“——Translated into German, in 4to. Nuremberg 1786, Weigel.

“——Translated into Greek by Panagiotto, manuscript in the Nani library at Venice.

“——Translated into Greek by Panagiotto, manuscript in the Nani library in Venice.

“Another manuscript copy of this compilation was in the possession of P. Orlandi, from whence it passed into the library of Smith[i102].

“Another manuscript copy of this compilation was owned by P. Orlandi, from where it moved into the library of Smith[i102].

“Cellini, in a discourse published by Morelli, says[i103], that he possessed a copy of a book of De Vinci on Perspective, which he communicated to Serlio, and that this latter published from it all that he could comprehend. Might not this be the tract which Gori announces to be in the library of the Academy of Cortona[i104]?”

“Cellini, in a talk published by Morelli, says[i103], that he had a copy of a book by Da Vinci on perspective, which he shared with Serlio, and that Serlio published everything he could understand from it. Could this be the document that Gori mentions is in the library of the Academy of Cortona[i104]?”

The reputation in which the Treatise on Painting ought to be held, is not now for the first time to be settled; its merit has been acknowledged by the best judges, though at that time it laboured under great disadvantage from the want of a proper arrangement. In the present publication that objection is removed, and the attempt has been favourable to the work itself, as it has shewn it, by bringing together the several chapters that related to each other, to be a much more complete and connected treatise than was before supposed. Notwithstanding however the fair estimation in which it has always stood, and which is no more than its due, one person has been found hardy enough to endeavour, though[Pg lxvi] unsuccessfully, to lessen its credit: a circumstance which it would not have been worth while to notice, if it had not been intimated to us, that there are still some persons in France who side with the objector, which, as he was a Frenchman, and Leonardo an Italian, may perhaps be ascribed, in some measure at least, to the desire which in several instances that people have lately shewn of claiming on behalf of their countrymen, a preference over others, to which they are not entitled. Abraham Bosse, of the city of Tours, an engraver in copper, who lived in the last century, is the person here alluded to; and it may not be impertinent in this place to state some of the motives by which he was induced to such a conduct. At the time when this Treatise first made its appearance in France, as well in Italian as in French, Bosse appears to have been resident at Paris, and was a member of the Academy of Painting, where he gave the first lessons on perspective, and, with the assistance of Mons. Desargues, published from time to time several tracts on geometry and perspective, the manner of designing, and the art of engraving, some of which at least are described in the title-page, as printed at Paris for the author[i105]. This man,[Pg lxvii] in his lectures, having, it is said, attacked some of the pictures painted by Le Brun, the then Director of the Academy, had been very deservedly removed from his situation, and forced to quit the Academy, for endeavouring to lessen that authority, which for the instruction and improvement of students it was necessary the Director should possess, and attempting thus to render fruitless the precepts which his situation required him to deliver. As this Treatise of Leonardo had in the translation been adopted by Le Brun, who fully saw its value, and introduced it into the Academy for the advantage of the students, by which means the sale of Bosse’s work might be, and probably was, affected; Bosse, at the end of a Treatise on Geometry and Perspective, taught in the Royal Academy of Painting and Sculpture, published by him in octavo in 1665, has inserted a paper with this title, which in the original is given in French, but we have preferred translating it: “What follows is for those who shall have the curiosity to be acquainted with a part of the procedings of Mons. Desargues, and myself, against some of our antagonists, and part of their skill; together with some remarks made on the contents of several chapters of a Treatise attributed to Leonardo de Vinci, translated from Italian into French by[Pg lxviii] Mons. Freart Sieur de Chambray, from a manuscript taken from that which is in the library of the illustrious, virtuous, and curious Mons. le Chevalier Du Puis at Rome.”

The reputation that the Treatise on Painting deserves isn't being established for the first time; its value has been recognized by top critics, even though it initially suffered from a lack of proper organization. In this latest edition, that issue has been resolved, and the effort has benefited the work itself, as it has shown that by grouping related chapters together, it is a much more complete and cohesive treatise than previously thought. Despite the positive regard it has always enjoyed, which is only fitting, one person has been bold enough, albeit unsuccessfully, to try to diminish its credibility. This is worth mentioning because we've been informed that there are still some people in France who support this critic. Since he was French and Leonardo was Italian, this may partly stem from a trend among some of their countrymen to claim superiority for their own over others when it's undeserved. The person being referred to here is Abraham Bosse, an engraver from Tours, who lived in the last century. It's relevant to mention some of the reasons that led him to behave this way. When this Treatise first appeared in France, both in Italian and French, Bosse seems to have been living in Paris and was a member of the Academy of Painting, where he was the first to teach perspective. He, along with Mons. Desargues, periodically published various works on geometry, perspective, design, and engraving, some of which are mentioned on the title page printed in Paris for the author[i105]. This man[Pg lxvii] was said to have criticized some paintings by Le Brun, the then Director of the Academy, during his lectures, which led to his deserved removal from that position and forced him to leave the Academy for trying to undermine the authority that was essential for student instruction and improvement, effectively trying to make the Director's teachings irrelevant. Since Le Brun had adopted and recognized the value of Leonardo's Treatise for the Academy's students, the sales of Bosse's work might have been, and likely were, impacted; thus, at the end of a Treatise on Geometry and Perspective taught at the Royal Academy of Painting and Sculpture, which he published in octavo in 1665, Bosse included a paper with this title. In the original, it's written in French, but we've chosen to translate it: “What follows is for those who are curious to learn about part of the proceedings of Mons. Desargues and me, against some of our opponents, and a portion of their skills; along with some comments on the contents of several chapters of a Treatise attributed to Leonardo da Vinci, translated from Italian into French by[Pg lxviii] Mons. Freart Sieur de Chambray, from a manuscript taken from that which is in the library of the illustrious, virtuous, and curious Mons. le Chevalier Du Puis at Rome.”

After the explanation of his motives above given, it is not wonderful to find him asserting, that this Treatise of Leonardo was in a number of circumstances inferior to his own; nor to observe, that in a list of some of the chapters which he has there given, we should be frequently told by him that they are false, absurd, ridiculous, confused, trifling, weak, and, in short, every thing but good. It is true that the estimation of Leonardo da Vinci was in France too high for him to attack without risking his own character for judgment and taste, and he has therefore found it necessary for his purpose insidiously to suggest that these chapters were interpolations; but of this he has produced no proof, which, had it been the fact, might have been easily obtained, by only getting some friend to consult Leonardo’s manuscript collections in the Ambrosian library. That he would have taken this step if he had expected any success from it, may fairly be inferred from the circumstance of his writing to Poussin at Rome, apparently in hopes of inducing him to say something to the disadvantage of the work; and his omitting to make this inquiry after the enmity he has shewn against the book, fully justifies[Pg lxix] an opinion that he forbore to inquire, because he was conscious that such an investigation would have terminated in vindicating his adversaries from his aspersions, and have furnished evidence of their fidelity and accuracy.

After explaining his motives above, it’s not surprising to find him claiming that Leonardo's Treatise was lacking in several ways compared to his own. It's also not uncommon to see him label various chapters as false, absurd, ridiculous, confusing, trivial, weak, and basically anything but good. It's true that Leonardo da Vinci was so highly regarded in France that attacking him could risk his own reputation for judgment and taste. Therefore, he slyly suggests that these chapters were added later. However, he hasn’t provided any proof for this claim, which would have been easy to obtain simply by asking a friend to check Leonardo’s manuscript collections in the Ambrosian library. The fact that he didn’t take this step, despite showing hostility towards the book, supports the view that he avoided investigating because he knew it would prove his accusations wrong and show the reliability of his opponents.

What the letter which he wrote to Poussin contained, he has not informed us; but he has given us, as he says, Poussin’s answer[i106], in which are some passages relating to this Treatise, of which we here give a translation: “As to what concerns the book of Leonard Vinci, it is true that I have designed the human figures which are in that which Mons. le Chevalier du Puis has; but all the others, whether geometrical or otherwise, are of one man, named Gli Alberti, the very same who has drawn the plants which are in the book of subterraneous Rome; and the awkward landscapes which are behind some of the little human figures of the copy which Mons. du Chambray has caused to be printed, have been added to it by one Errard, without my knowing any thing of it.

What the letter he wrote to Poussin contained, he hasn’t told us; but he has provided us with what he claims is Poussin’s response[i106], which includes some parts related to this Treatise, and we’re sharing a translation here: “Regarding the book of Leonardo da Vinci, it’s true that I’ve sketched the human figures that are in the one Mons. le Chevalier du Puis has; however, all the other figures, whether geometric or not, are by a man named Gli Alberti, the same person who illustrated the plants in the book on subterranean Rome; and the awkward landscapes behind some of the small human figures in the copy that Mons. du Chambray had printed were added by someone named Errard, and I didn’t know anything about it."

“All that is good in this book may be written on one sheet of paper, in a large character, and those who believe that I approve all that is in it, do not know me; I who profess never to give sanction to things of my profession which I know to be ill done and ill said.”

“All the good stuff in this book could fit on one sheet of paper in big letters, and anyone who thinks I agree with everything in it doesn’t really know me; I’m someone who claims I will never support things in my field that I know are poorly done or poorly said.”

Whoever recollects the difference in the course of study pursued and recommended by Leonardo (that of Nature), from that observed by Poussin (that of the antique), and remembers also the different fortunes of Le Brun and Poussin, that the one was at the head of his profession, enjoying all its honours and emoluments, while the other, though conscious of his own great powers, was toiling for a daily subsistence in comparative obscurity, may easily conceive why the latter could not approve a work which so strongly inculcates the adopting Nature as the guide throughout; and which was at the same time patronized by one whom he could not but consider as his more fortunate rival. It may however be truly affirmed, that even the talents of Poussin, great as they certainly were, and his knowledge and correctness in drawing, would have been abundantly improved by an attention to the rules laid down in this Treatise, and that the study of Nature would have freed his pictures from that resemblance to statues which his figures frequently have, and bestowed on them the soft and fleshy appearance for which Leonardo was so remarkable; while a minute investigation of Leonardo’s system of colouring would have produced perhaps in him as fortunate a change as we have seen it did in the case of Raphael.

Anyone who recalls the difference in the study methods recommended by Leonardo (focusing on Nature) compared to those of Poussin (focusing on the classics), and also remembers the contrasting outcomes for Le Brun and Poussin—where one led his profession, enjoying all its honors and rewards, while the other, despite being aware of his own significant talent, struggled for daily survival in relative obscurity—can easily understand why Poussin could not support a work that strongly emphasizes using Nature as the primary guide; especially one that was endorsed by someone he saw as his more fortunate rival. However, it can be truthfully said that even Poussin's considerable talent and his skill in drawing would have greatly benefited from following the rules in this Treatise, and studying Nature would have helped his paintings avoid the statue-like quality his figures often displayed. Instead, they could have had the soft and flesh-like appearance for which Leonardo was well known; a thorough examination of Leonardo’s coloring techniques might have led to a change for him as beneficial as what we have seen with Raphael.

Though Bosse tells us [i107], that he had seen in the hands of Mons. Felibien, a manuscript copy of this Tract on Painting, which he said he had taken from the same original mentioned before, for the purpose of translating it into French; and that on Bosse’s pointing out to him some of these errors, and informing him that Mons. de Chambray was far advanced in his translation, he abandoned his design, and assigned to the Sieur de Chambray the privilege he had obtained for it; we have no intention here to enumerate or answer Bosse’s objections, merely because such an undertaking would greatly exceed the limits which can here be allowed us. Most of them will be found captious and splenetic, and, together with the majority of the rest, might be fully refuted by a deduction of facts; it is however sufficient on the present occasion to say, that wherever opportunity has been afforded of tracing the means by which Leonardo procured his materials for any great composition, he is found to have exactly pursued the path which he recommends to others [i108]; and for the success of his precepts, [Pg lxxii] and what may be effected by them, we need only appeal to his own example.

Though Bosse tells us [i107], that he had seen a manuscript copy of this Tract on Painting in the hands of Mons. Felibien, which he claimed to have taken from the same original mentioned earlier to translate it into French; and that when Bosse pointed out some errors to him and informed him that Mons. de Chambray was well into his translation, he gave up his plan and assigned the privilege he had obtained to Sieur de Chambray; we don’t intend to list or respond to Bosse’s objections here, simply because that would take us far beyond what we can cover. Most of them will likely seem petty and bitter, and together with most of the others, could be fully countered by a factual analysis; however, it’s enough to say for now that whenever there's an opportunity to trace how Leonardo gathered his materials for any major work, he consistently followed the same approach he suggests to others [i108]; and to see the success of his principles, [Pg lxxii] and what can be achieved through them, we need only look to his own example.

To this enumeration of the productions of Leonardo’s pen, and in contradiction to the fact already asserted, that no part of his collections was ever arranged or prepared for publication by himself, it is probable we may be told we should add tracts on Motion; on the Equilibrium of bodies; on the nature, equilibrium, and motion of Water; on Anatomy; on the Anatomy of an horse; on Perspective; and on Light and Shadow: which are either mentioned by himself in the Treatise on Painting, or ascribed to him by others. But as to these, there is great reason for supposing, that, though they might be intended, they were never actually drawn up into form. Certain it is, that no such have been ever given to the world, as those before noticed are the only treatises of this author that have yet appeared in print; and even they have already been shewn to be no more than extracts from the immense mass of his collections of such passages as related to the subjects on which they profess to give intelligence. If any tracts therefore in his name, on any of the above topics, are any where existing [Pg lxxiii] in manuscript, and in obscurity, it is probable they are only similar selections. And indeed it will be found on inspection, that his collections consist of a multitude of entries made at different times, without method, order, or arrangement of any kind, so as to form an immense chaos of intelligence, which he, like many other voluminous collectors, intended at some future time to digest and arrange, but unfortunately postponed this task so long, that he did not live to carry that intention into effect. Under these circumstances, should it happen, as perhaps it may, that any volume of the whole is confined exclusively to any one branch of science, such as hydrostatics for instance, it was not the consequence of a designed plan, but only arose from this accident, that he had then made that branch the object of his pursuit, and for a time laid aside the rest. In proof of this assertion it may be observed, that the very treatise of light and shadow above mentioned, is described as in the Ambrosian library at Milan, and as a folio volume covered with red velvet, presented by Signior Mazzenta to Cardinal Borromeo[i109]; from all which circumstances it is evidently proved to be [Pg lxxiv] one of the volumes now existing in France [i110], which were inspected and described by Venturi in the tract so often cited in the course of this life.

To this list of what Leonardo wrote, and despite the fact that it's already been stated that he never organized or prepared any part of his works for publication himself, we might be told we should also include writings on Motion; on the Equilibrium of bodies; on the nature, equilibrium, and motion of Water; on Anatomy; on the Anatomy of a horse; on Perspective; and on Light and Shadow: which are either mentioned by him in the Treatise on Painting or attributed to him by others. However, it's reasonable to believe that, while he may have intended these works, they were never actually put together. It’s certain that no such works have ever been published; the only pieces of his that have appeared in print are the ones mentioned previously, which have been shown to be merely extracts from his extensive collection of notes related to the topics they claim to cover. Therefore, if any manuscripts under his name on the topics listed above exist in obscurity, it’s likely they are just similar selections. In fact, it will be found upon inspection that his collections consist of numerous entries made at different times without any method, order, or organization, resulting in an immense chaos of information that he, like many other prolific collectors, intended to整理 and structure at some point in the future but unfortunately delayed this task long enough that he did not live to fulfill that intention. Given these circumstances, if it happens that any complete volume is dedicated solely to one branch of science, like hydrostatics for example, it didn’t come from a deliberate plan but rather occurred by chance because he was focused on that area and temporarily set aside the others. To support this claim, it can be noted that the specific treatise on light and shadow mentioned earlier is recorded as being in the Ambrosian library in Milan, described as a folio volume covered in red velvet, which was presented by Signior Mazzenta to Cardinal Borromeo. From all these details, it is evident that it is one of the volumes currently existing in France, which were examined and described by Venturi in the frequently referenced work throughout this life.

Although the principal of Leonardo’s productions have been already mentioned, it has been thought proper, for the satisfaction of the curious, here to subjoin a catalogue of such of them as have come to our knowledge; distinguishing in it such as were only drawings, from such as were finished pictures, and noticing also which of them have been engraven, and by whom.

Although the main works of Leonardo have already been mentioned, it seems appropriate, for the sake of those who are curious, to include a list of the ones we know about here. This list will differentiate between those that were just drawings and those that were completed paintings, and it will also note which of them have been engraved and by whom.


CATALOG
OF THE
WORKS
OF
Leonardo da Vinci.


ARCHITECTURE.

Architecture.

Many designs for plans and buildings, made by him in his youth[i111].

Many designs for plans and buildings, created by him when he was young[i111].

A model made by him for raising the roof of the church of St. John, at Florence[i112].

A model he created for lifting the roof of St. John’s church in Florence[i112].

The house of the family of Melzi at Vaprio, supposed by Della Valle to be designed by Leonardo [i113].

The Melzi family's house in Vaprio, which Della Valle believed was designed by Leonardo [i113].

MODELS and SCULPTURE.

MODELS & SCULPTURE.

Some heads of laughing women, modelled by him in clay, in his youth[i114].

Some heads of laughing women, shaped by him in clay, during his youth[i114].

Some boys’ heads also, which appeared to have come from the hand of a master[i115].

Some boys’ heads too, which seemed to be crafted by a master[i115].

Three figures in bronze, over the gate on the north side of the church of St. John, at Florence, made by Gio. Francesco Rustici, but designed with the advice of Leonardo da Vinci [i116].

Three bronze figures, above the gate on the north side of St. John's church in Florence, created by Gio. Francesco Rustici, but designed with the input of Leonardo da Vinci [i116].

A model in clay, in alto relievo. It is a circle of about two palms in diameter, and represents St. Jerom in a grotto, old, and much worn out by prayer. It was in the possession of Sig. Ignazio Hugford, a painter at Florence, who was induced to buy it in consequence of the great praises which in his youth he had heard bestowed on it by the celebrated Anton. Dominico Gabbiani, his master, who knew it to be of the hand of Leonardo. This model appears to have been much studied in the time of Pontormo and Rosso; and many copies of it, both drawings and pictures, are to be found throughout Florence, well painted in their manner[i117].

A model in clay, created in high relief. It has a diameter of about two palms and shows St. Jerome in a cave, aged and worn out from prayer. It belonged to Sig. Ignazio Hugford, a painter in Florence, who decided to buy it after hearing the great praises it received in his youth from the famous Anton. Dominico Gabbiani, his mentor, recognized it as being made by Leonardo. This model seems to have been extensively studied during the time of Pontormo and Rosso, and many reproductions of it, including drawings and paintings, can be found throughout Florence, all well-executed in their style[i117].

The equestrian statue in memory of the Duke of Milan’s father, which was not only finished and exposed to view, but broken to pieces by the French when they took possession of Milan. It has been said by some, that the model only was finished, and the statue never cast, and that it was the model only which the French destroyed [i118].

The equestrian statue in honor of the Duke of Milan’s father was not only completed and displayed but was also destroyed by the French when they took over Milan. Some have claimed that only the model was finished and that the statue was never actually made, and it was just the model that the French destroyed [i118].

Vasari, p. 36, mentions a little model by Leonardo in wax, but he does not say what was its subject.

Vasari, p. 36, mentions a small model made of wax by Leonardo, but he doesn't specify what it was about.

DRAWINGS.

Artworks.

Vasari, p. 24, says, that it was Leonardo’s practice to model figures from the life, and then to cover them with fine thin lawn or cambric, so as to be able to see through it, and with the point of a fine pencil to trace off the outlines in black and white; and that some such drawings he had in his collection.

Vasari, p. 24, states that Leonardo would create models of figures from real life and then cover them with fine, thin fabric or cambric, allowing him to see through it. He would then use a fine pencil to trace the outlines in black and white, and that he had some of these drawings in his collection.

A head in chiaro oscuro, in the possession of Vasari, and mentioned by him as divine, a drawing on paper [i119].

A head in chiaroscuro, owned by Vasari, and described by him as divine, is a drawing on paper [i119].

A carton of Adam and Eve in Paradise, made by him for the King of Portugal. It is done with a pen in chiaro oscuro, and heightened with white, and was intended to be worked as tapestry in silk and gold; but Vasari says it was never executed, and that in his time the carton remained at Florence, in the house of Ottaviano de Medici. Whether this carton is still existing is unknown [i120].

A cartoon of Adam and Eve in Paradise, created by him for the King of Portugal. It’s done with a pen in light and dark shades, and highlighted with white, meant to be made into a tapestry in silk and gold; however, Vasari mentions that it was never completed, and that during his time, the cartoon stayed in Florence, at the house of Ottaviano de Medici. Whether this cartoon still exists is unknown. [i120].

Several ridiculous heads of men and women, formerly in Vasari’s collection, drawn in pen and ink [i121]. Aurelio Lovino had, says Lomazzo, a book of sketches by Leonardo, of odd and ridiculous heads. This book appears to have contained about 250 figures of countrymen and countrywomen laughing,[Pg lxxviii] drawn by the hand of Leonardo. Card. Silvio Valenti had a similar book, in which were caricature heads drawn with a pen, like that engraven by Count Caylus. Of these caricatures mention is made in the second volume of the Lettere Pittoriche, p. 170[i122]. The passage in the Lettere Pittoriche here referred to, is part of a letter without any name or date, addressed Al Sig. C. di C.; but a note of the editor’s explains these initials, as meaning Sig. Conte di Caylus, and supposes the author to have been the younger Mariette. The letter mentions a collection of heads from Leonardo’s drawings, published by the Count; and the editor, in another note, tells us, that they are caricature heads drawn in pen and ink; that the originals were bought in Holland, from Sig. Cardin. Silvio Valenti, and that the prints of which the letter speaks, are in the famous collection of the Corsini library. The author of the Letter supposes these caricatures to have been drawn when Vinci retired to Melzi’s house, that he invented them as a new sort of recreation, and intended them as a subject for the academy which he had established at Milan.

A number of amusing sketches of men and women, once part of Vasari’s collection, created with pen and ink [i121]. Aurelio Lovino had, according to Lomazzo, a sketchbook by Leonardo that featured quirky and humorous heads. This sketchbook is said to have included around 250 drawings of country folks laughing,[Pg lxxviii] made by Leonardo himself. Card. Silvio Valenti possessed a similar book filled with caricature heads drawn with a pen, similar to those engraved by Count Caylus. These caricatures are mentioned in the second volume of the Lettere Pittoriche, p. 170[i122]. The passage from the Lettere Pittoriche referenced here is part of a letter that lacks both a name and a date, addressed to Al Sig. C. di C.; however, an editor's note clarifies that these initials stand for Sig. Conte di Caylus and suggests that the author was the younger Mariette. The letter talks about a collection of heads based on Leonardo’s drawings that were published by the Count; the editor, in another note, informs us that these are caricature heads drawn in pen and ink, that the originals were purchased in Holland from Sig. Cardin. Silvio Valenti, and that the prints discussed in the letter are held in the renowned Corsini library collection. The author of the letter speculates that these caricatures were created when Vinci retreated to Melzi’s residence, suggesting he conjured them as a new form of amusement and intended them for the academy he established in Milan.

In another part of the same Letter, p. 173, 174, this collection of drawings of heads is again mentioned, and it is there said, that it might be that which belonged to the Earl of Arundel. This conjecture is founded on there being many such heads [Pg lxxix] engraven formerly by Hollar. In fact, the number of the plates which he has done from drawings of this painter, are near one hundred, which compose different series. The author of the Letter adds, that, if a conjecture might be permitted, we might affirm, that this is the collection of heads of which Paul Lomazzo speaks; at least the description which he gives of a similar collection which was in the hands of Aurelio Lovino, a painter of Milan, corresponds with this as well in the number of the drawings as their subjects. It represents, like this, studies from old men, countrymen, wrinkled old women, which are all laughing. Another part of this Letter says, it is easy to believe that the collection of drawings of heads which occasioned this Letter, might be one of those books in which Leonardo noted the most singular countenances.

In another part of the same Letter, pp. 173, 174, this collection of head drawings is mentioned again, and it's suggested that it might belong to the Earl of Arundel. This guess is based on the fact that there are many heads [Pg lxxix] previously engraved by Hollar. Actually, the number of plates he created from this painter's drawings is close to one hundred, which make up different series. The author of the Letter adds that, if we can make a guess, we might say that this is the collection of heads referred to by Paul Lomazzo; at least the description he provides of a similar collection held by Aurelio Lovino, a painter from Milan, matches this collection in both the number of drawings and their subjects. It includes studies of old men, rural folks, and wrinkled old women, all of whom are laughing. Another section of this Letter states that it's easy to believe that the collection of head drawings that prompted this Letter might be one of those books in which Leonardo recorded the most unique faces.

In p. 198 of the same Letter, Hollar’s engravings are said to be about an hundred, and to have been done at Antwerp in 1645, and the following year; and in p. 199, Count Caylus’s publication is said to contain 59 plates in aqua fortis, done in 1730, and that this latter is the work so often mentioned in the Letter.

In p. 198 of the same Letter, it mentions that Hollar’s engravings are around a hundred and were done in Antwerp in 1645 and the following year; and on p. 199, it states that Count Caylus’s publication contains 59 plates in aqua fortis, created in 1730, and that this is the work often referenced in the Letter.

Another collection of the same kind of caricature heads mentioned in Mariette’s Letter[i123], as existing in the cabinet of either the King of Spain or the King of Sardinia.

Another collection of similar caricature heads mentioned in Mariette’s Letter[i123], found in the collection of either the King of Spain or the King of Sardinia.

Four caricature heads, mentioned, Lett. Pitt. vol. ii. p. 190, as being in the possession of Sig. Crozat. They are described as drawn with a pen, and are said to have come originally from Vasari’s collection of drawings. Of this collection it is said, in a note on the above passage, that it was afterwards carried into France, and fell into the hands of a bookseller, who took the volume to pieces, and disposed of the drawings separately, and that many of them came into the cabinets of the King, and Sig. Crozat. Others say, and it is more credible, that Vasari’s collection passed into that of the Grand Dukes of Medici.

Four caricature heads, mentioned in Lett. Pitt. vol. ii. p. 190, are noted to be owned by Sig. Crozat. They are described as being drawn with a pen and are believed to have originally come from Vasari’s collection of drawings. According to a note on the above passage, this collection was later taken to France and ended up with a bookseller who dismantled the volume and sold the drawings separately, with many finding their way into the collections of the King and Sig. Crozat. Others claim, and it seems more credible, that Vasari’s collection was passed on to the Grand Dukes of Medici.

A head of Americo Vespucci, in charcoal, but copied by Vasari in pen and ink[i124].

A head of Americo Vespucci, drawn in charcoal, but replicated by Vasari in pen and ink[i124].

A head of an old man, beautifully drawn in charcoal[i125].

A head of an old man, beautifully illustrated in charcoal[i125].

An head of Scarramuccia, captain of the gypsies, in chalk; formerly belonging to Pierfrancesco Giambullari, canon of St. Lorenzo, at Florence, and left by him to Donato Valdambrini of Arezzo, canon of St. Lorenzo also [i126].

A portrait of Scarramuccia, the leader of the gypsies, in chalk; previously owned by Pierfrancesco Giambullari, a canon of St. Lorenzo in Florence, and passed on to Donato Valdambrini of Arezzo, who is also a canon of St. Lorenzo [i126].

Several designs of combatants on horseback, made by Leonardo for Gentil Borri, a master of defence [i127], to shew the different positions necessary for a horse soldier in defending himself, and attacking his enemy.

Several designs of soldiers on horseback, created by Leonardo for Gentil Borri, a master of defense [i127], to demonstrate the different positions needed for a cavalry soldier to defend himself and attack his enemy.

A carton of our Saviour, the Virgin, St. Ann, [Pg lxxxi] and St. John. Vasari says of this, that for two days, people of all sorts, men and women, young and old, resorted to Leonardo’s house to see this wonderful performance, as if they had been going to a solemn feast; and adds, that this carton was afterwards in France. It seems that this was intended for an altar-piece for the high altar of the church of the Annunziata, but the picture was never painted [i128]. However, when Leonardo afterwards went into France, he, at the desire of Francis the First, put the design into colours. Lomazzo has said, that this carton of St. Ann was carried into France; that in his time it was at Milan, in the possession of Aurelio Lovino, a painter; and that many drawings from it were in existence. What was the fate this carton of St. Ann underwent, may be seen in a letter of P. Resta, printed in the third volume of the Lettere Pittoriche, in which he says, that Leonardo made three of these cartons, and nevertheless did not convert it into a picture, but that it was painted by Salai, and that[Pg lxxxii] the picture is still in the sacristy of St. Celsus at Milan [i129].

A cartoon of our Savior, the Virgin, St. Ann, [Pg lxxxi] and St. John. Vasari says that for two days, all kinds of people—men and women, young and old—flocked to Leonardo’s house to see this incredible work, as if they were attending a grand feast; he adds that this cartoon later ended up in France. It seems this was meant to be an altar piece for the high altar of the Church of the Annunziata, but the painting was never completed[i128]. However, when Leonardo went to France later, he, at the request of Francis the First, turned the design into a colored version. Lomazzo mentioned that this cartoon of St. Ann was taken to France; that during his time it was in Milan, owned by Aurelio Lovino, a painter; and that many drawings based on it still existed. The fate of this cartoon of St. Ann can be found in a letter from P. Resta, printed in the third volume of the Lettere Pittoriche, in which he states that Leonardo made three of these cartoons, yet did not turn it into a painting, but rather it was painted by Salai, and that[Pg lxxxii] the painting is still in the sacristy of St. Celsus in Milan [i129].

A drawing of an old man’s head, seen in front, in red chalk; mentioned Lett. Pitt. vol. ii. p. 191.

A drawing of an old man's head, seen from the front, in red chalk; mentioned Lett. Pitt. vol. ii. p. 191.

A carton designed by him for painting the council-chamber at Florence. The subject which he chose for this purpose was, the history of Niccolo Piccinino, the Captain of Duke Philip of Milan, in which he drew a group of men on horseback fighting for a standard[i130]. Mariette, in a note, Lett. Pitt. vol. ii. p. 193, mentions this carton, which he says represented two horsemen fighting for a standard; that it was only part of a large history, the subject of which was the rout of Niccolo Piccinino, General of the army of Philip Duke of Milan, and that a print was engraven of it by Edelinck, when young, but the drawing from which he worked was a bad one. In the catalogue of prints from the works of Leonardo, inserted Lett. Pitt. vol. ii. p. 195, this print is again mentioned and described more truly, as representing four horsemen fighting for a standard. It is there supposed to have been engraven from a drawing by Fiammingo, and that this drawing might have been made from the picture which Du Fresne speaks of as being in his time in the possession of Sig. La Maire, an excellent painter of perspective.

A sketch created by him for painting the council chamber in Florence. The topic he chose for this was the story of Niccolo Piccinino, the Captain of Duke Philip of Milan, where he illustrated a group of men on horseback battling for a standard[i130]. Mariette, in a note, Lett. Pitt. vol. ii. p. 193, mentions this sketch, stating it depicted two horsemen fighting for a standard; that it was just part of a larger narrative, which centered on the defeat of Niccolo Piccinino, General of the army of Philip, Duke of Milan, and that Edelinck, when young, engraved a print of it, but the drawing he used as a reference was of poor quality. In the print catalog of Leonardo's works, included in Lett. Pitt. vol. ii. p. 195, this print is mentioned again and is described more accurately as showing four horsemen fighting for a standard. It's assumed to have been engraved from a drawing by Fiammingo, and that this drawing might have been based on the painting that Du Fresne noted as being owned at that time by Sig. La Maire, an excellent painter of perspective.

A design of Neptune drawn in his car by sea horses, attended by sea gods; made by him for his friend Antonio Segni [i131].

A design of Neptune riding in his chariot pulled by sea horses, accompanied by sea gods; created by him for his friend Antonio Segni [i131].

Several anatomical drawings made from the life, many of which have been since collected into a volume, by his scholar Francesco Melzi[i132].

Several anatomical drawings made from life, many of which have been collected into a single volume by his student Francesco Melzi[i132].

A book of the Anatomy of man, mentioned by Vasari, p. 36, the drawings for which were made with the assistance of Marc Antonio della Torre, before noticed in the present life. It is probably the same with the preceding.

A book on the Anatomy of Man, mentioned by Vasari, p. 36, the drawings for which were created with the help of Marc Antonio della Torre, previously mentioned in this biography. It is likely the same as the one before it.

A beautiful and well-preserved study in red and black chalk, of the head of a Virgin, from which he afterwards painted a picture. This study was at one time in the celebrated Villa de Vecchietti, but afterwards, in consequence of a sale, passed into the hands of Sig. Ignazio Hugford [i133].

A beautiful and well-preserved study in red and black chalk of the head of a Virgin, which he later used to paint a picture. This study was once in the famous Villa de Vecchietti, but later, due to a sale, it ended up in the possession of Sig. Ignazio Hugford [i133].

Two heads of women in profile, little differing from each other, drawn in like manner in black and red chalk, bought at the same sale by Sig. Hugford, but now among the Elector Palatine’s collection of drawings[i134].

Two heads of women in profile, hardly different from each other, sketched in black and red chalk, purchased at the same auction by Sig. Hugford, but now part of the Elector Palatine’s collection of drawings[i134].

A book of the Anatomy of a horse, mentioned by Vasari, p. 36, as a distinct work; but probably included in Leonardo’s manuscript collections. See the account before given of them.

A book on the anatomy of a horse, mentioned by Vasari, p. 36, as a separate work; but likely included in Leonardo’s manuscript collections. See the account previously provided of them.

Several designs by Leonardo were in the possession of Sig. Jabac, who seems to have been a collector of pictures, and to have bought up for the King of[Pg lxxxiv] France several excellent pictures particularly by Leonardo da Vinci [i135].

Several designs by Leonardo were owned by Sig. Jabac, who appears to have been a collector of art and acquired several excellent paintings, especially by Leonardo da Vinci, for the King of[Pg lxxxiv] France [i135].

A drawing of a young man embracing an old woman, whom he is caressing for the sake of her riches. This is mentioned, Lett. Pitt. vol. ii. p. 198, as engraven by Hollar, in 1646.

A drawing of a young man holding an old woman, whom he is lovingly touching for her wealth. This is noted in Lett. Pitt. vol. ii. p. 198, as engraved by Hollar in 1646.

A head of a young man seen in profile, engraven in aqua fortis by Conte di Caylus, from a drawing in the King of France’s collection[i136].

A profile of a young man's head, etched in aqua fortis by Conte di Caylus, based on a drawing from the King of France’s collection[i136].

A fragment of a Treatise on the Motions of the Human Body, already mentioned in the foregoing life.

A fragment of a Treatise on the Motions of the Human Body, mentioned earlier in this biography.

In the Lettere Pittoriche, vol. ii. p. 199, mention is made of a print representing some intertwisted lines upon a black ground, in the style of some of Albert Durer’s engravings in wood. In the middle of this, in a small compartment, is to be read, “Academia Leonardi Vin.” Vasari, it is there said, has noticed it as a singularity.

In the Lettere Pittoriche, vol. ii. p. 199, there's a reference to a print featuring some intertwined lines on a black background, reminiscent of some of Albert Durer’s wood engravings. In the center of this, in a small section, it says, “Leonardi Wine Academy.” It is noted there that Vasari mentioned it as something unique.

In p. 200 of the same work, a similar print is also noticed, which differs only in the inscription from the former. In this last it is Academia Leonardi Vici. Both this and the former print are said to be extremely rare, and only to have been seen in the King of France’s collection. It does not however appear from any thing in the Lett. Pitt. that they were designed by Leonardo.

In p. 200 of the same work, a similar print is also noted, differing only in the inscription from the previous one. In this last print, it reads Leonardo da Vinci Academy. Both this and the earlier print are said to be very rare and have only been seen in the King of France’s collection. However, there’s no evidence in the Lett. Pitt. that they were created by Leonardo.

The Abate di Villeloin, in his Catalogue of Prints [Pg lxxxv] published in 1666, speaks, under the article of Leonardo da Vinci, of a print of the taking down from the Cross; but the Lett. Pitt. says it was engraven from Eneas Vico, not from Leonardo [i137].

The Abate di Villeloin, in his Catalogue of Prints [Pg lxxxv] published in 1666, mentions, in the section about Leonardo da Vinci, a print of the removal from the Cross; however, the Lett. Pitt. states it was engraved from Eneas Vico, not from Leonardo [i137].

Two drawings of monsters, mentioned by Lomazzo, consisting of a boy’s head each, but horribly distorted by the misplacing of the features, and the introduction of other members not in Nature to be found there. These two drawings were in the hands of Francesco Borella, a sculptor[i138].

Two drawings of monsters, mentioned by Lomazzo, each featuring a boy’s head, but grotesquely distorted with misplaced features and the addition of elements not found in nature. These two drawings were in the possession of Francesco Borella, a sculptor[i138].

A portrait by Leonardo, of Artus, Maestro di Camera to Francis I. drawn in black lead pencil [i139].

A portrait by Leonardo, of Artus, Master of the Household to Francis I. drawn in graphite pencil [i139].

The head of a Cæsar crowned with oak, among a valuable collection of drawings in a thick volume in folio, in the possession of Sig. Pagave[i140].

The head of a Caesar crowned with oak, among a valuable collection of drawings in a thick volume in folio, in the possession of Sig. Pagave[i140].

The proportions of the human body. The original of this is preserved in the possession of Sig. Pagave. At the head and foot of this drawing is to be read the description which begins thus: Tanto apre l’Uomo nelle braccia quanto è la sua altezza, &c. and above all, at the head of the work is the famous Last Supper, which he proposes to his scholars as the rule of the art [i141].

The proportions of the human body. The original of this is kept by Sig. Pagave. At the top and bottom of this drawing, there’s a description that starts like this: Tanto apre l’Uomo nelle braccia quanto è la sua altezza, &c. And at the top of the work is the famous Last Supper, which he presents to his students as the standard for the art [i141].

The Circumcision, a large drawing mentioned Lett. Pitt. vol. ii. 283, as the work of Leonardo, by Nicolo Gabburri, in a letter dated Florence, 4th Oct. 1732, and addressed Al Sig. Pietro Mariette. Gabburri says [Pg lxxxvi] he saw this drawing, and that it was done on white paper a little tinted with Indian ink, and heightened with ceruse. Its owner then was Alessandro Galilei, an architect of Florence.

The Circumcision, a large drawing noted in Lett. Pitt. vol. ii. 283, as the work of Leonardo, by Nicolo Gabburri, in a letter dated Florence, 4th Oct. 1732, and addressed Al Sig. Pietro Mariette. Gabburri says [Pg lxxxvi] he saw this drawing, which was created on white paper slightly tinted with Indian ink and enhanced with ceruse. At that time, it belonged to Alessandro Galilei, an architect from Florence.

A drawing consisting of several laughing heads, in the middle of which is another head in profile, crowned with oak leaves. This drawing was the property of the Earl of Arundel, and was engraven by Hollar in 1646[i142].

A drawing of several laughing heads, with another head in profile at the center, topped with oak leaves. This drawing belonged to the Earl of Arundel and was etched by Hollar in 1646[i142].

A man sitting, and collecting in a looking-glass the rays of the sun, to dazzle the eyes of a dragon who is fighting with a lion. A print of this is spoken of, Lett. Pitt. vol. ii. p. 197, as badly engraven by an anonymous artist, but it is there said to have so little of Leonardo’s manner as to afford reason for believing it not designed by him, though it might perhaps be found among his drawings in the King of France’s collection. Another print of it, of the same size, has been engraven from the drawing by Conte de Caylus. It represents a pensive man, and differs from the former in this respect, that in this the man is naked, whereas in the drawing he is clothed.

A man is sitting and using a mirror to catch the sunlight to blind a dragon that's battling a lion. A print of this is mentioned in Lett. Pitt. vol. ii. p. 197, noted as poorly engraved by an unknown artist, but it’s also mentioned that it lacks a lot of Leonardo’s style, leading to the belief that it wasn't designed by him, although it might be included in his drawings within the King of France's collection. Another print of the same size has been made from the drawing by Conte de Caylus. It shows a thoughtful man and differs from the previous one in that this man is naked, while in the drawing, he is dressed.

PAINTINGS.

ARTWORKS.

A Madonna, formerly in the possession of Pope Clement the Seventh[i143].

A Madonna, once owned by Pope Clement the Seventh[i143].

A small Madonna and Child, painted for Baldassar Turini da Pescia, who was the Datary[i144] at Lyons, the colours of which are much faded[i145]. It is not known where this now is.

A small Madonna and Child, painted for Baldassar Turini da Pescia, who was the Datary[i144] at Lyons, the colors of which are quite faded[i145]. Its current location is unknown.

A Virgin and Child, at one time in the hands of the Botti family[i146].

A Virgin and Child, once in the possession of the Botti family[i146].

The Virgin sitting in St. Ann’s lap, and holding her little Son, formerly at Paris[i147]. This has been engraven in wood, in chiaro oscuro, by an unknown artist. The picture was in the King of France’s cabinet, and a similar one is in the sacristy of St. Celsus at Milan[i148].

The Virgin sitting in St. Ann’s lap, and holding her little Son, formerly in Paris[i147]. This has been engraved on wood, in chiaroscuro, by an unknown artist. The picture was in the King of France’s collection, and a similar one is in the sacristy of St. Celsus in Milan[i148].

Another Virgin with her Son, St. John, and an Angel, mentioned by Du Fresne, as at Paris [i149].

Another Virgin with her Son, St. John, and an Angel, mentioned by Du Fresne, as in Paris [i149].

A Madonna and Child, in the possession of the Marquis di Surdi[i150].

A Madonna and Child, owned by the Marquis di Surdi[i150].

A Madonna and Child, painted on the wall in the church of St. Onofrio at Rome[i151].

A Madonna and Child, painted on the wall in the church of St. Onofrio in Rome[i151].

A Madonna kneeling, in the King’s gallery in France[i152].

A Madonna kneeling, in the King’s gallery in France[i152].

An Holy Family, with St. Michael, and another Angel, in the King of France’s collection [i153].

A Holy Family, with St. Michael and another Angel, in the King of France’s collection [i153].

A Madonna, in the church of St. Francis at Milan, attributed to Leonardo by Sorman [i154].

A Madonna, in the Church of St. Francis in Milan, credited to Leonardo by Sorman [i154].

A Virgin and Child, by Leonardo, in Piacenza, near the church of Our Lady in the Fields. It was bought for 300 chequins by the Principe di Belgioioso[i155].

A Virgin and Child, by Leonardo, located in Piacenza, near the church of Our Lady in the Fields. It was purchased for 300 chequins by the Prince of Belgioioso[i155].

A Madonna, half length, holding on her knee the infant Jesus, with a lily in his hand. A print of this, engraven in aqua fortis by Giuseppe Juster, is mentioned Lett. Pitt. vol. ii. p. 196. The picture is there said to have been in the possession of Charles Patin, and was supposed by some to have been painted for Francis I.

A Madonna, half-length, holding the infant Jesus on her knee, with a lily in his hand. A print of this, engraved in aqua fortis by Giuseppe Juster, is mentioned in Lett. Pitt. vol. ii. p. 196. The picture is said to have been owned by Charles Patin and was thought by some to have been painted for Francis I.

An Herodiade, some time in Cardinal Richelieu’s possession[i156].

An Herodiade, some time in Cardinal Richelieu’s possession[i156].

The daughter of Herodias, with an executioner holding out to her the head of St. John, in the Barberini palace [i157].

The daughter of Herodias, with an executioner presenting her the head of St. John, in the Barberini palace [i157].

An Herodiade with a basket, in which is the head of John the Baptist. A print of this in aqua fortis, by Gio. Troven, under the direction of Teniers, is mentioned Lett. Pitt. vol. ii. p. 197, and is there said to have been done from a picture which was then in the cabinet of the Archduke Leopold, but had been before in that of the Emperor.

A Herodias with a basket, containing the head of John the Baptist. A print of this in aquatint, by Gio. Troven, under the direction of Teniers, is mentioned in Lett. Pitt. vol. ii. p. 197, and is said to have been made from a painting that was then in the collection of Archduke Leopold, but had previously been in that of the Emperor.

Another picture of the same subject, but differently disposed. It is also an half length. A print[Pg lxxxix] from it, in aqua fortis, by Alessio Loyr, is mentioned Lett. Pitt. vol. ii. p. 197; but it is not there said in whose possession the picture ever was.

Another image of the same subject, but arranged differently. It is also a half-length piece. A print[Pg lxxxix] from it, created using aqua fortis by Alessio Loyr, is referenced in Lett. Pitt. vol. ii. p. 197; however, it does not mention who has ever owned the painting.

The angel in Verrochio’s picture before mentioned[i158].

The angel in Verrochio’s painting mentioned earlier[i158].

The shield, mentioned by Vasari, p. 26, as painted by him at the request of his father, and consisting of serpents, &c.

The shield, mentioned by Vasari, p. 26, as painted by him at the request of his father, and featuring serpents, etc.

A head of Medusa, in oil, in the palace of Duke Cosmo. It is still in being, and in good preservation [i159].

A head of Medusa, painted in oil, is located in the palace of Duke Cosmo. It is still intact and well-preserved [i159].

A head of an angel raising one arm in the air, in the collection of Duke Cosmo[i160]. Whether this is a picture, or only a drawing, does not appear; but as Vasari does not notice any difference between that and the head of Medusa, which he decidedly says is in oil, it is probable that this is so also.

A head of an angel raising one arm in the air, in the collection of Duke Cosimo[i160]. It's unclear whether this is a painting or just a drawing; however, since Vasari doesn't point out any difference between this and the head of Medusa, which he clearly states is an oil painting, it's likely that this is too.

The Adoration of the Magi: it was in the house of Americo Benci, opposite to the Portico of Peruzzi [i161].

The Adoration of the Magi: it was in the house of Americo Benci, across from the Portico of Peruzzi [i161].

The famous Last Supper, in the Refectory of the Dominican convent of Santa Maria delle Grazie [i162]. A list of the copies made from this celebrated picture has, together with its history, been given in a former page. A print has been engraven from it under the direction of Pietro Soutman; but he being a scholar[Pg xc] of Rubens, has introduced into it so much of Rubens’s manner [i163], that it can no longer be known for Leonardo da Vinci’s. Besides this, Mariette also mentions two other prints, one of them an engraving, the other an etching, but both by unknown authors. He notices also, that the Count di Caylus had etched it in aqua fortis[i164]. The print lately engraven of it by Morghen has been already noticed in a former page.

The famous Last Supper, in the dining hall of the Dominican convent of Santa Maria delle Grazie[i162]. A list of the copies made from this celebrated painting, along with its history, has been provided on a previous page. A print was made from it under the direction of Pietro Soutman; however, since he was a student[Pg xc] of Rubens, he incorporated so much of Rubens's style[i163] that it is no longer recognizable as Leonardo da Vinci’s work. Additionally, Mariette mentions two other prints, one an engraving and the other an etching, both by unknown artists. He also notes that Count di Caylus had etched it using aqua fortis[i164]. The print recently made by Morghen has already been mentioned on a previous page.

A Nativity, sent as a present from the Duke of Milan to the Emperor[i165].

A Nativity, given as a gift from the Duke of Milan to the Emperor[i165].

The portraits of Lodovic Sforza, Duke of Milan, and Maximilian his eldest son, and on the other side Beatrix his dutchess, and Francesco his other son, all in one picture, in the same Refectory with the Last Supper[i166].

The portraits of Lodovic Sforza, Duke of Milan, and his eldest son Maximilian, along with his duchess Beatrix and his other son Francesco, all in one picture, in the same dining hall as the Last Supper[i166].

The portraits of two of the handsomest women at Florence, painted by him as a present to Lewis XII [i167].

The portraits of two of the most beautiful women in Florence, painted by him as a gift to Lewis XII [i167].

The painting in the council-chamber at Florence[i168]. The subject of this is the battle of Attila [i169].

The painting in the council chamber in Florence[i168]. The subject of this is the battle of Attila [i169].

A portrait of Ginevra, daughter of Americo Benci[i170].

A portrait of Ginevra, daughter of Americo Benci[i170].

The portrait of Mona Lisa, the wife of Francesco del Giocondo, painted for her husband[i171]. Lomazzo[Pg xci] has said, she was a Neapolitan, but this is supposed a mistake, and that she was a Florentine[i172]. In a note of Mariette’s, Lett. Pitt. vol. ii. p. 175, this picture is said to have been in the collection of Francis I. King of France, who gave for it 4000 crowns.

The portrait of Mona Lisa, the wife of Francesco del Giocondo, was painted for her husband[i171]. Lomazzo[Pg xci] claimed she was from Naples, but that’s thought to be a mistake; she was actually from Florence[i172]. In a note by Mariette, Lett. Pitt. vol. ii. p. 175, it’s mentioned that this painting was in the collection of Francis I, King of France, who paid 4000 crowns for it.

A small picture of a child, which was at Pescia, in the possession of Baldassar Turini. It is not known where this now is[i173].

A small picture of a child, which was in Pescia, owned by Baldassar Turini. Its current location is unknown[i173].

A painting of two horsemen struggling for a flag, in the Palais Royal at Paris[i174].

A painting of two horsemen fighting for a flag, in the Palais Royal in Paris[i174].

A nobleman of Mantua [i175].

A noble from Mantua __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.

A picture of Flora, which Du Fresne mentions as being in his time at Paris. This is said to have been once in the cabinet of Mary de Medicis[i176], and though for some time supposed to have been painted by Leonardo da Vinci, was discovered by Mariette to have been the work of Francisco Melzi, whose name is upon it [i177]. In the supplement to the life of Leonardo, inserted in Della Valle’s edition of Vasari, this picture is said to have been painted for the Duke de S. Simone.

A picture of Flora, which Du Fresne mentions was in his time in Paris. It is said to have once been in the collection of Mary de Medicis[i176], and although it was believed for a while to have been painted by Leonardo da Vinci, Mariette found out that it was actually the work of Francisco Melzi, whose name is on it[i177]. In the supplement to Leonardo's biography included in Della Valle’s edition of Vasari, it is noted that this picture was painted for the Duke de S. Simone.

A head of John the Baptist, in the hands of Camillo Albizzo[i178].

A head of John the Baptist, in the hands of Camillo Albizzo[i178].

The Conception of the blessed Virgin, for the church of St. Francis at Milan[i179]. This was esteemed a copy, and not worth more than 30 chequins, till an[Pg xcii] Englishman came there, who thought a large sum of money well employed in the purchase of it [i180].

The Conception of the Blessed Virgin, for the Church of St. Francis at Milan[i179]. It was considered a copy and not worth more than 30 chequins, until an[Pg xcii] Englishman visited, who believed spending a large amount of money on it was worthwhile[i180].

St. John in the Wilderness, said to be at Paris[i181]. In Lett. Pitt. vol. ii. p. 197, mention is made of a print of St. John the Baptist, half length, by Sig. Jabac, who had the original picture, which was formerly in the King of France’s cabinet.

St. John in the Wilderness, reportedly located in Paris[i181]. In Lett. Pitt. vol. ii. p. 197, there is a reference to a print of St. John the Baptist, shown from the waist up, created by Sig. Jabac, who owned the original painting that was once in the cabinet of the King of France.

Joseph and Potiphar’s wife, which Mons. de Charmois, secretary to the Duke of Schomberg, had [i182].

Joseph and Potiphar’s wife, which Mons. de Charmois, secretary to the Duke of Schomberg, had [i182].

A portrait of Raphael, in oil, in the Medici gallery. This is mentioned in Vasari, p. 47; and though not expressly there said to be by Leonardo, is so placed as to make it doubtful whether it was or not.

A portrait of Raphael, in oil, in the Medici gallery. This is mentioned in Vasari, p. 47; and although it isn't explicitly stated to be by Leonardo, its placement leaves it unclear whether it is or not.

A Nun, half length, by Leonardo, in the possession of Abbate Nicolini[i183].

A Nun, half length, by Leonardo, owned by Abbate Nicolini[i183].

Two fine heads, painted in oil by Leonardo, bought at Florence by Sig. Bali di Breteuil, ambassador from Malta to Rome. One of these, representing a woman, was in his first manner. The other, a Virgin, in his last[i184].

Two beautiful portraits, painted in oil by Leonardo, purchased in Florence by Sig. Bali di Breteuil, the ambassador from Malta to Rome. One of these, depicting a woman, was in his early style. The other, a Virgin, was in his later style[i184].

A Leda, which Lomazzo says was at Fontainebleau, and did not yield in colouring to the portrait of Joconda in the Duke’s gallery. Richardson says it was in the palace Mattei [i185].

A Leda, which Lomazzo claims was at Fontainebleau, and didn't fall short in color compared to the portrait of Joconda in the Duke’s gallery. Richardson states it was in the Mattei palace [i185].

The head of a dead man, with all its minute parts, painted by Leonardo, formerly in the Mattei palace, but no longer there[i186].

The head of a dead man, with all its tiny details, painted by Leonardo, once in the Mattei palace, but no longer there[i186].

A picture containing a study of two most delicate female heads, in the Barberini palace at Rome [i187].

A picture showing a study of two very delicate female heads, in the Barberini palace in Rome [i187].

A portrait of a girl with a book in her hand, in the Strozzi palace in Rome[i188].

A portrait of a girl holding a book, in the Strozzi palace in Rome[i188].

The Dispute of Jesus with the Doctors, half length, in the Panfili palace[i189].

The Dispute of Jesus with the Doctors, half length, in the Panfili palace[i189].

Five pictures in the Ambrosian library at Milan, the subjects not mentioned[i190].

Five pictures in the Ambrosian library in Milan, the subjects not mentioned[i190].

Some in the gallery of the archbishopric at Milan, the number and subjects equally unnoticed [i191].

Some in the gallery of the archbishopric in Milan, the number and subjects equally unnoticed [i191].

One picture in the sacristy of Santa Maria, near St. Celsus at Milan[i192].

One picture in the sacristy of Santa Maria, near St. Celsus in Milan[i192].

A small head of Christ, while a youth, mentioned by Lomazzo. Probably this may be the study for the picture of Jesus disputing with the Doctors, at the Panfili palace [i193].

A small head of Christ, while he was a youth, mentioned by Lomazzo. This is probably a study for the painting of Jesus debating with the Doctors at the Panfili palace [i193].

St. Michael with a man kneeling, in the King of France’s collection[i194].

St. Michael with a man kneeling, in the King of France’s collection[i194].

A Bacchus, in the same collection [i195].

A Bacchus, in the same collection [i195].

The fair Ferraia, in the same collection[i196].

The beautiful Ferraia, in the same collection[i196].

A portrait of a lady, there also [i197].

A portrait of a lady, there also [i197].

A Christ with a globe in his hand [i198]. A very fine picture, half length, now in the possession of Richard Troward, Esq. of Pall Mall. This was engraven by Hollar in 1650, in aqua fortis[i199].

A Christ with a globe in his hand [i198]. This is a beautiful half-length portrait, currently owned by Richard Troward, Esq. of Pall Mall. It was engraved by Hollar in 1650, using aquatint[i199].

The Fall of Phaeton, in the gallery of the Grand Duke of Tuscany, of which Scannelli speaks, but it is mentioned by no one else[i200].

The Fall of Phaeton is in the gallery of the Grand Duke of Tuscany, which Scannelli mentions, but no one else does.[i200]

St. Catherine with a palm-branch, in the gallery of the Duke of Modena[i201].

St. Catherine with a palm branch, in the gallery of the Duke of Modena[i201].

The head of a young man armed, in the same collection, very graceful, but inferior to the St. Catherine [i202].

The head of a young man with a weapon, in the same collection, very elegant, but not as good as the St. Catherine [i202].

A portrait of the Queen of Naples, which was in the Aldobrandini gallery, but afterwards to be found in a chamber of portraits in the Panfili palace. It is not equal in colouring to the Dispute of Jesus with the Doctors [i203].

A portrait of the Queen of Naples, which was in the Aldobrandini gallery, but later found in a chamber of portraits in the Panfili palace. It doesn't match the coloring of the Dispute of Jesus with the Doctors [i203].

A portrait in profile of the Dutchess of Milan, mentioned by Richardson as being in a chamber leading to the Ambrosian library[i204].

A profile portrait of the Duchess of Milan, noted by Richardson as being in a room that leads to the Ambrosian library[i204].

A beautiful figure of the Virgin, half length, in the palace of Vaprio. It is of a gigantic size, for the head of the Virgin is six common palms in size, and that of the Divine Infant four in circumference. Della Valle speaks of having seen this in the year 1791, and says he is not ignorant that tradition ascribes this Madonna to Bramante, notwithstanding which he gives it to Leonardo[i205].

A beautiful statue of the Virgin, half-length, in the palace of Vaprio. It is huge, with the Virgin’s head measuring six regular palms, and the Divine Infant’s head four in size. Della Valle mentions seeing this in 1791 and acknowledges that tradition attributes this Madonna to Bramante; however, he attributes it to Leonardo[i205].

A laughing Pomona with three veils, commended by Lomazzo. It was done for Francis I. King of France [i206].

A laughing Pomona with three veils, praised by Lomazzo. It was made for Francis I, King of France [i206].

The portrait of Cecilia Gallarani, mentioned by [Pg xcv] Bellincione in one of his sonnets, as painted by Leonardo [i207].

The portrait of Cecilia Gallarani, mentioned by [Pg xcv] Bellincione in one of his sonnets, as painted by Leonardo [i207].

Another of Lucrezia Cavelli, a celebrated performer on the lute, ascribed to him on the same authority. Copies of both this and the former may be seen at Milan [i208].

Another of Lucrezia Cavelli, a famous lute player, credited him with the same authority. You can find copies of both this one and the previous one in Milan [i208].

Our Saviour before Pilate, in the church of S. Florentino, at Amboise. It is thought that the carton only of this was Leonardo’s, and that the picture was painted by Andrea Salai, or Melzi [i209].

Our Savior before Pilate, in the church of S. Florentino, at Amboise. It’s believed that only the cartoon for this was done by Leonardo, and that the painting was created by Andrea Salai or Melzi[i209].

A portrait of Leonardo by himself, half length, in the Ambrosian library at Milan [i210]. Della Valle has inserted a copy of this before the Supplement to Leonardo’s Life, in his edition of Vasari, for which purpose Sig. Pagave transmitted him a drawing from the original picture. But Leonardo’s own drawing for the picture itself, is in the possession of his Britannic Majesty, and from that Mr. Chamberlaine has prefixed to his publication before mentioned, a plate engraven by Bartolozzi.

A portrait of Leonardo by himself, half-length, in the Ambrosian library at Milan [i210]. Della Valle has included a copy of this before the Supplement to Leonardo’s Life in his edition of Vasari, for which purpose Mr. Pagave sent him a drawing of the original picture. However, Leonardo’s own drawing for the picture is with his Britannic Majesty, and from that, Mr. Chamberlaine has added a plate engraved by Bartolozzi to his earlier mentioned publication.


A
TREATISE
&c.


DRAWING.


PROPORTION.

Chapter 1.What the young Student in Painting ought in the first Place to learn.

The young student should, in the first place, acquire a knowledge of perspective, to enable him to give to every object its proper dimensions: after which, it is requisite that he be under the care of an able master, to accustom him, by degrees, to a good style of drawing the parts. Next, he must study Nature, in order to confirm and fix in his mind the reason of those precepts which he has learnt. He must also bestow some time in viewing the works of various old masters, to form his eye[Pg 2] and judgment, in order that he may be able to put in practice all that he has been taught [1].

The young student should first learn about perspective so he can accurately represent the size of objects. After that, he needs to be guided by a skilled teacher to gradually get used to drawing well. Next, he must study Nature to understand and reinforce the principles he has learned. He should also spend time looking at the works of various old masters to develop his eye[Pg 2] and judgment so he can apply everything he has been taught[1].

Chap. 2.Rule for a young Student in Painting.

The organ of sight is one of the quickest, and takes in at a single glance an infinite variety of forms; notwithstanding which, it cannot perfectly comprehend more than one object at a time. For example, the reader, at one look over this page, immediately perceives it full of different characters; but he cannot at the same moment distinguish each letter, much less can he comprehend their meaning. He must consider it word by word, and line by line, if he be desirous of forming a just notion of these characters. In like manner, if we wish to ascend to the top of an edifice, we must be content to advance step by step, otherwise we shall never be able to attain it.

The eye is one of the fastest organs, taking in a vast array of shapes in a single glance; however, it can only fully understand one object at a time. For instance, when the reader looks at this page, they instantly see it filled with different letters; yet they can’t simultaneously identify each letter, let alone understand their meaning. They need to read it word by word, and line by line, if they want to get a clear idea of these characters. Similarly, if we want to reach the top of a building, we have to move up step by step, or we’ll never get there.

A young man, who has a natural inclination to the study of this art, I would advise to act thus: In order to acquire a true notion of the form of things, he must begin by studying the parts which compose them, and not pass to a second till he has[Pg 3] well stored his memory, and sufficiently practised the first; otherwise he loses his time, and will most certainly protract his studies. And let him remember to acquire accuracy before he attempts quickness.

A young man who naturally wants to study this art should consider the following: To truly understand the form of things, he should start by studying the parts that make them up. He shouldn't move on to the next part until he has[Pg 3] thoroughly memorized and practiced the first one. Otherwise, he’ll waste time and likely drag out his studies. And he should keep in mind that gaining accuracy is more important than trying to be fast.

Chap. 3.How to discover a young Man’s Disposition for Painting.

Many are very desirous of learning to draw, and are very fond of it, who are, notwithstanding, void of a proper disposition for it. This may be known by their want of perseverance; like boys, who draw every thing in a hurry, never finishing, or shadowing.

Many people are eager to learn how to draw and really enjoy it, but they often lack the right attitude for it. You can tell by their lack of persistence; they’re like kids who rush to draw everything, never actually finishing or shading anything.

Chapter 4.Of Painting, and its Divisions.

Painting is divided into two principal parts. The first is the figure, that is, the lines which distinguish the forms of bodies, and their component parts. The second is the colour contained within those limits.

Art is divided into two main parts. The first is the figure, which refers to the lines that define the shapes of bodies and their individual parts. The second is the color that fills those shapes.

Chapter 5.Division of the Figure.

The form of bodies is divided into two parts; that is, the proportion of the members to each other, which must correspond with the whole; and the motion, expressive of what passes in the mind of the living figure.

The shape of bodies is split into two parts: first, the proportion of the body parts to one another, which must match the whole; and second, the movement that reflects what is happening in the mind of the living being.

Chap. 6.Proportion of Members.

The proportion of members is again divided into two parts, viz. equality, and motion. By equality is meant (besides the measure corresponding with the[Pg 4] whole), that you do not confound the members of a young subject with those of old age, nor plump ones with those that are lean; and that, moreover, you do not blend the robust and firm muscles of man with feminine softness: that the attitudes and motions of old age be not expressed with the quickness and alacrity of youth; nor those of a female figure like those of a vigorous young man. The motions and members of a strong man should be such as to express his perfect state of health.

The proportion of members is once again divided into two parts: equality and motion. By equality, it is meant (in addition to the measure that corresponds with the[Pg 4] whole) that you do not confuse the features of a young person with those of an older individual, nor the plump ones with the slender; furthermore, you should not mix the strong and firm muscles of a man with the softness typical of femininity. The postures and movements of old age should not be depicted with the speed and energy of youth, nor should a female figure's movements resemble those of a vigorous young man. The movements and physique of a strong man should convey his optimal state of health.

Chap. 7.Of Dimensions in general.

In general, the dimensions of the human body are to be considered in the length, and not in the breadth; because in the wonderful works of Nature, which we endeavour to imitate, we cannot in any species find any one part in one model precisely similar to the same part in another. Let us be attentive, therefore, to the variation of forms, and avoid all monstrosities of proportion; such as long legs united to short bodies, and narrow chests with long arms. Observe also attentively the measure of joints, in which Nature is apt to vary considerably; and imitate her example by doing the same.

In general, the proportions of the human body should be considered in terms of length rather than width. This is because in the amazing creations of Nature, which we try to replicate, we can't find any part in one model that is exactly the same as that part in another. So, let’s pay close attention to the variations in shapes and steer clear of any strange proportions, like long legs attached to short torsos, or narrow chests paired with long arms. Also, notice carefully the size of the joints, which can vary greatly in Nature, and follow her lead by doing the same.

Ch. 8.Motion, Changes, and Proportion of Members.

The measures of the human body vary in each member, according as it is more or less bent, or seen in different views, increasing on one side as much as they diminish on the other.

The dimensions of the human body differ in each part, depending on how it is bent or viewed from different angles, increasing on one side while decreasing on the other.

Chap. 9.The Difference of Proportion between Children and grown Men.

In men and children I find a great difference between the joints of the one and the other in the length of the bones. A man has the length of two heads from the extremity of one shoulder to the other, the same from the shoulder to the elbow, and from the elbow to the fingers; but the child has only one, because Nature gives the proper size first to the seat of the intellect, and afterwards to the other parts.

In men and children, I notice a significant difference in the length of their bones. A man measures two head lengths from the tip of one shoulder to the other, and the same goes for the distance from the shoulder to the elbow and from the elbow to the fingers; however, a child measures only one head length, because Nature prioritizes the proper size for the seat of intelligence first, and then for the other parts.

Chap. 10.The Alterations in the Proportion of the human Body from Infancy to full Age.

A man, in his infancy, has the breadth of his shoulders equal to the length of the face, and to the length of the arm from the shoulder to the elbow, when the arm is bent [2]. It is the same again from the lower belly to the knee, and from the knee to the foot. But, when a man is arrived at the period of his full growth, every one of these dimensions becomes double in length, except the face, which, with the top of the head, undergoes but very little alteration in length. A well-proportioned and full-grown man, therefore, is ten times the length of his face; the breadth of his shoulders will be two faces, and in like manner all the above lengths will be double. The rest will[Pg 6] be explained in the general measurement of the human body[3].

A guy in his early years has shoulder width equal to the length of his face and the length of his arm from shoulder to elbow when the arm is bent[2]. This also applies from the lower belly to the knee and from the knee to the foot. However, once a man reaches adulthood, each of these dimensions doubles in length, except for the face, which, along with the top of the head, changes very little in length. A well-proportioned adult man is therefore ten times the length of his face; his shoulder width will be twice the length of his face, and similarly, all the previous lengths will be doubled. The rest will[Pg 6] be clarified in the general measurement of the human body[3].

Chap. 11.Of the Proportion of Members.

All the parts of any animal whatever must be correspondent with the whole. So that, if the body be short and thick, all the members belonging to it must be the same. One that is long and thin must have its parts of the same kind; and so of the middle size. Something of the same may be observed in plants, when uninjured by men or tempests; for when thus injured they bud and grow again, making young shoots from old plants, and by those means destroying their natural symmetry.

All parts of any animal must match the whole. So, if the body is short and thick, all its limbs should reflect that. An animal that is long and thin must have its parts be similar; the same goes for those of average size. A similar observation can be made for plants when they're undamaged by humans or storms; however, when they are harmed, they sprout and grow again, producing new shoots from old plants, which disrupts their natural symmetry.

Chap. 12.That every Part be proportioned to its Whole.

If a man be short and thick, be careful that all his members be of the same nature, viz. short arms and thick, large hands, short fingers, with broad joints; and so of the rest.

If a man is short and stocky, make sure all his features are consistent, like short, thick arms, large hands, short fingers, and broad joints; and the same goes for the rest of him.

Chap. 13.Of the Proportion of the Members.

Measure upon yourself the proportion of the parts, and, if you find any of them defective, note it down, and be very careful to avoid it in drawing your own compositions. For this is reckoned a common fault in painters, to delight in the imitation of themselves.

Measure yourself against the proportions of the parts, and if you find any of them lacking, make a note of it and be very careful to avoid it in your own artwork. This is considered a common mistake among painters, to take pleasure in imitating their own style.

Chap. 14.The Danger of forming an erroneous Judgment in regard to the Proportion and Beauty of the Parts.

If the painter has clumsy hands, he will be apt to introduce them into his works, and so of any other part of his person, which may not happen to be so beautiful as it ought to be. He must, therefore, guard particularly against that self-love, or too good opinion of his own person, and study by every means to acquire the knowledge of what is most beautiful, and of his own defects, that he may adopt the one and avoid the other.

If the artist has awkward hands, they’re likely to show up in their work, just like any other part of themselves that might not be as beautiful as it should be. They must, therefore, be especially careful of vanity or an overly positive view of their own appearance and strive in every way to understand what is truly beautiful and recognize their own flaws so they can embrace the former and steer clear of the latter.

Chap. 15.Another Precept.

The young painter must, in the first instance, accustom his hand to copying the drawings of good masters; and when his hand is thus formed, and ready, he should, with the advice of his director, use himself also to draw from relievos; according to the rules we shall point out in the treatise on drawing from relievos [4].

The young painter should first get his hand used to copying the works of great masters; once his hand is well-trained and prepared, he should, with the guidance of his instructor, practice drawing from reliefs, following the guidelines we will outline in the treatise on drawing from reliefs [4].

Chapter 16.The Manner of drawing from Relievos, and rendering Paper fit for it.

When you draw from relievos, tinge your paper of some darkish demi-tint. And after you have made your outline, put in the darkest shadows, and, last of all, the principal lights, but sparingly, especially the smaller ones; because those are easily lost to the eye at a very moderate distance[5].

When you work from reliefs, tint your paper with a darkish shade. After you create your outline, add the darkest shadows, and finally, include the main highlights, but use them sparingly, especially the smaller ones; because they can easily be overlooked from a short distance.[5].

Chap. 17.Of drawing from Casts or Nature.

In drawing from relievo, the draftsman must place himself in such a manner, as that the eye of the figure to be drawn be level with his own[6].

In drawing from relief, the artist must position themselves so that the eye of the figure being drawn is at the same level as their own[6].

Chap. 18.To draw Figures from Nature.

Accustom yourself to hold a plummet in your hand, that you may judge of the bearing of the parts.

Get accustomed to holding a plumb line in your hand, so you can assess the alignment of the pieces.

Chap. 19.Of drawing from Nature.

When you draw from Nature, you must be at the distance of three times the height of the object; and when you begin to draw, form in your own mind a certain principal line (suppose a perpendicular); observe well the bearing of the parts towards that line; whether they intersect, are parallel to it, or oblique.

When you draw from Nature, you should be three times the height of the object away; and as you start to draw, create a main line in your mind (let’s say a vertical line); carefully observe how the parts relate to that line, whether they cross it, run parallel to it, or are at an angle.

Chap. 20.Of drawing Academy Figures.

When you draw from a naked model, always sketch in the whole of the figure, suiting all the members well to each other; and though you finish only that part which appears the best, have a regard to the rest, that, whenever you make use of such studies, all the parts may hang together.

When you draw from a nude model, always sketch the entire figure, making sure all the body parts fit together well; and even if you only finish the part that looks the best, pay attention to the rest so that whenever you use those studies, all the parts will connect seamlessly.

In composing your attitudes, take care not to turn the head on the same side as the breast, nor let the arm go in a line with the leg[7]. If the head turn towards the right shoulder, the parts must be lower on the left side than on the other; but if the chest come forward, and the head turn towards the left, the parts on the right side are to be the highest.

In creating your poses, make sure not to tilt your head in the same direction as your chest, and don’t let your arm line up with your leg[7]. If your head turns toward your right shoulder, the features on the left side should be lower than those on the right; but if your chest leans forward and your head turns to the left, the features on the right side should be higher.

Chap. 21.Of studying in the Dark, on first waking in the Morning, and before going to sleep.

I have experienced no small benefit, when in the dark and in bed, by retracing in my mind the outlines of those forms which I had previously studied, particularly such as had appeared the most difficult to comprehend and retain; by this method they will be confirmed and treasured up in the memory.

I’ve got gained quite a bit from going over in my mind the shapes I've studied, especially the ones that were the hardest to understand and remember, while lying in bed in the dark. This way, they will be reinforced and stored in my memory.

Chap. 22.Observations on drawing Portraits.

The cartilage, which raises the nose in the middle of the face, varies in eight different ways. It is equally straight, equally concave, or equally convex, which is the first sort. Or, secondly, unequally straight, concave, or convex. Or, thirdly, straight in the upper part, and concave in the under. Or, fourthly, straight again in the upper part, and convex in those below. Or, fifthly, it may be concave and straight beneath. Or, sixthly, concave above, and convex below. Or, seventhly, it may be convex in the upper part, and straight in the lower. And in the eighth and last place, convex above, and concave beneath.

The cartilage that lifts the nose in the center of the face can take on eight different shapes. It can be perfectly straight, perfectly concave, or perfectly convex, which is the first type. Secondly, it can be unevenly straight, concave, or convex. Thirdly, it can be straight at the top and concave at the bottom. Fourthly, it can be straight at the top and convex below. Fifthly, it might be concave above and straight below. Sixthly, it can be concave on top and convex underneath. Seventhly, it might be convex on top and straight at the bottom. Lastly, in the eighth type, it can be convex above and concave below.

The uniting of the nose with the brows is in two ways, either it is straight or concave. The forehead has three different forms. It is straight, concave, or round. The first is divided into two parts, viz. it is either convex in the upper part, or in the lower, sometimes both; or else flat above and below.

The connection between the nose and the brows can occur in two ways: either it is straight or concave. The forehead has three different shapes: it can be straight, concave, or rounded. The straight forehead is further divided into two types; it can be convex at the top, at the bottom, sometimes both, or it can be flat at both the top and bottom.

Chap. 23.The Method of retaining in the Memory the Likeness of a Man, so as to draw his Profile, after having seen him only once.

You must observe and remember well the variations of the four principal features in the profile; the nose, mouth, chin, and forehead. And first of the nose, of which there are three different sorts[8], straight, concave, and convex. Of the straight there are but four variations, short or long, high at the end, or low. Of the concave there are three sorts; some have the concavity above, some in the middle, and some at the end. The convex noses also vary three ways; some project in the upper part, some in the middle, and others at the bottom. Nature, which seems to delight in infinite variety, gives again three changes to those noses which have a projection in the middle; for some have it straight, some concave, and some convex.

You need to closely observe and remember the variations of the four main features in the profile: the nose, mouth, chin, and forehead. First, let's talk about the nose, which comes in three different types[8]: straight, concave, and convex. For straight noses, there are four variations: short or long, high at the tip, or low. Concave noses have three types; some curve in at the top, some in the middle, and some at the tip. Convex noses also vary in three ways; some protrude at the top, some in the middle, and others at the bottom. Nature, which seems to enjoy endless variety, also shows three different forms for noses that project in the middle; some are straight, some concave, and some convex.

Chap. 24.How to remember the Form of a Face.

If you wish to retain with facility the general look of a face, you must first learn how to draw well several faces, mouths, eyes, noses, chins, throats, necks, and shoulders; in short, all those principal parts which distinguish one man from another. For instance, noses are often different sorts[9]. Straight,[Pg 12] bunched, concave, some raised above, some below the middle, aquiline, flat, round, and sharp. These affect the profile. In the front view there are eleven different sorts. Even, thick in the middle, thin in the middle, thick at the tip, thin at the beginning, thin at the tip, and thick at the beginning. Broad, narrow, high, and low nostrils; some with a large opening, and some more shut towards the tip.

If you want to easily capture the overall appearance of a face, you need to start by learning how to draw multiple faces, including mouths, eyes, noses, chins, throats, necks, and shoulders; in other words, all those main features that set one person apart from another. For example, noses come in various types[9]. They can be straight, bunched, concave, some raised above, some below the middle, aquiline, flat, round, or sharp. These variations affect the profile. In a frontal view, there are eleven different types. They can be even, thick in the middle, thin in the middle, thick at the tip, thin at the beginning, thin at the tip, and thick at the start. Nostrils can be broad, narrow, high, or low; some have a large opening, while others are more pinched towards the tip.

The same variety will be found in the other parts of the face, which must be drawn from Nature, and retained in the memory. Or else, when you mean to draw a likeness from memory, take with you a pocket-book, in which you have marked all these variations of features, and after having given a look at the face you mean to draw, retire a little aside, and note down in your book which of the features are similar to it; that you may put it all together at home.

The same variety can be found in other parts of the face, which should be observed in nature and remembered. If you want to draw a likeness from memory, carry a notebook where you have noted all these different features. After you’ve taken a good look at the face you want to draw, step aside a bit and jot down in your notebook which features are similar; this way, you can put it all together when you're back home.

Chap. 25.That a Painter should take Pleasure in the Opinion of every body.

A painter ought not certainly to refuse listening to the opinion of any one; for we know that, although a man be not a painter, he may have just notions of the forms of men; whether a man has a hump on his back, a thick leg, or a large hand; whether he be lame, or have any other defect. Now, if we know that men are able to judge of the works of Nature, should we not think them more able to detect our errors?

An artist should definitely be open to hearing what others think; because we know that even if someone isn’t a painter, they can have valid opinions about how people look, whether it's a person with a hunchback, thick legs, or large hands; whether they’re limping or have any other flaws. Since we know that people can judge the works of Nature, shouldn’t we believe they can spot our mistakes even better?


ANATOMY.

Chap. 26.What is principally to be observed in Figures.

The principal and most important consideration required in drawing figures, is to set the head well upon the shoulders, the chest upon the hips, the hips and shoulders upon the feet.

The main and most important thing to keep in mind when drawing figures is to position the head properly on the shoulders, the chest on the hips, and the hips and shoulders on the feet.

Chap. 27.Mode of Studying.

Study the science first, and then follow the practice which results from that science. Pursue method in your study, and do not quit one part till it be perfectly engraven in the memory; and observe what difference there is between the members of animals and their joints[10].

Study the science first, and then apply the practices that come from that science. Follow a method in your studies, and don’t move on from one section until it’s fully memorized; also, take note of the differences between the parts of animals and their joints[10].

Ch. 28.Of being universal.

It is an easy matter for a man who is well versed in the principles of his art, to become universal in the practice of it, since all animals have a similarity of members, that is, muscles, tendons, bones, &c. These only vary in length or thickness, as will be demonstrated in the Anatomy[11]. As for aquatic animals, [Pg 14] of which there is great variety, I shall not persuade the painter to take them as a rule, having no connexion with our purpose.

It is easy for someone who knows the principles of their craft to become skilled in applying it universally, since all animals share similar body structures, like muscles, tendons, and bones. These only differ in size or thickness, as will be shown in the Anatomy[11]. As for aquatic animals, [Pg 14] which come in many varieties, I won't encourage the artist to use them as a standard, as they are unrelated to our aims.

Chap. 29.A Precept for the Painter.

It reflects no great honour on a painter to be able to execute only one thing well, such as a head, an academy figure, or draperies, animals, landscape, or the like, confining himself to some particular object of study; because there is scarcely a person so void of genius as to fail of success, if he apply earnestly to one branch of study, and practise it continually.

It doesn’t reflect well on a painter if they can only do one thing well, like a portrait, a figure from a class, drapery, animals, landscapes, or something similar, limiting themselves to just one area of focus. Almost anyone with some talent can succeed if they dedicate themselves to one field of study and keep practicing it.

Chap. 30.Of the Measures of the human Body, and the bending of Members.

It is very necessary that painters should have a knowledge of the bones which support the flesh by which they are covered, but particularly of the joints, which increase and diminish the length of them in their appearance. As in the arm, which does not measure the same when bent, as when extended; its difference between the greatest extension and bending, is about one eighth of its length. The increase and diminution of the arm is effected by the bone projecting out of its socket at the elbow; which, as [Pg 15] is seen in figure A B, Plate I. is lengthened from the shoulder to the elbow; the angle it forms being less than a right angle. It will appear longer as that angle becomes more acute, and will shorten in proportion as it becomes more open or obtuse.

It is essential for painters to understand the bones that support the flesh they depict, especially the joints, which affect their length visually. For example, the arm doesn't measure the same when bent as it does when extended; the difference between its longest extension and its bent state is about one-eighth of its length. The change in the arm's size occurs because the bone protrudes from its socket at the elbow; as shown in [Pg 15] in figure A B, Plate I, the bone extends from the shoulder to the elbow, creating an angle that is less than a right angle. It appears longer when that angle becomes sharper, and it shortens as the angle opens up or becomes obtuse.

Plate 1

Plate 1.

Image 1.

London, Published by J. Taylor High Holborn.

London, published by J. Taylor, High Holborn.

Ch. 31.Of the small Bones in several Joints of the human Body.

There are in the joints of the human body certain small bones, fixed in the middle of the tendons which connect several of the joints. Such are the patellas of the knees, and the joints of the shoulders, and those of the feet. They are eight in number, one at each shoulder, one at each knee, and two at each foot under the first joint of the great toe towards the heel. These grow extremely hard as a man advances in years.

There are small bones in the joints of the human body, located in the middle of the tendons that connect several joints. These include the kneecaps, the shoulder joints, and those in the feet. There are eight in total: one at each shoulder, one at each knee, and two at each foot under the first joint of the big toe toward the heel. These bones become very hard as a person gets older.

Chap. 32.Memorandum to be observed by the Painter.

Note down which muscles and tendons are brought into action by the motion of any member, and when they are hidden. Remember that these remarks are of the greatest importance to painters and sculptors, who profess to study anatomy, and the science of the muscles. Do the same with children, following the different gradations of age from their birth even to decrepitude, describing the changes which the members, and particularly the joints, undergo; which of them grow fat, and which lean.

Note which muscles and tendons are engaged when any part of the body moves, and when they aren't visible. Keep in mind that these observations are very important for painters and sculptors who aim to understand anatomy and the science of muscles. Do the same with children, tracking the different stages of growth from birth to old age, and describe the changes that the body parts, especially the joints, go through; which ones become fat and which ones become lean.

Chap. 33.The Shoulders.

The joints of the shoulders, and other parts which bend, shall be noticed in their places in the Treatise on Anatomy, where the cause of the motions of all the parts which compose the human body shall be explained[12].

The shoulder joints and other bending parts will be discussed in the Treatise on Anatomy, where the reasons for the movements of all the parts that make up the human body will be explained[12].

Chap. 34.The Difference of Joints between Children and grown Men.

Young children have all their joints small, but they are thick and plump in the spaces between them; because there is nothing upon the bones at the joints, but some tendons to bind the bones together. The soft flesh, which is full of fluids, is enclosed under the skin in the space between the joints; and as the bones are bigger at the joints than in the space between them, the skin throws off in the progress to manhood that superfluity, and draws nearer to the bones, thinning the whole part together. But upon the joints it does not lessen, as there is nothing but cartilages and tendons. For these reasons children are small in the joints, and plump in the space between, as may be observed in their fingers, arms, and narrow shoulders. Men, on the contrary, are large and full in the joints, in the arms and legs; and where children have hollows, men are knotty and prominent.

Youth children have small joints, but they are thick and plump in the areas between them because there’s nothing on the bones at the joints except some tendons that hold the bones together. The soft flesh, filled with fluids, is enclosed under the skin in the spaces between the joints, and since the bones are larger at the joints than in the spaces between them, the skin sheds that excess as they grow into adults, tightening around the bones. However, it doesn’t thin out at the joints since there’s only cartilage and tendons there. For these reasons, children have small joints and are plump in the areas between, which can be seen in their fingers, arms, and narrow shoulders. In contrast, men have larger and fuller joints, arms, and legs; where children have hollows, men have knobby and prominent areas.

Chap. 35.Of the Joints of the Fingers.

The joints of the fingers appear larger on all sides when they bend; the more they bend the larger they appear. The contrary is the case when straight. It is the same in the toes, and it will be more perceptible in proportion to their fleshiness.

The joints of the fingers look bigger on all sides when they bend; the more they bend, the larger they seem. The opposite happens when they are straight. The same goes for the toes, and this effect will be more noticeable depending on how fleshy they are.

Chap. 36.Of the Joint of the Wrist.

The wrist or joint between the hand and arm lessens on closing the hand, and grows larger when it opens. The contrary happens in the arm, in the space between the elbow and the hand, on all sides; because in opening the hand the muscles are extended and thinned in the arm, from the elbow to the wrist; but when the hand is shut, the same muscles swell and shorten. The tendons alone start, being stretched by the clenching of the hand.

The wrist or joint between the hand and arm shrinks when you close your hand and gets bigger when you open it. The opposite occurs in the arm, in the area between the elbow and the hand, on all sides; because when you open your hand, the muscles are stretched and thinned in the arm, from the elbow to the wrist; but when your hand is closed, those same muscles swell and shorten. Only the tendons start to stretch, getting pulled tight as you clench your hand.

Chap. 37.Of the Joint of the Foot.

The increase and diminution in the joint of the foot is produced on that side where the tendons are seen, as D E F, Plate I. which increases when the angle is acute, and diminishes when it becomes obtuse. It must be understood of the joint in the front part of the foot A B C.

The increase and decrease in the foot joint happens on the side where the tendons are visible, as shown in D E F, Plate I. This increase occurs when the angle is sharp, and it decreases when the angle becomes wide. It should be noted that this refers to the joint in the front part of the foot A B C.

Chap. 38.Of the Knee.

Of all the members which have pliable joints, the knee is the only one that lessens in the bending, and becomes larger by extension.

Of all the joints that are flexible, the knee is the only one that decreases when it bends and gets larger when it straightens.

Chap. 39.Of the Joints.

All the joints of the human body become larger by bending, except that of the leg.

All the joints of the human body get bigger when bent, except for the knee.

Chap. 40.Of the Naked.

When a figure is to appear nimble and delicate, its muscles must never be too much marked, nor are any of them to be much swelled. Because such figures are expressive of activity and swiftness, and are never loaded with much flesh upon the bones. They are made light by the want of flesh, and where there is but little flesh there cannot be any thickness of muscles.

When a figure is meant to look quick and graceful, its muscles should never be overly defined, nor should they appear too big. This is because such figures represent movement and speed, and they don’t have a lot of flesh on their bones. They look light due to the lack of flesh, and where there is little flesh, there can’t be a lot of muscle thickness.

Chap. 41.Of the Thickness of the Muscles.

Muscular men have large bones, and are in general thick and short, with very little fat; because the fleshy muscles in their growth contract closer together, and the fat, which in other instances lodges between them, has no room. The muscles in such thin subjects, not being able to extend, grow in thickness, particularly towards their middle, in the parts most removed from the extremities.

Muscular men have big bones and are generally stocky and short, with very little body fat; this is because their fleshy muscles grow closer together, leaving no space for fat, which usually accumulates between them. In thinner individuals, the muscles can’t stretch out, so they grow thicker, especially in the middle sections, farthest from the extremities.

Chap. 42.Fat Subjects have small Muscles.

Though fat people have this in common with muscular men, that they are frequently short and thick, they have thin muscles; but their skin contains a great deal of spongy and soft flesh full of air; [Pg 19] for that reason they are lighter upon the water, and swim better than muscular people.

While overweight individuals share some similarities with muscular men, such as often being short and stout, they have less muscle tone; however, their skin is filled with soft, spongy flesh that has a lot of air in it; [Pg 19] for this reason, they tend to be lighter in water and swim better than muscular individuals.

Chap. 43.Which of the Muscles disappear in the different Motions of the Body.

In raising or lowering the arm, the pectoral muscles disappear, or acquire a greater relievo. A similar effect is produced by the hips, when they bend either inwards or outwards. It is to be observed, that there is more variety of appearances in the shoulders, hips, and neck, than in any other joint, because they are susceptible of the greatest variety of motions. But of this subject I shall make a separate treatise [13].

In raising or lowering the arm, the pectoral muscles either disappear or become more pronounced. A similar effect happens with the hips when they bend inwards or outwards. It's important to note that there is more variety in the appearance of the shoulders, hips, and neck than in any other joint because they can move in so many different ways. I will discuss this topic in a separate treatise [13].

Chap. 44.Of the Muscles.

The muscles are not to be scrupulously marked all the way, because it would be disagreeable to the sight, and of very difficult execution. But on that side only where the members are in action, they should be pronounced more strongly; for muscles that are at work naturally collect all their parts together, to gain increase of strength, so that some small parts of those muscles will appear, that were not seen before.

The muscles don’t need to be outlined in detail all the way, as it would look unpleasant and be really difficult to do. Instead, they should be more defined only where the body parts are moving; when muscles are working, they naturally tighten and come together to increase strength, making some smaller parts of those muscles visible that weren’t noticeable before.

Chap. 45.Of the Muscles.

The muscles of young men are not to be marked strongly, nor too much swelled, because that would indicate full strength and vigour of age, which they have not yet attained. Nevertheless they must be more or less expressed, as they are more or less employed. For those which are in motion are always more swelled and thicker than those which remain at rest. The intrinsic and central line of the members which are bent, never retains its natural length.

The muscles of young men shouldn't be too defined or overly developed, as that would suggest they possess the full strength and vitality of adulthood, which they haven't reached yet. Still, their muscles should be somewhat visible, depending on how much they are used. Muscles that are active appear more developed and thicker than those that are not. The natural length of the central line of the bent limbs never stays the same.

Chap. 46.The Extension and Contraction of the Muscles.

The muscle at the back part of the thigh shows more variety in its extension and contraction, than any other in the human body; the second, in that respect, are those which compose the buttocks; the third, those of the back; the fourth, those of the neck; the fifth, those of the shoulders; and the sixth, those of the Abdomen, which, taking their rise under the breast, terminate under the lower belly; as I shall explain when I speak of each.

The muscle at the back of the thigh has more variation in its stretching and contracting than any other muscle in the human body. The second most variable are the muscles in the buttocks, followed by the muscles in the back, the neck, the shoulders, and finally, those in the abdomen. The abdominal muscles start just below the chest and end below the lower belly, which I will explain when I discuss each group in detail.

Chap. 47.Of the Muscle between the Chest and the lower Belly.

There is a muscle which begins under the breast at the Sternum, and is inserted into, or terminates at the Os pubis, under the lower belly. It is called the Rectus of the Abdomen; it is divided, lengthways, [Pg 21] into three principal portions, by transverse tendinous intersections or ligaments, viz. the superior part, and a ligament; the second part, with its ligaments; and the third part, with the third ligament; which last unites by tendons to the Os pubis. These divisions and intersections of the same muscle are intended by nature to facilitate the motion when the body is bent or distended. If it were made of one piece, it would produce too much variety when extended, or contracted, and also would be considerably weaker. When this muscle has but little variety in the motion of the body, it is more beautiful [14].

There is a muscle that starts underneath the breast at the sternum and connects to the pubic bone, below the lower abdomen. It's called the rectus abdominis; it's divided lengthwise [Pg 21] into three main sections by horizontal tendinous intersections or ligaments: the upper part, with one ligament; the middle part, which has its own ligaments; and the lower part, with a third ligament that connects to the pubic bone. These divisions and intersections of the same muscle are designed by nature to make movement easier when the body bends or stretches. If it were a single piece, it would cause too much variation when extended or contracted and would also be significantly weaker. When this muscle has less variation in body movement, it looks better. [14].

Chap. 48.Of a Man’s complex Strength, but first of the Arm.

The muscles which serve either to straighten or bend the arm, arise from the different processes of the Scapula; some of them from the protuberances of the Humerus, and others about the middle of the Os humeri. The extensors of the arm arise from behind, and the flexors from before.

The muscles that either straighten or bend the arm come from different parts of the shoulder blade; some originate from the bumps on the upper arm bone, while others are located around the middle of the upper arm bone. The muscles that extend the arm come from the back, and the ones that flex it come from the front.

That a man has more power in pulling than in pushing, has been proved by the ninth proposition De Ponderibus[15], where it is said, that of two equal[Pg 22] weights, that will have the greatest power which is farthest removed from the pole or centre of its balance. It follows then of course, that the muscle N B, Plate II. and the muscle N C, being of equal power, the inner muscle N C, will nevertheless be stronger than the outward one N B, because it is inserted into the arm at C, a point farther removed from the centre of the elbow A, than B, which is on the other side of such centre, so that that question is determined. But this is a simple power, and I thought it best to explain it before I mentioned the complex power of the muscles, of which I must now take notice. The complex power, or strength, is, for instance, this, when the arm is going to act, a second power is added to it (such as the weight of the body and the strength of the legs, in pulling or pushing), consisting in the extension of the parts, as when two men attempt to throw down a column; the one by pushing, and the other by pulling[16].

That a man has more power when pulling than when pushing has been proven by the ninth proposition of De Ponderibus[15], which states that of two equal[Pg 22] weights, the one that is farthest from the pole or center of balance will have the greatest power. Therefore, since the muscle N B, Plate II. and the muscle N C generate equal force, the inner muscle N C will be stronger than the outer muscle N B because it connects to the arm at C, which is further from the elbow's center A than B, located on the opposite side of that center. This resolves the question. However, this is a simple power, and I thought it best to explain it before addressing the complex power of the muscles, which I now need to discuss. Complex power, or strength, for example, occurs when the arm is about to act and a second force is added (such as the weight of the body and the strength of the legs when pulling or pushing), which involves the extension of the limbs, like when two men try to topple a column—one by pushing and the other by pulling[16].

Chap. 49.In which of the two Actions, Pulling or Pushing, a Man has the greatest Power, Plate II.

A man has the greatest power in pulling, for in that action he has the united exertion of all the muscles of the arm, while some of them must be inactive when he is pushing; because when the arm is extended for that purpose, the muscles which move the elbow cannot act, any more than if he pushed with his shoulders against the column he means to throw down; in which case only the muscles that extend the back, the legs under the thigh, and the calves of the legs, would be active. From which we conclude, that in pulling there is added to the power of extension the strength of the arms, of the legs, of the back, and even of the chest, if the oblique motion of the body require it. But in pushing, though all the parts were employed, yet the strength of the muscles of the arms is wanting; for to push with an extended arm without motion does not help more than if a piece of wood were placed from the shoulder to the column meant to be pushed down.

A guy has the greatest power when pulling because that action engages all the muscles in his arm at once. In contrast, when he's pushing, some muscles have to stay inactive. For example, when he extends his arm to push, the muscles that bend the elbow can't work, just like when he pushes against a column he wants to knock over. In that case, only the muscles in his back, thighs, and calves are active. This leads us to conclude that pulling combines the strength of the arms, legs, back, and even the chest if the body needs to move at an angle. However, when pushing, even though all parts are used, the strength of the arm muscles is missing; pushing with an extended arm, without movement, is no more effective than if a piece of wood were placed from the shoulder to the column intended to be pushed down.

Plate 2

Plate 2.

Plate 2.

London, Published by J. Taylor High Holborn.

London, Published by J. Taylor High Holborn.

Chap. 50.Of the bending of Members, and of the Flesh round the bending Joint.

The flesh which covers the bones near and at the joints, swells or diminishes in thickness according to their bending or extension; that is, it increases at the inside of the angle formed by the bending, and grows narrow and lengthened on the outward side of the exterior angle. The middle between the convex and concave angle participates of this increase or diminution, but in a greater or less degree as the parts are nearer to, or farther from, the angles of the bending joints.

The flesh that covers the bones near and at the joints thickens or thins based on whether the joints are bent or extended; it becomes thicker on the inside of the angle created by the bend and narrows and stretches on the outer side of the exterior angle. The area between the convex and concave angles also sees changes in thickness, but this varies in degree depending on how close or far the parts are from the angles of the bending joints.

Chap. 51.Of the naked Body.

The members of naked men who work hard in different attitudes, will shew the muscles more strongly on that side where they act forcibly to bring the part into action; and the other muscles will be [Pg 24] more or less marked, in proportion as they co-operate in the same motion.

The members of naked men who work hard in different positions will show their muscles more prominently on the side where they exert themselves to make that part move; and the other muscles will be [Pg 24] more or less defined, depending on how much they assist in the same movement.

Chap. 52.Of a Ligament without Muscles.

Where the arm joins with the hand, there is a ligament, the largest in the human body, which is without muscles, and is called the strong ligament of the Carpus; it has a square shape, and serves to bind and keep close together the bones of the arm, and the tendons of the fingers, and prevent their dilating, or starting out.

Where? the arm connects to the hand, there's a ligament, the largest in the human body, that has no muscles and is known as the strong ligament of the Carpus. It has a square shape and functions to hold the bones of the arm and the tendons of the fingers tightly together, preventing them from stretching or coming apart.

Chap. 53.Of Creases.

In bending the joints the flesh will always form a crease on the opposite side to that where it is tight.

In bending the joints, the skin will always create a fold on the opposite side from where it's tight.

Chap. 54.How near behind the Back one Arm can be brought to the other, Plate III. and IV.

When the arms are carried behind the back, the elbows can never be brought nearer than the length from the elbow to the end of the longest finger; so that the fingers will not be seen beyond the elbows, and in that situation, the arms with the shoulders form a perfect square. The greatest extension of the arm across the chest is, when the elbow comes over the pit of the stomach; the elbow and the shoulder in this position, will form an equilateral triangle.

When the arms are held behind the back, the elbows can never come closer than the distance from the elbow to the tip of the longest finger; so the fingers won't be visible past the elbows, and in that position, the arms and shoulders create a perfect square. The maximum stretch of the arm across the chest happens when the elbow is positioned over the stomach; in this position, the elbow and shoulder will form an equilateral triangle.

Chap. 55.Of the Muscles.

A naked figure being strongly marked, so as to give a distinct view of all the muscles, will not express any motion; because it cannot move, if some of its muscles do not relax while the others are pulling. Those which relax cease to appear in proportion as the others pull strongly and become apparent.

Naked figure that is clearly defined, so as to show all the muscles, will not convey any motion; because it cannot move if some of its muscles don’t relax while the others contract. The muscles that relax stop being visible as the others contract strongly and become more prominent.

Plate 3

Plate 3.

Plate 3.

London, Published by J. Taylor High Holborn.

London, published by J. Taylor, High Holborn.

Plate 4

Plate 4.

Plate 4.

London, Published by J. Taylor High Holborn.

London, published by J. Taylor, High Holborn.

Chap. 56.Of the Muscles.

The muscles of the human body are to be more or less marked according to their degree of action. Those only which act are to be shewn, and the more forcibly they act, the stronger they should be pronounced. Those that do not act at all must remain soft and flat.

The muscles of the human body are more or less defined based on how actively they function. Only the muscles that are in use should be shown, and the stronger they work, the more prominently they should be displayed. Muscles that don't engage should remain soft and flat.

Chap. 57.Of the Bending of the Body.

The bodies of men diminish as much on the side which bends, as they increase on the opposite side. That diminution may at last become double, in proportion to the extension on the other side. But of this I shall make a separate treatise [17].

The bodies of men shrink on the side that bends just as much as they grow on the other side. That shrinkage can eventually become double compared to the expansion on the opposite side. But I will write a separate treatise on this [17].

Chap. 58.The same Subject.

The body which bends, lengthens as much on one side as it shortens on the other; but the central line between them will never lessen or increase.

The body that bends stretches as much on one side as it shortens on the other; however, the central line between them will never change in length.

Chap. 59.The Necessity of anatomical Knowledge.

The painter who has obtained a perfect knowledge of the nature of the tendons and muscles, and of those parts which contain the most of them, will know to a certainty, in giving a particular motion to any part of the body, which, and how many of the muscles give rise and contribute to it; which of them, by swelling, occasion their shortening, and which of the cartilages they surround.

The painter who has a complete understanding of the tendons and muscles, as well as the areas that have the most of them, will definitely know which muscles are involved and how many of them contribute to a specific movement of any part of the body; which muscles cause shortening by swelling, and which cartilages they surround.

He will not imitate those who, in all the different attitudes they adopt, or invent, make use of the same muscles, in the arms, back, or chest, or any other parts.

He won’t copy those who, in all the various positions they take on or create, use the same muscles in their arms, back, chest, or any other areas.


MOTION AND EQUIPOISE OF FIGURES.

Chap. 60.Of the Equipoise of a Figure standing still.

The non-existence of motion in any animal resting on its feet, is owing to the equality of weight distributed on each side of the line of gravity.

The lack of movement in any animal standing on its feet is due to the balance of weight evenly distributed on both sides of the center of gravity.

Chap. 61.Motion produced by the Loss of Equilibrium.

Motion is created by the loss of due equipoise, that is, by inequality of weight; for nothing can move of itself, without losing its centre of gravity, and the farther that is removed, the quicker and stronger will be the motion.

Movement happens when there is a loss of balance, meaning there’s an unequal distribution of weight; because nothing can move on its own without shifting its center of gravity, and the more that center is displaced, the faster and stronger the motion will be.

Plate 5

Plate 5.

Image 5.

London, Published by J. Taylor High Holborn.

London, published by J. Taylor High Holborn.

Chap. 62.Of the Equipoise of Bodies, Plate V.

The balance or equipoise of parts in the human body is of two sorts, viz. simple, and complex. Simple, when a man stands upon his feet without motion: in that situation, if he extends his arms at different distances from the middle, or stoop, the centre of his weight will always be in a perpendicular line upon the centre of that foot which supports the body; and if he rests equally upon both feet, then the middle of the chest will be perpendicular to the middle of the line which measures the space between the centres of his feet.

The balance or stability of parts in the human body comes in two forms: simple and complex. Simple balance occurs when a person stands still. In that position, if they extend their arms at different distances from the center, or bend down, the center of their weight will always be directly over the foot supporting their body. If they stand evenly on both feet, then the center of their chest will be directly above the midpoint between their feet.

The complex balance is, when a man carries a weight not his own, which he bears by different motions; as in the figure of Hercules stifling Anteus, by pressing him against his breast with his arms, after he has lifted him from the ground. He must have as much of his own weight thrown behind the central line of his feet, as the weight of Anteus adds before.

The complex balance occurs when a person carries a weight that isn't theirs, which they manage through different movements; like in the image of Hercules choking Anteus by holding him against his chest with his arms after lifting him off the ground. He needs to have enough of his own weight positioned behind the center line of his feet to counterbalance the weight of Anteus in front.

Chap. 63.Of Positions.

The pit of the neck, between the two Clavicles, falls perpendicularly with the foot which bears the weight of the body. If one of the arms be thrown forwards, this pit will quit that perpendicular; and if one of the legs goes back, that pit is brought forwards, [Pg 28] and so changes its situation at every change of posture.

The dip in the neck, between the two collarbones, lines up vertically with the foot that carries the body's weight. If one arm is extended forward, this dip moves out of that vertical line; and if one leg moves backward, the dip shifts forward, [Pg 28] changing its position with every shift in posture.

Chap. 64.Of balancing the Weight round the Centre of Gravity in Bodies.

A figure standing upon its feet without motion, will form an equipoise of all its members round the centre of its support.

An image standing on its feet without moving will create a balance of all its parts around the center of its support.

If this figure without motion, and resting upon its feet, happens to move one of its arms forwards, it must necessarily throw as much of its weight on the opposite side, as is equal to that of the extended arm and the accidental weight. And the same I say of every part, which is brought out beyond its usual balance.

If this figure is standing still and moves one of its arms forward, it will have to shift an equal amount of its weight to the opposite side, which is the same as the weight of the extended arm and any extra weight. I would say the same applies to any part that is positioned beyond its usual balance.

Chap. 65.Of Figures that have to lift up, or carry any Weight.

A weight can never be lifted up or carried by any man, if he do not throw more than an equal weight of his own on the opposite side.

A pound can never be lifted or carried by anyone unless they put in more than an equal amount of their own weight on the other side.

Chap. 66.The Equilibrium of a Man standing upon his Feet, Plate VI.

The weight of a man resting upon one leg will always be equally divided on each side of the central or perpendicular line of gravity, which supports him.

The weight of a man standing on one leg will always be evenly distributed on both sides of the central or vertical line of gravity that holds him up.

Chap. 67.Of Walking, Plate VII.

A man walking will always have the centre of gravity over the centre of the leg which rests upon the ground.

A guy walking will always have his center of gravity over the center of the leg that is on the ground.

Plate 6

Plate 6.

Plate 6.

London, Published by J. Taylor High Holborn.

London, published by J. Taylor, High Holborn.

Plate 7

Plate 7.

Plate 7

London, Published by J. Taylor High Holborn.

London, Published by J. Taylor High Holborn.

Chap. 68.Of the Centre of Gravity in Men and Animals.

The legs, or centre of support, in men and animals, will approach nearer to the centre of gravity, in proportion to the slowness of their motion; and, on the contrary, when the motion is quicker, they will be farther removed from that perpendicular line.

The legs, or center of support, in humans and animals, will move closer to the center of gravity if they move slowly; however, when they move faster, they will be farther away from that vertical line.

Chap. 69.Of the corresponding Thickness of Parts on each Side of the Body.

The thickness or breadth of the parts in the human body will never be equal on each side, if the corresponding members do not move equally and alike.

The thickness or width of the parts in the human body will never be the same on both sides if the corresponding limbs don’t move equally and in the same way.

Chap. 70.Of the Motions of Animals.

All bipeds in their motions lower the part immediately over the foot that is raised, more than over that resting on the ground, and the highest parts do just the contrary. This is observable in the hips and shoulders of a man when he walks; and also in birds in the head and rump.

All bipeds lower the part right above the foot that is lifted more than the part that’s on the ground, while the highest parts do the opposite. You can see this in a man's hips and shoulders when he walks, and it’s also noticeable in birds with their heads and tails.

Chap. 71.Of Quadrupeds and their Motions.

The highest parts of quadrupeds are susceptible of more variation when they walk, than when they are still, in a greater or less degree, in proportion to their size. This proceeds from the oblique position of their legs when they touch the ground, which [Pg 30] raise the animal when they become straight and perpendicular upon the ground.

The upper parts of four-legged animals can change more when they move than when they're standing still, to varying degrees based on their size. This happens because their legs are positioned at an angle when they touch the ground, which [Pg 30] causes the animal to lift up as their legs straighten and stand upright on the ground.

Chap. 72.Of the Quickness or Slowness of Motion.

The motion performed by a man, or any other animal whatever, in walking, will have more or less velocity as the centre of their weight is more or less removed from the centre of that foot upon which they are supported.

The movement by a man, or any other animal, while walking will be faster or slower depending on how far their center of weight is from the center of the foot they’re standing on.

Chap. 73.Of the Motion of Animals.

That figure will appear the swiftest in its course which leans the most forwards.

That figure will move the fastest in its path if it leans the most forward.

Any body, moving of itself, will do it with more or less velocity in proportion as the centre of its gravity is more or less removed from the centre of its support. This is mentioned chiefly in regard to the motion of birds, which, without any clapping of their wings, or assistance of wind, move themselves. This happens when the centre of their gravity is out of the centre of their support, viz. out of its usual residence, the middle between the two wings. Because, if the middle of the wings be more backward than the centre of the whole weight, the bird will move forwards and downwards, in a greater or less degree as the centre of its weight is more or less removed from the middle of its wings. From which it follows, that if the centre of gravity be far removed from the other centre, the descent of the bird will be very oblique; but if that centre be near the middle of the wings, the descent will have very little obliquity.

Any object that moves on its own does so with varying speed depending on how far its center of gravity is from its support center. This is particularly true for birds, which can move themselves without flapping their wings or relying on the wind. This occurs when their center of gravity is not located at the usual center of support, which is typically at the midpoint between their two wings. If the midpoint of the wings is positioned further back than the center of their overall weight, the bird will move forward and downward, and the extent of this movement depends on how far the center of its weight is from the midpoint of its wings. As a result, if the center of gravity is far from the other center, the bird will descend at a sharp angle; but if that center is close to the midpoint of the wings, the descent will be almost straight down.

Plate 8

Plate 8.

Plate 8.

London, Published by J. Taylor High Holborn.

London, published by J. Taylor High Holborn.

Chap. 74.Of a Figure moving against the Wind, Plate VIII.

A man moving against the wind in any direction does not keep his centre of gravity duly disposed upon the centre of support[18].

A guy moving against the wind in any direction doesn’t have his center of gravity properly aligned over his point of support[18].

Chap. 75.Of the Balance of a Figure resting upon its Feet.

The man who rests upon his feet, either bears the weight of his body upon them equally, or unequally. If equally, it will be with some accidental weight, or simply with his own; if it be with an additional weight, the opposite extremities of his members will not be equally distant from the perpendicular of his feet. But if he simply carries his own weight, the opposite extremities will be equally distant from the perpendicular of his feet: and on this subject of gravity I shall write a separate book [19].

The man who stands on his feet either distributes the weight of his body equally or unevenly. If it's equal, it’s due to some extra weight or just his own; if there is additional weight, the opposite ends of his limbs won’t be the same distance from the vertical line of his feet. But if he's just carrying his own weight, the opposite ends will be equally distant from the vertical of his feet. I’ll write a separate book on the topic of gravity [19].

Chap. 76.A Precept.

The navel is always in the central or middle line of the body, which passes through the pit of the stomach to that of the neck, and must have as much weight, either accidental or natural, on one side of the human figure as on the other. This is demonstrated by extending the arm, the wrist of which performs[Pg 32] the office of a weight at the end of a steelyard; and will require some weight to be thrown on the other side of the navel, to counterbalance that of the wrist. It is on that account that the heel is often raised.

The navel is always in the centerline of the body, which runs from the pit of the stomach to the neck, and there must be equal weight, whether accidental or natural, on both sides of the body. This is shown by extending the arm, where the wrist acts like a weight on a scale; some weight has to be added to the other side of the navel to balance out the weight of the wrist. That’s why the heel is often lifted.

Chap. 77.Of a Man standing, but resting more upon one Foot than the other.

After a man, by standing long, has tired the leg upon which he rests, he sends part of his weight upon the other leg. But this kind of posture is to be employed only for old age, infancy, or extreme lassitude, because it expresses weariness, or very little power in the limbs. For that reason, a young man, strong and healthy, will always rest upon one of his legs, and if he removes a little of his weight upon the other, it is only a necessary preparative to motion, without which it is impossible to move; as we have proved before, that motion proceeds from inequality[20].

After a man has been standing for a long time and tires out the leg he’s resting on, he shifts some of his weight to the other leg. However, this kind of stance should only be used in old age, infancy, or extreme fatigue, as it shows weariness or very little strength in the limbs. For this reason, a young man who is strong and healthy will always rest on one leg, and if he shifts a bit of his weight to the other, it’s just a necessary preparation for movement, without which it’s impossible to move; as we have previously proven, motion arises from inequality[20].

Chap. 78.Of the Balance of Figures, Plate IX.

If the figure rests upon one foot, the shoulder on that side will always be lower than the other; and the pit of the neck will fall perpendicularly over the middle of that leg which supports the body. The same will happen in whatever other view we see that figure, when it has not the arm much extended, nor any weight on its back, in its hand, or on its shoulder, and when it does not, either behind or before, throw out that leg which does not support the body.

If the figure stands on one foot, the shoulder on that side will always be lower than the other; and the nape of the neck will drop directly over the middle of the leg that supports the body. The same will happen from any other angle we view the figure, as long as the arm isn't extended too much, there’s no weight on its back, in its hand, or on its shoulder, and when it doesn’t, either in front or behind, extend the leg that doesn’t support the body.

Plate 9

Plate 9.

Plate 9.

London, Published by J. Taylor High Holborn.

London, published by J. Taylor, High Holborn.

Plate 10

Plate 10.

Plate 10.

London, Published by J. Taylor High Holborn.

London, published by J. Taylor, High Holborn.

Chap. 79.In what Manner extending one Arm alters the Balance.

The extending of the arm, which was bent, removes the weight of the figure upon the foot which bears the weight of the whole body: as is observable in rope-dancers, who dance upon the rope with their arms open, without any pole.

The extending of the bent arm shifts the weight from the foot that supports the entire body, similar to what we see in tightrope walkers, who perform on the rope with their arms open, without using a pole.

Chap. 80.Of a Man bearing a Weight on his Shoulders, Plate X.

The shoulder which bears the weight is always higher than the other. This is seen in the figure opposite, in which the centre line passes through the whole, with an equal weight on each side, to the leg on which it rests. If the weight were not equally divided on each side of this central line of gravity, the whole would fall to the ground. But Nature has provided, that as much of the natural weight of the man should be thrown on one side, as of accidental weight on the other, to form a counterpoise. This is effected by the man’s bending, and leaning on the side not loaded, so as to form an equilibrium to the accidental weight he carries; and this cannot be done, unless the loaded shoulder be raised, and the other lowered. This is the resource with which Nature has furnished a man on such occasions.

The shoulder that carries the weight is always higher than the other one. You can see this in the figure opposite, where the center line runs through the whole body, with equal weight on each side, balancing on the leg it rests on. If the weight weren’t evenly divided on both sides of this central line of gravity, the whole body would fall to the ground. But Nature has ensured that as much of a person’s natural weight is shifted to one side as the accidental weight is on the other, creating a balance. This balance is achieved by the person bending and leaning toward the unloaded side to counteract the extra weight they are carrying; this can only happen if the loaded shoulder is raised and the other lowered. This is the solution that Nature provides for a person in such situations.

Chap. 81.Of Equilibrium.

Any figure bearing an additional weight out of the central line, must throw as much natural or accidental weight on the opposite side as is sufficient to form a counterpoise round that line, which passes from the pit of the neck, through the whole mass of weight, to that part of the foot which rests upon the ground. We observe, that when a man lifts a weight with one arm, he naturally throws out the opposite arm; and if that be not enough to form an equipoise, he will add as much of his own weight, by bending his body, as will enable him to resist such accidental load. We see also, that a man ready to fall sideways and backwards at the same time, always throws out the arm on the opposite side.

Any figure holding extra weight away from the center line must shift enough natural or added weight to the opposite side to create a balance around that line, which runs from the base of the neck, through the entire weight, to the part of the foot touching the ground. We notice that when a person lifts a weight with one arm, they naturally extend the opposite arm; and if that isn’t enough for balance, they will lean their body to add enough of their own weight to counteract the extra load. We also see that when someone is about to fall sideways and backwards at the same time, they always extend the arm on the opposite side.

Chap. 82.Of Motion.

Whether a man moves with velocity or slowness, the parts above the leg which sustains the weight, will always be lower than the others on the opposite side.

Whether a man moves quickly or slowly, the parts above the leg that supports the weight will always be lower than those on the opposite side.

Chap. 83.The Level of the Shoulders.

The shoulders or sides of a man, or any other animal, will preserve less of their level, in proportion to the slowness of their motion; and, vice versâ, those parts will lose less of their level when the motion is quicker. This is proved by the ninth proposition, treating of local motions, where it is said, any weight will press in the direction of the line of its motion; therefore the whole moving towards any one point, the parts belonging to it will follow the shortest line of the motion of its whole, without giving any of its weight to the collateral parts of the whole.

The shoulders or sides of a man, or any other animal, will maintain a more level position the slower they move; conversely, these parts will stay level when their motion is faster. This is illustrated in the ninth proposition about local motion, which states that any weight will push in the direction of its motion; therefore, as everything moves towards a single point, the parts connected to it will follow the shortest path of the overall motion, without transferring any of their weight to the surrounding parts of the whole.

Plate 11

Plate 11.

Plate 11.

London, Published by J. Taylor High Holborn.

London, published by J. Taylor High Holborn.

Plate 12

Plate 12.

Plate 12.

London, Published by J. Taylor High Holborn.

London, Published by J. Taylor High Holborn.

Plate 13

Plate 13.

Plate 13.

London, Published by J. Taylor High Holborn.

London, published by J. Taylor, High Holborn.

Chap. 84.Objection to the above answered, Plate XI. and XII.

It has been objected, in regard to the first part of the above proposition, that it does not follow that a man standing still, or moving slowly, has his members always in perfect balance upon the centre of gravity; because we do not find that Nature always follows that rule, but, on the contrary, the figure will sometimes bend sideways, standing upon one foot; sometimes it will rest part of its weight upon that leg which is bent at the knee, as is seen in the figures B C. But I shall reply thus, that what is not performed by the shoulders in the figure C, is done by the hip, as is demonstrated in another place.

It has been argued regarding the first part of the above statement that it doesn’t necessarily mean that a person standing still or moving slowly always has their body balanced perfectly over their center of gravity. This is because we observe that nature doesn’t consistently follow that rule; on the contrary, a figure can sometimes lean to the side while standing on one foot, or it might rest part of its weight on the leg that is bent at the knee, as shown in figures B and C. However, I would respond that what the shoulders do not accomplish in figure C is compensated for by the hip, as demonstrated elsewhere.

Chap. 85.Of the Position of Figures, Plate XIII.

In the same proportion as that part of the naked figure marked D A, lessens in height from the shoulder to the hip, on account of its position the opposite side increases. And this is the reason: the figure resting upon one (suppose the left) foot, that foot becomes the centre of all the weight above; and the pit of the neck, formed by the junction of the two Clavicles, quits also its natural situation at the upper extremity[Pg 36] of the perpendicular line (which passes through the middle surface of the body), to bend over the same foot; and as this line bends with it, it forces the transverse lines, which are always at right angles, to lower their extremities on that side where the foot rests, as appears in A B C. The navel and middle parts always preserve their natural height.

In the same way that the part of the bare figure labeled D A, decreases in height from the shoulder to the hip, the opposite side increases due to its position. Here’s why: when the figure is resting on one foot (let’s say the left), that foot becomes the center of all the weight above it; and the dip in the neck, created by the junction of the two collarbones, also shifts from its natural position at the upper end[Pg 36] of the vertical line (that runs through the center of the body) to lean over the same foot. As this line bends with it, it causes the horizontal lines, which are always at right angles, to lower their ends on the side where the foot is resting, as shown in A B C. The navel and midsection always keep their natural height.

Chap. 86.Of the Joints.

In the bending of the joints it is particularly useful to observe the difference and variety of shape they assume; how the muscles swell on one side, while they flatten on the other; and this is more apparent in the neck, because the motion of it is of three sorts, two of which are simple motions, and the other complex, participating also of the other two.

In the bending of the joints, it’s especially helpful to notice the differences and variety in the shapes they take; how the muscles bulge on one side while they flatten on the other; and this is more noticeable in the neck, because its movement consists of three types: two are simple motions, and the third is complex, combining aspects of the other two.

The simple motions are, first, when the neck bends towards the shoulder, either to the right or left, and when it raises or lowers the head. The second is, when it twists to the right or left, without rising or bending, but straight, with the head turned towards one of the shoulders. The third motion, which is called complex, is, when to the bending of it is added the twisting, as when the ear leans towards one of the shoulders, the head turning the same way, and the face turned upwards.

The basic movements are, first, when the neck bends towards the shoulder, either to the right or left, and when it raises or lowers the head. The second is when it twists to the right or left, without rising or bending, but remaining straight, with the head turned towards one of the shoulders. The third movement, known as complex, occurs when the bending is combined with the twisting, such as when the ear leans towards one of the shoulders, with the head also turning that way, and the face turned upwards.

Chap. 87.Of the Shoulders.

Of those which the shoulders can perform, simple motions are the principal, such as moving the arm upwards and downwards, backwards and forwards. Though one might almost call those motions infinite, for if the arm can trace a circle upon a wall, it will have performed all the motions belonging to the shoulders. Every continued quantity being divisible ad infinitum, and this circle being a continued quantity, produced by the motion of the arm going through every part of the circumference, it follows, that the motions of the shoulders may also be said to be infinite.

Of the movements that the shoulders can perform, the basic actions are the main ones, like raising and lowering the arm, and moving it back and forth. These motions could almost be considered limitless, because if the arm can draw a circle on a wall, it has executed all the possible movements of the shoulders. Since any continuous quantity can be divided ad infinitum, and this circle is a continuous quantity created by the arm moving through every part of its edge, it also implies that the shoulder movements can be described as infinite.

Plate 14

Plate 14.

Plate 14.

London, Published by J. Taylor High Holborn.

London, Published by J. Taylor High Holborn.

Chap. 88.Of the Motions of a Man.

When you mean to represent a man removing a weight, consider that the motions are various, viz. either a simple motion, by bending himself to raise the weight from the ground upwards, or when he drags the weight after him, or pushes it before him, or pulls it down with a rope passing through a pulley. It is to be observed, that the weight of the man’s body pulls the more in proportion as the centre of his gravity is removed from the centre of his support. To this must be added the strength of the effort that the legs and back make when they are bent, to return to their natural straight situation.

When you want to show a man lifting a weight, keep in mind that there are different ways to do it. He might simply bend down to lift the weight off the ground, or he could drag the weight behind him, push it in front of him, or pull it down using a rope over a pulley. It's

A man never ascends or descends, nor walks at all in any direction, without raising the heel of the back foot.

A man never goes up or down, nor walks in any direction at all, without lifting the heel of his back foot.

Chap. 89.Of the Disposition of Members preparing to act with great Force, Plate XIV.

When a man prepares himself to strike a violent blow, he bends and twists his body as far as he can[Pg 38] to the side contrary to that which he means to strike, and collecting all his strength, he, by a complex motion, returns and falls upon the point he has in view[21].

When a man gets ready to deliver a violent blow, he bends and twists his body as much as possible[Pg 38] in the opposite direction of where he intends to hit. Gathering all his strength, he performs a complex motion and then strikes at the target he has in mind[21].

Chap. 90.Of throwing any Thing with Violence, Plate XV.

A man throwing a dart, a stone, or any thing else with violence, may be represented, chiefly, two different ways; that is, he may be preparing to do it, or the act may be already performed. If you mean to place him in the act of preparation, the inside of the foot upon which he rests will be under the perpendicular line of the pit of the neck; and if it be the right foot, the left shoulder will be perpendicular over the toes of the same foot.

A guy throwing a dart, a stone, or anything else with force can be shown in two main ways: either getting ready to do it or already doing it. If you want to depict him in the act of getting ready, the inside of the foot he’s standing on will line up under the straight vertical line from his neck. If it’s his right foot, then his left shoulder will be directly above the toes of that foot.

Chap. 91.On the Motion of driving any Thing into or drawing it out of the Ground.

He who wishes to pitch a pole into the ground, or draw one out of it, will raise the leg and bend the knee opposite to the arm which acts, in order to balance himself upon the foot that rests, without which he could neither drive in, nor pull out any thing.

He who wants to stick a pole into the ground or pull one out will lift the leg and bend the knee opposite to the arm that’s working, to balance himself on the foot that’s on the ground; without this, he couldn’t push it in or pull it out.

Chap. 92.Of forcible Motions, Plate XVI.

Of the two arms, that will be most powerful in its effort, which, having been farthest removed from its natural situation, is assisted more strongly by the other parts to bring it to the place where it means to go. As the man A, who moves the arm with a club E, and brings it to the opposite side B, assisted by the motion of the whole body.

Of the two arms, the one that will be most effective is the one that, having moved farthest from its natural position, receives stronger assistance from the other parts to return to where it aims to go. Like the man A, who swings the arm with a club E and moves it to the opposite side B, aided by the motion of his entire body.

Plate 15

Plate 15.

Plate 15.

London, Published by J. Taylor High Holborn.

London, Published by J. Taylor High Holborn.

Plate 16

Plate 16.

Plate 16.

London, Published by J. Taylor High Holborn.

London, published by J. Taylor, High Holborn.

Chap. 93.The Action of Jumping.

Nature will of itself, and without any reasoning in the mind of a man going to jump, prompt him to raise his arms and shoulders by a sudden motion, together with a great part of his body, and to lift them up high, till the power of the effort subsides. This impetuous motion is accompanied by an instantaneous extension of the body which had bent itself, like a spring or bow, along the back, the joints of the thighs, knees, and feet, and is let off obliquely, that is, upwards and forwards; so that the disposition of the body tending forwards and upwards, makes it describe a great arch when it springs up, which increases the leap.

Nature will naturally and instinctively encourage a person about to jump to suddenly raise their arms and shoulders, along with a significant part of their body, lifting them high until the force of the effort decreases. This sudden movement is accompanied by an instant stretching of the body, which had been bent like a spring or bow along the back, the joints of the thighs, knees, and feet, and is released at an angle, that is, upwards and forwards; so that the body's inclination to move forwards and upwards creates a large arc when it jumps, enhancing the leap.

Ch. 94.Of the three Motions in jumping upwards.

When a man jumps upwards, the motion of the head is three times quicker than that of the heel, before the extremity of the foot quits the ground, and twice as quick as that of the hips; because three angles are opened and extended at the same time: the superior one is that formed by the body at its joint with the thigh before, the second is at the joint of[Pg 40] the thighs and legs behind, and the third is at the instep before[22].

When a man jumps upward, the motion of his head is three times faster than that of his heel before the toes leave the ground, and twice as fast as that of his hips; because three angles are opened and extended at the same time: the top one is formed by the body at its joint with the thigh in front, the second is at the joint of the thighs and legs behind, and the third is at the instep in front[22].

Chap. 95.Of the easy Motions of Members.

In regard to the freedom and ease of motions, it is very necessary to observe, that when you mean to represent a figure which has to turn itself a little round, the feet and all the other members are not to move in the same direction as the head. But you will divide that motion among four joints, viz. the feet, the knees, the hips, and the neck. If it rests upon the right leg, the left knee should be a little bent inward, with its foot somewhat raised outward. The left shoulder should be lower than the other, and the nape of the neck turned on the same side as the outward ankle of the left foot, and the left shoulder perpendicular over the great toe of the right foot. And take it as a general maxim, that figures do not turn their heads straight with the chest, Nature having for our convenience formed the neck so as to turn with ease on every side, when the eyes want to look round; and to this the other joints are in some measure subservient. If the figure be sitting, and the arms have some employment across the body, the breast will turn over the joint of the hip.

In terms of freedom and ease of movement, it's essential to note that when you want to show a figure that needs to turn slightly, the feet and all other body parts shouldn't move in the same direction as the head. Instead, you'll want to spread that movement across four joints: the feet, knees, hips, and neck. If the figure is resting on the right leg, the left knee should be slightly bent inward, with the foot raised outward a bit. The left shoulder should be lower than the right one, and the neck should turn toward the same side as the outward ankle of the left foot, while the left shoulder remains directly above the big toe of the right foot. Remember, figures don’t turn their heads in line with their chest; Nature designed our necks to easily rotate in all directions so that our eyes can look around, and the other joints help with this. If the figure is sitting and using its arms across the body, the chest will pivot at the hip joint.

Plate 17

Plate 17.

Plate 17.

London, Published by J. Taylor High Holborn.

London, published by J. Taylor, High Holborn.

Chap. 96.The greatest Twist which a Man can make, in turning to look at himself behind. Plate XVII.

The greatest twist that the body can perform is when the back of the heels and the front of the face are seen at the same time. It is not done without difficulty, and is effected by bending the leg and lowering the shoulder on that side towards which the head turns. The cause of this motion, and also which of the muscles move first and which last, I shall explain in my treatise on anatomy [23].

The greatest twist the body can make is when the back of the heels and the front of the face are visible at the same time. This isn’t easy to achieve and requires bending the leg and lowering the shoulder on the side the head turns toward. I will explain the reason for this motion, as well as which muscles activate first and last, in my anatomy treatise [23].

Chap. 97.Of turning the Leg without the Thigh.

It is impossible to turn the leg inwards or outwards without turning the thigh by the same motion, because the setting in of the bones at the knee is such, that they have no motion but backwards and forwards, and no more than is necessary for walking or kneeling; never sideways, because the form of the bones at the joint of the knee does not allow it.[Pg 42] If this joint had been made pliable on all sides, as that of the shoulder, or that of the thigh bone with the hip, a man would have had his legs bent on each side as often as backwards and forwards, and seldom or never straight with the thigh. Besides, this joint can bend only one way, so that in walking it can never go beyond the straight line of the leg; it bends only forwards, for if it could bend backwards, a man could never get up again upon his feet, if once he were kneeling; as when he means to get up from the kneeling posture (on both knees), he gives the whole weight of his body to one of the knees to support, unloading the other, which at that time feels no other weight than its own, and therefore is lifted up with ease, and rests his foot flat upon the ground; then returning the whole weight upon that foot, and leaning his hand upon his knee, he at once extends the other arm, raises his head, and straightening the thigh with the body, he springs up, and rests upon the same foot, while he brings up the other.

It is impossible to turn the leg inwards or outwards without also turning the thigh, because the way the bones are set in the knee allows for movement only forwards and backwards, just enough for walking or kneeling; never sideways, since the structure of the knee joint doesn’t permit it.[Pg 42] If this joint had been as flexible in all directions as the shoulder joint or the hip joint with the thigh, a person would have had their legs bent to the sides just as often as they bend forwards and backwards, and would rarely have them straight with the thigh. Additionally, this joint can only bend one way, so in walking, it cannot extend beyond the straight line of the leg; it bends only forwards. If it could bend backwards, a person could never rise back onto their feet after kneeling; because when someone wants to get up from kneeling (on both knees), they shift their entire body weight onto one knee, which supports them while the other knee carries only its own weight, making it easy to lift and place that foot flat on the ground. Then, by shifting their weight onto that foot and leaning on their knee, they extend the other arm, lift their head, and straighten the thigh with their body to spring up, resting on the same foot while bringing up the other.

Chap. 98.Postures of Figures.

Figures that are set in a fixed attitude, are nevertheless to have some contrast of parts. If one arm come before, the other remains still or goes behind. If the figure rest upon one leg, the shoulder on that side will be lower than the other. This is observed by artists of judgment, who always take care to balance the figure well upon its feet, for fear it should[Pg 43] appear to fall. Because by resting upon one foot, the other leg, being a little bent, does not support the body any more than if it were dead; therefore it is necessary that the parts above that leg should transfer the centre of their weight upon the leg which supports the body.

Figures that have a fixed pose should still show some contrast between different parts. If one arm is in front, the other should either stay still or move behind. If the figure is standing on one leg, the shoulder on that side will be lower than the opposite one. This is recognized by skilled artists, who always ensure the figure is well-balanced on its feet to prevent it from looking like it might[Pg 43] fall. This is because when resting on one foot, the other leg, being slightly bent, doesn’t support the body any more than if it were lifeless; therefore, it’s essential that the parts above that leg shift their weight onto the leg that is supporting the body.

Chap. 99.Of the Gracefulness of the Members.

The members are to be suited to the body in graceful motions, expressive of the meaning which the figure is intended to convey. If it had to give the idea of genteel and agreeable carriage, the members must be slender and well turned, but not lean; the muscles very slightly marked, indicating in a soft manner such as must necessarily appear; the arms, particularly, pliant, and no member in a straight line with any other adjoining member. If it happen, on account of the motion of the figure, that the right hip be higher than the left, make the joint of the shoulder fall perpendicularly on the highest part of that hip; and let that right shoulder be lower than the left. The pit of the neck will always be perpendicular over the middle of the instep of the foot that supports the body. The leg that does not bear will have its knee a little lower than the other, and near the other leg.

The limbs should move gracefully, expressing the meaning that the figure is meant to convey. If the intention is to suggest a stylish and pleasant demeanor, the limbs should be slender and well-defined, but not skinny; the muscles should be subtly defined, appearing gently as they naturally would. The arms, in particular, should be flexible, and no limb should form a straight line with any adjacent limb. If, due to the figure's movement, the right hip is higher than the left, let the shoulder joint align vertically with the highest part of that hip, making the right shoulder lower than the left. The notch of the neck should always be vertically aligned over the midpoint of the instep of the foot that supports the body. The leg that isn’t bearing weight will have its knee slightly lower than the other and close to the other leg.

In regard to the positions of the head and arms, they are infinite, and for that reason I shall not enter into any detailed rule concerning them; suffice it to say, that they are to be easy and free, graceful, and[Pg 44] varied in their bendings, so that they may not appear stiff like pieces of wood.

When it comes to the positions of the head and arms, there are countless possibilities, so I won’t go into specific rules about them. It's enough to say that they should be relaxed and natural, elegant, and varied in their movements, so they don't look stiff like wooden pieces.

Chap. C.That it is impossible for any Memory to retain the Aspects and Changes of the Members.

It is impossible that any memory can be able to retain all the aspects or motions of any member of any animal whatever. This case we shall exemplify by the appearance of the hand. And because any continued quantity is divisible ad infinitum, the motion of the eye which looks at the hand, and moves from A to B, moves by a space A B, which is also a continued quantity, and consequently divisible ad infinitum, and in every part of the motion varies to its view the aspect and figure of the hand; and so it will do if it move round the whole circle. The same will the hand do which is raised in its motion, that is, it will pass over a space, which is a continued quantity[24].

It's impossible for any memory to hold onto all the details or movements of any part of any animal. We can illustrate this with the example of the hand. Since any continuous quantity can be divided ad infinitum, the movement of the eye that looks at the hand, shifting from A to B, travels a distance A B, which is also a continuous quantity and therefore can be divided ad infinitum. In every segment of the movement, the perspective and shape of the hand change. The same goes for the hand, which, when raised, covers a distance that is a continuous quantity[24].

Moving Fingers

Chap. 101.The Motions of Figures.

Never put the head straight upon the shoulders, but a little turned sideways to the right or left, even though the figures should be looking up or down, or straight, because it is necessary to give them some motion of life and spirit. Nor ever compose a figure in such a manner, either in a front or back view, as that every part falls straight upon another from the top to the bottom. But if you wish to introduce such a figure, use it for old age. Never repeat the same motion of arms, or of legs, not only not in the same figure, but in those which are standing by, or near; if the necessity of the case, or the expression of the subject you represent, do not oblige you to it [25].

Never position the head directly on the shoulders, but rather tilt it slightly to the right or left, even if the figures are looking up, down, or straight ahead, since it's important to give them some sense of life and energy. Also, never arrange a figure in such a way, whether seen from the front or back, that each part lines up perfectly from top to bottom. But if you need to depict such a figure, reserve it for old age. Avoid repeating the same arm or leg movements, not just in the same figure, but in those nearby as well, unless the situation or the emotion of the subject you’re showing requires it. [25].

Chap. 102.Of common Motions.

The variety of motions in man are equal to the variety of accidents or thoughts affecting the mind, and each of these thoughts, or accidents, will operate more or less, according to the temper and age of the subject; for the same cause will in the actions of youth, or of old age, produce very different effects.

The variety of movements in people corresponds to the variety of circumstances or thoughts that influence the mind, and each of these thoughts or circumstances will affect them to a greater or lesser extent, depending on the person's temperament and age; because the same cause will lead to very different results in the actions of youth compared to those of old age.

Chap. 103.Of simple Motions.

Simple motion is that which a man performs in merely bending backwards or forwards.

Basic motion is what a person does when just bending backward or forward.

Chap. 104.Complex Motion.

Complex motion is that which, to produce some particular action, requires the body to bend downwards and sideways at the same time. The painter must be careful in his compositions to apply these complex motions according to the nature of the subject, and not to weaken or destroy the effect of it by introducing figures with simple motions, without any connexion with the subject.

Complicated motion is when a body needs to bend downwards and sideways at the same time to produce a specific action. The painter needs to be careful in their compositions to incorporate these complex motions based on the nature of the subject, and not to weaken or ruin the effect by including figures with simple motions that don't relate to the subject.

Chap. 105.Motions appropriated to the Subject.

The motions of your figures are to be expressive of the quantity of strength requisite to the force of the action. Let not the same effort be used to take up a stick as would easily raise a piece of timber. Therefore shew great variety in the expression of strength, according to the quality of the load to be managed.

The movements of your bodies should reflect the amount of strength needed for the action. Don’t use the same effort to pick up a stick as you would to lift a heavy piece of wood. So, show a lot of variety in how you express strength based on the type of weight you're handling.

Chap. 106.Appropriate Motions.

There are some emotions of the mind which are not expressed by any particular motion of the body, while in others, the expression cannot be shewn without it. In the first, the arms fall down, the hands and all the other parts, which in general are [Pg 47] the most active, remain at rest. But such emotions of the soul as produce bodily action, must put the members into such motions as are appropriated to the intention of the mind. This, however, is an ample subject, and we have a great deal to say upon it. There is a third kind of motion, which participates of the two already described; and a fourth, which depends neither on the one nor the other. This last belongs to insensibility, or fury, and should be ranked with madness or stupidity; and so adapted only to grotesque or Moresco work.

There are some emotions of the mind that aren't shown through any specific body movement, while in others, the expression can’t be conveyed without it. In the first case, the arms drop down, and the hands and other body parts, which are typically [Pg 47] the most active, stay still. However, emotions of the soul that lead to physical action must cause the body to move in ways that reflect the mind's intentions. This is a broad topic, and we have a lot to discuss about it. There is a third type of motion that combines elements of the two previously mentioned; and a fourth, which doesn't rely on either. This last type relates to insensitivity or rage and should be classified with madness or dullness; it's suited only for bizarre or Moorish work.

Chap. 107.Of the Postures of Women and young People.

It is not becoming in women and young people to have their legs too much asunder, because it denotes boldness; while the legs close together shew modesty.

It is not proper for women and young people to have their legs too far apart, as it shows boldness; while keeping the legs together displays modesty.

Chap. 108.Of the Postures of Children.

Children and old people are not to express quick motions, in what concerns their legs.

Kids and elderly people should avoid making sudden movements with their legs.

Chap. 109.Of the Motion of the Members.

Let every member be employed in performing its proper functions. For instance, in a dead body, or one asleep, no member should appear alive or awake. A foot bearing the weight of the whole body, should not be playing its toes up and down, but flat upon the ground; except when it rests entirely upon the heel.

Let each part play its role. For example, in a dead body or one that's asleep, no part should seem alive or alert. A foot that supports the weight of the entire body shouldn't be wiggling its toes, but should lie flat on the ground, except when it’s resting completely on the heel.

Chap. 110.Of mental Motions.

A mere thought, or operation of the mind, excites only simple and easy motions of the body; not this way, and that way, because its object is in the mind, which does not affect the senses when it is collected within itself.

Just a thought, or mental process, triggers only simple and straightforward movements of the body; not in complicated ways, because its focus is in the mind, which doesn’t influence the senses when it remains internal.

Chap. 111.Effect of the Mind upon the Motions of the Body, occasioned by some outward Object.

When the motion is produced by the presence of some object, either the cause is immediate or not. If it be immediate, the figure will first turn towards it the organs most necessary, the eyes; leaving its feet in the same place; and will only move the thighs, hips, and knees a little towards the same side, to which the eyes are directed.

When motion is caused by the presence of an object, the cause can be either immediate or not. If it's immediate, the figure will first turn its most essential organs, the eyes, towards it; keeping its feet still in the same spot; and will only slightly move the thighs, hips, and knees toward the same side that the eyes are looking.


LINEAR PERSPECTIVE.

Chap. 112.Of those who apply themselves to the Practice, without having learnt the Theory of the Art.

Those who become enamoured of the practice of the art, without having previously applied to the diligent study of the scientific part of it, may be compared to mariners, who put to sea in a ship [Pg 49] without rudder or compass, and therefore cannot be certain of arriving at the wished-for port.

Those who fall in love with the art without first dedicating themselves to the serious study of its science are like sailors setting out to sea in a ship [Pg 49] without a rudder or compass, so they can never be sure they’ll reach their desired destination.

Practice must always be founded on good theory; to this, Perspective is the guide and entrance, without which nothing can be well done.

Practice should always be based on solid theory; in this regard, Perspective is the guide and gateway, without which nothing can be executed properly.

Chap. 113.Precepts in Painting.

Perspective is to Painting what the bridle is to a horse, and the rudder to a ship.

Viewpoint is to painting what a bridle is to a horse and a rudder is to a ship.

The size of a figure should denote the distance at which it is situated.

The size of a figure should indicate the distance from which it is viewed.

If a figure be seen of the natural size, remember that it denotes its being near to the eye.

If you see a figure at its actual size, remember that it means it's close to your eye.

Chap. 114.Of the Boundaries of Objects called Outlines or Contours.

The outlines or contours of bodies are so little perceivable, that at any small distance between that and the object, the eye will not be able to recognise the features of a friend or relation, if it were not for their clothes and general appearance. So that by the knowledge of the whole it comes to know the parts.

The shapes or outlines of bodies are so faint that at just a short distance, the eye can't make out the features of a friend or relative, except for their clothing and overall appearance. Thus, by recognizing the whole, we come to understand the parts.

Chap. 115.Of linear Perspective.

Linear Perspective consists in giving, by established rules, the true dimensions of objects, according to their respective distances; so that the second object be less than the first, the third than the second, and by degrees at last they become invisible. I find by experience, that, if the second object be at[Pg 50] the same distance from the first, as the first is from the eye, though they be of the same size, the second will appear half the size of the first; and, if the third be at the same distance behind the second, it will diminish two thirds; and so on, by degrees, they will, at equal distances, diminish in proportion; provided that the interval be not more than twenty cubits [26]; at which distance it will lose two fourths of its size: at forty it will diminish three fourths; and at sixty it will lose five sixths, and so on progressively. But you must be distant from your picture twice the size of it; for, if you be only once the size, it will make a great difference in the measure from the first to the second.

Straight Perspective is about showing the true size of objects based on how far away they are. This means that the second object looks smaller than the first, the third looks smaller than the second, and eventually, they become invisible. From my experience, if the second object is as far from the first as the first is from your eye, even if they’re the same size, the second will look half the size of the first. If the third object is the same distance behind the second, it will look two-thirds smaller, and so on; they will shrink in size at equal distances, as long as the gap doesn't exceed twenty cubits[26]; at that distance, it will lose two-fourths of its size. At forty cubits, it will shrink three-fourths, and at sixty cubits, it will lose five-sixths, continuing this pattern. But you need to stand twice the distance from your picture as its size; standing only once the size will make a noticeable difference in how the first object appears compared to the second.

Chap. 116.What Parts of Objects disappear first by Distance.

Those parts which are of less magnitude will first vanish from the sight[27]. This happens, because the shape of small objects, at an equal distance, comes to the eye under a more acute angle than the large ones, and the perception of them is less, in proportion as they are less in magnitude. It follows then, that if the large objects, by being removed to a great distance, and consequently coming to the eye by a small angle, are almost lost to the sight, the small objects will entirely disappear.

Those smaller parts will vanish from sight first[27]. This occurs because smaller objects, at the same distance, appear to the eye at a sharper angle than larger ones, making them harder to perceive as their size decreases. Thus, if the larger objects are moved far away and appear to the eye at a smaller angle, they become almost invisible, and the smaller objects will completely disappear.

Chap. 117.Of remote Objects.

The outlines of objects will be less seen, in proportion as they are more distant from the eye.

The outlines of objects become less visible the farther they are from the eye.

Chap. 118.Of the Point of Sight.

The point of sight must be on a level with the eyes of a common-sized man, and placed upon the horizon, which is the line formed by a flat country terminating with the sky. An exception must be made as to mountains, which are above that line.

The viewpoint should be at eye level with an average-sized person and positioned on the horizon, which is the line where flat land meets the sky. Mountains are an exception as they rise above this line.

Chap. 119.A Picture is to be viewed from one Point only.

This will be proved by one single example. If you mean to represent a round ball very high up, on a flat and perpendicular wall, it will be necessary to make it oblong, like the shape of an egg, and to place yourself (that is, the eye, or point of view) so far back, as that its outline or circumference may appear round.

This will be demonstrated with just one example. If you want to show a round ball very high up on a flat vertical wall, you'll need to make it elongated, like an egg shape, and position yourself (that is, your eye or point of view) far enough back so that its outline or edge looks round.

Chap. 120.Of the Dimensions of the first Figure in an historical Painting.

The first figure in your picture will be less than Nature, in proportion as it recedes from the front of the picture, or the bottom line; and by the same rule the others behind it will go on lessening in an equal degree[28].

The first figure in your image will appear smaller than reality the further it is from the front of the image or the bottom line; and following the same principle, the other figures behind it will continue to shrink at the same rate[28].

Chap. 121.Of Objects that are lost to the Sight in Proportion to their Distance.

The first things that disappear, by being removed to some distance, are the outlines or boundaries of objects. The second, as they remove farther, are the shadows which divide contiguous bodies. The third are the thickness of legs and feet; and so in succession the small parts are lost to the sight, till nothing remains but a confused mass, without any distinct parts.

The first things that vanish, as they get moved further away, are the shapes or edges of objects. Next, as they move even farther, the shadows that separate adjacent bodies disappear. Then it's the thickness of legs and feet, and so on, until the smaller details fade from view, leaving only a blurred mass without any clear parts.

Chap. 122.Errors not so easily seen in small Objects as in large ones.

Supposing this small object to represent a man, or any other animal, although the parts, by being so much diminished or reduced, cannot be executed with the same exactness of proportion, nor finished with the same accuracy, as if on a larger scale, yet on that very account the faults will be less conspicuous. For example, if you look at a man at the distance of two hundred yards, and with all due attention mean to form a judgment, whether he be handsome or ugly, deformed or well made, you will find that, with all your endeavours, you can hardly venture to decide. The reason is, that the man diminishes so much by the distance, that it is impossible[Pg 53] to distinguish the parts minutely. If you wish to know by demonstration the diminution of the above figure, hold your finger up before your eye at about nine inches distance, so that the top of your finger corresponds with the top of the head of the distant figure: you will perceive that your finger covers, not only its head, but part of its body; which is an evident proof of the apparent diminution of that object. Hence it often happens, that we are doubtful, and can scarcely, at some distance, distinguish the form of even a friend.

Picture this this small object as a man or any other animal. Although the details, due to being so much smaller, can't be crafted with the same exact proportions or completed with the same precision as if they were on a larger scale, this very fact makes imperfections less noticeable. For instance, if you see a man from two hundred yards away and try to judge whether he’s handsome or ugly, deformed or well-built, you’ll find that despite your efforts, you can hardly make a decision. The reason is that the man looks so much smaller from that distance that it becomes impossible[Pg 53] to clearly see the details. If you want to understand this reduction using a simple demonstration, hold your finger up in front of your eye at about nine inches away, aligning the top of your finger with the top of the head of the faraway figure. You’ll notice that your finger covers not just its head, but part of its body too; this clearly shows the apparent reduction of that object. Because of this, we often find ourselves uncertain and can barely distinguish the shape of even a friend when they’re at a distance.

Chap. 123.Historical Subjects one above another on the same Wall to be avoided.

This custom, which has been generally adopted by painters, on the front and sides of chapels, is much to be condemned. They begin with an historical picture, its landscape and buildings, in one compartment. After which, they raise another compartment, and execute another history with other buildings upon another level; and from thence they proceed to a third and fourth, varying the point of sight, as if the beholder was going up steps, while, in fact, he must look at them all from below, which is very ill judged in those matters.

This practice, which has been widely accepted by painters, on the front and sides of chapels, is quite problematic. They start with a historical scene, including its landscape and buildings, in one section. Then they create another section above it, depicting another story with different buildings on another level; and from there, they move on to a third and fourth, changing the perspective as if the viewer were ascending stairs, even though they have to view everything from below, which is not a wise approach in such matters.

We know that the point of sight is the eye of the spectator; and if you ask, how is a series of subjects, such as the life of a saint, to be represented, in different compartments on the same wall? I answer, that you are to place the principal event in the largest compartment, and make the point of[Pg 54] sight as high as the eye of the spectator. Begin that subject with large figures; and as you go up, lessen the objects, as well the figures, as buildings, varying the plans according to the effect of perspective; but never varying the point of sight: and so complete the series of subjects, till you come to a certain height, where terrestrial objects can be seen no more, except the tops of trees, or clouds and birds; or if you introduce figures, they must be aerial, such as angels, or saints in glory, or the like, if they suit the purpose of your history. If not, do not undertake this kind of painting, for your work will be faulty, and justly reprehensible[29].

We understand that the viewpoint is the eye of the viewer. If you’re wondering how to depict a series of subjects, like the life of a saint, in different sections on the same wall, here’s what you should do: place the main event in the biggest section and set the viewpoint at eye level for the spectator. Start that subject with large figures, and as you move upwards, make the objects smaller, including the figures and buildings, adjusting the layout according to perspective effects, but keep the viewpoint consistent. Complete the series until you reach a certain height where you can no longer see terrestrial objects, except for the tops of trees, clouds, and birds. If you do include figures, they should be ethereal, like angels or saints in glory, or similar, if they fit the theme of your story. If not, don’t attempt this type of painting, as it will be flawed and rightfully criticized.[Pg 54]

Chap. 124.Why Objects in Painting can never detach, as natural Objects do.

Painters often despair of being able to imitate Nature, from observing, that their pictures have not the same relief, nor the same life, as natural objects have in a looking-glass, though they both appear upon a plain surface. They say, they have colours which surpass in brightness the quality of the lights,[Pg 55] and in darkness the quality of the shades of the objects seen in the looking-glass; but attribute this circumstance to their own ignorance, and not to the true cause, because they do not know it. It is impossible that objects in painting should appear with the same relief as those in the looking-glass, unless we look at them with only one eye.

Artists often feel frustrated by their inability to replicate Nature. They notice that their paintings lack the same depth and vibrancy as natural objects reflecting in a mirror, even though both are displayed on a flat surface. They claim their colors are brighter than the actual light and darker than the shadows of the objects reflected in the mirror; however, they attribute this to their own lack of understanding, rather than realizing the real reason. It's impossible for painted objects to have the same depth as those in a mirror, unless we view them with just one eye.

The reason is this. The two eyes A B looking at objects one behind another, as M and N, see them both; because M cannot entirely occupy the space of N, by reason that the base of the visual rays is so broad, that the second object is seen behind the first. But if one eye be shut, and you look with the other S, the body F will entirely cover the body R, because the visual rays beginning at one point, form a triangle, of which the body F is the base, and being prolonged, they form two diverging tangents at the two extremities of F, which cannot touch the body R behind it, therefore can never see it [30].

The reason is this. When both eyes A and B look at objects one behind the other, like M and N, they can see both; because M doesn’t completely fill the space of N, due to the wide base of the visual rays, allowing the second object to be visible behind the first. But if one eye is closed and you look with the other one S, the object F will completely block the object R, because the visual rays starting from one point form a triangle where the object F is the base, and as they extend, they create two diverging lines at the ends of F that cannot reach the object R behind it, making it impossible to see it[30].

Objects Covering Each Other

Chap. 125.How to give the proper Dimension to Objects in Painting.

Objects at Different Distances

In order to give the appearance of the natural size, if the piece be small (as miniatures), the figures on the fore-ground are to be finished with as much precision as those of any large painting, because being small they are to be brought up close to the eye. But large paintings are seen at some distance; whence it happens, that though the figures in each are so different in size, in appearance they will be the same. This proceeds from the eye receiving those objects under the same angle; and it is proved thus. Let the large painting be B C, the eye A, and D E a pane of glass, through which are seen the figures situated at B C. I say that the eye being fixed, the figures in the copy of the paintings B C are to be smaller, in proportion as the glass D E is nearer the eye A, and are to be as precise and finished. But if you will execute the picture B C upon the glass D E, this ought to be less finished than the picture B C, and more so than the figure M N transferred upon the glass F G; because, supposing the figure P O to be as much finished as the natural one in B C, the perspective of O P would be false, since, though in regard to the diminution of the figure it would be right, B C being diminished in P O, the finishing would not[Pg 58] agree with the distance, because in giving it the perfection of the natural B C, B C would appear as near as O P; but, if you search for the diminution of O P, O P will be found at the distance B C, and the diminution of the finishing as at F G.

To create the illusion of natural size, if the piece is small (like miniatures), the figures in the foreground need to be detailed just as meticulously as those in any large painting, because small pieces are meant to be viewed up close. However, large paintings are seen from a distance, which is why the figures, despite their different sizes, will appear similar. This is because the eye perceives those objects at the same angle. Here's how it works: let the large painting be B C, the eye A, and D E a pane of glass through which the figures at B C are visible. I assert that with the eye fixed, the figures in the replica of the paintings B C should be smaller, in proportion to how close the glass D E is to the eye A, while still being detailed and precise. But if you were to paint the image B C on the glass D E, it should be less detailed than the painting B C but more detailed than the figure M N that is transferred to the glass F G; because, if we imagine the figure P O is as detailed as the real one in B C, the perspective of O P would be incorrect. Even though the size of the figure would decrease correctly, as B C is reduced in P O, the level of detail would not [Pg 58] match the distance. This is because, to achieve the perfection of the natural B C, B C would seem as close as O P. However, if you calculate the size reduction of O P, O P will be found at the distance of B C, and the level of detail will correspond to that of F G.

Chap. 126.How to draw accurately any particular Spot.

Take a glass as large as your paper, fasten it well between your eye and the object you mean to draw, and fixing your head in a frame (in such a manner as not to be able to move it) at the distance of two feet from the glass; shut one eye, and draw with a pencil accurately upon the glass all that you see through it. After that, trace upon paper what you have drawn on the glass, which tracing you may paint at pleasure, observing the aerial perspective.

Take a glass that's as big as your paper, secure it firmly between your eye and the object you want to draw, and stabilize your head in a frame (so you can't move it) about two feet away from the glass; close one eye, and carefully draw with a pencil on the glass everything you see through it. After that, transfer what you've drawn on the glass to paper, and you can paint this outline however you like, keeping in mind the aerial perspective.

Chap. 127.Disproportion to be avoided, even in the accessory Parts.

A great fault is committed by many painters, which is highly to be blamed, that is, to represent the habitations of men, and other parts of their compositions, so low, that the doors do not reach as high as the knees of their inhabitants, though, according to their situation, they are nearer to the eye of the spectator, than the men who seem willing to[Pg 59] enter them. I have seen some pictures with porticos, supported by columns loaded with figures; one grasping a column against which it leans, as if it were a walking-stick, and other similar errors, which are to be avoided with the greatest care.

Awesome mistake is made by many painters, which is quite blameworthy. They depict people's homes and other elements in their artwork so low that the doors are shorter than the knees of the people living there, even though these details are closer to the viewer's eye than the figures who seem ready to[Pg 59] enter. I've seen some paintings with porches supported by columns adorned with figures; one figure is leaning against a column as if it's a walking stick, along with other similar mistakes that should be avoided at all costs.


INVENTION, or COMPOSITION.


Chap. 128.Precept for avoiding a bad Choice in the Style or Proportion of Figures.

The painter ought to form his style upon the most proportionate model in Nature; and after having measured that, he ought to measure himself also, and be perfectly acquainted with his own defects or deficiencies; and having acquired this knowledge, his constant care should be to avoid conveying into his work those defects which he has found in his own person; for these defects, becoming habitual to his observation, mislead his judgment, and he perceives them no longer. We ought, therefore, to struggle against such a prejudice, which grows up with us; for the mind, being fond of its own habitation, is apt to represent it to our imagination as beautiful. From the same motive it may be, that there is not a woman, however plain in her person, who may not find her admirer, if she be not a monster. Against this bent of the mind you ought very cautiously to be on your guard.

The painter should build his style on the most balanced model in Nature. After measuring that model, he should also take stock of himself and be fully aware of his own flaws and shortcomings. With this understanding, he must always strive to avoid incorporating those flaws into his work; since these imperfections can become so familiar that they cloud his judgment, causing him to overlook them. Therefore, we need to fight against this bias that grows with us, as our minds, comfortable in their own spaces, tend to portray them as beautiful. It’s likely for the same reason that any woman, no matter how plain, can find an admirer if she’s not a complete outlier. You must be very careful to guard against this tendency of the mind.

Chap. 129.Variety in Figures.

A painter ought to aim at universal excellence; for he will be greatly wanting in dignity, if he do[Pg 61] one thing well and another badly, as many do, who study only the naked figure, measured and proportioned by a pair of compasses in their hands, and do not seek for variety. A man may be well proportioned, and yet be tall or short, large or lean, or of a middle size; and whoever does not make great use of these varieties, which are all existing in Nature in its most perfect state, will produce figures as if cast in one and the same mould, which is highly reprehensible.

An artist should strive for universal excellence; otherwise, he will lack dignity if he does one thing well and another poorly, like many who only focus on drawing the naked figure, measured and proportioned with a compass in hand, without seeking variety. A person can be well-proportioned and still be tall or short, large or lean, or of an average size; and anyone who doesn't take full advantage of these varieties, all of which are present in Nature at its finest, will create figures that seem like they were made from the same mold, which is very much to be criticized.

Chap. 130.How a Painter ought to proceed in his Studies.

The painter ought always to form in his mind a kind of system of reasoning or discussion within himself on any remarkable object before him. He should stop, take notes, and form some rule upon it; considering the place, the circumstances, the lights and shadows.

The painter should always create a sort of internal system of reasoning or discussion about any remarkable object in front of him. He needs to pause, take notes, and establish some guidelines regarding it, taking into account the location, the circumstances, and the lights and shadows.

Chap. 131.Of sketching Histories and Figures.

Sketches of historical subjects must be slight, attending only to the situation of the figures, without regard to the finishing of particular members, which may be done afterwards at leisure, when the mind is so disposed.

Drawings of historical subjects should be simple, focusing only on the positioning of the figures, without worrying about the details of specific parts, which can be polished later when you have the time and inclination.

Chap. 132.How to study Composition.

The young student should begin by sketching slightly some single figure, and turn that on all sides, knowing already how to contract, and how to extend[Pg 62] the members; after which, he may put two together in various attitudes, we will suppose in the act of fighting boldly. This composition also he must try on all sides, and in a variety of ways, tending to the same expression. Then he may imagine one of them very courageous, while the other is a coward. Let these attitudes, and many other accidental affections of the mind, be with great care studied, examined, and dwelt upon.

The young student should start by sketching a single figure from different angles, already knowing how to make the limbs both shorter and longer. After that, they can combine two figures into various poses, like they're bravely fighting. This composition should also be tested from all sides and in different ways, while maintaining the same expression. Then they might envision one figure as very brave and the other as a coward. These poses and many other spontaneous emotions should be studied, analyzed, and explored with great care.

Chap. 133.Of the Attitudes of Men.

The attitudes and all the members are to be disposed in such a manner, that by them the intentions of the mind may be easily discovered.

The attitudes and all the members should be arranged in such a way that the mind's intentions can be easily understood.

Chap. 134.Variety of Positions.

The positions of the human figure are to be adapted to the age and rank; and to be varied according to the difference of the sexes, men or women.

The positions of the human figure should be adapted to the age and status; and adjusted according to the differences between the sexes, male or female.

Chap. 135.Of Studies from Nature for History.

It is necessary to consider well the situation for which the history is to be painted, particularly the height; and let the painter place accordingly the model, from which he means to make his studies for that historical picture; and set himself as much below the object, as the picture is to be above the eye of the spectator, otherwise the work will be faulty.

It is important to carefully think about the situation that the history will depict, especially the height; and the painter should position the model accordingly, based on what he plans to use for his studies for that historical painting; and he should position himself low enough so that he is below the object, just as the painting will be above the viewer's eye, or else the work will be flawed.

Chap. 136.Of the Variety of Figures in History Painting.

History painting must exhibit variety in its fullest extent. In temper, size, complexion, actions, plumpness, leanness, thick, thin, large, small, rough, smooth, old age and youth, strong and muscular, weak, with little appearance of muscles, cheerfulness and melancholy. Some should be with curled hair, and some with straight; some short, some long, some quick in their motions, and some slow, with a variety of dresses and colours, according as the subject may require.

History painting should show a wide range of diversity. In terms of mood, size, skin tone, actions, fullness, thinness, thickness, thinness, big, small, rough, smooth, young, and old, strong and muscular, weak with little visible muscle, happy and sad. Some figures should have curly hair, while others have straight hair; some are short, some are tall, some move quickly, and some move slowly, all dressed in different styles and colors, depending on what the subject needs.

Chap. 137.Of Variety in History.

A painter should delight in introducing great variety into his compositions, avoiding repetition, that by this fertility of invention he may attract and charm the eye of the beholder. If it be requisite according to the subject meant to be represented, that there should be a mixture of men differing in their faces, ages, and dress, grouped with women, children, dogs, and horses, buildings, hills and flat country; observe dignity and decorum in the principal figure; such as a king, magistrate, or philosopher, separating them from the low classes of the people. Mix not afflicted or weeping figures with joyful and laughing ones; for Nature dictates that the cheerful be attended by others of the same disposition of mind. Laughter is productive of laughter, and vice versâ.

An artist should enjoy bringing a wide range of elements into his works, avoiding repetition so that his creative ideas can capture and please the viewer's eye. If the subject requires a mix of people with different faces, ages, and outfits, surrounded by women, children, dogs, and horses, as well as buildings, hills, and flat landscapes; ensure that the main figure has a presence of dignity and decorum, such as a king, magistrate, or philosopher, setting them apart from the lower classes of society. Don’t mix sad or crying figures with happy and laughing ones; nature suggests that those who are cheerful should be surrounded by others who share that same cheerful mindset. Laughter leads to more laughter, and vice versâ.

Chap. 138.Of the Age of Figures.

Do not bring together a number of boys with as many old men, nor young men with infants, nor women with men; if the subject you mean to represent does not oblige you to it.

Do not gather a group of boys with a bunch of old men, nor young men with babies, nor women with men; unless the topic you intend to depict requires it.

Chap. 139.Of Variety of Faces.

The Italian painters have been accused of a common fault, that is, of introducing into their compositions the faces, and even the whole figures, of Roman emperors, which they take from the antique. To avoid such an error, let no repetition take place, either in parts, or the whole of a figure; nor let there be even the same face in another composition: and the more the figures are contrasted, viz. the deformed opposed to the beautiful, the old to the young, the strong to the feeble, the more the picture will please and be admired. These different characters, contrasted with each other, will increase the beauty of the whole.

The Italian painters have often been criticized for a common mistake: incorporating the faces and even the full figures of Roman emperors taken from ancient art into their works. To avoid this mistake, there should be no repetition, whether in parts or in the entirety of a figure; there shouldn't even be the same face in a different piece. The more the figures are contrasted—such as the deformed versus the beautiful, the old versus the young, the strong versus the weak—the more pleasing and admirable the painting will be. These contrasting characters will enhance the overall beauty of the artwork.

It frequently happens that a painter, while he is composing, will use any little sketch or scrap of drawing he has by him, and endeavour to make it serve his purpose; but this is extremely injudicious, because he may very often find that the members he has drawn have not the motion suited to what he means to express; and after he has adopted, accurately drawn, and even well finished them, he will be loth to rub out and change them for others.

It often happens that a painter, while creating, will use any small sketch or scrap of drawing he has on hand, trying to make it work for his needs. However, this is really not a good idea because he may find that the parts he has drawn don't have the movement suited to what he wants to express. After he has incorporated them and drawn them well, he will be reluctant to erase and replace them with something better.

Chap. 140.A Fault in Painters.

It is a very great fault in a painter to repeat the same motions in figures, and the same folds in draperies in the same composition, as also to make all the faces alike.

It is a major mistake for a painter to use the same movements in figures, the same folds in drapery within the same piece, and to create all the faces identical.

Chap. 141.How you may learn to compose Groups for History Painting.

When you are well instructed in perspective, and know perfectly how to draw the anatomy and forms of different bodies or objects, it should be your delight to observe and consider in your walks the different actions of men, when they are talking, or quarrelling; when they laugh, and when they fight. Attend to their positions, and to those of the spectators; whether they are attempting to separate those who fight, or merely lookers-on. Be quick in sketching these with slight strokes in your pocket-book, which should always be about you, and made of stained paper, as you ought not to rub out. When it is full, take another, for these are not things to be rubbed out, but kept with the greatest care; because forms and motions of bodies are so infinitely various, that the memory is not able to retain them; therefore preserve these sketches as your assistants and masters.

When you have a good understanding of perspective and know how to accurately draw the anatomy and shapes of various bodies or objects, you should enjoy observing and thinking about the different actions of people during your walks—whether they are talking, arguing, laughing, or fighting. Pay attention to their positions and those of the onlookers; whether they are trying to separate the fighters or simply watching. Be quick to sketch these moments with light strokes in your notebook, which you should always carry with you and use stained paper for, as you shouldn’t erase anything. When it’s full, grab another one, because these moments shouldn’t be erased but preserved with great care; the forms and movements of bodies are so incredibly varied that the mind can't remember them all. So keep these sketches as your guides and teachers.

Chap. 142.How to study the Motions of the human Body.

The first requisite towards a perfect acquaintance with the various motions of the human body, is the knowledge of all the parts, particularly the joints, in all the attitudes in which it may be placed. Then make slight sketches in your pocket-book, as opportunities occur, of the actions of men, as they happen to meet your eye, without being perceived by them; because, if they were to observe you, they would be disturbed from that freedom of action, which is prompted by inward feeling; as when two men are quarrelling and angry, each of them seeming to be in the right, and with great vehemence move their eyebrows, arms, and all the other members, using motions appropriated to their words and feelings. This they could not do, if you wanted them to imitate anger, or any other accidental emotion; such as laughter, weeping, pain, admiration, fear, and the like. For that reason, take care never to be without a little book, for the purpose of sketching those various motions, and also groups of people standing by. This will teach you how to compose history. Two things demand the principal attention of a good painter. One is the exact outline and shape of the figure; the other, the true expression of what passes in the mind of that figure, which he must feel, and that is very important.

The first requirement for really understanding the different movements of the human body is to know all its parts, especially the joints, in every position it might be in. Then, make quick sketches in your notebook whenever you get the chance to observe how people act without them noticing. If they see you, it might disrupt their natural movement, which comes from their feelings inside. For example, when two guys are arguing and both feel they're right, they dramatically move their eyebrows, arms, and other parts of their bodies, using motions that match their words and emotions. They wouldn’t be able to do that if you asked them to mimic anger or any other spontaneous emotion like laughter, crying, pain, admiration, fear, and so on. That's why you should always have a small notebook on you to sketch those different movements and groups of people nearby. This will help you learn how to compose scenes. A good painter needs to focus on two main things: the precise outline and shape of the figure, and the true expression of what's going on in that figure's mind, which he must genuinely feel—and that’s very important.

Chap. 143.Of Dresses, and of Draperies and Folds.

The draperies with which you dress figures ought to have their folds so accommodated as to surround the parts they are intended to cover; that in the mass of light there be not any dark fold, and in the mass of shadows none receiving too great a light. They must go gently over, describing the parts; but not with lines across, cutting the members with hard notches, deeper than the part can possibly be; at the same time, it must fit the body, and not appear like an empty bundle of cloth; a fault of many painters, who, enamoured of the quantity and variety of folds, have encumbered their figures, forgetting the intention of clothes, which is to dress and surround the parts gracefully wherever they touch; and not to be filled with wind, like bladders, puffed up where the parts project. I do not deny that we ought not to neglect introducing some handsome folds among these draperies, but it must be done with great judgment, and suited to the parts, where, by the actions of the limbs and position of the whole body, they gather together. Above all, be careful to vary the quality and quantity of your folds in compositions of many figures; so that, if some have large folds, produced by thick woollen cloth; others, being dressed in thinner stuff, may have them narrower; some sharp and straight, others soft and undulating.

The drapes you use to dress figures should be arranged so that their folds properly cover the parts they are meant to hide; there shouldn’t be any dark folds in the light areas, nor should there be too much light in the shadowed areas. They should gently flow over the body, highlighting the forms without creating harsh lines that cut into the limbs deeper than necessary. At the same time, they need to fit the body and not look like a loose bundle of fabric; this is a common mistake among many painters who, enamored by the variety and quantity of folds, overload their figures, forgetting that the purpose of clothing is to gracefully drape and outline the body where it makes contact. They shouldn’t look inflated, like balloons puffed up at the protruding parts. I don't say we shouldn't include attractive folds in these drapes, but it must be done thoughtfully, considering the forms and how the actions of the limbs and the body’s position cause the fabric to bunch. Above all, be mindful to vary the quality and amount of folds in compositions with many figures; so that if some exhibits large folds from thick wool, others in lighter materials may have narrower folds; some may be sharp and straight, while others are soft and flowing.

Chap. 144.Of the Nature of Folds in Draperies.

Many painters prefer making the folds of their draperies with acute angles, deep and precise; others with angles hardly perceptible; and some with none at all; but instead of them, certain curved lines.

Many painters prefer creating the folds of their draperies with sharp angles, deep and precise; others use angles that are barely noticeable; and some don’t use angles at all, opting instead for smooth curves.

Chap. 145.How the Folds of Draperies ought to be represented, Plate XVIII.

That part of the drapery, which is the farthest from the place where it is gathered, will appear more approaching its natural state. Every thing naturally inclines to preserve its primitive form. Therefore a stuff or cloth, which is of equal thickness on both sides, will always incline to remain flat. For that reason, when it is constrained by some fold to relinquish its flat situation, it is observed that, at the part of its greatest restraint, it is continually making efforts to return to its natural shape; and the parts most distant from it reassume more of their primitive state by ample and distended folds. For example, let A B C be the drapery mentioned above; A B the place where it is folded or restrained. I have said that the part, which is farthest from the place of its restraint, would return more towards its primitive shape. Therefore C being the farthest, will be broader and more extended than any other part.

The part of the fabric that is farthest from where it is gathered will look more like its original state. Everything naturally tends to keep its original form. So, a piece of material that is the same thickness on both sides will always want to stay flat. That's why, when it’s forced into folds and has to give up its flat position, the area under the most tension tries hard to go back to its original shape; meanwhile, the parts farthest away from it take on more of their original form with loose, wide folds. For instance, let A B C be the fabric mentioned earlier; A B is where it is folded or constrained. I've said that the part farthest from the restraint will return more to its original shape. Therefore, C, being the farthest, will be wider and more spread out than any other part.

Plate 18

Plate 18.

Plate 18.

London, Published by J. Taylor High Holborn.

London, published by J. Taylor High Holborn.

Plate 19

Plate 19.

Plate 19.

London, Published by J. Taylor High Holborn.

London, published by J. Taylor, High Holborn.

Chap. 146.How the Folds in Draperies ought to be made.

Draperies are not to be encumbered with many folds: on the contrary, there ought to be some only where they are held up with the hands or arms of the figures, and the rest left to fall with natural simplicity. They ought to be studied from Nature; that is to say, if a woollen cloth be intended, the folds ought to be drawn after such cloth; if it be of silk, or thin stuff, or else very thick for labourers, let it be distinguished by the nature of the folds. But never copy them, as some do, after models dressed in paper, or thin leather, for it greatly misleads.

Curtains shouldn't be weighed down with too many folds. Instead, there should only be some folds where they are held up by the hands or arms of the figures, and the rest should hang naturally. They should be studied from real life; meaning, if you’re using woolen cloth, the folds should reflect that material. If it's silk, or a thin fabric, or very thick fabric for laborers, the folds should show those differences. However, don’t just copy them like some do from models dressed in paper or thin leather, as that can be very misleading.

Chap. 147.Fore-shortening of Folds, Plate XIX.

Where the figure is fore-shortened, there ought to appear a greater number of folds, than on the other parts, all surrounding it in a circular manner. Let E be the situation of the eye. M N will have the middle of every circular fold successively removed farther from its outline, in proportion as it is more distant from the eye. In M O of the other figure the outlines of these circular folds will appear almost straight, because it is situated opposite the eye; but in P and Q quite the contrary, as in N and M.

Where the figure is shortened, there should appear more folds than in the other areas, all arranged in a circular way around it. Let E be where the eye is positioned. M N will have the center of each circular fold gradually moved further from its outline, depending on how far it is from the eye. In M O of the other figure, the outlines of these circular folds will look almost straight because it faces the eye; however, in P and Q, it will be the opposite, just like in N and M.

Chap. 148.Of Folds.

The folds of draperies, whatever be the motion of the figure, ought always to shew, by the form[Pg 70] of their outlines, the attitude of such figure; so as to leave, in the mind of the beholder, no doubt or confusion in regard to the true position of the body; and let there be no fold, which, by its shadow, breaks through any of the members; that is to say, appearing to go in deeper than the surface of the part it covers. And if you represent the figure clothed with several garments, one over the other, let it not appear as if the upper one covered only a mere skeleton; but let it express that it is also well furnished with flesh, and a thickness of folds, suitable to the number of its under garments.

The way draperies fold, no matter how the figure moves, should always clearly show the shape of their outlines, reflecting the figure's pose. This way, onlookers won’t have any doubt or confusion about the body's actual position. Additionally, there shouldn't be any fold that, by casting a shadow, makes any part look like it goes deeper than the surface it covers. If you depict a figure wearing multiple layers of clothing, ensure it doesn’t look like the top layer is just draped over a bare skeleton; instead, it should convey that there is flesh underneath and a suitable thickness of folds according to the number of layers beneath.

The folds surrounding the members ought to diminish in thickness near the extremities of the part they surround.

The folds around the members should get thinner near the ends of the part they surround.

The length of the folds, which are close to the members, ought to produce other folds on that side where the member is diminished by fore-shortening, and be more extended on the opposite side.

The length of the folds, which are near the members, should create additional folds on the side where the member is shortened, and be more stretched out on the opposite side.

Chap. 149.Of Decorum.

Observe decorum in every thing you represent, that is, fitness of action, dress, and situation, according to the dignity or meanness of the subject to be represented. Be careful that a king, for instance, be grave and majestic in his countenance and dress; that the place be well decorated; and that his attendants, or the by-standers, express reverence and admiration, and appear as noble, in dresses suitable to a royal court.

Watch proper conduct in everything you portray, meaning the appropriateness of actions, attire, and setting based on the importance or insignificance of the subject being represented. Make sure that a king, for example, looks serious and impressive in his appearance and clothing; that the location is well adorned; and that his attendants or the onlookers show respect and admiration, appearing noble in attire appropriate for a royal court.

On the contrary, in the representation of a mean [Pg 71] subject, let the figures appear low and despicable; those about them with similar countenances, and actions, denoting base and presumptuous minds, and meanly clad. In short, in both cases, the parts must correspond with the general sentiment of the composition.

On the other hand, when depicting a mean [Pg 71] character, the figures should look low and contemptible; those around them should have similar expressions and actions that show their petty and arrogant minds, and be dressed poorly. In short, in both instances, the elements must align with the overall feeling of the piece.

The motions of old age should not be similar to those of youth; those of a woman to those of a man; nor should the latter be the same as those of a boy.

The movements of old age shouldn't be like those of youth; a woman's shouldn't be like a man's; and a man's shouldn't be the same as a boy's.

Chap. 150.The Character of Figures in Composition.

In general, the painter ought to introduce very few old men, in the ordinary course of historical subjects, and those few separated from young people; because old people are few, and their habits do not agree with those of youth. Where there is no conformity of custom, there can be no intimacy, and, without it, a company is soon separated. But if the subject require an appearance of gravity, a meeting on important business, as a council, for instance, let there be few young men introduced, for youth willingly avoids such meetings.

In general, the painter should include very few elderly people in typical historical subjects, and those few should be kept separate from young people; because older individuals are rare, and their lifestyles don't match those of youth. When there’s no alignment in customs, there can be no closeness, and without that, a group will quickly drift apart. However, if the subject calls for a sense of seriousness, like a meeting for important matters, such as a council, then there should be only a few young individuals present, as youth tends to shy away from such gatherings.

Chap. 151.The Motion of the Muscles, when the Figures are in natural Positions.

A figure, which does not express by its position the sentiments and passions, by which we suppose it animated, will appear to indicate that its muscles are not obedient to its will, and the painter very deficient in judgment. For that reason, a figure is [Pg 72] to shew great eagerness and meaning; and its position is to be so well appropriated to that meaning, that it cannot be mistaken, nor made use of for any other.

A person that doesn't convey its feelings and emotions through its posture might seem like its muscles aren't responding to its intentions, which would reflect poorly on the artist's judgment. Therefore, a figure should [Pg 72] express a strong sense of eagerness and purpose; its position should align so clearly with that purpose that there's no chance for misunderstanding or misinterpretation.

Chap. 152.A Precept in Painting.

The painter ought to notice those quick motions, which men are apt to make without thinking, when impelled by strong and powerful affections of the mind. He ought to take memorandums of them, and sketch them in his pocket-book, in order to make use of them when they may answer his purpose; and then to put a living model in the same position, to see the quality and aspect of the muscles which are in action.

The painter should pay attention to those quick movements that people often make unconsciously when driven by strong emotions. He should jot them down and sketch them in his notebook to use later when it fits his needs; then, he can have a live model pose in the same way to observe the quality and appearance of the active muscles.

Chap. 153.Of the Motion of Man, Plates XX. and XXI.

The first and principal part of the art is composition of any sort, or putting things together. The second relates to the expression and motion of the figures, and requires that they be well appropriated, and seeming attentive to what they are about; appearing to move with alacrity and spirit, according to the degree of expression suitable to the occasion; expressing slow and tardy motions, as well as those of eagerness in pursuit: and that quickness and ferocity be expressed with such force as to give an idea of the sensations of the actors. When a figure is to throw a dart, stones, or the like, let it be seen evidently by the attitude and disposition of all the members, that such is its intention; of which there are two examples in the opposite plates, varied both in action and power. The first in point of vigour is A. The second is B. But A will throw his weapon farther than B, because, though they seem desirous of throwing it to the same point, A having turned his feet towards the object, while his body is twisted and bent back the contrary way, to increase his power, returns with more velocity and force to the point to which he means to throw. But the figure B having turned his feet the same way as his body, it returns to its place with great inconvenience, and consequently with weakened powers. For in the expression of great efforts, the preparatory motions of the body must be strong and violent, twisting and bending, so that it may return with convenient ease, and by that means have a great effect. In the same manner, if a cross-bow be not strung with force, the motion of whatever it shoots will be short and without effect; because, where there is no impulse, there can be no motion; and if the impulse be not violent, the motion is but tardy and feeble. So a bow, which is not strong, has no motion; and, if it be strung, it will remain in that state till the impulse be given by another power which puts it in motion, and it will shoot with a violence equal to that which was employed in bending it. In the same manner, the man who does not twist and bend his body will have acquired no power. Therefore, after A has thrown his dart, he will find himself twisted the contrary way, viz. on the side where he has thrown; and he will have acquired only power sufficient to serve him to return to where he was at first.

The first and main part of the art is composition in any form, or putting things together. The second part relates to the expression and movement of the figures, requiring them to be well-suited and seem engaged in what they’re doing; they should appear to move with energy and spirit, according to the expression appropriate for the situation; expressing both slow and deliberate movements as well as ones driven by eagerness in pursuit. Quickness and intensity must be portrayed with enough force to convey the sensations of the characters. When a figure is about to throw a dart, stones, or something similar, it should be clear from the stance and positioning of all its limbs that this is its intention; there are two examples in the opposite plates, differing in both action and power. The first in terms of strength is A. The second is B. However, A will throw his weapon farther than B, because, although they both seem eager to throw it to the same target, A has his feet facing the target while his body is twisted and bent back in the opposite direction to increase his power, allowing him to return with more speed and force to the intended throw. B, on the other hand, has his feet turned in the same direction as his body, which makes it harder for him to return to the starting position, consequently weakening his power. In demonstrating great efforts, the preliminary movements of the body must be forceful and vigorous, twisting and bending so that it can return with ease, ultimately resulting in a significant impact. Similarly, if a crossbow isn't drawn back with force, whatever it shoots will have a short and ineffective flight; because without an impulse, there can be no motion; and if the impulse isn’t strong, the movement will be slow and weak. Just like a weak bow won’t have any motion; and if it is strung, it will stay that way until another force applies the impulse to launch it, shooting with a force equal to how much effort was used in bending it. Similarly, a person who doesn’t twist and bend their body won’t have gained any power. Therefore, after A throws his dart, he will find himself twisted in the opposite direction, namely towards the side he threw from; and he will only have gained enough power to return to his original position.

Plate 20

Plate 20.

Plate 20.

London, Published by J. Taylor High Holborn.

London, Published by J. Taylor High Holborn.

Plate 21

Plate 21.

Plate 21.

London, Published by J. Taylor High Holborn.

London, published by J. Taylor, High Holborn.

Chap. 154.Of Attitudes, and the Motions of the Members.

The same attitude is not to be repeated in the same picture, nor the same motion of members in the same figure, nay, not even in the hands or fingers. And if the history requires a great number of figures, such as a battle, or a massacre of soldiers, in which there are but three ways of striking, viz. thrusting, cutting, or back-handed; in that case you must take care, that all those who are cutting be expressed in different views; some turning their backs, some their sides, and others be seen in front; varying in the same manner the three different ways of fighting, so that all the actions may have a relation to those three principles. In battles, complex motions display great art, giving spirit and animation to the whole. By complex motion is meant, for instance, that of a single figure shewing the front of the legs, and at the same time the profile of the shoulder. But of this I shall treat in another place[31].

The same attitude shouldn't be repeated in the same picture, nor should the same movements of body parts appear in the same figure, not even the hands or fingers. If the scene requires a large number of figures, like in a battle or a massacre of soldiers, where there are only three ways to attack—thrusting, cutting, or back-handed—you need to ensure that all those who are cutting are shown from different angles; some should have their backs turned, some should be shown from the side, and others should face forward. You should also vary the three different ways of fighting, so that all the actions relate back to those three principles. In battles, complex motions exhibit great skill, adding energy and life to the entire scene. By complex motion, I mean, for example, a single figure showing the front of the legs while simultaneously displaying the profile of the shoulder. But I will discuss this in more detail elsewhere[31].

Chap. 155.Of a single Figure separate from an historical Group.

The same motion of members should not be repeated in a figure which you mean to be alone; for instance, if the figure be represented running, it must not throw both hands forward; but one forward and the other backward, or else it cannot run. If the right foot come forward, the right arm must[Pg 75] go backward and the left forward, because, without such disposition and contraste of parts, it is impossible to run well. If another figure be supposed to follow this, one of its legs should be brought somewhat forward, and the other be perpendicular under the head; the arm on the same side should pass forward. But of this we shall treat more fully in the book on motion [32].

The same movement of body parts should not be repeated in a figure that you want to be unique; for example, if the figure is depicted as running, it shouldn't have both hands stretched forward; instead, one should be forward and the other back, or else it can't run. If the right foot is stepping forward, the right arm should go back and the left arm should go forward because, without this arrangement and contrast of parts, it's impossible to run properly. If another figure is supposed to follow this one, one of its legs should be positioned slightly forward, while the other should be directly under the head; the arm on the same side should move forward. But we'll elaborate on this further in the book on motion [32].

Chap. 156.On the Attitudes of the human Figure.

A painter is to be attentive to the motions and actions of men, occasioned by some sudden accident. He must observe them on the spot, take sketches, and not wait till he wants such expression, and then have it counterfeited for him; for instance, setting a model to weep when there is no cause; such an expression without a cause will be neither quick nor natural. But it will be of great use to have observed every action from nature, as it occurs, and then to have a model set in the same attitude to help the recollection, and find out something to the purpose, according to the subject in hand.

A creator needs to pay close attention to the movements and actions of people, especially during unexpected events. They should observe these moments in real time, take quick sketches, and not wait until they need that expression and then have it faked later; for example, having a model cry when there’s no reason for it. That kind of expression without a reason will come off as neither spontaneous nor natural. However, it’s incredibly helpful to have observed every action as it happens in nature, then have a model pose in the same way to jog your memory and help you find something relevant to the topic at hand.

Chap. 157.How to represent a Storm.

To form a just idea of a storm, you must consider it attentively in its effects. When the wind blows violently over the sea or land, it removes and carries off with it every thing that is not firmly fixed to the general mass. The clouds must appear straggling[Pg 76] and broken, carried according to the direction and the force of the wind, and blended with clouds of dust raised from the sandy shore. Branches and leaves of trees must be represented as carried along by the violence of the storm, and, together with numberless other light substances, scattered in the air. Trees and grass must be bent to the ground, as if yielding to the course of the wind. Boughs must be twisted out of their natural form, with their leaves reversed and entangled. Of the figures dispersed in the picture, some should appear thrown on the ground, so wrapped up in their cloaks and covered with dust, as to be scarcely distinguishable. Of those who remain on their feet, some should be sheltered by and holding fast behind some great trees, to avoid the same fate: others bending to the ground, their hands over their faces to ward off the dust; their hair and their clothes flying straight up at the mercy of the wind.

To get a clear idea of a storm, you need to closely observe its effects. When the wind blows fiercely over the sea or land, it sweeps away everything that isn't securely attached to the ground. The clouds should look scattered[Pg 76] and fragmented, moving according to the strength and direction of the wind, mixed with clouds of dust kicked up from the sandy shore. Branches and leaves from trees should be shown being carried away by the storm’s force, along with countless other light objects scattered in the air. Trees and grass should be bent low, as if giving in to the wind. Branches should appear twisted and deformed, their leaves flipped and tangled. In the scene, some figures should seem to be thrown to the ground, wrapped in their cloaks and covered in dust, making them hard to distinguish. Those who manage to stay upright should be taking cover behind large trees, trying to avoid the same fate, while others bend down, hands over their faces to protect against the dust; their hair and clothes fluttering upward, completely at the mercy of the wind.

The high tremendous waves of the stormy sea will be covered with foaming froth; the most subtle parts of which, being raised by the wind, like a thick mist, mix with the air. What vessels are seen should appear with broken cordage, and torn sails, fluttering in the wind; some with broken masts fallen across the hulk, already on its side amidst the tempestuous waves. Some of the crew should be represented as if crying aloud for help, and clinging to the remains of the shattered vessel. Let the clouds appear as driven by tempestuous winds against the summits of lofty mountains, enveloping those[Pg 77] mountains, and breaking and recoiling with redoubled force, like waves against a rocky shore. The air should be rendered awfully dark, by the mist, dust, and thick clouds.

The huge, powerful waves of the stormy sea will be covered with foamy froth; the finest bits of which, lifted by the wind, like a thick mist, blend with the air. Any visible ships should appear with broken rigging and torn sails, flapping in the wind; some with broken masts fallen across the hull, already tipping over amidst the tumultuous waves. Some crew members should be shown as if shouting for help and clinging to the remnants of the shattered vessel. Let the clouds seem driven by fierce winds against the peaks of tall mountains, wrapping those[Pg 77] mountains, and breaking and rebounding with increased force, like waves crashing against a rocky shore. The air should be made terrifyingly dark, filled with mist, dust, and thick clouds.

Chap. 158.How to compose a Battle.

First, let the air exhibit a confused mixture of smoke, arising from the discharge of artillery and musquetry, and the dust raised by the horses of the combatants; and observe, that dust being of an earthy nature, is heavy; but yet, by reason of its minute particles, it is easily impelled upwards, and mixes with the air; nevertheless, it naturally falls downwards again, the most subtle parts of it alone gaining any considerable degree of elevation, and at its utmost height it is so thin and transparent, as to appear nearly of the colour of the air. The smoke, thus mixing with the dusty air, forms a kind of dark cloud, at the top of which it is distinguished from the dust by a blueish cast, the dust retaining more of its natural colour. On that part from which the light proceeds, this mixture of air, smoke, and dust, will appear much brighter than on the opposite side. The more the combatants are involved in this turbulent mist, the less distinctly they will be seen, and the more confused will they be in their lights and shades. Let the faces of the musketeers, their bodies, and every object near them, be tinged with a reddish hue, even the air or cloud of dust; in short, all that surrounds them. This red tinge you will diminish, in proportion to their distance,[Pg 78] from the primary cause. The groups of figures, which appear at a distance between the spectator and the light, will form a dark mass upon a light ground; and their legs will be more undetermined and lost as they approach nearer to the ground; because there the dust is heavier and thicker.

First, imagine the air filled with a chaotic mix of smoke from the gunfire and the dust kicked up by the horses of the fighters; note that the dust, being earthy, is dense, yet because of its tiny particles, it easily gets lifted into the air and mixes with it. However, it naturally falls back down, with only the finest particles achieving any significant height, and at its peak, it becomes so thin and clear that it’s almost the same color as the air. The smoke blending with the dusty air creates a sort of dark cloud, which is distinguishable by a bluish tint at its top, while the dust keeps more of its natural color. On the side where the light comes from, this mix of air, smoke, and dust appears much brighter than on the other side. The more the combatants are caught in this turbulent haze, the less clearly they can be seen, and their features will become more muddled in light and shadow. The faces of the musketeers, their bodies, and everything around them should have a reddish tint, including the air or dust cloud; in short, everything that surrounds them. You’ll lessen this red hue the further you go from the main source.[Pg 78] The groups of figures visible at a distance between the viewer and the light will form a dark shape against a lighter background, and their legs will become less defined and more indistinct as they get closer to the ground, where the dust is heavier and thicker.

If you mean to represent some straggling horses, running out of the main body, introduce also some small clouds of dust, as far distant from each other as the leap of the horse, and these little clouds will become fainter, more scanty, and diffused, in proportion to their distance from the horse. That nearest to his feet will consequently be the most determined, smallest, and the thickest of all.

If you want to show some stray horses running away from the main group, also add small clouds of dust that are spaced apart by the distance of the horse's jump. These dust clouds will look lighter, sparser, and more spread out the farther away they are from the horse. The one closest to the horse's feet will, therefore, be the most pronounced, smallest, and densest of them all.

Let the air be full of arrows, in all directions; some ascending, some falling down, and some darting straight forwards. The bullets of the musketry, though not seen, will be marked in their course by a train of smoke, which breaks through the general confusion. The figures in the fore-ground should have their hair covered with dust, as also their eyebrows, and all parts liable to receive it.

Let the air be filled with arrows flying in every direction; some going up, some coming down, and some shooting straight ahead. The bullets from the muskets, though not visible, will be traced in their path by a trail of smoke that cuts through the overall chaos. The figures in the foreground should have their hair, eyebrows, and any other exposed areas covered in dust.

The victorious party will be running forwards, their hair and other light parts flying in the wind, their eyebrows lowered, and the motion of every member properly contrasted; for instance, in moving the right foot forwards, the left arm must be brought forwards also. If you make any of them fallen down, mark the trace of his fall on the slippery, gore-stained dust; and where the ground is less impregnated with blood, let the print of men’s feet[Pg 79] and of horses, that have passed that way, be marked. Let there be some horses dragging the bodies of their riders, and leaving behind them a furrow, made by the body thus trailed along.

The winning team will be charging ahead, their hair and other light features blowing in the wind, their brows furrowed, and the movement of each person clearly contrasting; for example, when moving the right foot forward, the left arm should also move forward. If any of them fall down, make sure to show the mark of their fall on the slick, blood-stained ground; and where the earth is less soaked with blood, let the imprint of men’s feet[Pg 79] and horses that have walked that way be visible. There should be some horses dragging the bodies of their riders, creating a path as their bodies are trailed along.

The countenances of the vanquished will appear pale and dejected. Their eyebrows raised, and much wrinkled about the forehead and cheeks. The tip of their noses somewhat divided from the nostrils by arched wrinkles terminating at the corner of the eyes, those wrinkles being occasioned by the opening and raising of the nostrils; the upper lips turned up, discovering the teeth. Their mouths wide open, and expressive of violent lamentation. One may be seen fallen wounded on the ground, endeavouring with one hand to support his body, and covering his eyes with the other, the palm of which is turned towards the enemy. Others running away, and with open mouths seeming to cry aloud. Between the legs of the combatants let the ground be strewed with all sorts of arms; as broken shields, spears, swords, and the like. Many dead bodies should be introduced, some entirely covered with dust, others in part only; let the blood, which seems to issue immediately from the wound, appear of its natural colour, and running in a winding course, till, mixing with the dust, it forms a reddish kind of mud. Some should be in the agonies of death; their teeth shut, their eyes wildly staring, their fists clenched, and their legs in a distorted position. Some may appear disarmed, and beaten down by the enemy, still fighting with their fists and teeth, and endeavouring[Pg 80] to take a passionate, though unavailing revenge. There may be also a straggling horse without a rider, running in wild disorder; his mane flying in the wind, beating down with his feet all before him, and doing a deal of damage. A wounded soldier may also be seen falling to the ground, and attempting to cover himself with his shield, while an enemy bending over him endeavours to give him the finishing stroke. Several dead bodies should be heaped together under a dead horse. Some of the conquerors, as having ceased fighting, may be wiping their faces from the dirt, collected on them by the mixture of dust with the water from their eyes.

The faces of the defeated will look pale and downcast. Their eyebrows are raised, with many wrinkles on their foreheads and cheeks. The tips of their noses are slightly separated from their nostrils by arched wrinkles that end at the corners of their eyes, caused by the lifting of the nostrils. Their upper lips curl up, showing their teeth. Their mouths are wide open, conveying deep sorrow. One can be seen lying wounded on the ground, trying to prop himself up with one hand, while covering his eyes with the other, palm facing the enemy. Others are running away, mouths agape as they seem to cry out. The ground between the fighters is scattered with various weapons: broken shields, spears, swords, and more. Many dead bodies should be depicted, some covered in dust, others partially so; the blood, appearing fresh from the wound, should flow in winding streams, mixing with the dust to create a reddish mud. Some may be shown in their final moments, with clenched teeth, wild eyes, fists tightened, and legs twisted in agony. Some can be seen unarmed and beaten down by the enemy, still fighting back with their fists and teeth, desperately attempting to take revenge, though in vain. There might also be a stray horse without a rider, running wildly, its mane flying in the wind, trampling everything in its path and causing chaos. A wounded soldier can be seen collapsing, trying to shield himself with his armor while an enemy bends over him, aiming to deliver the final blow. Several corpses should be piled beneath a dead horse. Some of the victors, having paused their fighting, may be wiping the dirt off their faces, a mix of dust and tears.

The corps de reserve will be seen advancing gaily, but cautiously, their eyebrows directed forwards, shading their eyes with their hands to observe the motions of the enemy, amidst clouds of dust and smoke, and seeming attentive to the orders of their chief. You may also make their commander holding up his staff, pushing forwards, and pointing towards the place where they are wanted. A river may likewise be introduced, with horses fording it, dashing the water about between their legs, and in the air, covering all the adjacent ground with water and foam. Not a spot is to be left without some marks of blood and carnage.

The corps de reserve will be seen moving forward cheerfully, but carefully, their brows furrowed, shielding their eyes with their hands to watch the enemy's movements, amidst clouds of dust and smoke, appearing focused on their leader’s commands. You can also show their commander raising his staff, urging them on, and pointing to the area where they are needed. A river can also be included, with horses crossing it, splashing water everywhere and creating a mess with foam in the air, covering all the nearby ground. No place should be left without signs of blood and brutality.

Chap. 159.The Representation of an Orator and his Audience.

If you have to represent a man who is speaking to a large assembly of people, you are to consider the subject matter of his discourse, and to adapt his attitude to such subject. If he means to persuade, let it be known by his gesture. If he is giving an explanation, deduced from several reasons, let him put two fingers of the right hand within one of the left, having the other two bent close, his face turned towards the audience, with the mouth half open, seeming to speak. If he is sitting, let him appear as going to raise himself up a little, and his head be forward. But if he is represented standing, let him bend his chest and his head forward towards the people.

If you need to depict a man speaking to a large crowd, consider the topic of his speech and adjust his demeanor accordingly. If he's trying to persuade, that should show in his gestures. If he's explaining something based on multiple reasons, he should place two fingers of his right hand inside one of his left, with the other two fingers bent closely, his face directed toward the audience, and his mouth slightly open as if he's about to speak. If he's seated, he should look like he's about to lift himself up a bit, with his head leaning forward. But if he's standing, he should lean his chest and head forward toward the audience.

The auditory are to appear silent and attentive, with their eyes upon the speaker, in the act of admiration. There should be some old men, with their mouths close shut, in token of approbation, and their lips pressed together, so as to form wrinkles at the corners of the mouth, and about the cheeks, and forming others about the forehead, by raising the eyebrows, as if struck with astonishment. Some others of those sitting by, should be seated with their hands within each other, round one of their knees; some with one knee upon the other, and upon that, one hand receiving the elbow, the other supporting the chin, covered with a venerable beard.

The listeners should appear quiet and focused, their eyes on the speaker in a state of admiration. There should be some older men with their mouths closed, indicating approval, their lips pressed together, creating wrinkles at the corners of their mouths and cheeks. Their eyebrows may be raised, as if they're in awe. Others nearby should be sitting with their hands clasped together around one knee; some with one knee crossed over the other, resting one hand on their elbow and the other supporting their chin, adorned with a wise-looking beard.

Chap. 160.Of demonstrative Gestures.

The action by which a figure points at any thing near, either in regard to time or situation, is to be expressed by the hand very little removed from the body. But if the same thing is far distant, the hand must also be far removed from the body, and the face of the figure pointing, must be turned towards those to whom he is pointing it out.

The action where a person points to something nearby, whether related to time or location, should be shown with their hand close to their body. However, if the thing being pointed to is far away, the hand should also be extended farther from the body, and the person's face directing the point must be turned towards the people they are indicating it to.

Chap. 161.Of the Attitudes of the By-standers at some remarkable Event.

All those who are present at some event deserving notice, express their admiration, but in various manners. As when the hand of justice punishes some malefactor. If the subject be an act of devotion, the eyes of all present should be directed towards the object of their adoration, aided by a variety of pious actions with the other members; as at the elevation of the host at mass, and other similar ceremonies. If it be a laughable subject, or one exciting compassion and moving to tears, in those cases it will not be necessary for all to have their eyes turned towards the object, but they will express their feelings by different actions; and let there be several assembled in groups, to rejoice or lament together. If the event be terrific, let the faces of those who run away from the fight, be strongly expressive of fright, with various motions; as shall be described in the tract on Motion.

All those who attend an event worth noting show their admiration in different ways. For instance, when justice punishes someone guilty of wrongdoing. If the event involves an act of devotion, everyone’s eyes should focus on the object of their worship, accompanied by various pious actions with others; like during the elevation of the host at mass and similar ceremonies. If it’s something funny or evokes sympathy and brings tears, it won’t be necessary for everyone to look at the object, but they will express their feelings through different actions; and there can be groups gathered to either celebrate or mourn together. If the event is terrifying, the faces of those fleeing from danger should clearly show fear, with various movements; as will be described in the section on Motion.

Chap. 162.How to represent Night.

Those objects which are entirely deprived of light, are lost to the sight, as in the night; therefore if you mean to paint a history under those circumstances, you must suppose a large fire, and those objects that are near it to be tinged with its colour, and the nearer they are the more they will partake of it. The fire being red, all those objects which receive light from it will appear of a reddish colour, and those that are most distant from it will partake of the darkness that surrounds them. The figures which are represented before the fire will appear dark in proportion to the brightness of the fire, because those parts of them which we see, are tinged by that darkness of the night, and not by the light of the fire, which they intercept. Those that are on either side of the fire, will be half in the shade of night, and half in the red light. Those seen beyond the extent of the flames, will be all of a reddish light upon a black ground. In regard to their attitudes, let those who are nearest the fire, make screens of their hands and cloaks, against the scorching heat, with their faces turned on the contrary side, as if ready to run away from it. The most remote will only be shading their eyes with their hands, as if hurt by the too great glare.

Those objects that are completely in the dark can’t be seen, just like at night; so if you want to paint a scene like that, you should imagine a big fire, with objects close to it glowing in its color, and the closer they are, the more colorful they’ll be. Since the fire is red, everything getting light from it will look reddish, while those further away will be wrapped in darkness. The figures in front of the fire will look darker in relation to how bright the fire is because the parts we see are shaded by the surrounding night rather than lit by the fire, which they block. Those on either side of the fire will be partly in the night’s shadows and partly in the red light. Anything seen beyond the reach of the flames will have a reddish glow against a black background. As for their poses, those closest to the fire will be shielding themselves with their hands and cloaks from the heat, facing away as if ready to escape. The ones further back will just be shading their eyes with their hands, as if bothered by the intense brightness.

Chap. 163.The Method of awakening the Mind to a Variety of Inventions.

I will not omit to introduce among these precepts a new kind of speculative invention, which though apparently trifling, and almost laughable, is nevertheless of great utility in assisting the genius to find variety for composition.

I'll not forget to introduce among these guidelines a new type of creative idea, which, although it seems trivial and almost amusing, is still very useful in helping the creative mind discover variety for composition.

By looking attentively at old and smeared walls, or stones and veined marble of various colours, you may fancy that you see in them several compositions, landscapes, battles, figures in quick motion, strange countenances, and dresses, with an infinity of other objects. By these confused lines the inventive genius is excited to new exertions.

By carefully examining old, smudged walls or colorful stones and veined marble, you might imagine you see various scenes, landscapes, battles, figures in motion, unusual faces, and outfits, along with countless other objects. These chaotic patterns inspire the creative mind to new endeavors.

Chap. 164.Of Composition in History.

When the painter has only a single figure to represent, he must avoid any shortening whatever, as well of any particular member, as of the whole figure, because he would have to contend with the prejudices of those who have no knowledge in that branch of the art. But in subjects of history, composed of many figures, shortenings may be introduced with great propriety, nay, they are indispensable, and ought to be used without reserve, as the subject may require; particularly in battles, where of course many shortenings and contortions of figures happen, amongst such an enraged multitude of actors, possessed, as it were, of a brutal madness.

When a painter has just one figure to depict, they need to avoid any shortening, whether of a specific part or the entire figure, because they'll face the biases of those who aren't familiar with that area of art. However, in historical scenes with multiple figures, shortening can be used very effectively, even though it's a must and should be applied freely as the subject demands; especially in battles, where numerous shortenings and distortions of figures naturally occur amidst a frenzied crowd, driven by what seems like a wild madness.


Expression and personality.

Chap. 165.Of expressive Motions.

Let your figures have actions appropriated to what they are intended to think or say, and these will be well learnt by imitating the deaf, who by the motion of their hands, eyes, eyebrows, and the whole body, endeavour to express the sentiments of their mind. Do not ridicule the thought of a master without a tongue teaching you an art he does not understand; he will do it better by his expressive motions, than all the rest by their words and examples. Let then the painter, of whatever school, attend well to this maxim, and apply it to the different qualities of the figures he represents, and to the nature of the subject in which they are actors.

Let your figures express actions that reflect what they are meant to think or say, and you can learn this well by observing the deaf, who use their hands, eyes, eyebrows, and entire bodies to convey their thoughts. Don't underestimate the idea of a master who can't speak teaching you an art he doesn’t fully grasp; he can communicate it better with his expressive movements than others can with their words and examples. Therefore, every painter, no matter their style, should carefully consider this principle and apply it to the different qualities of the figures they depict and the nature of the scenes they are part of.

Chap. 166.How to paint Children.

Children are to be represented with quick and contorted motions, when they are sitting; but when standing, with fearful and timid motions.

Kids should be depicted with fast and awkward movements when they’re sitting, but when they’re standing, they should appear scared and shy.

Chap. 167.How to represent old Men.

Old men must have slow and heavy motions; their legs and knees must be bent when they are standing, and their feet placed parallel and wide asunder. Let them be bowed downwards, the [Pg 86] head leaning much forward, and their arms very little extended.

Old men usually move slowly and heavily; their legs and knees should be bent while standing, with their feet positioned parallel and wide apart. They should be slightly hunched over, with the [Pg 86] head leaning forward and their arms barely extended.

Chap. 168.How to paint old Women.

Old women, on the contrary, are to be represented bold and quick, with passionate motions, like furies [33]. But the motions are to appear a great deal quicker in their arms than in their legs.

Vintage women, on the other hand, should be portrayed as bold and swift, with passionate movements, like furies [33]. However, their arm movements should appear much quicker than those of their legs.

Chap. 169.How to paint Women.

Women are to be represented in modest and reserved attitudes, with their knees rather close, their arms drawing near each other, or folded about the body; their heads looking downwards, and leaning a little on one side.

Women should be depicted with modest and reserved postures, with their knees close together, their arms drawn in or folded across their bodies; their heads should be lowered, and inclined slightly to one side.

Chap. 170.Of the Variety of Faces.

The countenances of your figures should be expressive of their different situations: men at work, at rest, weeping, laughing, crying out, in fear, or joy, and the like. The attitudes also, and all the members, ought to correspond with the sentiment expressed in the faces.

The faces of your characters should reflect their different situations: men working, resting, crying, laughing, shouting, in fear, or experiencing joy, and so on. Their postures and all their body parts should also match the emotions shown in their faces.

Chap.171.The Parts of the Face, and their Motions.

The motions of the different parts of the face, occasioned by sudden agitations of the mind, are[Pg 87] many. The principal of these are, Laughter, Weeping, Calling out, Singing, either in a high or low pitch, Admiration, Anger, Joy, Sadness, Fear, Pain, and others, of which I propose to treat. First, of Laughing and Weeping, which are very similar in the motion of the mouth, the cheeks, the shutting of the eyebrows, and the space between them; as we shall explain in its place, in treating of the changes which happen in the face, hands, fingers, and all the other parts of the body, as they are affected by the different emotions of the soul; the knowledge of which is absolutely necessary to a painter, or else his figures may be said to be twice dead. But it is very necessary also that he be careful not to fall into the contrary extreme; giving extraordinary motions to his figures, so that in a quiet and peaceable subject, he does not seem to represent a battle, or the revellings of drunken men: but, above all, the actors in any point of history must be attentive to what they are about, or to what is going forward; with actions that denote admiration, respect, pain, suspicion, fear, and joy, according as the occasion, for which they are brought together, may require. Endeavour that different points of history be not placed one above the other on the same canvass, nor walls with different horizons [34], as if it were a jeweller’s shop, shewing the goods in different square caskets.

The movements of various parts of the face, triggered by sudden changes in our emotions, are[Pg 87] numerous. The main ones are Laughter, Weeping, Calling out, Singing, whether in a high or low tone, Admiration, Anger, Joy, Sadness, Fear, Pain, and others that I will discuss. First, let’s look at Laughing and Weeping, which are quite similar in how the mouth, cheeks, and eyebrows move, along with the space between them; as we will elaborate on when we cover the changes that occur in the face, hands, fingers, and all other parts of the body, influenced by different emotions of the mind. Understanding this is essential for a painter; otherwise, their figures could be considered lifeless. However, it’s also crucial that they don't go to the opposite extreme, giving exaggerated movements to their figures, so that in a calm and peaceful scene, it doesn’t appear like they’re depicting a battle or the chaos of drunk people. Above all, the actors in any historical scene must pay attention to what they are doing and what is happening around them, showing actions that express admiration, respect, pain, suspicion, fear, and joy, based on the situation they are in. Make sure that different historical moments aren't layered over each other on the same canvas, nor should there be walls with different perspectives[34], like a jeweler’s shop displaying items in separate square boxes.

Chap. 172.Laughing and Weeping.

Between the expression of laughter and that of weeping there is no difference in the motion of the features either in the eyes, mouth, or cheeks; only in the ruffling of the brows, which is added when weeping, but more elevated and extended in laughing. One may represent the figure weeping as tearing his clothes, or some other expression, as various as the cause of his feeling may be; because some weep for anger, some through fear, others for tenderness and joy, or for suspicion; some for real pain and torment; whilst others weep through compassion, or regret at the loss of some friend and near relation. These different feelings will be expressed by some with marks of despair, by others with moderation; some only shed tears, others cry aloud, while another has his face turned towards heaven, with his hand depressed, and his fingers twisted. Some again will be full of apprehension, with their shoulders raised up to their ears, and so on, according to the above causes.

Between laughing and crying, there’s no difference in the way our features move, whether it’s our eyes, mouth, or cheeks; only the brows change, furrowing when we cry, but rising and widening when we laugh. One might show someone crying by tearing their clothes or using various expressions, depending on what’s causing their emotions; some cry out of anger, some out of fear, others from tenderness and joy, or even suspicion; some shed tears from real pain and suffering, while others weep out of compassion or regret for a lost friend or loved one. These different feelings can be shown in various ways: some display despair, others keep it together; some just cry quietly, others wail loudly, while someone else might look up to the sky with their hand down and fingers twisted. Some will appear anxious, with their shoulders raised to their ears, and so on, depending on the reasons above.

Those who weep, raise the brows, and bring them close together above the nose, forming many wrinkles on the forehead, and the corners of the mouth are turned downwards. Those who laugh have them turned upwards, and the brows open and extended.

Those who cry furrow their brows and bring them together above the nose, creating plenty of wrinkles on their forehead, and the corners of their mouths turn down. Those who laugh have their mouths turned up, and their brows are relaxed and stretched out.

Chap. 173.Of Anger.

If you represent a man in a violent fit of anger, make him seize another by the hair, holding his head writhed down against the ground, with his knee fixed upon the ribs of his antagonist; his right arm up, and his fist ready to strike; his hair standing on end, his eyebrows low and straight; his teeth close, and seen at the corner of the mouth; his neck swelled, and his body covered in the Abdomen with creases, occasioned by his bending over his enemy, and the excess of his passion.

If you depict a man in a fit of anger, show him grabbing another by the hair, forcing his head down against the ground, with his knee pressed on his opponent's ribs; his right arm raised, fist ready to strike; hair standing on end, eyebrows furrowed; teeth clenched, visible at the corner of his mouth; neck strained, and his body marked by creases in the abdomen from leaning over his enemy and the intensity of his rage.

Chap. 174.Despair.

The last act of despondency is, when a man is in the act of putting a period to his own existence. He should be represented with a knife in one hand, with which he has already inflicted the wound, and tearing it open with the other. His garments and hair should be already torn. He will be standing with his feet asunder, his knees a little bent, and his body leaning forward, as if ready to fall to the ground.

The final act of despair occurs when someone is attempting to end their own life. They should be depicted with a knife in one hand, having already inflicted the injury, and ripping it open with the other. Their clothes and hair should be disheveled. They will be standing with their feet apart, knees slightly bent, and body leaning forward, as if about to collapse to the ground.


LIGHT and SHADOW.


Chap. 175.The Course of Study to be pursued.

The student who is desirous of making great proficiency in the art of imitating the works of Nature, should not only learn the shape of figures or other objects, and be able to delineate them with truth and precision, but he must also accompany them with their proper lights and shadows, according to the situation in which those objects appear.

The student who wants to excel in mimicking the works of Nature should not only learn the shapes of figures or other objects and be able to depict them accurately, but they must also include the right highlights and shadows based on how those objects are positioned.

Chap. 176.Which of the two is the most useful Knowledge, the Outlines of Figures, or that of Light and Shadow.

The knowledge of the outline is of most consequence, and yet may be acquired to great certainty by dint of study; as the outlines of the different parts of the human figure, particularly those which do not bend, are invariably the same. But the knowledge of the situation, quality, and quantity of shadows, being infinite, requires the most extensive study.

The understanding of the outline is very important, and it can be learned with a lot of practice; the outlines of the different parts of the human body, especially those that don’t bend, are always the same. However, understanding the position, quality, and amount of shadows is limitless and needs a lot more in-depth study.

Chap. 177.Which is the most important, the Shadows or Outlines in Painting.

It requires much more observation and study to arrive at perfection in the shadowing of a picture,[Pg 91] than in merely drawing the lines of it. The proof of this is, that the lines may be traced upon a veil or a flat glass placed between the eye and the object to be imitated. But that cannot be of any use in shadowing, on account of the infinite gradation of shades, and the blending of them, which does not allow of any precise termination; and most frequently they are confused, as will be demonstrated in another place [35].

It takes a lot more observation and study to achieve perfection in shadowing a picture,[Pg 91] than just sketching its lines. The proof of this is that the lines can be traced on a veil or flat glass placed between your eye and the object you want to replicate. However, this method is useless for shadowing because of the countless variations of shades and how they blend together, which makes it impossible to define any clear boundaries; often, they merge in a way that will be explained further on[35].

Chap. 178.What is a Painter’s first Aim, and Object.

The first object of a painter is to make a simple flat surface appear like a relievo, and some of its parts detached from the ground; he who excels all others in that part of the art, deserves the greatest praise. This perfection of the art depends on the correct distribution of lights and shades, called Chiaro-scuro. If the painter then avoids shadows, he may be said to avoid the glory of the art, and to render his work despicable to real connoisseurs, for the sake of acquiring the esteem of vulgar and ignorant admirers of fine colours, who never have any knowledge of relievo.

The main goal of a painter is to make a flat surface look three-dimensional and some of its parts appear to pop out. The artist who is best at this deserves the highest praise. This mastery of the craft relies on the proper use of light and shadow, known as Chiaro-scuro. If the painter avoids shadows, they essentially shy away from the true beauty of the art, making their work unworthy in the eyes of true experts, all to gain approval from ordinary and uninformed fans of vibrant colors, who have no understanding of three-dimensionality.

Chap. 179.The Difference of Superficies, in regard to Painting.

Solid bodies are of two sorts: the one has the surface curvilinear, oval, or spherical; the other has[Pg 92] several surfaces, or sides producing angles, either regular or irregular. Spherical, or oval bodies, will always appear detached from their ground, though they are exactly of the same colour. Bodies also of different sides and angles will always detach, because they are always disposed so as to produce shades on some of their sides, which cannot happen to a plain superficies[36].

Solid objects come in two types: one has a curved, oval, or spherical surface; the other has [Pg 92] multiple surfaces or sides that create angles, whether regular or irregular. Spherical or oval objects always seem separate from their background, even if they are the same color. Objects with different sides and angles will also stand out because they are arranged in a way that creates shadows on some of their sides, which doesn’t happen with a flat surface[36].

Chap. 180.How a Painter may become universal.

The painter who wishes to be universal, and please a variety of judges, must unite in the same composition, objects susceptible of great force in the shadows, and great sweetness in the management of them; accounting, however, in every instance, for such boldness and softenings.

The painter who wants to be recognized by everyone and appeal to different kinds of critics must combine in the same piece objects that display both powerful shadows and gentle handling; while, in each case, being mindful of that boldness and softness.

Chap. 181.Accuracy ought to be learnt before Dispatch in the Execution.

If you wish to make good and useful studies, use great deliberation in your drawings, observe well among the lights which, and how many, hold the first rank in point of brightness; and so among the shadows, which are darker than others, and in what manner they blend together; compare the quality and quantity of one with the other, and observe to what part they are directed. Be careful also in your outlines, or divisions of the members. Remark well what quantity of parts are to be on one side, and [Pg 93] what on the other; and where they are more or less apparent, or broad, or slender. Lastly, take care that the shadows and lights be united, or lost in each other; without any hard strokes, or lines: as smoke loses itself in the air, so are your lights and shadows to pass from the one to the other, without any apparent separation.

If you want to create good and useful studies, take your time with your drawings. Pay close attention to the highlights; identify which are the brightest and how many there are. Do the same with the shadows—notice which ones are darker and how they blend together. Compare their quality and quantity, and see where they’re directed. Be careful with your outlines and divisions of parts. Notice how many parts are on one side versus the other, and where they appear more or less prominent, broad, or narrow. Lastly, ensure that the shadows and highlights seamlessly blend into each other; avoid any harsh strokes or lines. Just as smoke dissolves into the air, your lights and shadows should transition smoothly, without any noticeable separation.

When you have acquired the habit, and formed your hand to accuracy, quickness of execution will come of itself [37].

When you’ve developed the habit and trained your hand for precision, speed will follow naturally [37].

Chap. 182.How the Painter is to place himself in regard to the Light, and his Model.

Let A B be the window, M the centre of it, C the model. The best situation for the painter will be a little sideways, between the window and his model, as D, so that he may see his object partly in the light and partly in the shadow.

Let A B be the window, M the center of it, C the model. The ideal position for the painter is slightly off to the side, between the window and the model, like at D, so that he can see his subject partly in the light and partly in the shadow.

Painter, Light, and Model

Chap. 183.Of the best Light.

The light from on high, and not too powerful, will be found the best calculated to shew the parts to advantage.

The light from above, which isn't too bright, will be the most effective for highlighting the features favorably.

Chap. 184.Of Drawing by Candle-light.

To this artificial light apply a paper blind, and you will see the shadows undetermined and soft.

To this artificial light, add a paper blind, and you will see the shadows unclear and soft.

Chap. 185.Of those Painters who draw at Home from one Light, and afterwards adapt their Studies to another Situation in the Country, and a different Light.

It is a great error in some painters who draw a figure from Nature at home, by any particular light, and afterwards make use of that drawing in a picture representing an open country, which receives the general light of the sky, where the surrounding air gives light on all sides. This painter would put dark shadows, where Nature would either produce none, or, if any, so very faint as to be almost imperceptible; and he would throw reflected lights where it is impossible there should be any.

It's a big mistake for some painters to create a figure from nature at home using a specific light and then use that drawing in a painting of an open landscape that gets light from the sky, where the surrounding atmosphere provides light from all directions. This painter would add dark shadows in places where nature would produce none, or where any shadows would be so faint they're barely noticeable; and he would include reflected lights where it's impossible for there to be any.

Chap. 186.How high the Light should be in drawing from Nature.

To paint well from Nature, your window should be to the North, that the lights may not vary. If it be to the South, you must have paper blinds, that the sun, in going round, may not alter the shadows. The situation of the light should be such as to produce upon the ground a shadow from your model as long as that is high.

To paint well from Nature, your window should face North, so the light remains consistent. If it faces South, you need to use paper blinds, so the moving sun doesn't change the shadows. The light should be positioned to create a shadow on the ground that is as long as your model is tall.

Chap. 187.What Light the Painter must make use of to give most Relief to his Figures.

The figures which receive a particular light shew more relief than those which receive an universal one; because the particular light occasions some reflexes, which proceed from the light of one object upon the shadows of another, and helps to detach it from the dark ground. But a figure placed in front of a dark and large space, and receiving a particular light, can receive no reflexion from any other objects, and nothing is seen of the figure but what the light strikes on, the rest being blended and lost in the darkness of the back ground. This is to be applied only to the imitation of night subjects with very little light.

The figures that get specific lighting show more depth than those that receive general lighting; that's because the specific light creates reflections, which come from one object's light hitting the shadows of another, helping to separate it from the dark background. However, a figure positioned in front of a large, dark space and receiving specific light can’t reflect off any other objects, so you only see the parts that the light hits, while the rest fades into the darkness of the background. This concept should only be applied to the portrayal of nighttime scenes with very little light.

Chap. 188.Advice to Painters.

Be very careful, in painting, to observe, that between the shadows there are other shadows, almost imperceptible, both for darkness and shape; and this is proved by the third proposition [38], which says, that the surfaces of globular or convex bodies have as great a variety of lights and shadows as the bodies that surround them have.

Be very careful when painting to notice that between the shadows, there are other shadows that are almost unnoticed, both in their darkness and shape; and this is demonstrated by the third proposition [38], which states that the surfaces of round or curved objects have just as much variety of light and shadow as the objects around them do.

Chap. 189.Of Shadows.

Those shadows which in Nature are undetermined, and the extremities of which can hardly be perceived, are to be copied in your painting in the same manner, never to be precisely finished, but left confused and blended. This apparent neglect will shew great judgment, and be the ingenious result of your observation of Nature.

Those shadows in Nature that are vague, and whose edges are hard to see, should be represented in your painting in the same way—never completely defined, but instead left messy and mixed. This deliberate choice will show great skill and be a clever outcome of your observation of Nature.

Chap. 290.Of the Kind of Light proper for drawing from Relievos, or from Nature.

Lights separated from the shadows with too much precision, have a very bad effect. In order, therefore, to avoid this inconvenience, if the object be in the open country, you need not let your figures be illumined by the sun; but may suppose some transparent clouds interposed, so that the sun not being visible, the termination of the shadows will be also imperceptible and soft.

Lights that are too sharply separated from shadows create a negative effect. To avoid this problem, if the scene is outdoors, don't let your figures be directly lit by the sun; instead, imagine some transparent clouds in the way, so that the sun isn't visible and the edges of the shadows become soft and less noticeable.

Chap. 191.Whether the Light should be admitted in Front or sideways; and which is most pleasing and graceful.

The light admitted in front of heads situated opposite to side walls that are dark, will cause them to have great relievo, particularly if the light be placed high; and the reason is, that the most prominent parts of those faces are illumined by the general light striking them in front, which light produces very [Pg 97] faint shadows on the part where it strikes; but as it turns towards the sides, it begins to participate of the dark shadows of the room, which grow darker in proportion as it sinks into them. Besides, when the light comes from on high, it does not strike on every part of the face alike, but one part produces great shadows upon another; as the eyebrows, which deprive the whole sockets of the eyes of light. The nose keeps it off from great part of the mouth, and the chin from the neck, and such other parts. This, by concentrating the light upon the most projecting parts, produces a very great relief.

The light that comes in front of faces positioned opposite dark side walls creates a strong contrast, especially if the light source is high. This happens because the most prominent features of those faces are lit up by the direct light, which casts very[Pg 97] subtle shadows where it hits. However, as the light travels toward the sides, it starts picking up the darker shadows in the room, which become deeper as it blends into them. Additionally, when the light comes from above, it doesn’t hit all parts of the face evenly, causing some areas to cast significant shadows on others; for example, the eyebrows block light from reaching the eye sockets. The nose shades a large portion of the mouth, and the chin casts shadows onto the neck and other areas. This effect, by concentrating the light on the most prominent features, creates a strong sense of depth.

Chap. 192.Of the Difference of Lights according to the Situation.

A small light will cast large and determined shadows upon the surrounding bodies. A large light, on the contrary, will cast small shadows on them, and they will be much confused in their termination. When a small but strong light is surrounded by a broad but weaker light, the latter will appear like a demi-tint to the other, as the sky round the sun. And the bodies which receive the light from the one, will serve as demi-tints to those which receive the light from the other.

A tiny light creates bold and distinct shadows on the nearby objects. A large light, on the other hand, will produce faint shadows on them, making them unclear at the edges. When a small but powerful light is surrounded by a wider but weaker light, the broader light will seem like a dim shade compared to the smaller one, just like the sky around the sun. The objects that get light from the small source will act as dim shades to those that receive light from the larger source.

Chap. 193.How to distribute the Light on Figures.

The lights are to be distributed according to the natural situation you mean your figures should occupy. If you suppose them in sunshine, the shades must be dark, the lights broad and extended, and [Pg 98] the shadows of all the surrounding objects distinctly marked upon the ground. If seen in a gloomy day, there will be very little difference between the lights and shades, and no shadows at the feet. If the figures be represented within doors, the lights and shadows will again be distinctly divided, and produce shadows on the ground. But if you suppose a paper blind at the window, and the walls painted white, the effect will be the same as in a gloomy day, when the lights and shadows have little difference. If the figures are enlightened by the fire, the lights must be red and powerful, the shadows dark, and the shadows upon the ground and upon the walls must be precise; observing that they spread wider as they go off from the body. If the figures be enlightened, partly by the sky and partly by the fire, that side which receives the light from the sky will be the brightest, and on the other side it will be reddish, somewhat of the colour of the fire. Above all, contrive, that your figures receive a broad light, and that from above; particularly in portraits, because the people we see in the street receive all the light from above; and it is curious to observe, that there is not a face ever so well known amongst your acquaintance, but would be recognised with difficulty, if it were enlightened from beneath.

The lights should be arranged based on the natural setting where you imagine your figures will be. If you envision them in sunlight, the shadows should be deep, the lights broad and spread out, and [Pg 98] the shadows of nearby objects should be clearly defined on the ground. If it's a gloomy day, the difference between the lights and shadows will be minimal, with no shadows at the feet. If the figures are indoors, the lights and shadows will again be clearly separated, casting shadows on the ground. But if you imagine a paper blind at the window and the walls painted white, the effect will be similar to a gloomy day, with little difference between the lights and shadows. If the figures are lit by a fire, the lights should be red and intense, the shadows dark, and the shadows on the ground and walls should be clear, spreading wider as they move away from the body. If the figures are lit partly by the sky and partly by the fire, the side receiving light from the sky will be the brightest, while the other side will have a reddish tint, similar to the fire. Most importantly, make sure your figures receive broad light from above; especially in portraits, since people we see on the street get all their light from above. It's interesting to note that even the most familiar faces among your acquaintances would be hard to recognize if lit from below.

Chap. 194.Of the Beauty of Faces.

You must not mark any muscles with hardness of line, but let the soft light glide upon them, and terminate imperceptibly in delightful shadows: from this will arise grace and beauty to the face.

You shouldn't outline any muscles sharply; instead, let soft light flow over them and fade gently into pleasing shadows: this will bring grace and beauty to the face.

Chap. 195.How, in drawing a Face, to give it Grace, by the Management of Light and Shade.

A face placed in the dark part of a room, acquires great additional grace by means of light and shadow. The shadowed part of the face blends with the darkness of the ground, and the light part receives an increase of brightness from the open air, the shadows on this side becoming almost insensible; and from this augmentation of light and shadow, the face has much relief, and acquires great beauty.

A profile positioned in the dim area of a room gains significant added elegance through light and shadow. The shaded part of the face merges with the darkness of the floor, while the illuminated part takes on extra brightness from the surrounding light, making the shadows on this side nearly imperceptible; as a result of this enhancement of light and shadow, the face appears more three-dimensional and incredibly beautiful.

Chap. 196.How to give Grace and Relief to Faces.

In streets running towards the west, when the sun is in the meridian, and the walls on each side so high that they cast no reflexions on that side of the bodies which is in shade, and the sky is not too bright, we find the most advantageous situation for giving relief and grace to figures, particularly to faces; because both sides of the face will participate of the shadows of the walls. The sides of the nose and the face towards the west, will be light, and the man whom we suppose placed at the entrance, and in the middle of the street, will see all the parts of that face, which are before him, perfectly illumined, while both sides of it, towards the walls, will be in shadow. What gives additional grace is, that these shades do not appear cutting, hard, or dry, but softly blended and lost in each other. The reason of it is, [Pg 100] that the light which is spread all over in the air, strikes also the pavement of the street, and reflecting upon the shady part of the face, it tinges that slightly with the same hue: while the great light which comes from above being confined by the tops of houses, strikes on the face from different points, almost to the very beginning of the shadows under the projecting parts of the face. It diminishes by degrees the strength of them, increasing the light till it comes upon the chin, where it terminates, and loses itself, blending softly into the shades on all sides. For instance, if such light were A E, the line F E would give light even to the bottom of the nose. The line C F will give light only to the under lip; but the line A H would extend the shadow to all the under parts of the face, and under the chin.

In streets that run westward, when the sun is at its peak and the walls on either side are so tall that they don’t cast reflections on the shaded side of people, and the sky isn’t overly bright, we find the best conditions for showing off and enhancing figures, especially faces. This is because both sides of the face will benefit from the shadows cast by the walls. The side of the nose and the face facing west will be lit, and the person we imagine standing at the entrance, in the middle of the street, will see all the parts of the face in front of him perfectly illuminated, while the sides closer to the walls will be in shadow. What adds to the beauty is that these shadows don’t appear harsh or stark, but are softly blended and merged with one another. The reason for this is,[Pg 100] that the light spread throughout the air also hits the pavement, reflecting onto the shaded part of the face and tinting it lightly with the same tone. Meanwhile, the strong light from above, being restricted by the rooftops, hits the face from various angles, almost reaching the beginning of the shadows created by the protruding parts of the face. It gradually softens the intensity of the shadows, increasing the light until it reaches the chin, where it ends and seamlessly blends into the shades all around. For example, if such light were represented by line A E, line F E would provide light even to the bottom of the nose. Line C F would illuminate only the lower lip, but line A H would extend the shadow to all the lower parts of the face, including under the chin.

In this situation the nose receives a very strong light from all the points A B C D E.

In this situation, the nose gets a very strong light from all the points A, B, C, D, and E.

Faces

Chap. 197.Of the Termination of Bodies upon each other.

When a body, of a cylindrical or convex surface, terminates upon another body of the same colour, it will appear darker on the edge, than the body upon which it terminates. And any flat body, adjacent to a white surface, will appear very dark; but upon a dark ground it will appear lighter than any other part, though the lights be equal.

When a body with a cylindrical or rounded surface meets another body of the same color, the edge will look darker than the body it touches. And any flat object next to a white surface will look very dark; but on a dark background, it will look lighter than any other part, even if the light levels are the same.

Chap. 198.Of the Back-grounds of painted Objects.

The ground which surrounds the figures in any painting, ought to be darker than the light part of those figures, and lighter than the shadowed part.

The area around the figures in any painting should be darker than the light areas of those figures and lighter than the shadowed areas.

Chap. 299.How to detach and bring forward Figures out of their Back-ground.

If your figure be dark, place it on a light ground; if it be light, upon a dark ground; and if it be partly light and partly dark, as is generally the case, contrive that the dark part of the figure be upon the light part of the ground, and the light side of it against the dark [39].

If your figure is dark, put it on a light background; if it's light, place it on a dark background; and if it's a mix of light and dark, which is usually the case, make sure the dark part of the figure is on the light part of the background, and the light side of it is against the dark [39].

Chap. 200.Of proper Back-grounds.

It is of the greatest importance to consider well the nature of back-grounds, upon which any opake [Pg 102] body is to be placed. In order to detach it properly, you should place the light part of such opake body against the dark part of the back-ground, and the dark parts on a light ground[40]; as in the cut [41].

It is extremely important to carefully consider the type of backgrounds where any opaque [Pg 102] object will be placed. To properly separate it, you should position the lighter parts of the opaque object against the darker parts of the background, and the darker parts on a lighter background[40]; as shown in the image[41].

Back-grounds

Chap. 151.Of the general Light diffused over Figures.

In compositions of many figures and animals, observe, that the parts of these different objects ought to be darker in proportion as they are lower, and as they are nearer the middle of the groups, though they are all of an uniform colour. This is necessary, because a smaller portion of the sky (from which all[Pg 103] bodies are illuminated) can give light to the lower spaces between these different figures, than to the upper parts of the spaces. It is proved thus: A B C D is that portion of the sky which gives light to all the objects beneath; M and N are the bodies which occupy the space S T R H, in which it is evidently perceived, that the point F, receiving the light only from the portion of the sky C D, has a smaller quantity of it than the point E which receives it from the whole space A B (a larger portion than C D); therefore it will be lighter in E than in F.

In compositions featuring multiple figures and animals, note that the parts of these different objects should be darker where they are lower and closer to the center of the groups, even if they all share the same color. This is important because a smaller portion of the sky (which is the source of light for all[Pg 103] bodies) illuminates the lower areas between these figures less than it does the upper parts. This can be demonstrated as follows: A B C D represents the section of the sky that provides light to all the objects below; M and N are the bodies occupying the space S T R H. It is clearly observable that point F, which only receives light from the section of the sky C D, gets less light than point E, which receives it from the entire area A B (a larger section than C D); therefore, E will be lighter than F.

Diffused Light

Chap. 202.Of those Parts in Shadows which appear the darkest at a Distance.

Darkest Shadows

The neck, or any other part which is raised straight upwards, and has a projection over it, will be darker than the perpendicular front of that projection; and this projecting part will be lighter, in proportion as it presents a larger surface to the light. For instance, the recess A receives no light from any part of the sky G K, but B begins to receive the light from the part of the sky H K, and C from G K; and the point D receives the whole of F K. Therefore the chest will be as light as the forehead, nose, and chin. But what I have particularly to recommend, in regard to faces, is, that you observe well those different qualities of shades which are lost at different distances (while there remain only the first and principal spots or strokes of shades, such as those of the sockets of the eyes, and other similar recesses, which are always dark), and at last the whole face becomes obscured; because the greatest lights (being small in proportion to the demi-tints) are lost. The quality, therefore, and quantity of the principal [Pg 105] lights and shades are by means of great distance blended together into a general half-tint; and this is the reason why trees and other objects are found to be in appearance darker at some distance than they are in reality, when nearer to the eye. But then the air, which interposes between the objects and the eye, will render them light again by tinging them with azure, rather in the shades than in the lights; for the lights will preserve the truth of the different colours much longer.

The neck or any other part that stands straight up and has a projection above it will appear darker than the upright front of that projection. The projecting part will be lighter, depending on how much surface it shows to the light. For example, the recess A doesn’t get any light from the sky G K, but B starts receiving light from the part of the sky H K, and C from G K; while the point D gets all the light from F K. Therefore, the chest will appear as light as the forehead, nose, and chin. What I particularly want to emphasize about faces is that you should pay close attention to the various shades that fade at different distances (as only the main spots or strokes of shadows remain visible, like the sockets of the eyes and other similar recesses that are always dark), and eventually, the entire face becomes obscured; because the brightest highlights (being small compared to the mid-tones) are lost. Thus, the quality and amount of the main [Pg 105] lights and shadows blend into an overall half-tone due to great distance; and that’s why trees and other objects seem darker from a distance than they actually are when seen up close. However, the air that lies between the objects and the eye makes them appear lighter by tinting them with blue, mostly affecting the shadows rather than the highlights; since the highlights maintain their true colors much longer.

Chap. 203.Of the Eye viewing the Folds of Draperies surrounding a Figure.

The shadows between the folds of a drapery surrounding the parts of the human body will be darker as the deep hollows where the shadows are generated are more directly opposite the eye. This is to be observed only when the eye is placed between the light and the shady part of the figure.

The shadows in the folds of a curtain covering parts of the human body will appear darker because the deep indentations where the shadows form are more directly in line with the viewer's eye. This is only noticeable when the eye is positioned between the light source and the shaded area of the figure.

Chap. 204.Of the Relief of Figures remote from the Eye.

Any opake body appears less relieved in proportion as it is farther distant from the eye; because the air, interposed between the eye and such body, being lighter than the shadow of it, it tarnishes and weakens that shadow, lessens its power, and consequently lessens also its relief.

Any opaque object looks less defined the farther away it is from the eye; this is because the air between the eye and the object, being lighter than its shadow, dulls and weakens that shadow, reduces its intensity, and as a result, diminishes its sense of depth.

Chap. 205.Of Outlines of Objects on the Side towards the Light.

The extremities of any object on the side which receives the light, will appear darker if upon a lighter ground, and lighter if seen upon a darker ground. But if such body be flat, and seen upon a ground equal in point of light with itself, and of the same colour, such boundaries, or outlines, will be entirely lost to the sight [42].

The edges of any object facing the light will look darker against a lighter background and lighter against a darker one. However, if the object is flat and viewed against a background that has the same light level and color, its boundaries or outlines will completely disappear from view. [42].

Chap. 206.How to make Objects detach from their Ground, that is to say, from the Surface on which they are painted.

Objects contrasted with a light ground will appear much more detached than those which are placed against a dark one. The reason is, that if you wish to give relief to your figures, you will make those parts which are the farthest from the light, participate the least of it; therefore they will remain the darkest, and every distinction of outline would be lost in the general mass of shadows. But to give it grace, roundness, and effect, those dark shades are always attended by reflexes, or else they would either cut too hard upon the ground, or stick to it, by the similarity of shade, and relieve the less as the ground is darker; for at some distance nothing would be seen[Pg 107] but the light parts, therefore your figures would appear mutilated of all that remains lost in the back-ground.

Items set against a light background appear much more separated than those placed against a dark one. This is because if you want to give depth to your figures, you should make the parts farthest from the light receive the least amount of it; as a result, they will stay the darkest, and any outline distinctions would be lost in the overall shadow. However, to give it elegance, roundness, and effect, those dark areas are always accompanied by reflections; otherwise, they would either stand out too sharply against the background or blend in due to similar shades, providing less contrast as the background gets darker. From a distance, only the light parts would be visible[Pg 107], making your figures look incomplete as everything else would be lost in the background.


CONTRASTE AND EFFECT.

Chap. 207.A Precept.

Figures will have more grace, placed in the open and general light, than in any particular or small one; because the powerful and extended light will surround and embrace the objects: and works done in that kind of light appear pleasant and graceful when placed at a distance[43], while those which are drawn in a narrow light, will receive great force of shadow, but will never appear at a great distance, but as painted objects.

Stats will look more graceful when exposed to broad, natural light rather than in limited, small lighting. The strong, widespread light will envelop and highlight the objects, making works created in that type of light seem attractive and elegant from afar[43], whereas those made in a confined light will have pronounced shadows but will appear merely as painted objects from a distance.

Chap. 208.Of the Interposition of transparent Bodies between the Eye and the Object.

The greater the transparent interposition is between the eye and the object, the more the colour of that object will participate of, or be changed into that of the transparent medium [44].

The more transparent the medium is between the eye and the object, the more the color of that object will be influenced by or changed to match the color of the transparent medium [44].

When an opake body is situated between the eye and the luminary, so that the central line of the one passes also through the centre of the other, that object will be entirely deprived of light.

When an opaque object is positioned between the eye and the light source, such that the central line of one passes through the center of the other, that object will be completely blocked from light.

Chap. 209.Of proper Back-grounds for Figures.

As we find by experience, that all bodies are surrounded by lights and shadows, I would have the painter to accommodate that part which is enlightened, so as to terminate upon something dark; and to manage the dark parts so that they may terminate on a light ground. This will be of great assistance in detaching and bringing out his figures[45].

As we learn from experience, all objects are surrounded by light and shadow. I would suggest that the painter adjust the lit areas so they end on something dark, and handle the dark areas so they end on a light background. This will greatly help in making the figures stand out.[45]

Chap. 210.Of Back-grounds.

To give a great effect to figures, you must oppose to a light one a dark ground, and to a dark figure a light ground, contrasting white with black, and black with white. In general, all contraries give a particular force and brilliancy of effect by their opposition[46].

To create a strong impact with figures, you need to place a dark background against a light figure, and a light background against a dark figure, contrasting white with black, and black with white. Overall, opposing elements enhance the intensity and brilliance of the effect they create by their contrast.[46].


REFLEXES.

Chap. 211.Of Objects placed on a light Ground, and why such a Practice is useful in Painting.

When a darkish body terminates upon a light ground, it will appear detached from that ground; because all opake bodies of a curved surface are not only dark on that side which receives no light, and consequently very different from the ground; but even that side of the curved surface which is enlightened, will not carry its principal light to the extremities, but have between the ground and the principal light a certain demi-tint, darker than either the ground or that light.

When a dark object is placed against a light background, it will look separate from that background; this is because all opaque objects with a curved surface not only appear dark on the side that doesn’t receive light, making them quite different from the background, but even the side of the curved surface that is lit won’t transfer its main light to the edges. Instead, there will be a kind of shaded area between the background and the main light, which is darker than both the background and the light.

Chap. 212.Of the different Effects of White, according to the Difference of Back-grounds.

Any thing white will appear whiter, by being opposed to a dark ground; and, on the contrary, darker upon a light ground. This we learn from observing snow as it falls; while it is descending it appears darker against the sky, than when we see it against an open window, which (owing to the darkness of the inside of the house) makes it appear very white. Observe also, that snow appears to fall very quick and in a great quantity when near the eye; but when at some distance, it seems to come down slowly, and in a smaller quantity [47].

Anything white looks whiter against a dark background; conversely, it appears darker against a light background. We see this when watching snow as it falls; while it's descending, it looks darker against the sky than when we see it next to an open window, which, due to the darkness inside the house, makes it look very white. Also, notice that snow seems to fall quickly and in large amounts when it's close to our eyes, but from a distance, it appears to fall slowly and in smaller amounts [47].

Chap. 213.Of Reverberation.

Reverberations are produced by all bodies of a bright nature, that have a smooth and tolerably hard surface, which, repelling the light it receives, makes it rebound like a foot-ball against the first object opposed to it.

Echoes are created by all bright surfaces that are smooth and fairly hard, which, by reflecting the light they receive, cause it to bounce back like a soccer ball hitting the first object in its way.

Chap. 214.Where there cannot be any Reverberation of Light.

The surfaces of hard bodies are surrounded by various qualities of light and shadow. The lights are of two sorts; one is called original, the other derivative. The original light is that which comes from the sun, or the brightness of fire, or else from the air. The derivative is a reflected light. But to return to our definition, I say, there can be no reflexion on that side which is turned towards any dark body; such as roofs, either high or low, shrubs, grass, wood, either dry or green; because, though every individual part of those objects be turned towards the original light, and struck by it; yet the quantity of shadow which every one of these parts produces upon the others, is so great, that, upon the whole, the light, not forming a compact mass, loses its effect, so that those objects cannot reflect any light upon the opposite bodies.

The surfaces of solid objects are surrounded by different qualities of light and shadow. There are two types of light; one is called original, and the other is derivative. The original light comes from the sun, the brightness of fire, or the air. The derivative is the reflected light. But to get back to our definition, there's no reflection on the side facing any dark object, such as roofs, whether high or low, shrubs, grass, or wood, whether dry or green. Even though each individual part of these objects faces the original light and is illuminated by it, the amount of shadow cast by each part onto the others is so significant that, overall, the light doesn't form a compact mass and loses its effect, meaning those objects can't reflect any light onto the opposite bodies.

Chap. 215.In what Part the Reflexes have more or less Brightness.

The reflected lights will be more or less apparent or bright, in proportion as they are seen against a darker or fainter ground; because if the ground be darker than the reflex, then this reflex will appear stronger on account of the great difference of colour. But, on the contrary, if this reflexion has behind it a ground lighter than itself, it will appear dark, in comparison to the brightness which is close to it, and therefore it will be hardly perceptible [48].

The reflected lights will appear brighter or dimmer depending on how they contrast with a darker or lighter background. If the background is darker than the reflection, the reflection will look stronger due to the significant color difference. However, if the reflection is set against a lighter background, it will seem dark in comparison to the nearby brightness, making it hard to notice. [48].

Chap. 216.Of the reflected Lights which surround the Shadows.

The reflected lights which strike upon the midst of shadows, will brighten up or lessen their obscurity in proportion to the strength of those lights, and their proximity to those shadows. Many painters neglect this observation, while others attend to and deduce their practice from it. This difference of opinion and practice divides the sentiments of artists, so that they blame each other for not thinking and acting as they themselves do. The best way is to steer a middle course, and not to admit of any reflected light, but when the cause of it is evident to every eye; and vice versâ, if you introduce none at all, let it appear evident that there was no reasonable cause for it. In doing so, you will neither be totally[Pg 112] blamed nor praised by the variety of opinion, which, if not proceeding from entire ignorance, will ensure to you the approbation of both parties.

The reflected lights that hit the middle of the shadows will either brighten or darken them based on how strong those lights are and how close they are to the shadows. Many artists overlook this observation, while others consider it and shape their work around it. This difference in opinion and practice causes a divide among artists, leading them to criticize each other for not thinking and working the same way. The best approach is to find a balance and only acknowledge reflected light when its source is clear to everyone; and vice versa, if you decide not to include any reflected light, make sure it’s obvious that there was no valid reason for it. By doing this, you won’t be completely[Pg 112] criticized or praised, as the range of opinion—if it doesn’t come from total ignorance—will earn you the approval of both sides.

Chap. 217.Where Reflexes are to be most apparent.

Of all reflected lights, that is to be the most apparent, bold, and precise, which detaches from the darkest ground; and, on the contrary, that which is upon a lighter ground will be less apparent. And this proceeds from the contraste of shades, by which the faintest makes the dark ones appear still darker; so in contrasted lights, the brightest cause the others to appear less bright than they really are[49].

Of all reflected lights, the one that stands out the most is the bold and clear one that contrasts with the darkest background; on the other hand, the one on a lighter background will be less noticeable. This happens because of the contrast of shades, where the faintest shades make the dark ones seem even darker; in the case of contrasting lights, the brightest ones make the others look less bright than they actually are[49].

Chap. 218.What Part of a Reflex is to be the lightest.

That part will be the brightest which receives the reflected light between angles the most nearly equal. For example, let N be the luminary, and A B the illuminated part of the object, reflecting the light over all the shady part of the concavity opposite to it. The light which reflects upon F will be placed between equal angles. But E at the base will not be reflected by equal angles, as it is evident that the angle E A B is more obtuse than the angle E B A. The angle A F B however, though it is between angles of less quality than the angle E, and has a common base B A, is between angles more nearly equal than E, therefore it will be lighter in F than[Pg 113] in E; and it will also be brighter, because it is nearer to the part which gives them light. According to the 6th rule [50], which says, that part of the body is to be the lightest, which is nearest to the luminary.

That part will be the brightest that gets the reflected light at the most similar angles. For instance, let N be the light source, and A B be the illuminated area of the object, reflecting light onto all the shaded area of the concavity opposite it. The light reflecting on F will be positioned at equal angles. However, E at the base won’t reflect light at equal angles, as it's clear that the angle E A B is wider than the angle E B A. The angle A F B, though it’s at angles of lesser quality than angle E and shares a common base B A, is between angles that are more similar than E, so it will appear lighter at F than[Pg 113] at E; and it will also be brighter because it’s closer to the part that provides the light. According to the 6th rule [50], the part of the body that is closest to the light source will be the lightest.

Lightest Part of a Reflex

Chap. 219.Of the Termination of Reflexes on their Grounds.

The termination of a reflected light on a ground lighter than that reflex, will not be perceivable; but if such a reflex terminates upon a ground darker than itself, it will be plainly seen; and the more so in proportion as that ground is darker, and vice versa[51].

The end of a reflected light on a surface lighter than that reflection won't be noticeable; however, if that reflection hits a surface darker than itself, it will be clearly visible; and the more the surface is darker, the more pronounced it becomes, and vice versa[51].

Chap. 220.Of double and treble Reflexions of Light.

Double reflexes are stronger than single ones, and the shadows which interpose between the common[Pg 114] light and these reflexes are very faint. For instance, let A be the luminous body, A N, A S, are the direct rays, and S N the parts which receive the light from them. O and E are the places enlightened by the reflexion of that light in those parts. A N E is a single reflex, but A N O, A S O is the double reflex. The single reflex is that which proceeds from a single light, but the double reflexion is produced by two different lights. The single one E is produced by the light striking on B D, while the double one O proceeds from the enlightened bodies B D and D R co-operating together; and the shadows which are between N O and S O will be very faint.

Double reflections are stronger than single ones, and the shadows that fall between the common[Pg 114] light and these reflections are very faint. For example, let A be the light source, A N and A S be the direct rays, and S N be the areas that receive light from them. O and E are the spots illuminated by the reflection of that light in those areas. A N E is a single reflection, while A N O and A S O are the double reflections. The single reflection E comes from just one light, but the double reflection O is created by the combination of two different light sources. The single one E is formed by the light hitting B D, while the double one O results from the illuminated bodies B D and D R working together; the shadows between N O and S O will be very faint.

Double and Treble Reflexions

Chap. 221.Reflexes in the Water, and particularly those of the Air.

The only portion of air that will be seen reflected in the water, will be that which is reflected by the surface of the water to the eye between equal angles; that is to say, the angle of incidence must be equal to the angle of reflexion.

The only part of the air that can be seen reflected in the water is the part that the water surface reflects to the eye at equal angles; in other words, the angle at which light hits the water must be the same as the angle at which it bounces back.


COLOURS and COLOURING.


COLOURS.

Chap. 222.What Surface is best calculated to receive most Colours.

White is more capable of receiving all sorts of colours, than the surface of any body whatever, that is not transparent. To prove it, we shall say, that any void space is capable of receiving what another space, not void, cannot receive. In the same manner, a white surface, like a void space, being destitute of any colour, will be fittest to receive such as are conveyed to it from any other enlightened body, and will participate more of the colour than black can do; which latter, like a broken vessel, is not able to contain any thing.

White can absorb all kinds of colors better than the surface of any solid object that isn’t transparent. To illustrate this, let’s say that an empty space can take in what a filled space cannot. Similarly, a white surface, much like an empty space, lacking any color, is best suited to receive colors from any illuminated object and will reflect more color than black can. The latter, like a broken container, cannot hold anything.

Chap. 223.What Surface will shew most perfectly its true Colour.

That opake body will shew its colour more perfect and beautiful, which has near it another body of the same colour.

That opaque object will display its color more perfectly and beautifully when it is next to another object of the same color.

Chap. 224.On what Surfaces the true Colour is least apparent.

Polished and glossy surfaces shew least of their genuine colour. This is exemplified in the grass of the fields, and the leaves of trees, which, being smooth and glossy, will reflect the colour of the sun, and the air, where they strike, so that the parts which receive the light do not shew their natural colour.

Sleek and shiny surfaces reveal the least of their true color. This is seen in the grass in the fields and the leaves on trees, which, being smooth and shiny, reflect the colors of the sun and the air where they catch the light, making the areas that receive the light not show their natural color.

Chap. 225.What Surfaces shew most of their true and genuine Colour.

Those objects that are the least smooth and polished shew their natural colours best; as we see in cloth, and in the leaves of such grass or trees as are of a woolly nature; which, having no lustre, are exhibited to the eye in their true natural colour; unless that colour happen to be confused by that of another body casting on them reflexions of an opposite colour, such as the redness of the setting sun, when all the clouds are tinged with its colour.

Those objects that are the least smooth and polished show their natural colors best; as we see in cloth, and in the leaves of grass or trees that have a woolly texture; which, lacking shine, present their true natural color to the eye; unless that color is altered by another object reflecting an opposite color onto them, like the redness of the setting sun, when all the clouds are tinted with its hue.

Chap. 226.Of the Mixture of Colours.

Although the mixture of colours may be extended to an infinite variety, almost impossible to be described, I will not omit touching slightly upon it, setting down at first a certain number of simple colours to serve as a foundation, and with each of these mixing one of the others; one with one, then[Pg 117] two with two, and three with three, proceeding in this manner to the full mixture of all the colors together: then I would begin again, mixing two of these colours with two others, and three with three, four with four, and so on to the end. To these two colours we shall put three; to these three add three more, and then six, increasing always in the same proportion.

Even though the mix of colors can be expanded into an endless variety, almost too complicated to describe, I won’t skip over it entirely. I'll start by listing a certain number of basic colors to use as a foundation, and with each of these, I'll mix in one of the others; one with one, then[Pg 117] two with two, and three with three, continuing this way until we have the complete mix of all the colors together. Then I would start again, mixing two of these colors with two others, three with three, four with four, and so on until the end. To these two colors, we’ll add three; to these three, we’ll add three more, and then six, always increasing in the same proportion.

I call those simple colours, which are not composed, and cannot be made or supplied by any mixture of other colours. Black and White are not reckoned among colours; the one is the representative of darkness, the other of light: that is, one is a simple privation of light, the other is light itself. Yet I will not omit mentioning them, because there is nothing in painting more useful and necessary; since painting is but an effect produced by lights and shadows, viz. chiaro-scuro. After Black and White come Blue and Yellow, then Green, and Tawny or Umber, and then Purple and Red. These eight colours are all that Nature produces. With these I begin my mixtures, first Black and White, Black and Yellow, Black and Red; then Yellow and Red: but I shall treat more at length of these mixtures in a separate work [52], which will be of great utility, nay very necessary. I shall place this subject between theory and practice.

I refer to those basic colors that aren’t blended or created by mixing other colors. Black and White are not considered colors; one represents darkness and the other represents light: in other words, one is simply the absence of light, while the other is light itself. However, I won’t skip over them because there’s nothing more useful and essential in painting; after all, painting is just an effect created by light and shadows, or chiaro-scuro. After Black and White come Blue and Yellow, followed by Green, Brown or Umber, and then Purple and Red. These eight colors are all that Nature produces. I’ll start mixing with these: first Black and White, then Black and Yellow, Black and Red; next Yellow and Red. I’ll discuss these mixtures in more detail in a separate work [52], which will be very useful, even necessary. I’ll place this topic between theory and practice.

Chap. 227.Of the Colours produced by the Mixture of other Colours, called secondary Colours.

The first of all simple colours is White, though philosophers will not acknowledge either White or Black to be colours; because the first is the cause, or the receiver of colours, the other totally deprived of them. But as painters cannot do without either, we shall place them among the others; and according to this order of things, White will be the first, Yellow the second, Green the third, Blue the fourth, Red the fifth, and Black the sixth. We shall set down White for the representative of light, without which no colour can be seen; Yellow for the earth; Green for water; Blue for air; Red for fire; and Black for total darkness.

The first of all the basic colors is White, although philosophers won't consider either White or Black as true colors; because White is the source or receiver of colors, while Black is completely devoid of them. However, since painters can't do without either, we'll include them with the others. Following this sequence, White will be the first, Yellow the second, Green the third, Blue the fourth, Red the fifth, and Black the sixth. We'll assign White to represent light, without which no color can be seen; Yellow for the earth; Green for water; Blue for air; Red for fire; and Black for complete darkness.

If you wish to see by a short process the variety of all the mixed, or composed colours, take some coloured glasses, and, through them, look at all the country round: you will find that the colour of each object will be altered and mixed with the colour of the glass through which it is seen; observe which colour is made better, and which is hurt by the mixture. If the glass be yellow, the colour of the objects may either be improved, or greatly impaired by it. Black and White will be most altered, while Green and Yellow will be meliorated. In the same manner you may go through all the mixtures of colours, which are infinite. Select those which are new and agreeable to the sight; and following the[Pg 119] same method you may go on with two glasses, or three, till you have found what will best answer your purpose.

If you want to quickly see the variety of mixed or composed colors, take some colored glasses and look at the surrounding landscape through them. You’ll notice that the color of each object changes and blends with the color of the glass. Pay attention to which colors look better and which ones are diminished by the mix. If the glass is yellow, the color of the objects can either be improved or significantly worsened. Black and white will change the most, while green and yellow will look better. You can explore all the possible color mixes, which are endless. Choose the ones that are new and visually pleasing, and using the same method, you can experiment with two or three glasses until you find what works best for your needs.

Chap. 228.Of Verdegris.

This green, which is made of copper, though it be mixed with oil, will lose its beauty, if it be not varnished immediately. It not only fades, but, if washed with a sponge and pure water only, it will detach from the ground upon which it is painted, particularly in damp weather; because verdegris is produced by the strength of salts, which easily dissolve in rainy weather, but still more if washed with a wet sponge.

This green, made from copper, will lose its beauty if it's not varnished right away, even though it's mixed with oil. It doesn't just fade; if you wash it with a sponge and pure water, it can come off the surface it's painted on, especially in humid weather. This is because verdigris is created by the strength of salts that easily dissolve in rainy conditions, and even more so if washed with a wet sponge.

Chap. 229.How to increase the Beauty of Verdegris.

If you mix with the Verdegris some Caballine Aloe, it will add to it a great degree of beauty. It would acquire still more from Saffron, if it did not fade. The quality and goodness of this Aloe will be proved by dissolving it in warm Brandy. Supposing the Verdegris has already been used, and the part finished, you may then glaze it thinly with this dissolved Aloe, and it will produce a very fine colour. This Aloe may be ground also in oil by itself, or with the Verdegris, or any other colour, at pleasure.

If you combine Verdegris with some Caballine Aloe, it will enhance its beauty significantly. It would become even better with Saffron, if only it didn’t fade. The quality and effectiveness of this Aloe can be tested by dissolving it in warm Brandy. If the Verdegris has already been applied and the piece is finished, you can lightly glaze it with this dissolved Aloe, resulting in a beautiful color. This Aloe can also be ground in oil by itself, or mixed with Verdegris or any other color you prefer.

Chap. 230.How to paint a Picture that will last almost for ever.

After you have made a drawing of your intended picture, prepare a good and thick priming with pitch and brickdust well pounded; after which give it a second coat of white lead and Naples yellow; then, having traced your drawing upon it, and painted your picture, varnish it with clear and thick old oil, and stick it to a flat glass, or crystal, with a clear varnish. Another method, which may be better, is, instead of the priming of pitch and brickdust, take a flat tile well vitrified, then apply the coat of white and Naples yellow, and all the rest as before. But before the glass is applied to it, the painting must be perfectly dried in a stove, and varnished with nut oil and amber, or else with purified nut oil alone, thickened in the sun [53].

After you create a drawing of your intended picture, prepare a thick primer using pitch and finely ground brick dust. Then, apply a second coat of white lead and Naples yellow. After tracing your drawing onto it and painting your picture, varnish it with clear, thick old oil, and attach it to a piece of flat glass or crystal using a clear varnish. Alternatively, which might be better, instead of using the primer made of pitch and brick dust, you can use a well-fired flat tile, then apply the coat of white and Naples yellow, followed by everything else as mentioned. However, before applying the glass, the painting must be fully dried in a stove and varnished with nut oil and amber, or just with thickened purified nut oil exposed to the sun. [53].

Chap. 231.The Mode of painting on Canvass, or Linen Cloth [54].

Stretch your canvass upon a frame, then give it a coat of weak size, let it dry, and draw your outlines upon it. Paint the flesh colours first; and while it is still fresh or moist, paint also the shadows, well softened and blended together. The flesh colour may be made with white, lake, and Naples yellow. The shades with black, umber, and a little lake; you may, if you please, use black chalk. After you have softened this first coat, or dead colour, and let it dry, you may retouch over it with lake and other colours, and gum water that has been a long while made and kept liquid, because in that state it becomes better, and does not leave any gloss. Again, to make the shades darker, take the lake and gum as above, and ink [55]; and with this you may shade or glaze many colours, because it is transparent; such as azure, lake, and several others. As for the lights, you may retouch or glaze them slightly with gum water and pure lake, particularly vermilion.

Stretch out your canvas onto a frame, then apply a thin coat of size, let it dry, and sketch your outlines on it. Start by painting the skin tones; while it's still fresh or damp, also paint the shadows, well blended and softened together. The skin tone can be created using white, lake, and Naples yellow. For the shadows, use black, umber, and a bit of lake; if you want, you can use black chalk. Once you've softened this initial layer, or dead color, and let it dry, you can touch it up with lake and other colors, along with well-prepared gum water that's been kept liquid for a while, as this works better and doesn't leave a shine. To make the shadows darker, use lake and gum as mentioned earlier, and ink [55]; with this, you can shade or glaze various colors since it's transparent, like azure, lake, and others. For highlights, you can lightly retouch or glaze them with gum water and pure lake, especially vermilion.

Chap. 232.Of lively and beautiful Colours.

For those colours which you mean should appear beautiful, prepare a ground of pure white. This is meant only for transparent colours: as for[Pg 122] those that have a body, and are opake, it matters not what ground they have, and a white one is of no use. This is exemplified by painted glasses; when placed between the eye and clear air, they exhibit most excellent and beautiful colours, which is not the case, when they have thick air, or some opake body behind them.

For the colors you want to look beautiful, start with a pure white background. This is only for transparent colors: as for[Pg 122] those that are thicker and opaque, it doesn’t matter what background they have, and a white one won’t help. This is shown by painted glasses; when they’re placed between your eye and clear air, they display vibrant and stunning colors, which doesn’t happen when they’re in front of thick air or an opaque object.

Chap. 233.Of transparent Colours.

When a transparent colour is laid upon another of a different nature, it produces a mixed colour, different from either of the simple ones which compose it. This is observed in the smoke coming out of a chimney, which, when passing before the black soot, appears blueish, but as it ascends against the blue of the sky, it changes its appearance into a reddish brown. So the colour lake laid on blue will turn it to a violet colour; yellow upon blue turns to green; saffron upon white becomes yellow; white scumbled upon a dark ground appears blue, and is more or less beautiful, as the white and the ground are more or less pure.

When a transparent color is applied over another one of a different type, it creates a mixed color that is different from either of the original colors. This can be seen in the smoke rising from a chimney; when it passes in front of black soot, it looks bluish, but as it rises against the blue sky, it shifts to a reddish-brown hue. Similarly, when lake color is laid over blue, it turns violet; yellow on blue turns to green; saffron over white becomes yellow; and white brushed over a dark background appears blue, with the beauty of the result depending on how pure the white and the background are.

Chap. 234.In what Part a Colour will appear in its greatest Beauty.

We are to consider here in what part any colour will shew itself in its most perfect purity; whether in the strongest light or deepest shadow, in the demi-tint, or in the reflex. It would be necessary to determine first, of what colour we mean to treat, because different colours differ materially in that respect.[Pg 123] Black is most beautiful in the shades; white in the strongest light; blue and green in the half-tint; yellow and red in the principal light; gold in the reflexes; and lake in the half-tint.

We need to consider where any color appears in its most perfect form; whether it’s in strong light or deep shadow, in soft tones, or in reflections. First, we must decide which color we want to discuss, as different colors behave quite differently in this regard.[Pg 123] Black looks best in the shadows; white shines in strong light; blue and green in soft tones; yellow and red in bright light; gold in reflections; and lake in soft tones.

Chap. 235.How any Colour without Gloss, is more beautiful in the Lights than in the Shades.

All objects which have no gloss, shew their colours better in the light than in the shadow, because the light vivifies and gives a true knowledge of the nature of the colour, while the shadows lower, and destroy its beauty, preventing the discovery of its nature. If, on the contrary, black be more beautiful in the shadows, it is because black is not a colour.

All objects that lack shine show their true colors better in the light than in the dark, because light enhances and reveals the true nature of the color, while shadows diminish and obscure its beauty, making it harder to understand its essence. However, if black appears more beautiful in the shadows, it's because black is not actually a color.

Chap. 236.Of the Appearance of Colours.

The lighter a colour is in its nature, the more so it will appear when removed to some distance; but with dark colours it is quite the reverse.

The lighter a color is, the more it will stand out when viewed from a distance; however, with dark colors, it's the opposite.

Chap. 237.What Part of a Colour is to be the most beautiful.

If A be the light, and B the object receiving it in a direct line, E cannot receive that light, but only the reflexion from B, which we shall suppose to be red. In that case, the light it produces being red, it will tinge with red the object E; and if E happen to be also red before, you will see that colour increase in beauty, and appear redder than B; but if E were[Pg 124] yellow, you will see a new colour, participating of the red and the yellow.

If A is the light, and B is the object receiving it directly, E can't get that light but only the reflection from B, which we'll say is red. In that case, the light that E produces will be red, making E take on a red hue; and if E happens to already be red, you'll notice that color becomes more vibrant and appears redder than B. However, if E were[Pg 124] yellow, you'd see a new color that blends red and yellow.

Beautiful Parts of a Colour

Chap. 238.That the Beauty of a Colour is to be found in the Lights.

As the quality of colours is discovered to the eye by the light, it is natural to conclude, that where there is most light, there also the true quality of the colour is to be seen; and where there is most shadow the colour will participate of, and be tinged with the colour of that shadow. Remember then to shew the true quality of the colour in the light parts only [56].

As the quality of colors is revealed to the eye by the light, it makes sense to conclude that where there is the most light, the true quality of the color can be seen; and where there is the most shadow, the color will take on and be affected by the color of that shadow. So, remember to display the true quality of the color only in the light areas [56].

Chap. 239.Of Colours.

The colour which is between the light and the shadow will not be so beautiful as that which is in the full light. Therefore the chief beauty of colours will be found in the principal lights [57].

The color that’s in between light and shadow won’t be as beautiful as the one that’s in full light. So, the main beauty of colors will be found in the primary lights [57].

Chap. 240.No Object appears in its true Colour, unless the Light which strikes upon it be of the same Colour.

This is very observable in draperies, where the light folds casting a reflexion, and throwing a light on other folds opposite to them, make them appear in their natural colour. The same effect is produced by gold leaves casting their light reciprocally on each other. The effect is quite contrary if the light be received from an object of a different colour [58].

This is very noticeable in draperies, where the light folds cast reflections, throwing light on the opposite folds, making them look their natural color. The same effect happens with gold leaves reflecting light off each other. The effect is completely different if the light comes from an object of a different color [58].

Chap. 241.Of the Colour of Shadows.

The colour of the shadows of an object can never be pure if the body which is opposed to these shadows be not of the same colour as that on which they are produced. For instance, if in a room, the walls of which are green, I place a figure clothed in blue, and receiving the light from another blue object, the light part of that figure will be of a beautiful blue, but the shadows of it will become dingy, and not like a true shade of that beautiful blue, because it will be corrupted by the reflexions from the green wall; and it would be still worse if the walls were of a darkish brown.

The color of an object's shadows can never be pure if the surface opposing those shadows isn't the same color as the surface they're cast on. For example, if I have a room with green walls and I place a figure dressed in blue that gets its light from another blue object, the illuminated part of that figure will be a lovely blue, but its shadows will turn out dull and not resemble a true shade of that beautiful blue, because they'll be affected by the reflection from the green wall. It would be even worse if the walls were a dark brown.

Chap. 242.Of Colours.

Colours placed in shadow will preserve more or less of their original beauty, as they are more or less immersed in the shade. But colours situated in a light space will shew their natural beauty in proportion to the brightness of that light. Some say, [Pg 126] that there is as great variety in the colours of shadows, as in the colours of objects shaded by them. It may be answered, that colours placed in shadow will shew less variety amongst themselves as the shadows are darker. We shall soon convince ourselves of this truth, if, from a large square, we look through the open door of a church, where pictures, though enriched with a variety of colours, appear all clothed in darkness.

Colors in shadow retain more or less of their original beauty, depending on how much they’re affected by the shade. However, colors in a well-lit area reveal their true beauty in relation to the brightness of that light. Some say, [Pg 126] that there’s as much variety in the colors of shadows as there is in the colors of the objects that are shaded. It can be argued that colors in shadow show less variety among themselves as the shadows get darker. We will easily see this truth if we look from a large square through the open door of a church, where images, despite being full of different colors, seem to be wrapped in darkness.

Chap. 243.Whether it be possible for all Colours to appear alike by means of the same Shadow.

It is very possible that all the different colours may be changed into that of a general shadow; as is manifest in the darkness of a cloudy night, in which neither the shape nor colour of bodies is distinguished. Total darkness being nothing but a privation of the primitive and reflected lights, by which the form and colour of bodies are seen; it is evident, that the cause being removed the effect ceases, and the objects are entirely lost to the sight.

It is quite possible that all the different colors can blend into a general shadow, as seen in the darkness of a cloudy night, where neither the shape nor color of objects can be distinguished. Total darkness is simply the absence of the primary and reflected lights that allow us to see the form and color of things; it’s clear that when the cause is removed, the effect disappears, and the objects are completely invisible.

Chap. 244.Why White is not reckoned among the Colours.

White is not a colour, but has the power of receiving all the other colours. When it is placed in a high situation in the country, all its shades are azure; according to the fourth proposition[59], which[Pg 127] says, that the surface of any opake body participates of the colour of any other body sending the light to it. Therefore white being deprived of the light of the sun by the interposition of any other body, will remain white; if exposed to the sun on one side, and to the open air on the other, it will participate both of the colour of the sun and of the air. That side which is not opposed to the sun, will be shaded of the colour of the air. And if this white were not surrounded by green fields all the way to the horizon, nor could receive any light from that horizon, without doubt it would appear of one simple and uniform colour, viz. that of the air.

White isn't a color but has the ability to reflect all other colors. When it’s positioned high up in the countryside, all its shades look blue; according to the fourth proposition[59], which[Pg 127] states that the surface of any opaque object takes on the color of any other object that reflects light onto it. Therefore, if white is blocked from sunlight by another object, it will stay white; but if one side is exposed to sunlight and the other to open air, it will reflect both the color of the sun and the air. The side not facing the sun will take on the color of the air. If this white object weren’t surrounded by green fields all the way to the horizon and couldn't receive any light from that horizon, it would definitely appear as one simple, uniform color, namely the color of the air.

Chap. 245.Of Colours.

The light of the fire tinges every thing of a reddish yellow; but this will hardly appear evident, if we do not make the comparison with the daylight. Towards the close of the evening this is easily done; but more certainly after the morning twilight; and the difference will be clearly distinguished in a dark room, when a little glimpse of daylight strikes upon any part of the room, and there still remains a candle burning. Without such a trial the difference is hardly perceivable, particularly in those colours which have most similarity; such as white and yellow, light green and light blue; because the light which strikes the blue, being yellow, will naturally[Pg 128] turn it green; as we have said in another place[60], that a mixture of blue and yellow produces green. And if to a green colour you add some yellow, it will make it of a more beautiful green.

The light from the fire gives everything a reddish-yellow tint; however, this becomes noticeable only when we compare it to daylight. It's easy to see this as evening approaches, but it's even clearer after morning twilight. The difference is particularly evident in a dark room when a bit of daylight hits any part of the room while a candle is still burning. Without such a comparison, the difference is hard to notice, especially in colors that are quite similar, like white and yellow, or light green and light blue. This is because the light hitting the blue, which is yellow, will naturally make it appear green; as mentioned elsewhere[60], mixing blue and yellow creates green. Furthermore, adding some yellow to a green color enhances its beauty.

Chap. 246.Of the Colouring of remote Objects.

The painter, who is to represent objects at some distance from the eye, ought merely to convey the idea of general undetermined masses, making choice, for that purpose, of cloudy weather, or towards the evening, and avoiding, as was said before, to mark the lights and shadows too strong on the extremities; because they would in that case appear like spots of difficult execution, and without grace. He ought to remember, that the shadows are never to be of such a quality, as to obliterate the proper colour, in which they originated; if the situation of the coloured body be not in total darkness. He ought to mark no outline, not to make the hair stringy, and not to touch with pure white, any but those things which in themselves are white; in short, the lightest touch upon any particular object ought to denote the beauty of its proper and natural colour.

The painter, who aims to depict objects at a distance, should focus on conveying the idea of general, undefined masses. To achieve this, they should choose cloudy weather or the evening and avoid making the highlights and shadows too pronounced at the edges. If they do, those areas will look like hard-to-execute spots and lack elegance. They need to remember that shadows should never be so intense that they erase the original color of the object, unless that object is in complete darkness. They should avoid outlining, make sure hair doesn’t look stringy, and only use pure white on things that are inherently white. In short, a light touch on any specific object should highlight the beauty of its true and natural color.

Chap. 247.The Surface of all opake Bodies participates of the Colour of the surrounding Objects.

The painter ought to know, that if any white object is placed between two walls, one of which is[Pg 129] also white, and the other black, there will be found between the shady side of that object and the light side, a similar proportion to that of the two walls; and if that object be blue, the effect will be the same. Having therefore to paint this object, take some black, similar to that of the wall from which the reflexes come; and to proceed by a certain and scientific method, do as follows. When you paint the wall, take a small spoon to measure exactly the quantity of colour you mean to employ in mixing your tints; for instance, if you have put in the shading of this wall three spoonfuls of pure black, and one of white, you have, without any doubt, a mixture of a certain and precise quality. Now having painted one of the walls white, and the other dark, if you mean to place a blue object between them with shades suitable to that colour, place first on your pallet the light blue, such as you mean it to be, without any mixture of shade, and it will do for the lightest part of your object. After which take three spoonfuls of black, and one of this light blue, for your darkest shades. Then observe whether your object be round or square: if it be square, these two extreme tints of light and shade will be close to each other, cutting sharply at the angle; but if it be round, draw lines from the extremities of the walls to the centre of the object, and put the darkest shade between equal angles, where the lines intersect upon the superficies of it; then begin to make them lighter and [Pg 130] lighter gradually to the point N O, lessening the strength of the shadows as much as that place participates of the light A D, and mixing that colour with the darkest shade A B, in the same proportion.

The painter should understand that if you place a white object between two walls—one wall being white and the other black—you'll notice a similar proportion of light and shade on the object reflecting those walls. If the object is blue, the effect will be similar. So when painting this object, take some black that matches the wall from where the reflections come, and follow a precise method as outlined. When you paint the wall, use a small spoon to measure the exact amount of color you want to mix for your tints. For example, if you mix three spoonfuls of pure black with one spoonful of white for the wall's shading, you will have a mixture of a specific quality. Once one wall is painted white and the other dark, and you want to place a blue object between them with appropriate shades, first put the light blue—exactly as you want it, without mixing any shades—on your palette for the lightest part of your object. Then take three spoonfuls of black and one of this light blue for your darkest shades. Next, determine whether your object is round or square. If it's square, the extreme tints of light and shade will be close together, sharply defining the angle. If it's round, draw lines from the edges of the walls to the center of the object and apply the darkest shade at equal angles where the lines intersect on the surface; then gradually lighten those shades toward point N O, reducing the intensity of the shadows according to how much that area gets light from A D, mixing that color with the darkest shade A B in the same proportion.

Surface of Opaque Bodies

Chap. 248.General Remarks on Colours.

Blue and green are not simple colours in their nature, for blue is composed of light and darkness; such is the azure of the sky, viz. perfect black and perfect white. Green is composed of a simple and a mixed colour, being produced by blue and yellow.

Blue and green are not just basic colors; blue is made up of both light and darkness, like the blue of the sky, which mixes perfect black and perfect white. Green is a combination of a primary and a secondary color, created by mixing blue and yellow.

Any object seen in a mirror, will participate of the colour of that body which serves as a mirror; and the mirror in its turn is tinged in part by the colour of the object it represents; they partake more or less of each other as the colour of the object seen is more or less strong than the colour of the mirror. That object will appear of the strongest and most lively colour in the mirror, which has the most affinity to the colour of the mirror itself.

Any object viewed in a mirror will reflect the color of the surface that acts as the mirror; and the mirror, in return, is influenced in part by the color of the object it reflects. They interact with each other, depending on whether the object's color is stronger or weaker than the mirror's color. The object will look the brightest and most vibrant in the mirror if its color is the most similar to that of the mirror itself.

Of coloured bodies, the purest white will be seen at the greatest distance, therefore the darker the colour, the less it will bear distance.

The purest white can be seen from the farthest away, so the darker the color, the shorter the distance it can be seen from.

Of different bodies equal in whiteness, and in distance from the eye, that which is surrounded by the greatest darkness will appear the whitest; and on the contrary, that shadow will appear the darkest that has the brightest white round it.

Of different objects that are the same in brightness and distance from the eye, the one surrounded by the deepest darkness will look the brightest; conversely, the shadow that has the brightest white around it will seem the darkest.

Of different colours, equally perfect, that will appear most excellent, which is seen near its direct contrary. A pale colour against red, a black upon white (though neither the one nor the other are colours), blue near a yellow; green near red; because each colour is more distinctly seen, when opposed to its contrary, than to any other similar to it.

Different colors, equally perfect, look their best when placed next to their opposite. A pale color next to red, black on white (even though neither is a color in the strictest sense), blue near yellow, and green next to red. This is because each color stands out more clearly when contrasted with its opposite than when it's next to something similar.

Any thing white seen in a dense air full of vapours, will appear larger than it is in reality.

Anything white seen in thick, foggy air will look larger than it actually is.

The air, between the eye and the object seen, will change the colour of that object into its own; so will the azure of the air change the distant mountains into blue masses. Through a red glass every thing appears red; the light round the stars is dimmed by the darkness of the air, which fills the space between the eye and the planets.

The air, between the eye and the object being looked at, will alter the color of that object to match its own; for instance, the blue of the air will make distant mountains look blue too. When looking through a red glass, everything appears red; the light around the stars is dimmed by the darkness of the air that fills the space between the eye and the planets.

The true colour of any object whatever will be seen in those parts which are not occupied by any kind of shade, and have not any gloss (if it be a polished surface).

The true color of any object can be seen in areas that aren't covered by any kind of shadow and don't have any shine (if it's a polished surface).

I say, that white terminating abruptly upon a dark ground, will cause that part where it terminates to appear darker, and the white whiter.

I say that white ending suddenly against a dark background will make the spot where it ends look darker and the white look brighter.


COLOURS IN REGARD TO LIGHT AND SHADOW.

Chap. 249.Of the Light proper for painting Flesh Colour from Nature.

Your window must be open to the sky, and the walls painted of a reddish colour. The summertime is the best, when the clouds conceal the sun, or else your walls on the south side of the room must be so high, as that the sun-beams cannot strike on the opposite side, in order that the reflexion of those beams may not destroy the shadows.

Your window should face the sky, and the walls should be painted a reddish color. Summer is the ideal time when the clouds block the sun, or if not, the walls on the south side of the room should be tall enough so that the sunlight doesn’t reach the opposite side, to prevent the reflection of those beams from ruining the shadows.

Chap. 250.Of the Painter’s Window.

The window which gives light to a painting-room, ought to be made of oiled paper, without any cross bar, or projecting edge at the opening, or any sharp angle in the inside of the wall, but should be slanting by degrees the whole thickness of it; and the sides be painted black.

The window that lights up an artist's studio should be made of oiled paper, without any crossbar or protruding edge at the opening, and without any sharp angles on the inside of the wall. It should slope gradually across its entire thickness, with the sides painted black.

Chap. CCLI.The Shadows of Colours.

The shadows of any colour whatever must participate of that colour more or less, as it is nearer to,[Pg 133] or more remote from the mass of shadows; and also in proportion to its distance from, or proximity to the mass of light.

The shadows of any color must share that color to some extent, depending on how close they are to the mass of shadows, [Pg 133] or how far away they are; and it's also in relation to how far they are from, or how close they are to, the mass of light.

Chap. 252.Of the Shadows of White.

To any white body receiving the light from the sun, or the air, the shadows should be of a blueish cast; because white is no colour, but a receiver of all colours; and as by the fourth proposition[61] we learn, that the surface of any object participates of the colours of other objects near it, it is evident that a white surface will participate of the colour of the air by which it is surrounded.

To any white object exposed to sunlight or air, the shadows should appear bluish; because white isn't a color, but a reflection of all colors. As we understand from the fourth proposition[61], the surface of any object takes on the colors of nearby objects, so it’s clear that a white surface will reflect the color of the surrounding air.

Chap. 253.Which of the Colours will produce the darkest Shade.

That shade will be the darkest which is produced by the whitest surface; this also will have a greater propensity to variety than any other surface; because white is not properly a colour, but a receiver of colours, and its surface will participate strongly of the colour of surrounding objects, but principally of black or any other dark colour, which being the most opposite to its nature, produces the most sensible difference between the shadows and the lights.

That shade will be the darkest that comes from the whitest surface; it will also have a greater tendency to show variety than any other surface because white isn't really a color, but rather a collector of colors. Its surface will strongly reflect the color of the surrounding objects, especially black or any other dark color, which, being the most opposite to its nature, creates the most noticeable contrast between the shadows and the lights.

Chap. 254.How to manage, when a White terminates upon another White.

When one white body terminates on another of the same colour, the white of these two bodies will[Pg 134] be either alike or not. If they be alike, that object which of the two is nearest to the eye, should be made a little darker than the other, upon the rounding of the outline; but if the object which serves as a ground to the other be not quite so white, the latter will detach of itself, without the help of any darker termination.

When one white object ends at another white object, the whites of these two will[Pg 134] either be the same or different. If they are the same, the object that is closer to the eye should be made slightly darker than the other around the edges; however, if the object that serves as the background isn’t quite as white, the foreground object will stand out on its own, without needing a darker edge.

Chap. 255.On the Back-grounds of Figures.

Of two objects equally light, one will appear less so if seen upon a whiter ground; and, on the contrary, it will appear a great deal lighter if upon a space of a darker shade. So flesh colour will appear pale upon a red ground, and a pale colour will appear redder upon a yellow ground. In short, colours will appear what they are not, according to the ground which surrounds them.

Of two objects that are equally light, one will look darker if placed on a white background; conversely, it will seem much lighter if set against a darker surface. For example, skin tones will look pale on a red background, and a light color will appear redder on a yellow background. In short, colors will appear different depending on the background that surrounds them.

Chap. 256.The Mode of composing History.

Amongst the figures which compose an historical picture, those which are meant to appear the nearest to the eye, must have the greatest force; according to the second proposition [62] of the third book, which [Pg 135] says, that colour will be seen in the greatest perfection which has less air interposed between it and the eye of the beholder; and for that reason the shadows (by which we express the relievo of bodies) appear darker when near than when at a distance, being then deadened by the air which interposes. This does not happen to those shadows which are near the eye, where they will produce the greatest relievo when they are darkest.

Among the figures that make up a historical image, those intended to be closest to the viewer must have the strongest presence; according to the second proposition [62] of the third book, which [Pg 135] states that color appears most vividly when there's less atmosphere between it and the viewer's eye; for this reason, shadows (which show the relief of objects) seem darker when they are close than when they are far away, as they are muted by the air in between. This doesn't apply to shadows that are near the eye, where they create the most relief when they are at their darkest.

Chap. 257.Remarks concerning Lights and Shadows.

Observe, that where the shadows end, there be always a kind of half-shadow to blend them with the lights. The shadow derived from any object will mix more with the light at its termination, in proportion as it is more distant from that object. But the colour of the shadow will never be simple: this is proved by the ninth proposition[63], which says, that the superficies of any object participates of the colours of other bodies, by which it is surrounded, although it were transparent, such as water, air, and the like: because the air receives its light from the sun, and darkness is produced by the privation of it. But as the air has no colour in itself any more than water, it receives all the colours that are between the object[Pg 136] and the eye. The vapours mixing with the air in the lower regions near the earth, render it thick, and apt to reflect the sun’s rays on all sides, while the air above remains dark; and because light (that is, white) and darkness (that is, black), mixed together, compose the azure that becomes the colour of the sky, which is lighter or darker in proportion as the air is more or less mixed with damp vapours.

Notice that where the shadows end, there’s always a kind of half-shadow that blends them with the light. The shadow created by any object will mix more with the light at its edge the farther away it is from that object. However, the color of the shadow will never be straightforward: this is proven by the ninth proposition[63], which states that the surface of any object shares the colors of other objects surrounding it, even if it's transparent, like water or air. This is because air gets its light from the sun, and darkness comes from a lack of it. But since air has no color on its own, just like water, it takes on all the colors that exist between the object[Pg 136] and the eye. The vapors that mix with the air closer to the earth make it dense and capable of reflecting sunlight in all directions, while the air above stays dark; and because light (which is white) and darkness (which is black) mixed together create the blue that we see as the sky, its color changes from lighter to darker depending on how much moisture is mixed with the air.

Chap. 258.Why the Shadows of Bodies upon a white Wall are blueish towards Evening.

Shadows Blueish towards Evening

The shadows of bodies produced by the redness of the setting sun, will always be blueish. This is accounted for by the eleventh proposition[64], which says, that the superficies of any opake body participates of the colour of the object from which it receives the light; therefore the white wall being deprived entirely of colour, is tinged by the colour of[Pg 137] those bodies from which it receives the light, which in this case are the sun and the sky. But because the sun is red towards the evening, and the sky is blue, the shadow on the wall not being enlightened by the sun, receives only the reflexion of the sky, and therefore will appear blue; and the rest of the wall, receiving light immediately from the sun, will participate of its red colour.

The shadows created by the red glow of the setting sun will always have a bluish tone. This is explained by the eleventh proposition[64], which states that the surface of any opaque object reflects the color of the light source it receives. Since the white wall lacks any color of its own, it takes on the hues of the objects that provide it light, which in this case are the sun and the sky. However, since the sun is red in the evening and the sky is blue, the shadow on the wall, not illuminated by the sun, only reflects the sky's color and thus appears blue; meanwhile, the rest of the wall, receiving direct light from the sun, shows its red color.

Chap. 259.Of the Colour of Faces.

The colour of any object will appear more or less distinct in proportion to the extent of its surface. This proportion is proved, by observing that a face appears dark at a small distance, because, being composed of many small parts, it produces a great number of shadows; and the lights being the smallest part of it, are soonest lost to the sight, leaving only the shadows, which being in a greater quantity, the whole of the face appears dark, and the more so if that face has on the head, or at the back, something whiter.

The color of an object looks more or less clear depending on how much surface area it has. This is shown by the way a face appears dark when viewed from a short distance; since a face is made up of many small parts, it casts a lot of shadows. The highlights are the smallest parts, so they disappear from view the quickest, leaving behind mostly shadows. Since there are more shadows, the entire face looks dark, especially if there’s something lighter on the head or at the back.

Chap. 260.A Precept relating to Painting.

Where the shadows terminate upon the lights, observe well what parts of them are lighter than the others, and where they are more or less softened and blended; but above all remember, that young people have no sharp shadings: their flesh is transparent, something like what we observe when we put our hand between the sun and eyes; it appears [Pg 138] reddish, and of a transparent brightness. If you wish to know what kind of shadow will suit the flesh colour you are painting, place one of your fingers close to your picture, so as to cast a shadow upon it, and according as you wish it either lighter or darker, put it nearer or farther from it, and imitate it.

Where's it at? the shadows meet the lights, take a good look at which parts are lighter than the others, and where they appear softer and more blended; but most importantly, remember that young people don't have sharp shadows: their skin is translucent, similar to what we see when we put our hand between the sun and our eyes; it looks [Pg 138] reddish and has a transparent glow. If you want to know what kind of shadow works best for the skin tone you’re painting, hold one of your fingers close to your painting to cast a shadow on it, and depending on whether you want the shadow to be lighter or darker, move it closer or farther away, and mimic it.

Chap. 261.Of Colours in Shadow.

It happens very often that the shadows of an opake body do not retain the same colour as the lights. Sometimes they will be greenish, while the lights are reddish, although this opake body be all over of one uniform colour. This happens when the light falls upon the object (we will suppose from the East), and tinges that side with its own colour. In the West we will suppose another opake body of a colour different from the first, but receiving the same light. This last will reflect its colour towards the East, and strike the first with its rays on the opposite side, where they will be stopped, and remain with their full colour and brightness. We often see a white object with red lights, and the shades of a blueish cast; this we observe particularly in mountains covered with snow, at sun-set, when the effulgence of its rays makes the horizon appear all on fire.

It happens quite often that the shadows of an opaque object don't have the same color as the lights. Sometimes the shadows appear greenish while the lights look reddish, even if the opaque object is all one uniform color. This occurs when light hits the object (let's say from the East) and colors that side with its hue. In the West, we can imagine another opaque object of a different color, but receiving the same light. This second object will reflect its color towards the East and cast its rays onto the first object on the opposite side, where they will be blocked and remain with their full color and brightness. We often notice a white object with red highlights and shadows that have a bluish tint; this is especially noticeable in snow-covered mountains at sunset, when the brilliance of the rays makes the horizon look like it’s on fire.

Chap. 262.Of the Choice of Lights.

Whatever object you intend to represent is to be supposed situated in a particular light, and that[Pg 139] entirely of your own choosing. If you imagine such objects to be in the country, and the sun be overcast, they will be surrounded by a great quantity of general light. If the sun strikes upon those objects, then the shadows will be very dark, in proportion to the lights, and will be determined and sharp; the primitive as well as the secondary ones. These shadows will vary from the lights in colour, because on that side the object receives a reflected light hue from the azure of the air, which tinges that part; and this is particularly observable in white objects. That side which receives the light from the sun, participates also of the colour of that. This may be particularly observed in the evening, when the sun is setting between the clouds, which it reddens; those clouds being tinged with the colour of the body illuminating them, the red colour of the clouds, with that of the sun, casts a hue on those parts which receive the light from them. On the contrary, those parts which are not turned towards that side of the sky, remain of the colour of the air, so that the former and the latter are of two different colours. This we must not lose sight of, that, knowing the cause of those lights and shades, it be made apparent in the effect, or else the work will be false and absurd. But if a figure be situated within a house, and seen from without, such figure will have its shadows very soft; and if the beholder stands in the line of the light, it will acquire grace, and do credit to the painter, as it will have great relief in the lights, and soft and [Pg 140] well-blended shadows, particularly in those parts where the inside of the room appears less obscure, because there the shadows are almost imperceptible: the cause of which we shall explain in its proper place.

Whatever object you want to depict should be imagined in a specific light of your choosing. If you picture these objects outdoors and the sun is overcast, they’ll be surrounded by a lot of general light. If sunlight directly hits them, their shadows will be very dark relative to the light, sharp and well-defined, both primary and secondary. The shadows will differ in color from the light because that side of the object receives a reflected light hue from the blue of the sky, which tints that part; this effect is especially noticeable on white objects. The side that gets sunlight will also take on its color. This effect is particularly evident in the evening when the sun sets behind clouds, making them reddish; those clouds reflect the color of the light source. The red of the clouds mixed with sunlight casts a hue on the areas they illuminate. In contrast, those parts of the object not facing that side of the sky remain the color of the air, resulting in two different colors. We must remember that understanding the cause of the light and shadows needs to be clear in the final effect, or else the piece will look false and absurd. However, if a figure is positioned inside a house and viewed from outside, its shadows will appear very soft; if the viewer stands in the path of the light, the figure will gain grace and enhance the painter’s skill, showcasing strong highlights and soft, well-blended shadows, especially in the spots where the room appears less dark, as shadows there are nearly invisible: we will explain why that is in due time.


COLOURS IN REGARD TO BACK-GROUNDS.

Chap. 263.Of avoiding hard Outlines.

Do not make the boundaries of your figures with any other colour than that of the back-ground, on which they are placed; that is, avoid making dark outlines.

Do not outline your figures with any color other than the background they are placed on; in other words, avoid using dark outlines.

Chap. 264.Of Outlines.

The extremities of objects which are at some distance, are not seen so distinctly as if they were nearer. Therefore the painter ought to regulate the strength of his outlines, or extremities, according to the distance.

The edges of objects that are far away aren't seen as clearly as those that are closer. So, the artist should adjust the boldness of their outlines or edges based on the distance.

The boundaries which separate one body from another, are of the nature of mathematical lines, but not of real lines. The end of any colour is only the beginning of another, and it ought not to be called a line, for nothing interposes between them, except the termination of the one against the other, which being nothing in itself, cannot be perceivable;[Pg 141] therefore the painter ought not to pronounce it in distant objects.

The boundaries that separate one body from another are like mathematical lines but not actual lines. The end of one color is just the start of another, and we shouldn’t call it a line, because nothing stands in between them, except one fading into the other, which isn't anything itself and can’t be seen; [Pg 141] so the painter shouldn’t depict it in distant objects.

Chap. 265.Of Back-grounds.

One of the principal parts of painting is the nature and quality of back-grounds, upon which the extremities of any convex or solid body will always detach and be distinguished in nature, though the colour of such objects, and that of the ground, be exactly the same. This happens, because the convex sides of solid bodies do not receive the light in the same manner with the ground, for such sides or extremities are often lighter or darker than the ground. But if such extremities were to be of the same colour as the ground, and in the same degree of light, they certainly could not be distinguished. Therefore such a choice in painting ought to be avoided by all intelligent and judicious painters; since the intention is to make the objects appear as it were out of the ground. The above case would produce the contrary effect, not only in painting, but also in objects of real relievo.

One of the main elements of painting is the nature and quality of backgrounds, which always help to define and distinguish the edges of any convex or solid object, even if the colors of those objects and the background are exactly the same. This occurs because the curved surfaces of solid objects don’t reflect light the same way as the background does; these surfaces or edges are often lighter or darker than the ground. If these edges were the same color as the background and had the same light intensity, they clearly couldn't be distinguished. Therefore, this choice in painting should be avoided by all knowledgeable and skilled painters, as the goal is to make the objects seem as if they are emerging from the background. The situation mentioned would create the opposite effect, not only in painting but also in three-dimensional objects.

Chap. 266.How to detach Figures from the Ground.

All solid bodies will appear to have a greater relief, and to come more out of the canvass, on a ground of an undetermined colour, with the greatest variety of lights and shades against the confines of such bodies (as will be demonstrated in its place), [Pg 142] provided a proper diminution of lights in the white tints, and of darkness in the shades, be judiciously observed.

All solid objects will seem to have more depth and to stand out more from the canvas when placed on a background of an undefined color, with a wide range of light and shadow around the edges of these objects (as will be shown later), [Pg 142] as long as a suitable reduction of light in the white areas and of darkness in the shadows is carefully maintained.

Chap. 267.Of Uniformity and Variety of Colours upon plain Surfaces.

The back-grounds of any flat surfaces which are uniform in colour and quantity of light, will never appear separated from each other; vice versâ, they will appear separated if they are of different colours or lights.

The backgrounds of any flat surfaces that are the same color and have an even amount of light will never look disconnected from each other; vice versa, they will look disconnected if they are of different colors or lighting.

Chap. 268.Of Back-grounds suitable both to Shadows and Lights.

The shadows or lights which surround figures, or any other objects, will help the more to detach them the more they differ from the objects; that is, if a dark colour does not terminate upon another dark colour, but upon a very different one; as white, or partaking of white, but lowered, and approximated to the dark shade.

The shadows or lights that surround figures or any other objects will help to distinguish them more clearly the more they differ from the objects. This means that a dark color shouldn't end against another dark color, but instead against a very different one, like white or something close to white but in a darker tone.

Chap. 269.The apparent Variation of Colours, occasioned by the Contraste of the Ground upon which they are placed.

No colour appears uniform and equal in all its parts unless it terminate on a ground of the same colour. This is very apparent when a black terminates on a white ground, where the contraste of colour [Pg 143] gives more strength and richness to the extremities than to the middle.

No color looks consistent and even throughout unless it ends on a background of the same color. This is especially clear when black is placed against a white background, where the contrast in color [Pg 143] makes the edges appear bolder and richer than the center.


CONTRASTE, HARMONY, AND REFLEXES, IN REGARD TO COLOURS.

Chap. 270.Gradation in Painting.

What is fine is not always beautiful and good: I address this to such painters as are so attached to the beauty of colours, that they regret being obliged to give them almost imperceptible shadows, not considering the beautiful relief which figures acquire by a proper gradation and strength of shadows. Such persons may be compared to those speakers who in conversation make use of many fine words without meaning, which altogether scarcely form one good sentence.

What’s up is nice isn't always beautiful or good: I’m talking to those painters who are so focused on the beauty of colors that they wish they didn't have to use almost invisible shadows, not realizing the lovely depth that figures gain from a proper range and strength of shadows. These people are like speakers who, in conversation, use a lot of fancy words that don’t really mean anything, which barely come together to form a single good sentence.

Chap. 271.How to assort Colours in such a Manner as that they may add Beauty to each other.

If you mean that the proximity of one colour should give beauty to another that terminates near it, observe the rays of the sun in the composition of the rainbow, the colours of which are generated by the falling rain, when each drop in its descent takes every colour of that bow, as is demonstrated in its place [65].

If you mean that the closeness of one color should enhance the beauty of another that is nearby, look at the rays of the sun in the making of the rainbow. The colors are created by the falling rain, and as each drop descends, it captures every color of that bow, as shown in its place [65].

If you mean to represent great darkness, it must be done by contrasting it with great light; on the contrary, if you want to produce great brightness, you must oppose to it a very dark shade: so a pale yellow will cause red to appear more beautiful than if opposed to a purple colour.

If you want to show deep darkness, you have to contrast it with bright light; similarly, if you want to create a vivid brightness, you need to pair it with a very dark shade: for instance, a pale yellow makes red look more beautiful than it would if next to a purple color.

There is another rule, by observing which, though you do not increase the natural beauty of the colours, yet by bringing them together they may give additional grace to each other, as green placed near red, while the effect would be quite the reverse, if placed near blue.

There’s another guideline that, although it doesn’t enhance the natural beauty of the colors, can make them look better together. For example, green next to red can add elegance to both, whereas the effect would be completely different if green were near blue.

Harmony and grace are also produced by a judicious arrangement of colours, such as blue with pale yellow or white, and the like; as will be noticed in its place.

Harmony and grace are also created by a thoughtful arrangement of colors, like blue paired with pale yellow or white, and similar combinations; as will be noted later.

Chap. 272.Of detaching the Figures.

Let the colours of which the draperies of your figures are composed, be such as to form a pleasing variety, to distinguish one from the other; and although, for the sake of harmony, they should be of the same nature[66], they must not stick together, [Pg 145] but vary in point of light, according to the distance and interposition of the air between them. By the same rule, the outlines are to be more precise, or lost, in proportion to their distance or proximity.

Let the colors of your figures' draperies be varied enough to create an attractive difference between them; and while they should share a similar quality for the sake of harmony[66], they must not blend together, [Pg 145] but should differ in light depending on how far away they are and the air between them. Similarly, the outlines should be more defined or fade away based on their distance from one another.

Chap. 273.Of the Colour of Reflexes.

All reflected colours are less brilliant and strong, than those which receive a direct light, in the same proportion as there is between the light of a body and the cause of that light.

All reflected colors are less bright and vibrant than those that receive direct light, in the same way that there is a difference between the light of an object and the source of that light.

Chap. 274.What Body will be the most strongly tinged with the Colour of any other Object.

An opake surface will partake most of the genuine colour of the body nearest to it, because a great quantity of the species of colour will be conveyed to it; whereas such colour would be broken and disturbed if coming from a more distant object.

An opaque surface will take on most of the true color of the object closest to it, because a large amount of that specific color will be transmitted to it; whereas that color would appear muddled and disrupted if it were coming from a more distant object.

Chap. 275.Of Reflexes.

Reflexes will partake, more or less, both of the colour of the object which produces them, and of the colour of that object on which they are produced, in proportion as this latter body is of a smoother or more polished surface, than that by which they are produced.

Reactions will involve, to some extent, both the color of the object that creates them and the color of the object they are reflected on, depending on how much smoother or more polished the latter surface is compared to the one producing them.

Chap. 276.Of the Surface of all shadowed Bodies.

The surface of any opake body placed in shadow, will participate of the colour of any other object which reflects the light upon it. This is very evident; for if such bodies were deprived of light in the space between them and the other bodies, they could not shew either shape or colour. We shall conclude then, that if the opake body be yellow, and that which reflects the light blue, the part reflected will be green, because green is composed of blue and yellow.

The surface of any opaque object in shadow will take on the color of any other object that reflects light onto it. This is very clear; if these objects were cut off from light in the space between them and the other objects, they wouldn't show any shape or color. So, we can conclude that if the opaque object is yellow and the one reflecting the light is blue, the reflected part will be green, since green is made from blue and yellow.

Chap. 277.That no reflected Colour is simple, but is mixed with the Nature of the other Colours.

No colour reflected upon the surface of another body, will tinge that surface with its own colour alone, but will be mixed by the concurrence of other colours also reflected on the same spot. Let us suppose A to be of a yellow colour, which is reflected on the convex C O E, and that the blue colour B be reflected on the same place. I say that a mixture of the blue and yellow colours will tinge the convex surface; and that, if the ground be white, it will produce a green reflexion, because it is proved that a mixture of blue and yellow produces a very fine green.

No color reflected on the surface of another object will only tint that surface with its own color; instead, it will mix with other colors also reflected at the same spot. Let's say A is yellow, which reflects on the convex C O E, and the blue color B is reflected on the same area. I assert that a mixture of the blue and yellow colors will tint the convex surface; and if the background is white, it will create a green reflection, because it's been shown that mixing blue and yellow yields a nice green.

Reflected Colours

Chap. 278.Of the Colour of Lights and Reflexes.

When two lights strike upon an opake body, they can vary only in two ways; either they are equal in strength, or they are not. If they be equal, they may still vary in two other ways, that is, by the equality or inequality of their brightness; they will be equal, if their distance be the same; and unequal, if it be otherwise. The object placed at an equal distance, between two equal lights, in point both of colour and brightness, may still be enlightened by them in two different ways, either equally on each side, or unequally. It will be equally enlightened by them, when the space which remains round the lights shall be equal in colour, in degree of shade, and in brightness. It will be unequally enlightened by them when the spaces happen to be of different degrees of darkness.

When two lights hit an opaque object, they can differ in only two ways: either they have the same strength or they don’t. If they are the same strength, they can still differ in two other ways, specifically through the equality or inequality of their brightness. They will be equal in brightness if they are the same distance away; they will be unequal if the distances are different. An object positioned at an equal distance between two equal lights, in terms of both color and brightness, can still be illuminated in two different ways: either equally on both sides or unequally. It will be equally illuminated if the area around the lights is equal in color, shade, and brightness. It will be unequally illuminated when the areas differ in their levels of darkness.

Chap. 279.Why reflected Colours seldom partake of the Colour of the Body where they meet.

It happens very seldom that the reflexes are of the same colour with the body from which they proceed, or with that upon which they meet. To exemplify this, let the convex body D F G E be of a yellow colour, and the body B C, which reflects its colour on it, blue; the part of the convex surface which is struck by that reflected light, will take a green tinge, being B C, acted on by the natural light of the air, or the sun.

It rarely happens that the reflections match the color of the object they come from or the object they hit. To illustrate this, let's say the convex object D F G E is yellow, and the object B C, which reflects its color, is blue; the area of the convex surface that receives that reflected light will appear green, as B C is influenced by the natural light from the air or the sun.

Reflected Colours and a Body

Chap. 280.The Reflexes of Flesh Colours.

The lights upon the flesh colours, which are reflected by the light striking upon another flesh-coloured body, are redder and more lively than any other part of the human figure; and that happens according to the third proposition of the second book [67], [Pg 149] which says, the surface of any opake body participates of the colour of the object which reflects the light, in proportion as it is near to or remote from it, and also in proportion to the size of it; because, being large, it prevents the variety of colours in smaller objects round it, from interfering with, and discomposing the principal colour, which is nearer. Nevertheless it does not prevent its participating more of the colour of a small object near it, than of a large one more remote. See the sixth proposition [68] of perspective, which says, that large objects may be situated at such a distance as to appear less than small ones that are near.

The lights on skin tones, which are reflected by light hitting another skin-toned surface, appear redder and more vibrant than any other part of the human body; this aligns with the third proposition in the second book [67], [Pg 149] which states that the surface of any opaque object reflects the color of the object emitting light, depending on how close or far it is, and also based on its size. A larger object can prevent the variety of colors in smaller objects nearby from interfering with and altering the main color, which is closer. However, it doesn’t stop it from reflecting more of the color of a small object nearby than a larger one that’s farther away. Refer to the sixth proposition [68] of perspective, which notes that large objects can be placed at such a distance that they appear smaller than nearby small ones.

Chap. 281.Of the Nature of Comparison.

Black draperies will make the flesh of the human figure appear whiter than in reality it is [69]; and white draperies, on the contrary, will make it appear darker. Yellow will render it higher coloured, while red will make it pale.

Black drapes will make the skin of the human figure look whiter than it actually is [69]; and white drapes, on the other hand, will make it look darker. Yellow will give it a richer tone, while red will make it look pale.

Chap. 282.Where the Reflexes are seen.

Of all reflexions of the same shape, size, and strength, that will be more or less strong, which terminates on a ground more or less dark.

Of all reflections of the same shape, size, and strength, that will be more or less strong, which ends on a surface that is more or less dark.

The surface of those bodies will partake most of the colour of the object that reflects it, which receive that reflexion by the most nearly equal angles.

The surface of those bodies will take on most of the color of the object that reflects it, which receives that reflection at the most similar angles.

Of the colours of objects reflected upon any opposite surface by equal angles, that will be the most distinct which has its reflecting ray the shortest.

Of the colors of objects reflected on any opposite surface at equal angles, the one that will be the most distinct is the one with the shortest reflecting ray.

Of all colours, reflected under equal angles, and at equal distance upon the opposite body, those will be the strongest, which come reflected by the lightest coloured body.

Of all colors, reflected at the same angles and at the same distance on the opposite surface, the strongest ones will be those reflected by the lightest colored surface.

That object will reflect its own colour most precisely on the opposite object, which has not round it any colour that clashes with its own; and consequently that reflected colour will be most confused which takes its origin from a variety of bodies of different colours.

That object will show its own color most accurately on the opposite object, which has no color around it that clashes with its own; therefore, the reflected color will be most muddled when it originates from different bodies of various colors.

That colour which is nearest the opposed object, will tinge it the most strongly; and vice versâ: let the painter, therefore, in his reflexes on the human body, particularly on the flesh colour, mix some of the colour of the drapery which comes nearest to it; but not pronounce it too distinctly, if there be not good reason for it.

The color that is closest to the object will affect it the most strongly; and vice versa: therefore, the painter should, in his reflections on the human body, especially on skin tones, mix in some of the color of the fabric that is nearest to it; but don't make it too obvious unless there's a good reason for doing so.


PERSPECTIVE OF COLOURS.

Chap. 283.A Precept of Perspective in regard to Painting.

When, on account of some particular quality of the air, you can no longer distinguish the difference between the lights and shadows of objects, you may reject the perspective of shadows, and make use only of the linear perspective, and the diminution of colours, to lessen the knowledge of the objects opposed to the eye; and this, that is to say, the loss of the knowledge of the figure of each object, will make the same object appear more remote.

When, due to a specific quality of the air, you can no longer tell the difference between the lights and shadows of objects, you can ignore the perspective of shadows and rely solely on linear perspective and color fading to reduce the clarity of the objects facing the eye; and this, meaning the loss of recognition of the shape of each object, will make the same object seem further away.

The eye can never arrive at a perfect knowledge of the interval between two objects variously distant, by means of the linear perspective alone, if not assisted by the perspective of colours.

The eye can never truly understand the distance between two objects at different distances just by using linear perspective alone, without the help of color perspective.

Chap. 284.Of the Perspective of Colours.

The air will participate less of the azure of the sky, in proportion as it comes nearer to the horizon, as it is proved by the third and ninth proposition [70], that pure and subtile bodies (such as compose the air) will be less illuminated by the sun than those [Pg 152] of thicker and grosser substance: and as it is certain that the air which is remote from the earth, is thinner than that which is near it, it will follow, that the latter will be more impregnated with the rays of the sun, which giving light at the same time to an infinity of atoms floating in this air, renders it more sensible to the eye. So that the air will appear lighter towards the horizon, and darker as well as bluer in looking up to the sky; because there is more of the thick air between our eyes and the horizon, than between our eyes and that part of the sky above our heads.

The air will have less of the blue color of the sky as it gets closer to the horizon, as shown in the third and ninth propositions [70]. Pure and light substances (like those that make up the air) will be less lit by the sun than those that are thicker and denser [Pg 152]. Since the air further away from the earth is thinner than the air that is close to it, it follows that the air closer to us will be more saturated with sunlight, which illuminates countless particles floating in this air, making it more visible to the eye. Therefore, the air will look lighter near the horizon and appear darker and bluer when looking up at the sky, because there is more dense air between our eyes and the horizon than there is between our eyes and the part of the sky directly above us.

Perspective of Colours

For instance: if the eye placed in P, looks through the air along the line P R, and then lowers itself a little along P S, the air will begin to appear a little whiter, because there is more of the thick air in this space than in the first. And if it be still removed lower, so as to look straight at the horizon, no more of that blue sky will be perceived which was observable along the first line P R, because there [Pg 153] is a much greater quantity of thick air along the horizontal line P D, than along the oblique P S, or the perpendicular P R.

For example, if the eye positioned at P looks through the air along the line P R and then lowers slightly along P S, the air will start to look a bit whiter because there’s denser air in that space compared to the first. And if it moves even lower to look directly at the horizon, no more of that blue sky will be visible that was seen along the initial line P R, because there is a significantly larger amount of denser air along the horizontal line P D than along the slanted P S or the vertical P R.

Chap. 285.The Cause of the Diminution of Colours.

The natural colour of any visible object will be diminished in proportion to the density of any other substance which interposes between that object and the eye.

The natural color of any visible object will be reduced based on the density of any other substance that is in between that object and the eye.

Chap. 286.Of the Diminution of Colours and Objects.

Let the colours vanish in proportion as the objects diminish in size, according to the distance.

Let the colors fade as the objects get smaller, based on the distance.

Chap. 287.Of the Variety observable in Colours, according to their Distance, or Proximity.

The local colour of such objects as are darker than the air, will appear less dark as they are more remote; and, on the contrary, objects lighter than the air will lose their brightness in proportion to their distance from the eye. In general, all objects that are darker or lighter than the air, are discoloured by distance, which changes their quality, so that the lighter appears darker, and the darker lighter.

The local color of objects that are darker than the air will seem less dark as they get farther away; conversely, objects that are lighter than the air will appear less bright the further they are from your eye. Generally, all objects that are darker or lighter than the air become affected by distance, altering their appearance, so that the lighter ones look darker and the darker ones look lighter.

Chap. 288.At what Distance Colours are entirely lost.

Local colours are entirely lost at a greater or less distance, according as the eye and the object are more or less elevated from the earth. This is proved by the seventh proposition [71], which says, the air is more or less pure, as it is near to, or remote from the earth. If the eye then, and the object are near the earth, the thickness of the air which interposes, will in a great measure confuse the colour of that object to the eye. But if the eye and the object are placed high above the earth, the air will disturb the natural colour of that object very little. In short, the various gradations of colour depend not only on the various distances, in which they may be lost; but also on the variety of lights, which change according to the different hours of the day, and the thickness or purity of the air, through which the colour of the object is conveyed to the eye.

Local colors fade away at different distances, depending on how high the eye and the object are above the ground. This is demonstrated by the seventh proposition [71], which states that the air is clearer when it’s closer to the ground. So, when the eye and the object are near the earth, the thickness of the air in between will largely blur the color of that object for the eye. But when both the eye and the object are positioned high above the ground, the air will have little effect on the object's true color. In short, the varying shades of color depend not only on the different distances at which they can fade but also on the changes in light throughout the day and the thickness or clarity of the air through which the object's color reaches the eye.

Chap. 289.Of the Change observable in the same Colour, according to its Distance from the Eye.

Among several colours of the same nature, that which is the nearest to the eye will alter the least; because the air which interposes between the eye and the object seen, envelopes, in some measure, [Pg 155] that object. If the air, which interposes, be in great quantity, the object seen will be strongly tinged with the colour of that air; but if the air be thin, then the view of that object, and its colour, will be very little obstructed.

Among several colors of the same kind, the one closest to the eye will change the least; because the air that sits between the eye and the object being viewed slightly surrounds that object. If the air in between is thick, the object will be heavily colored by that air; but if the air is thin, then the view of that object and its color will be only slightly affected.

Chap. 290.Of the blueish Appearance of remote Objects in a Landscape.

Whatever be the colour of distant objects, the darkest, whether natural or accidental, will appear the most tinged with azure. By the natural darkness is meant the proper colour of the object; the accidental one is produced by the shadow of some other body.

Regardless of the color of distant objects, the darkest ones, whether naturally dark or dark due to other factors, will seem the most blue. By natural darkness, we mean the object's true color; the accidental darkness is caused by the shadow of another object.

Chap. 291.Of the Qualities in the Surface which first lose themselves by Distance.

The first part of any colour which is lost by the distance, is the gloss, being the smallest part of it, as a light within a light. The second that diminishes by being farther removed, is the light, because it is less in quantity than the shadow. The third is the principal shadows, nothing remaining at last but a kind of middling obscurity.

The first part of any color that is lost with distance is the gloss, the smallest part of it, like a light within a light. The second thing that fades as it gets farther away is the light itself, because it is less in quantity than the shadow. The third is the main shadows, until finally, only a kind of moderate darkness remains.

Chap. 292.From what Cause the Azure of the Air proceeds.

The azure of the sky is produced by the transparent body of the air, illumined by the sun, and interposed between the darkness of the expanse above,[Pg 156] and the earth below. The air in itself has no quality of smell, taste, or colour, but is easily impregnated with the quality of other matter surrounding it; and will appear bluer in proportion to the darkness of the space behind it, as may be observed against the shady sides of mountains, which are darker than any other object. In this instance the air appears of the most beautiful azure, while on the other side that receives the light, it shews through that more of the natural colour of the mountain.

The blue of the sky comes from the clear air, lit by the sun, sitting between the darkness of the sky above,[Pg 156] and the earth below. The air itself has no smell, taste, or color, but it easily picks up characteristics from the things around it; it will look bluer the darker the background is, which can be seen on the shady sides of mountains that are darker than anything else. In this case, the air appears a beautiful blue, while the side that gets light shows more of the mountain's natural color.

Chap. 293.Of the Perspective of Colours.

The same colour being placed at various distances and equal elevation, the force and effect of its colouring will be according to the proportion of the distance which there is from each of these colours to the eye. It is proved thus: let C B E D be one and the same colour. The first, E, is placed at two degrees of distance from the eye A; the second, B, shall be four degrees, the third, C, six degrees, and the fourth, D, eight degrees; as appears by the circles which terminate upon and intersect the line A R. Let us suppose that the space A R, S P, is one degree of thin air, and S P E T another degree of thicker air. It will follow, that the first colour, E, will pass to the eye through one degree of thick air, E S, and through another degree, S A, of thinner air. And B will send its colour to the eye in A, through two degrees of thick air, and through two others of the thinner sort. C will send it through three degrees[Pg 157] of the thin, and three of the thick sort, while D goes through four degrees of the one, and four of the other. This demonstrates, that the gradation of colours is in proportion to their distance from the eye [72]. But this happens only to those colours which are on a level with the eye; as for those which happen to be at unequal elevations, we cannot observe the same rule, because they are in that case situated in different qualities of air, which alter and diminish these colours in various manners.

The same color placed at different distances but at the same height will appear differently based on how far each color is from the eye. Here's how it works: let's say C B E D is one and the same color. The first, E, is two degrees away from the eye A; the second, B, is four degrees away, the third, C, is six degrees away, and the fourth, D, is eight degrees away, as shown by the circles intersecting the line A R. Suppose the space A R, S P, is one degree of thin air, and S P E T is another degree of thicker air. It follows that the first color, E, reaches the eye through one degree of thick air, E S, and another degree, S A, of thinner air. Color B travels to the eye at A through two degrees of thick air and two degrees of thinner air. Color C passes through three degrees of thin air and three of thick, while D passes through four degrees of each. This shows that the gradation of colors corresponds to their distance from the eye [72]. However, this only applies to colors that are level with the eye; colors at different heights do not follow the same rule because they are affected by different qualities of air, which change and diminish their appearance in various ways.

Of the Perspective of Colours

Chap. 294.Of the Perspective of Colours in dark Places.

In any place where the light diminishes in a gradual proportion till it terminates in total darkness, the colours also will lose themselves and be dissolved in proportion as they recede from the eye.

In any place where the light fades gradually until it becomes completely dark, the colors will also fade away and blend together as they move farther from your sight.

Chap. 295.Of the Perspective of Colours.

The principal colours, or those nearest to the eye, should be pure and simple; and the degree of their diminution should be in proportion to their distance, viz. the nearer they are to the principal point, the more they will possess of the purity of those colours, and they will partake of the colour of the horizon in proportion as they approach to it.

The main colors, or those closest to the eye, should be bright and straightforward; and their intensity should decrease with distance. In other words, the closer they are to the main point, the more vibrant those colors will be, and they will take on the color of the horizon as they get nearer to it.

Chap. 296.Of Colours.

Of all the colours which are not blue, those that are nearest to black will, when distant, partake most of the azure; and, on the contrary, those will preserve their proper colour at the greatest distance, that are most dissimilar to black.

Of all the colors that aren't blue, the ones closest to black will, from a distance, seem most like the blue; on the other hand, colors that are least similar to black will keep their true color even at a great distance.

The green therefore of the fields will change sooner into blue than yellow, or white, which will preserve their natural colour at a greater distance than that, or even red.

The greenery of the fields will turn to blue faster than it will to yellow or white, which will hold their natural color from further away than that, or even red.

Chap. 297.How it happens that Colours do not change, though placed in different Qualities of Air.

The colour will not be subject to any alteration when the distance and the quality of air have a reciprocal proportion. What it loses by the distance it regains by the purity of the air, viz. if we suppose the first or lowest air to have four degrees of thickness, and the colour to be at one degree from the eye,[Pg 159] and the second air above to have three degrees. The air having lost one degree of thickness, the colour will acquire one degree upon the distance. And when the air still higher shall have lost two degrees of thickness, the colour will acquire as many upon the distance; and in that case the colour will be the same at three degrees as at one. But to be brief, if the colour be raised so high as to enter that quality of air which has lost three degrees of thickness, and acquired three degrees of distance, then you may be certain that that colour which is high and remote, has lost no more than the colour which is below and nearer; because in rising it has acquired those three degrees which it was losing by the same distance from the eye; and this is what was meant to be proved.

The color won’t change if the distance and air quality are in balance. What it loses due to distance, it gains from the clarity of the air. For instance, if we assume the lowest air has four degrees of thickness and the color is one degree away from the eye,[Pg 159] while the air above has three degrees of thickness. As the air loses one degree of thickness, the color will gain one degree in distance. If the air above loses two degrees of thickness, the color will gain that same amount in distance; thus, the color at three degrees will look the same as at one degree. To put it simply, if the color is raised high enough to reach air that has lost three degrees of thickness and gained three degrees of distance, you can be sure that the color far away has not lost more than the color that is closer. This is because as it rises, it gains those three degrees that it’s losing by being the same distance from the eye. And that’s the point that was intended to be proven.

Chap. 298.Why Colours experience no apparent Change, though placed in different Qualities of Air.

No Apparent Change in Colours

It may happen that a colour does not alter, though placed at different distances, when the thickness of the air and the distance are in the same inverse proportion. It is proved thus: let A be the [Pg 160] eye, and H any colour whatever, placed at one degree of distance from the eye, in a quality of air of four degrees of thickness; but because the second degree above, A M N L, contains a thinner air by one half, which air conveys this colour, it follows that this colour will appear as if removed double the distance it was at before, viz. at two degrees of distance, A F and F G, from the eye; and it will be placed in G. If that is raised to the second degree of air A M N L, and to the degree O M, P N, it will necessarily be placed at E, and will be removed from the eye the whole length of the line A E, which will be proved in this manner to be equal in thickness to the distance A G. If in the same quality of air the distance A G interposed between the eye and the colour occupies two degrees, and A E occupies two degrees and a half, it is sufficient to preserve the colour G, when raised to E, from any change, because the degree A C and the degree A F being the same in thickness, are equal and alike, and the degree C D, though equal in length to the degree F G, is not alike in point of thickness of air; because half of it is situated in a degree of air of double the thickness of the air above: this half degree of distance occupies as much of the colour as one whole degree of the air above would, which air above is twice as thin as the air below, with which it terminates; so that by calculating the thickness of the air, and the distances, you will find that the colours have changed places without undergoing any alteration in their beauty. And we shall prove it thus: reckoning[Pg 161] first the thickness of air, the colour H is placed in four degrees of thickness, the colour G in two degrees, and E at one degree. Now let us see whether the distances are in an equal inverse proportion; the colour E is at two degrees and a half of distance, G at two degrees, and H at one degree. But as this distance has not an exact proportion with the thickness of air, it is necessary to make a third calculation in this manner: A C is perfectly like and equal to A F; the half degree, C B, is like but not equal to A F, because it is only half a degree in length, which is equal to a whole degree of the quality of the air above; so that by this calculation we shall solve the question. For A C is equal to two degrees of thickness of the air above, and the half degree C B is equal to a whole degree of the same air above; and one degree more is to be taken in, viz. B E, which makes the fourth. A H has four degrees of thickness of air, A G also four, viz. A F two in value, and F G also two, which taken together make four. A E has also four, because A C contains two, and C D one, which is the half of A C, and in the same quality of air; and there is a whole degree above in the thin air, which all together make four. So that if A E is not double the distance A G, nor four times the distance A H, it is made equivalent by the half degree C B of thick air, which is equal to a whole degree of thin air above. This proves the truth of the proposition, that the colour H G E does not undergo any alteration by these different distances.

It might happen that a color doesn’t change even when placed at different distances, as long as the thickness of the air and the distance are in the same inverse ratio. Here’s how it works: let A be the [Pg 160] eye, and H any color placed one degree away from the eye in air with four degrees of thickness. However, the second degree up, A M N L, has air that is half as thick, which means the color carried by this thinner air will appear as if it’s doubled in distance, specifically at two degrees, A F and F G, from the eye; it will be located at G. If that is raised to the second degree of air A M N L and extended to degree O M, P N, it will then be positioned at E, moving from the eye the entire length of the line A E, which will be shown to be equal in thickness to the distance A G. If the same quality of air has a distance A G of two degrees between the eye and the color and A E is two and a half degrees, it’s enough to keep the color G, when raised to E, from changing since degree A C and degree A F are the same thickness and are equal, while degree C D, although equal in length to degree F G, differs in air thickness; half of it is in air that’s twice as thick as the air above. This half-degree of distance consumes as much of the color as one full degree of the thinner air above, making it twice as thin as the air below that is at the lower end. By calculating the thickness of the air and the distances, you will see that the colors have swapped places without losing any of their beauty. We can explain this by first considering[Pg 161] the air thickness: the color H is in four degrees of thickness, color G is in two degrees, and E is at one degree. Now let’s check if the distances are in equal inverse proportion: color E is at two and a half degrees, G at two degrees, and H at one degree. Since this distance doesn’t precisely match the thickness of air, we must do a third calculation: A C is completely like and equal to A F; the half degree C B is similar but not equal to A F, because it’s only half a degree long, equal to a whole degree of the air quality above. By this calculation, we’ll resolve the issue. A C equals two degrees of thickness of the air above, and the half degree C B is equivalent to a whole degree of that same air above; plus one more degree, B E, gives us the fourth. A H has four degrees of air thickness, and A G also has four, combining A F’s two and F G’s two to total four. A E also has four since A C includes two, C D gives one, which is half of A C, both in the same air quality; there’s a whole degree in the thin air above, adding up to four. So, if A E isn’t double the distance A G or four times the distance A H, it becomes equivalent because of the half degree C B in thick air, which equals a full degree of the thin air above. This solidifies the proposition that the color H G E doesn’t change due to these different distances.

Chap. 299.Contrary Opinions in regard to Objects seen afar off.

Many painters will represent the objects darker, in proportion as they are removed from the eye; but this cannot be true, unless the objects seen be white; as shall be examined in the next chapter.

Many painters depict objects as darker the farther they are from the eye; however, this only holds if the objects are white, which will be discussed in the next chapter.

Chap. 300.Of the Colour of Objects remote from the Eye.

The air tinges objects with its own colour more or less in proportion to the quantity of intervening air between it and the eye, so that a dark object at the distance of two miles (or a density of air equal to such distance), will be more tinged with its colour than if only one mile distant.

The air colors objects based on how much air is between them and our eyes, meaning that a dark object two miles away (or in air density equal to that distance) will be more colored by the air than if it were only a mile away.

It is said, that, in a landscape, trees of the same species appear darker in the distance than near; this cannot be true, if they be of equal size, and divided by equal spaces. But it will be so if the first trees are scattered, and the light of the fields is seen through and between them, while the others which are farther off, are thick together, as is often the case near some river or other piece of water: in this case no space of light fields can be perceived, but the trees appear thick together, accumulating the shadow on each other. It also happens, that as the shady parts of plants are much broader than the light ones, the colour of the plants becoming darker by the multiplied shadows, is preserved, and[Pg 163] conveyed to the eye more strongly than that of the other parts; these masses, therefore, will carry the strongest parts of their colour to a greater distance.

It's said that in a landscape, trees of the same species look darker from a distance than up close; this can't be true if they're the same size and spaced equally. However, it will be true if the first set of trees is scattered, allowing light from the fields to shine through and around them, while the ones farther away are densely grouped together, which often happens near rivers or other bodies of water. In this case, you can't see any patches of light fields, and the trees appear closely packed, casting shadows on one another. Additionally, since the shaded parts of plants are much broader than the lit ones, the color of the plants appears darker due to the accumulated shadows and is perceived more intensely than the lighter areas; therefore, these clusters will project their strongest colors over a greater distance.

Chap. 301.Of the Colour of Mountains.

The darker the mountain is in itself, the bluer it will appear at a great distance. The highest part will be the darkest, as being more woody; because woods cover a great many shrubs, and other plants, which never receive any light. The wild plants of those woods are also naturally of a darker hue than cultivated plants; for oak, beech, fir, cypress, and pine trees are much darker than olive and other domestic plants. Near the top of these mountains, where the air is thinner and purer, the darkness of the woods will make it appear of a deeper azure, than at the bottom, where the air is thicker. A plant will detach very little from the ground it stands upon, if that ground be of a colour something similar to its own; and, vice versâ, that part of any white object which is nearest to a dark one, will appear the whitest, and the less so as it is removed from it; and any dark object will appear darker, the nearer it is to a white one; and less so, if removed from it.

The darker the mountain is, the bluer it looks from a distance. The highest part tends to be the darkest because it's more wooded; woods have many shrubs and other plants that don’t get any light. The wild plants in those woods are also naturally darker than cultivated ones, since oak, beech, fir, cypress, and pine are much darker than olive and other domestic plants. Near the tops of these mountains, where the air is thinner and clearer, the darkness of the woods makes them look a deeper blue than down below, where the air is denser. A plant won’t stand out much from the ground it's on if that ground is a color similar to its own; and, vice versâ, the part of any white object closest to a dark one will look the whitest, and it appears less white the further away it is. Any dark object looks darker the closer it is to a white one, and it appears less dark if it’s further from it.

Chap. 302.Why the Colour and Shape of Objects are lost in some Situations apparently dark, though not so in Reality.

There are some situations which, though light, appear dark, and in which objects are deprived both[Pg 164] of form and colour. This is caused by the great light which pervades the intervening air; as is observable by looking in through a window at some distance from the eye, when nothing is seen but an uniform darkish shade; but if we enter the house, we shall find that room to be full of light, and soon distinguish every small object contained within that window. This difference of effect is produced by the great brightness of the air, which contracts considerably the pupil of the eye, and by so doing diminishes its power. But in dark places the pupil is enlarged, and acquires as much in strength, as it increases in size. This is proved in my second proposition of perspective [73].

There are some situations that, although they seem bright, actually look dark, and in which objects lose both[Pg 164] their shape and color. This happens because of the intense light that fills the air in between; you can see this when you look through a window from a distance, where all you notice is a uniform darkish shade. But once you go inside, you’ll see that the room is full of light, and you can quickly make out every little object in that window. This difference in how things look is caused by the bright light in the air, which makes your pupil contract significantly, reducing its ability to see. In darker areas, the pupil expands, increasing its strength as it gets bigger. This is demonstrated in my second proposition of perspective [73].

Chap. 303.Various Precepts in Painting.

The termination and shape of the parts in general are very little seen, either in great masses of light, or of shadows; but those which are situated between the extremes of light and shade are the most distinct.

The end and shape of the parts are rarely visible, whether in bright light or deep shadows; however, those that fall between the extremes of light and shade are the clearest.

Perspective, as far as it extends in regard to painting, is divided into three principal parts; the first consists in the diminution of size, according to distance; the second concerns the diminution of colours in such objects; and the third treats of the diminution of the perception altogether of those objects, and of the degree of precision they ought to exhibit at various distances.

Perspective, in relation to painting, is divided into three main parts; the first focuses on the reduction of size based on distance; the second relates to the fading of colors in those objects; and the third addresses the overall decrease in the perception of those objects and the level of detail they should show at different distances.

The azure of the sky is produced by a mixture composed of light and darkness[74]; I say of light, because of the moist particles floating in the air, which reflect the light. By darkness, I mean the pure air, which has none of these extraneous particles to stop and reflect the rays. Of this we see an example in the air interposed between the eye and some dark mountains, rendered so by the shadows of an innumerable quantity of trees; or else shaded on one side by the natural privation of the rays of the sun; this air becomes azure, but not so on the side of the mountain which is light, particularly when it is covered with snow.

The blue color of the sky comes from a mix of light and darkness[74]; I refer to light because of the damp particles in the air that reflect light. By darkness, I mean the clear air that doesn't have these extra particles to block and reflect the rays. We see this when looking at the air between our eyes and dark mountains, which appear dark because of the shadows cast by countless trees, or on the side shaded by the lack of sunlight. This air takes on a blue color, but not on the brightly lit side of the mountain, especially when it's covered in snow.

Among objects of equal darkness and equal distance, those will appear darker that terminate upon a lighter ground, and vice versâ[75].

Among objects of equal darkness and equal distance, those will look darker against a lighter background, and vice versa[75].

That object which is painted with the most white and the most black, will shew greater relief than any other; for that reason I would recommend to painters to colour and dress their figures with the brightest and most lively colours; for if they are painted of a dull or obscure colour, they will detach but little, and not be much seen, when the picture is placed at some distance; because the colour of every object is obscured in the shades; and if it be represented as originally so all over, there will be but little difference between the lights and the shades, while lively colours will shew a striking difference.

The object that has the most white and the most black will stand out more than anything else. For that reason, I suggest that painters use the brightest and most vibrant colors for their figures; if they use dull or muted colors, the figures won't stand out much and won't be easily seen from a distance. This is because the color of every object gets lost in the shadows, and if it is painted as such all over, there will be little contrast between the light and dark areas, whereas bright colors will create a strong difference.


AERIAL PERSPECTIVE.

Chap. 304.Aerial Perspective.

There is another kind of perspective called aerial, because by the difference of the air it is easy to determine the distance of different objects, though seen on the same line; such, for instance, as buildings behind a wall, and appearing all of the same height above it. If in your picture you want to have one appear more distant than another, you must first suppose the air somewhat thick, because, as we have said before, in such a kind of air the objects seen at a great distance, as mountains are, appear blueish like the air, by means of the great quantity of air that interposes between the eye and such mountains. You will then paint the first building behind that wall of its proper colour; the next in point of distance, less distinct in the outline, and participating, in a greater degree, of the blueish colour of the air; another which you wish to send off as much farther, should be painted as much bluer; and if you wish one of them to appear five times farther removed beyond the wall, it must have five times more of the azure. By this rule these buildings which appeared all of the same size, and upon the same line, will be distinctly perceived to be of different dimensions, and at different distances.

There is another type of perspective called aerial, because the quality of the air makes it easy to gauge the distance of different objects, even when they’re on the same line. For example, buildings behind a wall that seem to be the same height above it. If you want one building in your picture to look farther away than another, you should imagine the air being somewhat thick. As mentioned before, in that kind of air, objects seen from a distance, like mountains, appear bluish due to the large amount of air between the eye and the mountains. So, you would paint the first building behind that wall in its actual color; the next building, which is further away, should have a less distinct outline and share more of that bluish tint of the air; another one that you want to look much farther away should be painted even bluer. If you want one of them to look five times farther away beyond the wall, it should be five times more blue. By following this rule, these buildings that seemed the same size and on the same line will be clearly perceived as different sizes and at different distances.

Chap. 305.The Parts of the Smallest Objects will first disappear in Painting.

Of objects receding from the eye the smallest will be the first lost to the sight; from which it follows, that the largest will be the last to disappear. The painter, therefore, ought not to finish the parts of those objects which are very far off, but follow the rule given in the sixth book[76].

Of objects moving away from the eye, the smallest will be the first to fade from view; therefore, the largest will be the last to vanish. The painter should not finish the details of objects that are very far away, but should adhere to the guideline provided in the sixth book[76].

How many, in the representation of towns, and other objects remote from the eye, express every part of the buildings in the same manner as if they were very near. It is not so in nature, because there is no sight so powerful as to perceive distinctly at any great distance the precise form of parts or extremities of objects. The painter therefore who pronounces the outlines, and the minute distinction of parts, as several have done, will not give the representation of distant objects, but by this error will make them appear exceedingly near. Again, the angles of buildings in distant towns are not to be expressed (for they cannot be seen), considering that angles are formed by the concurrence of two lines into one point, and that a point has no parts; it is therefore invisible.

How many times, in depictions of towns and other distant objects, do we see each part of the buildings represented as if they were very close? This isn’t true in reality, since no sight is powerful enough to clearly perceive the exact shape of parts or edges of objects from afar. Therefore, a painter who focuses on the outlines and fine details of parts, as many have done, won’t accurately portray distant objects; instead, this mistake will make them seem very close. Moreover, the angles of buildings in distant towns shouldn’t be shown (since they can't be seen) because angles are formed by the meeting of two lines at one point, and a point has no parts; thus, it remains invisible.

Chap. 306.Small Figures ought not to be too much finished.

Objects appear smaller than they really are when they are distant from the eye, and because there is a great deal of air interposed, which weakens the appearance of forms, and, by a natural consequence, prevents our seeing distinctly the minute parts of such objects. It behoves the painter therefore to touch those parts slightly, in an unfinished manner; otherwise it would be against the effect of Nature, whom he has chosen for his guide. For, as we said before, objects appear small on account of their great distance from the eye; that distance includes a great quantity of air, which, forming a dense body, obstructs the light, and prevents our seeing the minute parts of the objects.

Items look smaller than they actually are when they're far away, and this is because there's a lot of air in between, which blurs their shapes and, as a natural result, makes it hard for us to see the tiny details. So, it’s important for the painter to represent those details lightly and in an unfinished way; otherwise, it wouldn’t align with the way Nature appears, which he has chosen as his inspiration. As mentioned before, objects seem small because of their distance from our eyes; that distance consists of a thick layer of air that blocks light and makes it difficult to see the small details of the objects.

Chapter 307.Why the Air is to appear whiter as it approaches nearer to the Earth.

As the air is thicker nearer the earth, and becomes thinner as it rises, look, when the sun is in the east, towards the west, between the north and south, and you will perceive that the thickest and lowest air will receive more light from the sun than the thinner air, because its beams meet with more resistance.

As the air is denser closer to the ground and gets thinner as you go higher, look, when the sun is in the east, toward the west, between the north and south, and you will notice that the denser and lower air receives more sunlight than the thinner air, because its rays encounter more resistance.

If the sky terminate low, at the end of a plain, that part of it nearest to the horizon, being seen only through the thick air, will alter and break its natural[Pg 169] colour, and will appear whiter than over your head, where the visual ray does not pass through so much of that gross air, corrupted by earthy vapours. But if you turn towards the east, the air will be darker the nearer it approaches the earth; for the air being thicker, does not admit the light of the sun to pass so freely.

If the sky is low at the edge of a flat area, the part of it closest to the horizon, seen through the thick air, will change and lose its natural[Pg 169] color, appearing whiter than the sky directly above you, where the light doesn't pass through as much of that polluted air mixed with earthly vapors. But if you look toward the east, the air will seem darker as it gets closer to the ground; the thicker air doesn’t let sunlight pass through as easily.

Chap. 408.How to paint the distant Part of a Landscape.

It is evident that the air is in some parts thicker and grosser than in others, particularly that nearest to the earth; and as it rises higher, it becomes thinner and more transparent. The objects which are high and large, from which you are at some distance, will be less apparent in the lower parts; because the visual ray which perceives them, passes through a long space of dense air; and it is easy to prove that the upper parts are seen by a line, which, though on the side of the eye it originates in a thick air, nevertheless, as it ascends to the highest summit of its object, terminates in an air much thinner than that of the lower parts; and for that reason the more that line or visual ray advances from the eye, it becomes, in its progress from one point to another, thinner and thinner, passing from a pure air into another which is purer; so that a painter who has mountains to represent in a landscape, ought to observe, that from one hill to another, the tops will appear always clearer than the bases. In proportion as the distance from one to another is greater, the top will be[Pg 170] clearer; and the higher they are, the more they will shew their variety of form and colour.

It is clear that the air is thicker and denser in some areas than in others, especially close to the ground; and as you go higher, it becomes thinner and more transparent. Objects that are large and high, from which you view them from a distance, will be less visible in the lower parts; because the line of sight that detects them passes through a large volume of dense air. It’s easy to demonstrate that the upper parts are seen by a line that, although it begins in thick air at the eye level, ends in much thinner air as it reaches the highest point of the object. For this reason, the further that line or visual ray travels from the eye, the thinner it becomes as it moves from a clear air to an even purer one. Thus, an artist depicting mountains in a landscape should keep in mind that the tops will always appear clearer than the bases as they move from one hill to another. The greater the distance between them, the clearer the top will be[Pg 170], and the higher they are, the more their diverse shapes and colors will show.

Chap. 309.Of precise and confused Objects.

The parts that are near in the fore-ground should be finished in a bold determined manner; but those in the distance must be unfinished, and confused in their outlines.

The parts that are close in the foreground should be completed in a bold, confident style; but those in the distance should remain unfinished and blurred in their shapes.

Chap. 310.Of distant Objects.

That part of any object which is nearest to the luminary from which it receives the light, will be the lightest.

That part of any object that is closest to the source of light will be the brightest.

The representation of an object in every degree of distance, loses degrees of its strength; that is, in proportion as the object is more remote from the eye it will be less perceivable through the air in its representation.

The way we see an object from different distances diminishes its clarity; in other words, the further away the object is from our eyes, the harder it is to see it clearly through the air.

Chap. 311.Of Buildings seen in a thick Air.

Buildings in Thick Air

That part of a building seen through a thick air, will appear less distinct than another part seen through a thinner air. Therefore the eye, N, looking at the[Pg 171] tower A D, will see it more confusedly in the lower degrees, but at the same time lighter; and as it ascends to the other degrees it will appear more distinct, but somewhat darker.

That part of a building viewed through thick air will look less clear than another part seen through thinner air. So, the eye, N, looking at the [Pg 171] tower A D, will see it more muddled in the lower levels, but at the same time lighter; and as it rises to higher levels, it will appear clearer but a bit darker.

Chap. 312.Of Towns and other Objects seen through a thick Air.

Towns in Thick Air

Buildings or towns seen through a fog, or the air made thick by smoke or other vapours, will appear less distinct the lower they are; and, vice versâ, they will be sharper and more visible in proportion as they are higher. We have said, in Chapter cccxxi. that the air is thicker the lower it is, and thinner as it is higher. It is demonstrated also by the cut, where the tower, A F, is seen by the eye N, in a thick air, from B to F, which is divided into four degrees, growing thicker as they are nearer the bottom. The less the quantity of air interposed between the eye and its object is, the less also will the colour of the object participate of the colour of that air. It[Pg 172] follows, that the greater the quantity of the air interposed between the eye and the object seen, is, the more this object will participate of the colour of the air. It is demonstrated thus: N being the eye looking at the five parts of the tower A F, viz. A B C D E, I say, that if the air were of the same thickness, there would be the same proportion between the colour of the air at the bottom of the tower and the colour of the air that the same tower has at the place B, as there is in length between the line M and F. As, however, we have supposed that the air is not of equal thickness, but, on the contrary, thicker as it is lower, it follows, that the proportion by which the air tinges the different elevations of the tower B C F, exceeds the proportion of the lines; because the line M F, besides its being longer than the line S B, passes by unequal degrees through a quality of air which is unequal in thickness.

Buildings or towns viewed through fog, smoke, or other vapors appear less clear the lower they are; conversely, they become sharper and more visible as they rise higher. We mentioned in Chapter cccxxi that the air is denser at lower altitudes and thinner at higher ones. This is also shown in the diagram, where the tower, A F, is seen by the eye N in dense air, stretching from B to F, which is divided into four sections, getting denser as it approaches the bottom. The less air there is between the eye and the object, the less the object's color will blend with the color of that air. It[Pg 172] follows that the more air there is between the eye and the observed object, the more that object will take on the color of the air. We can demonstrate this: with N as the eye looking at the five parts of the tower A F, namely A B C D E, I say that if the air were equally thick, the color of the air at the bottom of the tower would proportionally match the color of the air at point B, just as the lengths between line M and F. However, since we have assumed that the air is not uniformly thick but thicker at lower levels, it follows that the way the air shades the various heights of the tower B C F exceeds the proportional lengths; because line M F, besides being longer than line S B, passes through air that varies in thickness.

Chap. 313.Of the inferior Extremities of distant Objects.

The inferior or lower extremities of distant objects are not so apparent as the upper extremities. This is observable in mountains and hills, the tops of which detach from the sides of other mountains behind. We see the tops of these more determined and distinctly than their bases; because the upper extremities are darker, being less encompassed by thick air, which always remains in the lower regions, and makes them appear dim and confused. It is the[Pg 173] same with trees, buildings, and other objects high up. From this effect it often happens that a high tower, seen at a great distance, will appear broad at top, and narrow at bottom; because the thin air towards the top does not prevent the angles on the sides and other different parts of the tower from being seen, as the thick air does at bottom. This is demonstrated by the seventh proposition[77], which says, that the thick air interposed between the eye and the sun, is lighter below than above, and where the air is whiteish, it confuses the dark objects more than if such air were blueish or thinner, as it is higher up. The battlements of a fortress have the spaces between equal to the breadth of the battlement, and yet the space will appear wider; at a great distance the battlements will appear very much diminished, and being removed still farther, will disappear entirely, and the fort shew only the straight wall, as if there were no battlements.

The lower parts of distant objects aren’t as noticeable as the upper parts. This can be seen in mountains and hills, where the tops stand out more clearly than their bases. We see the tops more clearly because they are darker, being less affected by the thick air that usually lingers in the lower areas, making them look hazy and unclear. The same happens with trees, buildings, and other tall objects. As a result, a tall tower viewed from a distance may look wider at the top and narrower at the bottom; the thinner air at the top allows us to see the angles and different parts of the tower better than the thicker air at the bottom does. This is proven by the seventh proposition[77], which states that the thick air between the eye and the sun is lighter at the bottom than at the top, and where the air is whitish, it blurs dark objects more than if the air were bluish or thinner, as it is higher up. The gaps in a fortress's battlements are equal to the width of the battlements, yet from a distance, these spaces will seem wider; as you move even farther away, the battlements will appear much smaller, and if you go back far enough, they will disappear entirely, leaving just the straight wall, as if there were no battlements at all.

Chap. 314.Which Parts of Objects disappear first by being removed farther from the Eye, and which preserve their Appearance.

The smallest parts are those which, by being removed, lose their appearance first; this may be observed in the gloss upon spherical bodies, or columns, and the slender parts of animals; as in a stag, the first sight of which does not discover its legs and horns so soon as its body, which, being[Pg 174] broader, will be perceived from a greater distance. But the parts which disappear the very first, are the lines which describe the members, and terminate the surface and shape of bodies.

The smallest parts are the ones that, when removed, lose their appearance first; this can be seen in the shine on round objects, or pillars, and the thin parts of animals; for example, in a stag, the first glance doesn't reveal its legs and horns as quickly as it does its body, which, being[Pg 174] broader, can be seen from farther away. But the parts that disappear first are the lines that define the limbs and outline the surface and shape of objects.

Chap. 315.Why Objects are less distinguished in proportion as they are farther removed from the Eye.

This happens because the smallest parts are lost first; the second, in point of size, are also lost at a somewhat greater distance, and so on successively; the parts by degrees melting away, the perception of the object is diminished; and at last all the parts, and the whole, are entirely lost to the sight [78]. Colours also disappear on account of the density of the air interposed between the eye and the object.

This happens because the smallest parts are lost first; the second smallest parts are also lost at a slightly greater distance, and so on successively; the parts gradually fading away causes our perception of the object to decrease; and eventually, all the parts, and the whole object, are completely lost from sight [78]. Colors also vanish due to the density of the air between the eye and the object.

Chap. 316.Why Faces appear dark at a Distance.

It is evident that the similitude of all objects placed before us, large as well as small, is perceptible to our senses through the iris of the eye. If through so small an entrance the immensity of the sky and of the earth is admitted, the faces of men (which are scarcely any thing in comparison of such large objects), being still diminished by the distance, will occupy so little of the eye, that they become almost imperceptible. Besides, having to pass through a dark medium from the surface to the Retina in the[Pg 175] inside, where the impression is made, the colour of faces (not being very strong, and rendered still more obscure by the darkness of the tube) when arrived at the focus appears dark. No other reason can be given on that point, except that the speck in the middle of the apple of the eye is black, and, being full of a transparent fluid like air, performs the same office as a hole in a board, which on looking into it appears black; and that those things which are seen through both a light and dark air, become confused and obscure.

It is clear that the similarity of all objects around us, both large and small, is noticeable to our senses through the iris of the eye. If such a vast expanse as the sky and the earth can come through such a tiny opening, the faces of people (which are hardly significant compared to those large objects), being even smaller due to distance, will take up so little space in our vision that they become nearly invisible. Additionally, as the light travels through a dark medium to reach the Retina inside, where the image is formed, the color of faces (which isn't very strong and is further muted by the darkness of the passage) appears dark when it finally focuses. There’s no other explanation for this, except that the spot in the center of the eye is black, and since it’s filled with a clear fluid similar to air, it acts like a hole in a board, which appears black when you look through it; moreover, objects viewed through both bright and dim lighting become blurred and unclear.

Chap. 317.Of Towns and other Buildings seen through a Fog in the Morning or Evening.

Buildings seen afar off in the morning or in the evening, when there is a fog, or thick air, shew only those parts distinctly which are enlightened by the sun towards the horizon; and the parts of those buildings which are not turned towards the sun remain confused and almost of the colour of the fog.

Buildings viewed from a distance in the morning or evening, when there’s fog or heavy air, only show the parts lit up by the sun near the horizon; the sections of those buildings that face away from the sun stay unclear and almost blend into the color of the fog.

Chap. 318.Of the Height of Buildings seen in a Fog.

Of a building near the eye the top parts will appear more confused than the bottom, because there is more fog between the eye and the top than at the base. And a square tower, seen at a great distance through a fog, will appear narrower at the base than at the summit. This is accounted for in Chapter cccxiii. which says, that the fog will appear whiter and thicker as it approaches the ground;[Pg 176] and as it is said before[79], that a dark object will appear smaller in proportion as it is placed on a whiter ground. Therefore the fog being whiter at bottom than at top, it follows that the tower (being darkish) will appear narrower at the base than at the summit.

When you look at a building, the upper parts will seem more chaotic than the lower ones, because there’s more fog between your eyes and the top than at the bottom. And if you see a square tower from a long distance through fog, it will look narrower at the bottom than at the top. This is explained in Chapter cccxiii, which states that the fog looks whiter and thicker as it gets closer to the ground;[Pg 176] and as mentioned earlier[79], a dark object appears smaller in proportion when placed against a lighter background. So, since the fog is whiter at the bottom than at the top, it stands to reason that the tower (being somewhat dark) will look narrower at the base than at the top.

Chap. 319.Why Objects which are high, appear darker at a Distance than those which are low, though the Fog be uniform, and of equal Thickness.

Amongst objects situated in a fog, thick air, vapour, smoke, or at a distance, the highest will be the most distinctly seen: and amongst objects equal in height, that placed in the darkest fog, will be most confused and dark. As it happens to the eye H, looking at A B C, three towers of equal height; it sees the top C as low as R, in two degrees of thickness; and the top B, in one degree only; therefore the top C will appear darker than the top of the tower B.

Among objects surrounded by fog, thick air, vapor, smoke, or at a distance, the tallest will be the most clearly visible: and among objects of the same height, the one in the densest fog will appear the most obscured and dark. Just like how the eye H views A, B, and C, three towers of equal height; it sees the top of C as low as R, with two levels of thickness; and the top of B, with just one level. Therefore, the top of C will look darker than the top of tower B.

High Objects Darker

Chap. 320.Of Objects seen in a Fog.

Objects seen through a fog will appear larger than they are in reality, because the aerial perspective does not agree with the linear, viz. the colour does not agree with the magnitude of the object[80]; such a fog being similar to the thickness of air interposed between the eye and the horizon in fine weather. But in this case the fog is near the eye, and though the object be also near, it makes it appear as if it were as far off as the horizon; where a great tower would appear no bigger than a man placed near the eye.

Items seen through fog will look larger than they really are, because the way we perceive distance doesn’t match with the actual size. The colors don’t correspond with the object’s scale[80]; this fog acts like the thickness of air that separates the eye from the horizon on a clear day. However, in this situation, the fog is close to the eye, and even though the object is also nearby, it makes it seem as if it’s as far away as the horizon; for example, a tall tower would look no bigger than a man standing close by.

Chap. 321.Of those Objects which the Eyes perceive through a Mist or thick Air.

The nearer the air is to water, or to the ground, the thicker it becomes. It is proved by the nineteenth proposition of the second book[81], that bodies rise in proportion to their weight; and it follows, that a light body will rise higher than another which is heavy.

The closer the air is to water, or to the ground, the denser it gets. It's demonstrated in the nineteenth proposition of the second book[81], that objects rise in relation to their weight; thus, a lighter object will rise higher than a heavier one.

Chap. 322.Miscellaneous Observations.

Of different objects equal in magnitude, form, shade, and distance from the eye, those will appear the smaller that are placed on the lighter ground. This is exemplified by observing the sun when seen behind a tree without leaves; all the ramifications seen against that great light are so diminished that they remain almost invisible. The same may be observed of a pole placed between the sun and the eye.

Of different objects that are the same size, shape, color, and distance from the eye, those that are on a lighter background will look smaller. You can see this when you look at the sun shining behind a bare tree; all the branches against that bright light appear so small that they're nearly invisible. The same thing happens with a pole positioned between the sun and your eyes.

Parallel bodies placed upright, and seen through a fog, will appear larger at top than at bottom. This is proved by the ninth proposition[82], which says, that a fog, or thick air, penetrated by the rays of the sun, will appear whiter the lower they are.

Parallel bodies positioned upright and viewed through fog will look larger at the top than at the bottom. This is demonstrated by the ninth proposition[82], which states that fog or dense air illuminated by sunlight will appear whiter the lower it is.

Things seen afar off will appear out of proportion, because the parts which are the lightest will send their image with stronger rays than the parts which are darkest. I have seen a woman dressed in black, with a white veil over her head, which appeared twice as large as her shoulders covered with black.

Things seen from a distance will seem out of proportion because the lighter parts will reflect their image more strongly than the darker parts. I've seen a woman in black with a white veil over her head that looked twice the size of her shoulders covered in black.


MISCELLANEOUS OBSERVATIONS.


LANDSCAPE.

Chap. 323.Of Objects seen at a Distance.

Any dark object will appear lighter when removed to some distance from the eye. It follows, by the contrary reason, that a dark object will appear still darker when brought nearer to the eye. Therefore the inferior parts of any object whatever, placed in thick air, will appear farther from the eye at the bottom than at the top; for that reason the lower parts of a mountain appear farther off than its top, which is in reality the farthest.

Any dark object looks lighter when it's a bit far away from your eyes. Conversely, a dark object will seem even darker when it's closer. So, the lower parts of any object in thick air will appear farther away from the eye than the upper parts; that's why the bottom of a mountain seems farther away than its peak, even though the peak is actually the farthest point.

Chap. 324.Of a Town seen through a thick Air.

The eye which, looking downwards, sees a town immersed in very thick air, will perceive the top of the buildings darker, but more distinct than the bottom. The tops detach against a light ground, because they are seen against the low and thick air which is beyond them. This is a consequence of what has been explained in the preceding chapter.

The eye that looks down and sees a town shrouded in thick air will notice that the tops of the buildings appear darker but clearer than the bottoms. The tops stand out against a lighter background because they are viewed against the dense, low air behind them. This is a result of what was discussed in the previous chapter.

Ch. 325.How to draw a Landscape.

Contrive that the trees in your landscape be half in shadow and half in the light. It is better to represent them as when the sun is veiled with thin clouds, because in that case the trees receive a general light from the sky, and are darkest in those parts which are nearest to the earth.

Imagine that the trees in your landscape are partly in shadow and partly in the light. It's better to depict them as they would look when the sun is covered by thin clouds, because in that situation the trees get a soft, diffuse light from the sky, making them darkest where they are closest to the ground.

Chap. 326.Of the Green of the Country.

Of the greens seen in the country, that of trees and other plants will appear darker than that of fields and meadows, though they may happen to be of the same quality.

Of the greens seen in the countryside, the greens of trees and other plants will look darker than those of fields and meadows, even if they are of the same quality.

Chap. 327.What Greens will appear most of a blueish Cast.

Those greens will appear to approach nearest to blue which are of the darkest shade when remote. This is proved by the seventh proposition[83], which says, that blue is composed of black and white seen at a great distance.

Those greens will seem to get closest to blue when they are the darkest shade at a distance. This is demonstrated by the seventh proposition[83], which states that blue consists of black and white as observed from far away.

Chap. 328.The Colour of the Sea from different Aspects.

When the sea is a little ruffled it has no sameness of colour; for whoever looks at it from the shore, will see it of a dark colour, in a greater degree as it[Pg 182] approaches towards the horizon, and will perceive also certain lights moving slowly on the surface like a flock of sheep. Whoever looks at the sea from on board a ship, at a distance from the land, sees it blue. Near the shore it appears darkish, on account of the colour of the earth reflected by the water, as in a looking-glass; but at sea the azure of the air is reflected to the eye by the waves in the same manner.

When the sea is a bit choppy, it doesn't have a uniform color; anyone watching from the shore will see it looking dark, especially as it gets closer to the horizon, and they will also notice some lights drifting slowly on the surface like a flock of sheep. Anyone viewing the sea from a ship, far from land, sees it as blue. Near the shore, it seems darker due to the earth’s colors reflecting in the water, like a mirror; but out at sea, the blue of the sky is reflected in the waves in the same way.

Chap. 329.Why the same Prospect appears larger at some Times than at others.

Objects in the country appear sometimes larger and sometimes smaller than they actually are, from the circumstance of the air interposed between the eye and the horizon, happening to be either thicker or thinner than usual.

Items in the countryside sometimes look bigger and sometimes smaller than they really are, due to the air between the eye and the horizon being either thicker or thinner than usual.

Of two horizons equally distant from the eye, that which is seen through the thicker air will appear farther removed; and the other will seem nearer, being seen through a thinner air.

Of two horizons the same distance away, the one seen through thicker air will look farther away, while the other will seem closer, as it is viewed through thinner air.

Objects of unequal size, but equally distant, will appear equal if the air which is between them and the eye be of proportionable inequality of thickness, viz. if the thickest air be interposed between the eye and the smallest of the objects. This is proved by the perspective of colours[84], which is so deceitful that a mountain which would appear small by the compasses, will seem larger than a small hill near [Pg 183] the eye; as a finger placed near the eye will cover a large mountain far off.

Objects of different sizes, but the same distance away, will look the same if the air between them and the eye has varying thicknesses, meaning that the thickest air is between the eye and the smallest object. This is demonstrated by the trickiness of color perspective[84], where a mountain that seems small through a compass will appear larger than a small hill nearby [Pg 183] when viewed. For example, a finger held close to the eye can cover a distant large mountain.

Chap. 330.Of Smoke.

Smoke is more transparent, though darker towards the extremities of its waves than in the middle.

Vape is clearer, but darker at the edges of its waves than in the center.

It moves in a more oblique direction in proportion to the force of the wind which impels it.

It moves at a more angled path based on the strength of the wind pushing it.

Different kinds of smoke vary in colour, as the causes that produce them are various.

Different types of smoke come in different colors because the things that create them are diverse.

Smoke never produces determined shadows, and the extremities are lost as they recede from their primary cause. Objects behind it are less apparent in proportion to the thickness of the smoke. It is whiter nearer its origin, and bluer towards its termination.

Smoke never creates sharp shadows, and the edges fade away as they move away from their source. Objects behind it become less visible based on how dense the smoke is. It appears whiter closer to where it comes from and takes on a bluish tint further away.

Fire appears darker, the more smoke there is interposed between it and the eye.

Fire looks darker the more smoke gets between it and the eye.

Where smoke is farther distant, the objects are less confused by it.

Where the smoke is farther away, things are less obscured by it.

It encumbers and dims all the landscape like a fog. Smoke is seen to issue from different places, with flames at the origin, and the most dense part of it. The tops of mountains will be more seen than the lower parts, as in a fog.

It covers and dulls the entire landscape like fog. Smoke can be seen coming from various spots, with flames at the source and in the thickest areas. The tops of the mountains will be more visible than the lower parts, just like in fog.

Chap. 331.In what Part Smoke is lightest.

Smoke which is seen between the sun and the eye will be lighter and more transparent than any other[Pg 184] in the landscape. The same is observed of dust, and of fog; while, if you place yourself between the sun and those objects, they will appear dark.

Vapor that you see between the sun and your eye will look lighter and more transparent than anything else[Pg 184] in the landscape. The same goes for dust and fog; however, if you stand between the sun and those objects, they will look dark.

Chap. 332.Of the Sun-beams passing through the Openings of Clouds.

The sun-beams which penetrate the openings interposed between clouds of various density and form, illuminate all the places over which they pass, and tinge with their own colour all the dark places that are behind: which dark places are only seen in the intervals between the rays.

The sunlight that breaks through the gaps between clouds of different shapes and thickness lights up everything it touches and colors all the shadowy spots behind it; those dark areas are only visible in the moments between the rays.

Chap. 333.Of the Beginning of Rain.

When the rain begins to fall, it tarnishes and darkens the air, giving it a dull colour, but receives still on one side a faint light from the sun, and is shaded on the other side, as we observe in clouds; till at last it darkens also the earth, depriving it entirely of the light of the sun. Objects seen through the rain appear confused and of undetermined shape, but those which are near will be more distinct. It is observable, that on the side where the rain is shaded, objects will be more clearly distinguished than where it receives the light; because on the shady side they lose only their principal lights, whilst on the other they lose both their lights and shadows, the lights mixing with the light part of the rain, and the shadows are also considerably weakened by it.

When the rain starts to fall, it dulls and darkens the air, giving it a gray color, yet on one side, it still catches a faint light from the sun, while the other side is in shadow, similar to what we see in clouds. Eventually, it completely darkens the earth, cutting off all sunlight. Objects seen through the rain look blurry and shapeless, but those that are close by are more defined. It’s interesting to note that on the side where the rain is in shadow, objects are clearer than where they catch the light; this is because the shadowed side only loses its main highlights, while the lighted side loses both highlights and shadows. The highlights blend with the lighter part of the rain, and the shadows become much lighter as well.

Chap. 334.The Seasons are to be observed.

In Autumn you will represent the objects according as it is more or less advanced. At the beginning of it the leaves of the oldest branches only begin to fade, more or less, however, according as the plant is situated in a fertile or barren country; and do not imitate those who represent trees of every kind (though at equal distance) with the same quality of green. Endeavour to vary the colour of meadows, stones, trunks of trees, and all other objects, as much as possible, for Nature abounds in variety ad infinitum.

In Autumn, you'll depict the objects based on how developed they are. At the start, only the leaves of the oldest branches begin to fade, and this varies depending on whether the plant is in a rich or poor area. Don't mimic those who portray all types of trees (even if they're spaced out equally) with the same shade of green. Try to vary the colors of meadows, rocks, tree trunks, and all other objects as much as you can, because Nature is full of endless variety ad infinitum.

Chap. 335.The Difference of Climates to be observed.

Near the sea-shore, and in southern parts, you will be careful not to represent the Winter season by the appearance of trees and fields, as you would do in places more inland, and in northern countries, except when these are covered with ever-greens, which shoot afresh all the year round.

Nearby the coast, especially in the southern areas, be cautious not to depict winter by showing trees and fields like you would in more inland and northern regions, unless they are covered with evergreens, which stay green and grow throughout the year.

Chap. 336.Of Dust.

Dust becomes lighter the higher it rises, and appears darker the less it is raised, when it is seen between the eye and the sun.

Dust gets lighter the higher it goes, and looks darker the lower it is, when viewed between the eye and the sun.

Chap. 337.How to represent the Wind.

In representing the effect of the wind, besides the bending of trees, and leaves twisting the wrong side upwards, you will also express the small dust whirling upwards till it mixes in a confused manner with the air.

In showing the effect of the wind, along with the bending of trees and leaves turning inside out, you should also convey the small dust swirling up until it blends chaotically with the air.

Chap. 338.Of a Wilderness.

Those trees and shrubs which are by their nature more loaded with small branches, ought to be touched smartly in the shadows, but those which have larger foliage, will cause broader shadows.

Those trees and shrubs that naturally have more small branches should be lightly touched in the shadows, while those with larger leaves will create broader shadows.

Chap. 339.Of the Horizon seen in the Water.

By the sixth proposition [85], the horizon will be seen in the water as in a looking-glass, on that side which is opposite the eye. And if the painter has to represent a spot covered with water, let him remember that the colour of it cannot be either lighter or darker than that of the neighbouring objects.

By the sixth proposition [85], the horizon will be reflected in the water like a mirror, on the side opposite to where the viewer is looking. And if the artist needs to depict an area covered with water, they should keep in mind that its color cannot be lighter or darker than that of the surrounding objects.

Chap. 340.Of the Shadow of Bridges on the Surface of the Water.

The shadows of bridges can never be seen on the surface of the water, unless it should have lost its transparent and reflecting quality, and become troubled[Pg 187] and muddy; because clear water being polished and smooth on its surface, the image of the bridge is formed in it as in a looking-glass, and reflected in all the points situated between the eye and the bridge at equal angles; and even the air is seen under the arches. These circumstances cannot happen when the water is muddy, because it does not reflect the objects any longer, but receives the shadow of the bridge in the same manner as a dusty road would receive it.

The shadows of bridges can only be seen on the water's surface if it hasn’t lost its clarity and reflective quality, turning instead into something murky and disturbed[Pg 187]. Clear water, being smooth and polished, reflects the bridge like a mirror, capturing its image at all points between the viewer and the bridge at the same angles; even the space beneath the arches of the bridge is visible. These conditions can’t exist when the water is muddy, as it no longer reflects objects but instead takes on the bridge's shadow, much like a dusty road would.

Chap. 341.How a Painter ought to put in Practice the Perspective of Colours.

To put in practice that perspective which teaches the alteration, the lessening, and even the entire loss of the very essence of colours, you must take some points in the country at the distance of about sixty-five yards[86] from each other; as trees, men, or some other remarkable objects. In regard to the first tree, you will take a glass, and having fixed that well, and also your eye, draw upon it, with the greatest accuracy, the tree you see through it; then put it a little on one side, and compare it closely with the natural one, and colour it, so that in shape and colour it may resemble the original, and that by shutting one eye they may both appear painted, and at the same distance. The same rule may be applied to the second and third tree at the distance you have fixed. These[Pg 188] studies will be very useful if managed with judgment, where they may be wanted in the offscape of a picture. I have observed that the second tree is less by four fifths than the first, at the distance of thirteen yards.

To practice the idea that colors can change, fade, or even lose their essence completely, you need to pick out some points in the landscape that are about sixty-five yards[86] apart from each other, like trees, people, or other notable objects. For the first tree, take a glass and focus it well, along with your eye, then carefully draw the tree you see through it. Shift the glass slightly and compare it closely with the actual tree, painting it so that its shape and color resemble the original. The goal is for both to look painted and appear at the same distance when you close one eye. You can apply the same rule to the second and third trees at the distance you’ve chosen. These[Pg 188] studies will be quite beneficial if done thoughtfully, especially for the background of a painting. I've noticed that the second tree appears to be four-fifths smaller than the first when viewed from thirteen yards away.


Chap. 342.Various Precepts in Painting.

The superficies of any opake body participates of the colour of the transparent medium interposed between the eye and such body, in a greater or less degree, in proportion to the density of such medium and the space it occupies.

The surface of any opaque object shows the color of the transparent medium between the eye and that object, to a greater or lesser extent, depending on the density of that medium and the space it takes up.

The outlines of opake bodies will be less apparent in proportion as those bodies are farther distant from the eye.

The shapes of opaque objects will be less noticeable the farther they are from the eye.

That part of the opake body will be the most shaded, or lightest, which is nearest to the body that shades it, or gives it light.

That part of the opaque body will be the most shaded, or lightest, which is closest to the body that casts the shadow or provides the light.

The surface of any opake body participates more or less of the colour of that body which gives it light, in proportion as the latter is more or less remote, or more or less strong.

The surface of any opaque object reflects some of the color of the light source illuminating it, depending on how far away or how intense that light source is.

Objects seen between lights and shadows will appear to have greater relievo than those which are placed wholly in the light, or wholly in shadow.

Objects seen between light and shadow will appear to have more depth than those that are completely in light or completely in shadow.

When you give strength and precision to objects seen at a great distance, they will appear as if they were very near. Endeavour that your imitation be such as to give a just idea of distances. If the object[Pg 189] in nature appear confused in the outlines, let the same be observed in your picture.

When you give strength and clarity to objects viewed from far away, they will seem like they're very close. Make sure your imitation accurately represents distances. If the object[Pg 189] in nature looks blurred in its outlines, let that be reflected in your picture.

The outlines of distant objects appear undetermined and confused, for two reasons: the first is, that they come to the eye by so small an angle, and are therefore so much diminished, that they strike the sight no more than small objects do, which though near can hardly be distinguished, such as the nails of the fingers, insects, and other similar things: the second is, that between the eye and the distant objects there is so much air interposed, that it becomes thick; and, like a veil, tinges the shadows with its own whiteness, and turns them from a dark colour to another between black and white, such as azure.

The outlines of distant objects look unclear and muddled for two main reasons: first, they reach our eyes at such a small angle that they seem so much smaller, making them hard to distinguish, like small objects that are close, such as fingernails, insects, and similar things. Second, there’s so much air between our eyes and those distant objects that it becomes dense; like a veil, it washes out the shadows with its own whiteness and shifts their color from stark black to something in between, like a shade of blue.

Although, by reason of the great distance, the appearance of many things is lost, yet those things which receive the light from the sun will be more discernible, while the rest remain enveloped in confused shadows. And because the air is thicker near the ground, the things which are lower will appear confused; and vice versâ.

Although the distance causes many things to lose their clarity, those that catch sunlight will be easier to see, while the others stay shrouded in unclear shadows. And since the air is denser closer to the ground, lower objects will look muddled; and vice versa.

When the sun tinges the clouds on the horizon with red, those objects which, on account of their distance, appear blueish, will participate of that redness, and will produce a mixture between the azure and red, which renders the prospect lively and pleasant; all the opake bodies which receive that light will appear distinct, and of a reddish colour, and the air, being transparent, will be impregnated with it, and appear of the colour of lilies [87].

When the sun colors the clouds on the horizon red, those distant objects that look bluish will catch some of that redness, creating a mix of blue and red that makes the view vibrant and enjoyable. All the solid things that reflect that light will look clear and reddish, and since the air is transparent, it will take on that color, appearing like lilies. [87].

The air which is between the earth and the sun when it rises or sets, will always dim the objects it surrounds, more than the air any where else, because it is whiter.

The air between the earth and the rising or setting sun always dims the objects around it more than the air elsewhere because it is whiter.

It is not necessary to mark strongly the outlines of any object which is placed upon another. It ought to detach of itself.

It’s not necessary to heavily outline any object that’s placed on top of another. It should stand out on its own.

If the outline or extremity of a white and curved surface terminate upon another white body, it will have a shade at that extremity, darker than any part of the light; but if against a dark object, such outline, or extremity, will be lighter than any part of the light.

If the edge or tip of a white, curved surface meets another white object, it will have a shadow at that edge that's darker than any part of the light; but if it meets a dark object, that edge will be lighter than any part of the light.

Those objects which are most different in colour, will appear the most detached from each other.

Objects that are very different in color will seem the most separate from one another.

Those parts of objects which first disappear in the distance, are extremities similar in colour, and ending one upon the other, as the extremities of an oak tree upon another oak similar to it. The next to disappear at a greater distance are, objects of mixed colours, when they terminate one upon the other, as trees, ploughed fields, walls, heaps of rubbish, or of stones. The last extremities of bodies that vanish are those which, being light, terminate upon a dark ground; or being dark, upon a light ground.

The parts of objects that fade away first into the distance are similar-colored ends that overlap, like the branches of one oak tree on another similar tree. The next to disappear from a greater distance are mixed-color objects that also overlap, like trees, plowed fields, walls, piles of trash, or piles of stones. The last parts of objects to vanish are those that, if they’re light, blend into a dark background; or if they’re dark, they blend into a light background.

Of objects situated above the eye, at equal heights, the farthest removed from the eye will appear the lowest; and if situated below the eye, the nearest to it will appear the lowest. The parallel lines situated sidewise will concur to one point [88].

Of objects positioned above the eye, at the same height, the one furthest from the eye will seem the lowest; and if they are below the eye, the closest one will seem the lowest. The parallel lines located on the sides will converge at one point [88].

Those objects which are near a river, or a lake, in the distant part of a landscape, are less apparent and distinct than those that are remote from them.

Objects that are close to a river or a lake in the far part of a landscape are less noticeable and clear than those that are farther away from them.

Of bodies of equal density, those that are nearest to the eye will appear thinnest, and the most remote thickest.

Of bodies with the same density, the ones closest to the eye will look the thinnest, while the ones farthest away will look the thickest.

A large eye-ball will see objects larger than a small one. The experiment may be made by looking at any of the celestial bodies, through a pin-hole, which being capable of admitting but a portion of its light, it seems to diminish and lose of its size in the same proportion as the pin-hole is smaller than the usual apparent size of the object.

A large eyeball will see things larger than a small one. You can test this by looking at any of the stars or planets through a pinhole. Since the pinhole only lets in part of its light, the object appears smaller and loses size in the same way that the pinhole is smaller than the object’s normal apparent size.

A thick air interposed between the eye and any object, will render the outlines of such object undetermined and confused, and make it appear of a larger size than it is in reality; because the linear perspective does not diminish the angle which conveys the object to the eye. The aerial perspective carries it farther off, so that the one removes it from the eye, while the other preserves its magnitude [89].

A thick layer of air between the eye and any object makes the outlines of that object unclear and fuzzy, causing it to look larger than it actually is. This happens because linear perspective doesn't reduce the angle at which the object is seen. Aerial perspective pushes it further away, so one aspect moves it away from the eye, while the other keeps its size intact. [89].

When the sun is in the West the vapours of the earth fall down again and thicken the air, so that objects not enlightened by the sun remain dark and confused, but those which receive its light will be tinged yellow and red, according to the sun’s appearance on the horizon. Again, those that receive its light are very distinct, particularly public buildings[Pg 192] and houses in towns and villages, because their shadows are dark, and it seems as if those parts which are plainly seen were coming out of confused and undetermined foundations, because at that time every thing is of one and the same colour, except what is enlightened by the sun[90].

When the sun sets in the west, the earth's vapors fall back down and thicken the air, making objects not lit by the sun remain dark and unclear. However, those that catch its light will take on yellow and red hues, depending on the sun's position on the horizon. The illuminated objects stand out clearly, especially public buildings and houses in towns and villages, because their shadows are dark. It appears as though the clearly visible parts are emerging from indistinct and unclear foundations since, at that time, everything shares the same color except for what is lit by the sun[Pg 192][90].

Any object receiving the light from the sun, receives also the general light; so that two kinds of shadows are produced: the darkest of the two is that which happens to have its central line directed towards the centre of the sun. The central lines of the primitive and secondary lights are the same as the central lines of the primitive and secondary shadows.

Any object that gets sunlight also receives general light; this creates two types of shadows. The darker of the two is the one that has its center line pointing directly at the center of the sun. The center lines of the primary and secondary lights are the same as the center lines of the primary and secondary shadows.

The setting sun is a beautiful and magnificent object when it tinges with its colour all the great buildings of towns, villages, and the top of high trees in the country. All below is confused and almost lost in a tender and general mass; for, being only enlightened by the air, the difference between the shadows and the lights is small, and for that reason it is not much detached. But those that are high are touched by the rays of the sun, and, as was said before, are tinged with its colour; the painter therefore ought to take the same colour with which he has painted the sun, and employ it in all those parts of his work which receive its light.

The setting sun is a stunning sight as it colors all the grand buildings of towns, villages, and the tops of tall trees in the countryside. Everything below becomes blurred and almost lost in a gentle blend; since it's only illuminated by the air, the contrast between shadows and light is minimal, making it less distinct. But the higher elements catch the sun's rays, and, as mentioned before, are highlighted by its color. Therefore, the artist should use the same color they've used for the sun in all the areas of their work that are hit by its light.

It also happens very often, that a cloud will appear [Pg 193] dark without receiving any shadow from a separate cloud, according to the situation of the eye; because it will see only the shady part of the one, while it sees both the enlightened and shady parts of the other.

It often happens that a cloud appears [Pg 193] dark without getting any shadow from another cloud, depending on the viewer's perspective; it only sees the dark part of one cloud while seeing both the bright and dark parts of the other.

Of two objects at equal height, that which is the farthest off will appear the lowest. Observe the first cloud in the cut, though it is lower than the second, it appears as if it were higher. This is demonstrated by the section of the pyramidical rays of the low cloud at M A, and the second (which is higher) at N M, below M A. This happens also when, on account of the rays of the setting or rising sun, a dark cloud appears higher than another which is light.

Of two objects at the same height, the one that is farther away will look lower. Take note of the first cloud in the opening; even though it’s lower than the second cloud, it seems like it’s higher. This is shown by the angles of the rays from the low cloud at M A, and the second cloud (which is higher) at N M, below M A. This also happens when, because of the rays from the rising or setting sun, a dark cloud appears higher than a lighter one.

Objects of Equal Height

Chap. 343.The Brilliancy of a Landscape.

The vivacity and brightness of colours in a landscape will never bear any comparison with a landscape in nature when illumined by the sun, unless the picture be placed so as to receive the same light from the sun itself.

The liveliness and vibrancy of colors in a painting will never compare to a natural landscape illuminated by the sun, unless the artwork is positioned to catch the same sunlight as the scene itself.


MISCELLANEOUS OBSERVATIONS.

Chap. 344.Why a painted Object does not appear so far distant as a real one, though they be conveyed to the Eye by equal Angles.

Real and Painted Objects

If a house be painted on the pannel B C, at the apparent distance of one mile, and by the side of it a real one be perceived at the true distance of one mile also; which objects are so disposed, that the pannel, or picture, A C, intersects the pyramidical rays with the same opening of angles; yet these two objects will never appear of the same size, nor at the same distance, if seen with both eyes [91].

If a house is painted on the panel B C, at an apparent distance of one mile, and next to it a real one is seen at a true distance of one mile as well; if these objects are arranged so that the panel, or picture, A C, intersects the pyramidal rays with the same angle openings; even then, these two objects will never look the same size or at the same distance when viewed with both eyes[91].

Chap. 345.How to draw a Figure standing upon its Feet, to appear forty Braccia [92] high, in a Space of twenty Braccia, with proportionate Members.

In this, as in any other case, the painter is not to mind what kind of surface he has to work upon; particularly if his painting is to be seen from a determined point, such as a window, or any other opening. Because the eye is not to attend to the evenness or roughness of the wall, but only to what is to be represented as beyond that wall; such as a landscape, or any thing else. Nevertheless a curved surface, such as F R G, would be the best, because it has no angles.

In this, as in any other situation, the painter shouldn’t worry about what kind of surface he’s working on; especially if his painting will be viewed from a specific spot, like a window or any other opening. The eye shouldn’t focus on the smoothness or roughness of the wall, but only on what’s depicted beyond that wall, like a landscape or anything else. However, a curved surface, like F R G, would be the best choice since it has no angles.

Figure Standing upon Its Feet

Chap. 346.How to draw a Figure twenty-four Braccia high, upon a Wall twelve Braccia high. Plate XXII.

Draw upon part of the wall M N, half the figure you mean to represent; and the other half upon the cove above, M R. But before that, it will be necessary to draw upon a flat board, or a paper, the profile of the wall and cove, of the same shape and dimension, as that upon which you are to paint. Then draw also the profile of your figure, of whatever size you please, by the side of it; draw all the lines to the point F, and where they intersect the profile M R, you will have the dimensions of your figure as they ought to be drawn upon the real spot. You will find, that on the straight part of the wall M N, it will come of its proper form, because the going off perpendicularly will diminish it naturally; but that part which comes upon the curve will be diminished upon your drawing. The whole must be traced afterwards upon the real spot, which is similar to M N. This is a good and safe method.

Understood! Please provide the text you'd like modernized. by drawing half of the figure you want to represent on part of the wall M N, and the other half on the curve above, M R. But first, it's important to draw the profile of the wall and cove on a flat board or paper, matching the shape and size of the area you’ll be painting. Next, draw the profile of your figure, in whatever size you want, next to it; connect all the lines to the point F, and where they cross the profile M R, you'll find the dimensions for your figure as they should be drawn on the actual spot. You’ll notice that on the flat section of the wall M N, it will maintain its proper shape, because going off perpendicularly will reduce it naturally; however, the part that curves will appear smaller in your drawing. Finally, you need to trace everything onto the actual spot, which is similar to M N. This is a reliable and effective method.

Plate 22

Plate 22.

Plate 22.

London, Published by J. Taylor High Holborn.

London, published by J. Taylor, High Holborn.

Chap. 347.Why, on measuring a Face, and then painting it of the same Size, it will appear larger than the natural one.

A B is the breadth of the space, or of the head, and it is placed on the paper at the distance C F, where the cheeks are, and it would have to stand back all A C, and then the temples would be carried to the distance O R of the lines A F, B F; so that there is the difference C O and R D. It follows that the line C F, and the line D F, in order to become shorter [93], have to go and find the paper where the whole height is drawn, that is to say, the lines F A, and F B, where the true size is; and so it makes the difference, as I have said, of C O, and R D.

A B is the width of the space, or of the head, and it is positioned on the paper at the distance C F, where the cheeks are, and it needs to be set back all A C. Then, the temples would be moved to the distance O R of the lines A F, B F; so there’s the difference C O and R D. This means that the line C F and the line D F, in order to become shorter [93], have to find the paper where the full height is drawn, which corresponds to the lines F A and F B, where the true size is; and this creates the difference, as I mentioned, of C O and R D.

Measuring a Face

Chap. 348.Why the most perfect Imitation of Nature will not appear to have the same Relief as Nature itself.

If nature is seen with two eyes, it will be impossible to imitate it upon a picture so as to appear with the same relief, though the lines, the lights, shades, and colour, be perfectly imitated[94]. It is proved thus: let the eyes A B, look at the object C, with the concurrence of both the central visual rays A C[Pg 198] and B C. I say, that the sides of the visual angles (which contain these central rays) will see the space G D, behind the object C. The eye A will see all the space FD, and the eye B all the space G E. Therefore the two eyes will see behind the object C all the space F E; for which reason that object C becomes as it were transparent, according to the definition of transparent bodies, behind which nothing is hidden. This cannot happen if an object were seen with one eye only, provided it be larger than the eye. From all that has been said, we may conclude, that a painted object, occupying all the space it has behind, leaves no possible way to see any part of the ground, which it covers entirely by its own circumference[95].

If nature is viewed with both eyes, it's impossible to replicate it in a picture so that it appears with the same depth, even if the lines, lights, shadows, and colors are perfectly matched[94]. Here's how it works: let the eyes A and B look at object C, both focusing the central visual rays A C[Pg 198] and B C. I assert that the sides of the visual angles (that contain these central rays) will see the area G D, behind object C. Eye A will see all of area FD, and eye B will see all of area G E. Therefore, both eyes will be able to see behind object C, covering the area F E; thus, object C appears to be transparent, according to the definition of transparent objects, behind which nothing is concealed. This effect can't happen if you look at an object with just one eye, as long as the object is larger than the eye. From all this, we can conclude that a painted object, which takes up all the space behind it, leaves no chance to see any part of the ground that it completely covers with its edges[95].

Relief of Imitation of Nature

Chap. 349.Universality of Painting; a Precept.

A painter cannot be said to aim at universality in the art, unless he love equally every species of that art. For instance, if he delight only in landscape, his can be esteemed only as a simple investigation; and, as our friend Botticello [96] remarks, is but a vain study; since, by throwing a sponge impregnated with various colours against a wall, it leaves some spots upon it, which may appear like a landscape. It is true also, that a variety of compositions may be seen in such spots, according to the disposition of mind with which they are considered; such as heads of men, various animals, battles, rocky scenes, seas, clouds, woods, and the like. It may be compared to the sound of bells, which may seem to say whatever we choose to imagine. In the same manner also, those spots may furnish hints for compositions, though they do not teach us how to finish any particular part; and the imitators of them are but sorry landscape-painters.

An artist can’t be said to aim for universality in art unless he loves every type of that art equally. For example, if he only enjoys landscapes, his work can only be considered a simple exploration. As our friend Botticello [96] points out, it’s just a pointless pursuit; because by throwing a sponge soaked with various colors against a wall, it leaves some spots that might look like a landscape. It’s also true that different compositions can be seen in those spots, depending on the mindset with which they are viewed; such as faces of men, different animals, battles, rocky scenes, oceans, clouds, forests, and so on. It can be likened to the sound of bells, which can seem to say whatever we choose to imagine. Similarly, those spots can inspire compositions, even though they don’t teach us how to finish any specific part; and those who imitate them are just mediocre landscape painters.

Chap. 350.In what Manner the Mirror is the true Master of Painters.

When you wish to know if your picture be like the object you mean to represent, have a flat looking-glass, and place it so as to reflect the object you have imitated, and compare carefully the original with the copy. You see upon a flat mirror the representation of things which appear real; Painting is the same. They are both an even superficies, and both give the idea of something beyond their superficies. Since you are persuaded that the looking-glass, by means of lines and shades, gives you the representation of things as if they were real; you being in possession of colours which in their different lights and shades are stronger than those of the looking-glass, may certainly, if you employ the rules with judgment, give to your picture the same appearance of Nature as you admire in the looking-glass. Or rather, your picture will be like Nature itself seen in a large looking-glass.

When you want to know if your picture looks like the object you’re trying to represent, take a flat mirror and place it so that it reflects the object you’ve painted, then carefully compare the original with your copy. You can see in a flat mirror the representation of things that seem real; painting is the same. They both have a flat surface and both suggest something beyond that surface. Since you believe that the mirror gives you an image of things as if they were real through lines and shades, and you have colors that, in different lights and shades, are even more vibrant than those in the mirror, you can definitely, if you use the right techniques wisely, make your picture look just as natural as what you see in the mirror. In fact, your picture will resemble Nature itself reflected in a large mirror.

This looking-glass (being your master) will shew you the lights and shades of any object whatever. Amongst your colours there are some lighter than the lightest part of your model, and also some darker than the strongest shades; from which it follows, that you ought to represent Nature as seen in your looking-glass, when you look at it with one eye only; because both eyes surround the objects too much, particularly when they are small[97].

This mirror (being your guide) will show you the highlights and shadows of any object. Among your colors, there are some that are lighter than the lightest part of your model, and some that are darker than the deepest shadows; therefore, you should depict Nature as seen through your mirror when you look at it with one eye only; because both eyes give too much perspective on the objects, especially when they are small[97].

Chap. 351.Which Painting is to be esteemed the best.

That painting is the most commendable which has the greatest conformity to what is meant to be imitated. This kind of comparison will often put to shame a certain description of painters, who pretend they can mend the works of Nature; as they do, for instance, when they pretend to represent a child twelve months old, giving him eight heads in height, when Nature in its best proportion admits but five. The breadth of the shoulders also, which is equal to the head, they make double, giving to a child a year old, the proportions of a man of thirty. They have so often practised, and seen others practise these errors, that they have converted them into habit, which has taken so deep a root in their corrupted judgment, that they persuade themselves that Nature and her imitators are wrong in not following their own practice[98].

That painting is the most admirable when it closely resembles what it’s supposed to imitate. This kind of comparison often highlights the shortcomings of certain artists who think they can improve on Nature’s work; for example, when they try to depict a one-year-old child but give them a height of eight heads, while Nature's best proportions allow for only five. They also exaggerate the width of the shoulders, making it double what it should be, giving a one-year-old the proportions of a thirty-year-old man. They have practiced these mistakes so often, and seen others do the same, that they've turned them into a habit. This habit has taken such a strong hold on their distorted judgment that they convince themselves that Nature and its imitators are wrong for not following their own techniques.[98].

Chap. 352.Of the Judgment to be made of a Painter’s Work.

The first thing to be considered is, whether the figures have their proper relief, according to their respective situations, and the light they are in: that the shadows be not the same at the extremities of the groups, as in the middle; because being surrounded by [Pg 202] shadows, or shaded only on one side, produce very different effects. The groups in the middle are surrounded by shadows from the other figures, which are between them and the light. Those which are at the extremities have the shadows only on one side, and receive the light on the other. The strongest and smartest touches of shadows are to be in the interstice between the figures of the principal group where the light cannot penetrate[99].

The first thing to consider is whether the figures have the right depth based on their positions and the light they're in. The shadows shouldn't be the same at the edges of the groups as they are in the middle. Being surrounded by shadows, or being shaded on only one side, creates very different effects. The figures in the middle are surrounded by shadows from the other figures that are between them and the light. Those at the edges only have shadows on one side and receive light from the other. The strongest and sharpest shadows should be in the space between the figures of the main group where the light can't reach[99].

Secondly, that by the order and disposition of the figures they appear to be accommodated to the subject, and the true representation of the history in question.

Secondly, the arrangement and placement of the figures seem to fit the subject and accurately represent the history in question.

Thirdly, that the figures appear alive to the occasion which brought them together, with expressions suited to their attitudes.

Thirdly, that the figures seem engaged with the event that gathered them, displaying expressions that match their attitudes.

Chap. 353.How to make an imaginary Animal appear natural.

It is evident that it will be impossible to invent any animal without giving it members, and these members must individually resemble those of some known animal.

It is clear that it's impossible to create any animal without giving it body parts, and these body parts must individually look like those of some known animal.

If you wish, therefore, to make a chimera, or imaginary animal, appear natural (let us suppose a serpent); take the head of a mastiff, the eyes of a cat, the ears of a porcupine, the mouth of a hare, the brows of a lion, the temples of an old cock, and the neck of a sea tortoise[100].

If you want to create a chimera, or imaginary creature, that seems realistic (let's say a serpent); use the head of a mastiff, the eyes of a cat, the ears of a porcupine, the mouth of a hare, the brows of a lion, the temples of an old rooster, and the neck of a sea turtle[100].

Chap. 354.Painters are not to imitate one another.

One painter ought never to imitate the manner of any other; because in that case he cannot be called the child of Nature, but the grandchild. It is always best to have recourse to Nature, which is replete with such abundance of objects, than to the productions of other masters, who learnt every thing from her.

One painter should never copy someone else's style; if he does, he can't truly be considered a child of Nature, but just her grandchild. It's always better to turn to Nature herself, which is full of so many subjects, rather than to the works of other artists, who learned everything from her.

Chap. 355.How to judge of one’s own Work.

It is an acknowledged fact, that we perceive errors in the works of others more readily than in our own. A painter, therefore, ought to be well instructed in perspective, and acquire a perfect knowledge of the dimensions of the human body; he should also be a good architect, at least as far as concerns the outward shape of buildings, with their different parts; and where he is deficient, he ought not to neglect taking drawings from Nature.

It is a well-known fact that we notice mistakes in other people's work more easily than in our own. A painter should, therefore, be well-trained in perspective and have a thorough understanding of human body proportions; they should also have a good grasp of architecture, at least regarding the external structure of buildings and their various components. And where they lack knowledge, they should not hesitate to draw from real life.

It will be well also to have a looking-glass by him, when he paints, to look often at his work in it, which being seen the contrary way, will appear as the work of another hand, and will better shew his faults. It will be useful also to quit his work often, and take some relaxation, that his judgment may be clearer at his return; for too great application and sitting still is sometimes the cause of many gross errors.

It’s also a good idea for him to have a mirror nearby while he paints, so he can frequently check his work in it. Seeing it from the opposite angle will make it look like it was done by someone else and will highlight his mistakes more clearly. It’s also helpful to take breaks from his work for some relaxation; this way, his judgment will be sharper when he comes back. Spending too much time focused and sitting still can sometimes lead to major errors.

Chap. 356.Of correcting Errors which you discover.

Remember, that when, by the exercise of your own judgment, or the observation of others, you discover any errors in your work, you immediately set about correcting them, lest, in exposing your works to the public, you expose your defects also. Admit not any self-excuse, by persuading yourself that you shall retrieve your character, and that by some succeeding work you shall make amends for your shameful negligence; for your work does not perish as soon as it is out of your hands, like the sound of music, but remains a standing monument of your ignorance. If you excuse yourself by saying that you have not time for the study necessary to form a great painter, having to struggle against necessity, you yourself are only to blame; for the study of what is excellent is food both for mind and body. How many philosophers, born to great riches, have given them away, that they might not be retarded in their pursuits!

Don't forget, when you spot any mistakes in your work through your own judgment or by observing others, make sure to fix them right away. If you show your work to the public without addressing these issues, you're also showing your flaws. Don’t make excuses for yourself by thinking you can restore your reputation later with a future project; your work doesn’t just disappear once it’s out of your control like music fading away—it becomes a lasting reminder of your ignorance. If you argue that you don’t have time to study and become a great painter because you’re struggling to make ends meet, you’re only fooling yourself. The pursuit of excellence nourishes both mind and body. Just think of how many wealthy philosophers have given away their fortunes to avoid being hindered in their pursuits!

Chap. 357.The best Place for looking at a Picture.

Let us suppose, that A B is the picture, receiving the light from D; I say, that whoever is placed between C and E, will see the picture very badly, particularly if it be painted in oil, or varnished; because it will shine, and will appear almost of the[Pg 205] nature of a looking-glass. For these reasons, the nearer you go towards C, the less you will be able to see, because of the light from the window upon the picture, sending its reflection to that point. But if you place yourself between E D, you may conveniently see the picture, and the more so as you draw nearer to the point D, because that place is less liable to be struck by the reflected rays.

Let’s say A B is the painting, getting light from D; I’d argue that anyone standing between C and E will see the painting really poorly, especially if it’s oil or varnished; it will reflect light and appear almost like a [Pg 205] mirror. So, the closer you get to C, the harder it will be to see it because the light from the window reflects onto the painting at that point. But if you position yourself between E and D, you’ll be able to see the painting better, especially as you get closer to D, since that area is less affected by the reflected light.

Lookint at a Picture

Chap. 358.Of Judgment.

There is nothing more apt to deceive us than our own judgment, in deciding on our own works; and we should derive more advantage from having our faults pointed out by our enemies, than by hearing the opinions of our friends, because they are too much like ourselves, and may deceive us as much as our own judgment.

There is nothing more likely to deceive us than our own judgment when evaluating our own work; and we could benefit more from having our mistakes pointed out by our enemies than from hearing our friends' opinions, since they are too similar to us and might mislead us just as much as our own judgment.

Chap. 359.Of Employment anxiously wished for by Painters.

And you, painter, who are desirous of great practice, understand, that if you do not rest it on the good foundation of Nature, you will labour with little honour and less profit; and if you do it on a good [Pg 206] ground your works will be many and good, to your great honour and advantage.

And you, painter, who want to become highly skilled, understand that if you don't base your work on the solid foundation of Nature, you will toil with little recognition and even less reward; but if you build on a strong [Pg 206] foundation, your creations will be numerous and of high quality, bringing you great honor and benefit.

Chap. 360.Advice to Painters.

A painter ought to study universal Nature, and reason much within himself on all he sees, making use of the most excellent parts that compose the species of every object before him. His mind will by this method be like a mirror, reflecting truly every object placed before it, and become, as it were, a second Nature.

An artist should study the natural world and think deeply about everything he observes, using the best features that make up each object in front of him. Through this process, his mind will act like a mirror, accurately reflecting every object placed before it, and become, in a sense, a second nature.

Chap. 361.Of Statuary.

To execute a figure in marble, you must first make a model of it in clay, or plaster, and when it is finished, place it in a square case, equally capable of receiving the block of marble intended to be shaped like it. Have some peg-like sticks to pass through holes made in the sides, and all round the case; push them in till every one touches the model, marking what remains of the sticks outwards with ink, and making a countermark to every stick and its hole, so that you may at pleasure replace them again. Then having taken out the model, and placed the block of marble in its stead, take so much out of it, till all the pegs go in at the same holes to the marks you had made. To facilitate the work, contrive your frame so that every part of it, separately, or all together, may be lifted up, except the bottom, which [Pg 207] must remain under the marble. By this method you may chop it off with great facility[101].

To sculpt a figure in marble, you first need to create a model out of clay or plaster. Once the model is complete, place it in a square frame that can also fit the block of marble you intend to shape. Use peg-like sticks to pass through holes on the sides of the frame; push them in until they touch the model. Mark where the sticks touch the model with ink and make a matching mark for each stick and its hole, so you can easily put them back in later. Then, remove the model and put the block of marble in its place. Carve out the marble until all the pegs fit back into their holes at the points you marked. To make your work easier, design your frame so that each part can be lifted separately or together, except for the bottom, which [Pg 207] must stay underneath the marble. This way, you can work on it with great ease[101].

Chap. 362.On the Measurement and Division of Statues into Parts.

Divide the head into twelve parts, each part into twelve degrees, each degree into twelve minutes, and these minutes into seconds[102].

Split the head into twelve sections, each section into twelve degrees, each degree into twelve minutes, and these minutes into seconds[102].

Chap. 463.A Precept for the Painter.

The painter who entertains no doubt of his own ability, will attain very little. When the work succeeds beyond the judgment, the artist acquires nothing; but when the judgment is superior to the work, he never ceases improving, if the love of gain do not retard his progress.

The painter who has no doubt about his own skills won't achieve much. If the work is better than the artist thinks, they gain nothing; but if the artist's judgment is better than the work, they'll keep improving, as long as the desire for profit doesn't hold them back.

Chap. 364.On the Judgment of Painters.

When the work is equal to the knowledge and judgment of the painter, it is a bad sign; and when it surpasses the judgment, it is still worse, as is the case with those who wonder at having succeeded so [Pg 208] well. But when the judgment surpasses the work, it is a perfectly good sign; and the young painter who possesses that rare disposition, will, no doubt, arrive at great perfection. He will produce few works, but they will be such as to fix the admiration of every beholder.

When the artwork matches the painter's knowledge and judgment, it’s a bad indication; when it exceeds the judgment, it’s even worse, like those who are amazed at their unexpected success. But when the judgment is greater than the artwork, it's a very positive sign; the young artist who has that rare trait will undoubtedly achieve great excellence. He may create few pieces, but they will be enough to capture the admiration of everyone who sees them.

Chap. 365.That a Man ought not to trust to himself, but ought to consult Nature.

Whoever flatters himself that he can retain in his memory all the effects of Nature, is deceived, for our memory is not so capacious; therefore consult Nature for every thing.

Whoever thinks they can remember everything about Nature is mistaken, because our memory isn’t that vast; so always look to Nature for guidance.


THE END.

THE END.


PRINTED FOR J. TAYLOR.

PRINTED FOR J. TAYLOR.


1. SKETCHES for COUNTRY HOUSES, VILLAS, and RURAL DWELLINGS; calculated for Persons of moderate Income, and for comfortable Retirement. Also some Designs for Cottages, which may be constructed of the simplest Materials; with Plans and general Estimates. By John Plaw. Elegantly engraved in Aquatinta on Forty-two Plates. Quarto, 1l. 11s. 6d. in boards.

1. DESIGNS for COUNTRY HOMES, VILLAS, and RURAL HOUSES; intended for people of moderate income and for a comfortable retirement. Also some designs for cottages that can be built with basic materials; featuring plans and general cost estimates. By John Plaw. Beautifully printed in Aquatinta on forty-two plates. Quarto, 1l. 11s. 6d. in boards.


2. FERME ORNÉE, or RURAL IMPROVEMENTS; a Series of domestic and ornamental Designs, suited to Parks, Plantations, Rides, Walks, Rivers, Farms, &c. consisting of Fences, Paddock-houses, a Bath, Dog-kennels, Pavilions, Farm-yards, Fishing-houses, Sporting-boxes, Shooting-lodges, single and double Cottages, &c. calculated for landscape and picturesque Effects. By John Plaw, Architect. Engraved in Aquatinta, on Thirty-eight Plates, with appropriate Scenery, Plans, and Explanations. Quarto; in boards, 1l. 11s. 6d.

2. FERME ORNÉE, or RURAL IMPROVEMENTS; a Collection of domestic and decorative Designs, suitable for Parks, Plantations, Paths, Walks, Rivers, Farms, etc., including Fences, Paddock-houses, a Bath, Dog kennels, Pavilions, Farm-yards, Fishing cabins, Sporting lodges, Shooting retreats, single and double Cottages, etc., designed for visual and scenic Effects. By John Plaw, Architect. Engraved in Aquatinta, on Thirty-eight Plates, with matching Scenery, Plans, and Explanations. Quarto; in boards, 1l. 11s. 6d.


3. RURAL ARCHITECTURE, or Designs from the simple Cottage to the decorated Villa, including some which have been executed. By John Plaw. On Sixty-two Plates, with Scenery, in Aquatinta. Half-bound, 2l. 2s.

3. RURAL ARCHITECTURE, or Designs from the simple Cottage to the decorated Villa, including some that have been completed. By John Plaw. On sixty-two plates, with scenery, in aquatint. Half-bound, 2l. 2s.


4. HINTS for DWELLINGS, consisting of original Designs for Cottages, Farm-houses, Villas, &c. Plain and Ornamental; with Plans to each, in which strict Attention is paid, to unite Convenience and Elegance with Economy. Including some Designs for Town-houses. By D. Laing, Architect and Surveyor. Elegantly engraved on Thirty-four Plates in Aquatinta, with appropriate Scenery, Quarto, 1l. 5s. in boards.

4. HINTS for DWELLINGS, featuring original designs for cottages, farmhouses, villas, etc. Both simple and decorative; each comes with plans that focus on combining convenience and elegance with affordability. Includes some designs for townhouses. By D. Laing, Architect and Surveyor. Beautifully engraved on thirty-four plates in aquatint, with suitable scenery, quarto, 1l. 5s. in boards.


5. SKETCHES for COTTAGES, VILLAS, &c. with their Plans and appropriate Scenery. By John Soane. To which are added, Six Designs for improving and embellishing Grounds, with Explanations by an Amateur, on Fifty-four Plates, elegantly engraved in Aquatinta; Folio, 2l. 12s. 6d. half-bound.

5. SKETCHES for COTTAGES, VILLAS, &c. with their Plans and appropriate Scenery. By John Soane. This includes six designs for enhancing and beautifying landscapes, with explanations by an amateur, presented on fifty-four elegantly engraved aquatint plates; Folio, £2 12s. 6d. half-bound.


6. THE ARCHITECT and BUILDER’s MISCELLANY, or Pocket Library; containing original picturesque Designs, in Architecture, for Cottages, Farm, Country, and Town Houses, Public Buildings, Temples, Green-houses, Bridges, Lodges, and Gates for Entrances to Parks and Pleasure-grounds, Stables, Monumental Tombs, Garden Seats, &c. By Charles Middleton, Architect; on Sixty Plates, Octavo, coloured, 1l. 1s. bound.

6. THE ARCHITECT and BUILDER’s MISCELLANY, or Pocket Library; featuring original attractive Designs in Architecture for Cottages, Farms, Country and Town Houses, Public Buildings, Temples, Greenhouses, Bridges, Lodges, and Gates for park and recreational area entrances, Stables, Memorial Tombs, Garden Seats, etc. By Charles Middleton, Architect; in Sixty Plates, Octavo, colored, 1l. 1s. bound.


7. DESIGNS for GATES and RAILS, suitable to Parks, Pleasure-grounds, Balconies, &c. Also some Designs for Trellis Work, on Twenty-seven Plates. By C. Middleton, 6s. Octavo.

7. DESIGNS for GATES and RAILS, suitable for Parks, Recreational Areas, Balconies, etc. Also some Designs for Trellis Work, on Twenty-seven Plates. By C. Middleton, 6s. Octavo.


Printed by S. Gosnell,
Little Queen Street, Holborn, London.

Printed by S. Gosnell,
Little Queen Street, Holborn, London.

FOOTNOTES:

FOOTNOTES:

[i1] Vasari, Vite de Pittori, edit. Della Valle, 8vo. Siena 1792, vol. v. p. 22. Du Fresne, in the life prefixed to the Italian editions of this Treatise on Painting. Venturi, Essai sur les Ouvrages de Leonard de Vinci, 4to. Paris, 1797, p. 3, 36.

[i1] Vasari, Lives of the Painters, edited by Della Valle, 8vo. Siena 1792, vol. v. p. 22. Du Fresne, in the introduction to the Italian editions of this Treatise on Painting. Venturi, Essay on the Works of Leonardo da Vinci, 4to. Paris, 1797, p. 3, 36.

[i2] Venturi, p. 3.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Venturi, p. 3.

[i3] Vasari, 23.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Vasari, 23.

[i4] Du Fresne.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Du Fresne.

[i5] Du Fresne. Vasari, 25.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Du Fresne. Vasari, 25.

[i6] Vasari, 26. Du Fresne.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Vasari, 26. Du Fresne.

[i7] Du Fresne.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Du Fresne.

[i8] Vasari, 26.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Vasari, 26.

[i9] Vasari, 28.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Vasari, 28.

[i10] Du Fresne. Vasari, 28.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Du Fresne. Vasari, 28.

[i11] Du Fresne. Vasari, 28.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Du Fresne. Vasari, 28.

[i12] Vasari, 28.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Vasari, 28.

[i13] It is impossible in a translation to preserve the jingle between the name Vinci, and the Latin verb vincit which occurs in the original.

[i13] It's impossible in a translation to keep the rhyme between the name Vinci and the Latin verb vincit that appears in the original.

[i14] Du Fresne, Vasari, 28.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Du Fresne, Vasari, 28.

[i15] Vasari, 22.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Vasari, 22.

[i16] Vasari, 22 and 23.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Vasari, 22 and 23.

[i17] Lomazzo, Trattato della Pittura, p. 282.

[i17] Lomazzo, Treatise on Painting, p. 282.

[i18] Vasari, 23. Du Fresne.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Vasari, 23. Du Fresne.

[i19] Venturi, 37.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Venturi, 37.

[i20] Du Fresne.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Du Fresne.

[i21] Venturi, 36.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Venturi, 36.

[i22] Du Fresne.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Du Fresne.

[i23] Vasari, 30. Lettere Pittoriche, vol. ii. p. 184.

[i23] Vasari, 30. Lettere Pittoriche, vol. ii. p. 184.

[i24] Venturi, 3.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Venturi, 3.

[i25] Suppl. to Life of L. da Vinci, in Vasari, 65. Du Fresne.

[i25] Suppl. to Life of L. da Vinci, in Vasari, 65. Du Fresne.

[i26] Venturi, 36; who mentions also, that Leonardo at this time constructed a machine for the theatre.

[i26] Venturi, 36; who also notes that Leonardo built a machine for the theater at this time.

[i27] Venturi, p. 44.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Venturi, p. 44.

[i28] Suppl. in Vasari, 74.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Suppl. in Vasari, 74.

[i29] Suppl. in Vasari, 63.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Suppl. in Vasari, 63.

[i30] Du Fresne.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Du Fresne.

[i31] Du Fresne.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Du Fresne.

[i32] De Piles, in the Life of Leonardo. See Lettere Pittoriche, vol. ii. p. 187.

[i32] De Piles, in the Life of Leonardo. See Lettere Pittoriche, vol. ii. p. 187.

[i33] Lettere Pittoriche, vol. ii. p. 187.

[i33] Lettere Pittoriche, vol. ii. p. 187.

[i34] Du Fresne. Lettere Pitt. vol. ii. p. 186.

[i34] Du Fresne. Lettere Pitt. vol. ii. p. 186.

[i35] Vasari, 31, in a note.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Vasari, 31, in a note.

[i36] Let. Pit. vol. ii. 183.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Let. Pit. vol. 2. 183.

[i37] Additions to the Life in Vasari, 53. My worthy friend, Mr. Rigaud, who has more than once seen the original picture, gives this account of it: “The cutting of the wall for the sake of opening a door, was no doubt the effect of ignorance and barbarity, but it did not materially injure the painting; it only took away some of the feet under the table, entirely shaded. The true value of this picture consists in what was seen above the table. The door is only four feet wide, and cuts off only about two feet of the lower part of the picture. More damage has been done by subsequent quacks, who, within my own time, have undertaken to repair it.”

[i37] Additions to the Life in Vasari, 53. My good friend, Mr. Rigaud, who has seen the original painting more than once, describes it like this: “The cutting into the wall to make a door was clearly a result of ignorance and lack of care, but it didn’t significantly harm the painting; it only removed some of the feet under the table, which were completely in shadow. The real value of this painting lies in what is visible above the table. The door is only four feet wide and takes away about two feet from the bottom of the painting. The real damage has come from later amateur restorers who, in my own lifetime, have tried to fix it.”

[i38] Additions to the Life in Vasari, 53.

[i38] Updates to the Life in Vasari, 53.

[i39] COPIES EXISTING IN MILAN OR ELSEWHERE.

[i39] COPIES AVAILABLE IN MILAN OR OTHER LOCATIONS.

No. 1. That in the refectory of the fathers Osservanti della Pace: it was painted on the wall in 1561, by Gio. Paolo Lomazzo.

No. 1. That in the dining hall of the Osservanti della Pace fathers: it was painted on the wall in 1561 by Gio. Paolo Lomazzo.

2. Another, copied on board, as a picture in the refectory of the Chierici Regolari di S. Paolo, in their college of St. Barnabas. This is perhaps the most beautiful that can be seen, only that it is not finished lower than the knees, and is in size about one eighth of the original.

2. Another one, displayed in the dining hall of the Chierici Regolari di S. Paolo at their St. Barnabas college. This might be the most beautiful version out there, except that it’s not finished below the knees and is about one-eighth the size of the original.

3. Another on canvas, which was first in the church of S. Fedele, by Agostino S. Agostino, for the refectory of the Jesuits: since their suppression, it exists in that of the Orfani a S. Pietro, in Gessate.

3. Another painting on canvas, which was originally in the church of S. Fedele, by Agostino S. Agostino, for the Jesuits' dining hall: since their suppression, it has been moved to the one at Orfani a S. Pietro, in Gessate.

4. Another of the said Lomazzo’s, painted on the wall in the monastery Maggiore, very fine, and in good preservation.

4. Another one of Lomazzo's works, painted on the wall in the Monastery Maggiore, is very beautiful and well-preserved.

5. Another on canvas, by an uncertain artist, with only the heads and half the bodies, in the Ambrosian library.

5. Another one on canvas, by an unknown artist, showing just the heads and half of the bodies, in the Ambrosian library.

6. Another in the Certosa di Pavia, done by Marco d’Ogionno, a scholar of Leonardo’s, on the wall.

6. Another at the Certosa di Pavia, created by Marco d’Ogionno, a student of Leonardo, on the wall.

7. Another in the possession of the monks Girolamini di Castellazzo fuori di Porta Lodovica, of the hand of the same Ogionno.

7. Another one owned by the Girolamini monks of Castellazzo outside Porta Lodovica, created by the same Ogionno.

8. Another copy of this Last Supper in the refectory of the fathers of St. Benedict of Mantua. It was painted by Girolamo Monsignori, a Dominican friar, who studied much the works of Leonardo, and copied them excellently.

8. Another version of this Last Supper is in the dining hall of the fathers of St. Benedict in Mantua. It was painted by Girolamo Monsignori, a Dominican friar, who closely studied Leonardo's works and copied them very well.

9. Another in the refectory of the fathers Osservanti di Lugano, of the hand of Bernardino Lovino; a valuable work, and much esteemed as well for its neatness and perfect imitation of the original, as for its own integrity, and being done by a scholar of Leonardo’s.

9. Another in the dining hall of the Osservanti di Lugano, created by Bernardino Lovino; a valuable piece that's highly regarded not only for its neatness and perfect imitation of the original but also for its own integrity, being done by a student of Leonardo's.

10. A beautiful drawing of this famous picture is, or was lately, in the possession of Sig. Giuseppe Casati, king at arms. Supposed to be either the original design by Leonardo himself, or a sketch by one of his best scholars, to be used in painting some copy on a wall, or on canvas. It is drawn with a pen, on paper larger than usual, with a mere outline heightened with bistre.

10. A beautiful drawing of this famous picture is, or was recently, in the possession of Mr. Giuseppe Casati, king at arms. It is thought to be either the original design by Leonardo himself or a sketch by one of his top students, intended for creating a copy on a wall or canvas. It’s drawn with a pen on larger-than-usual paper, with just an outline enhanced with bistre.

11. Another in the refectory of the fathers Girolamini, in the monastery of St. Laurence, in the Escurial in Spain. It was presented to King Philip II. while he was in Valentia; and by his order placed in the said room where the monks dine, and is believed to be by some able scholar of Leonardo.

11. Another one in the dining hall of the Girolamini fathers, in the St. Laurence monastery at the Escorial in Spain. It was given to King Philip II while he was in Valencia; and by his command, it was hung in the room where the monks eat, and some believe it was created by a skilled scholar of Leonardo.

12. Another in St. Germain d’Auxerre, in France; ordered by King Francis I. when he came to Milan, and found he could not remove the original. There is reason to think this the work of Bernardino Lovino.

12. Another one in St. Germain d’Auxerre, France; commissioned by King Francis I when he visited Milan and realized he couldn't move the original. It's believed that this was done by Bernardino Lovino.

13. Another in France, in the castle of Escovens, in the possession of the Constable Montmorency.

13. Another one in France, in the castle of Escovens, owned by the Constable Montmorency.

The original drawing for this picture is in the possession of his Britannic Majesty. See the life prefixed to Mr. Chamberlaine’s publication of the Designs of Leonardo da Vinci, p. 5. An engraving from it is among those which Mr. Rogers published from drawings.

The original drawing for this picture is with his Britannic Majesty. Check the biography included in Mr. Chamberlaine’s publication of the Designs of Leonardo da Vinci, p. 5. An engraving from it is among those that Mr. Rogers published from drawings.

[i40] Vasari, 34. Du Fresne.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Vasari, 34. Du Fresne.

[i41] Du Fresne.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Du Fresne.

[i42] Vasari, 36. Du Fresne.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Vasari, 36. Du Fresne.

[i43] Vasari, 37. Du Fresne.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Vasari, 37. Du Fresne.

[i44] Du Fresne.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Du Fresne.

[i45] Suppl. in Vasari, 64.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Suppl. in Vasari, 64.

[i46] Du Fresne.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Du Fresne.

[i47] Suppl. in Vasari, 75, 76, 77, 78.

[i47] Suppl. in Vasari, 75, 76, 77, 78.

[i48] Vasari, 38. Du Fresne.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Vasari, 38. Du Fresne.

[i49] Du Fresne.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Du Fresne.

[i50] Du Fresne.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Du Fresne.

[i51] Vasari, 39. Du Fresne.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Vasari, 39. Du Fresne.

[i52] Vasari, 39. Du Fresne.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Vasari, 39. Du Fresne.

[i53] Vasari, 39. Du Fresne.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Vasari, 39. Du Fresne.

[i54] Du Fresne.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Du Fresne.

[i55] Supp. in Vasari, 81.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Sup. in Vasari, 81.

[i56] Suppl. in Vasari, 68.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Suppl. in Vasari, 68.

[i57] Vasari, 42. Du Fresne.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Vasari, 42. Du Fresne.

[i58] Du Fresne.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Du Fresne.

[i59] Du Fresne.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Du Fresne.

[i60] Venturi, 37.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Venturi, 37.

[i61] Du Fresne.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Du Fresne.

[i62] Venturi, 37.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Venturi, 37.

[i63] Venturi, 38.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Venturi, 38.

[i64] Venturi, 37.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Venturi, 37.

[i65] Du Fresne.

Du Fresne.

[i66] Venturi, 38.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Venturi, 38.

[i67] Venturi, 38.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Venturi, 38.

[i68] Du Fresne.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Du Fresne.

[i69] Vasari, 44. Du Fresne.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Vasari, 44. Du Fresne.

[i70] Vasari, 44. Du Fresne.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Vasari, 44. Du Fresne.

[i71] Du Fresne.

Du Fresne.

[i72] Suppl. in Vasari, 79, 80.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Suppl. in Vasari, 79, 80.

[i73] Suppl. in Vasari, 80.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Suppl. in Vasari, 80.

[i74] Suppl. in Vasari, 65.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Suppl. in Vasari, 65.

[i75] Vasari, 45. Du Fresne.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Vasari, 45. Du Fresne.

[i76] Venturi, 39. Suppl. in Vasari, 80.

[i76] Venturi, 39. Suppl. in Vasari, 80.

[i77] Venturi, p. 4.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Venturi, p. 4.

[i78] Sect. 1. Of the Descent of heavy Bodies, combined with the Rotation of the Earth. 2. Of the Earth divided into Particles. 3. Of the Earth and the Moon. 4. Of the Action of the Sun on the Sea. 5. Of the ancient State of the Earth. 6. Of the Flame and the Air. 7. Of Statics. 8. Of the Descent of heavy Bodies by inclined Planes. 9. Of the Water which one draws from a Canal. 10. Of Whirlpools. 11. Of Vision. 12. Of military Architecture. 13. Of some Instruments. 14. Two chymical Processes. 15. Of Method.

[i78] Sect. 1. On the Falling of Heavy Objects, Together with the Earth's Rotation. 2. On the Earth Divided into Particles. 3. On the Earth and the Moon. 4. On the Sun's Influence on the Sea. 5. On the Ancient Condition of the Earth. 6. On Fire and Air. 7. On Statics. 8. On the Falling of Heavy Objects on Inclined Surfaces. 9. On Water Drawn from a Canal. 10. On Whirlpools. 11. On Vision. 12. On Military Architecture. 13. On Certain Instruments. 14. Two Chemical Processes. 15. On Method.

[i79] See the Life prefixed to Mr. Chamberlaine’s publication of the Designs of Leonardo da Vinci, p. 11.

[i79] See the biography included in Mr. Chamberlaine’s publication of the Designs of Leonardo da Vinci, p. 11.

[i80] Fac similes of some of the pages of the original work, are also to be found in this publication.

[i80] Reproductions of some pages from the original work are also included in this publication.

[i81] P. 33.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ p. 33.

[i82] “J. A. Mazenta died in 1635. He gave the designs for the fortifications of Livorno in Tuscany; and has written on the method of rendering the Adda navigable. Argelati Script. Mediol. vol. ii.” Venturi, 33.

[i82] “J. A. Mazenta passed away in 1635. He provided the designs for the fortifications of Livorno in Tuscany and wrote about how to make the Adda river navigable. Argelati Script. Mediol. vol. ii.” Venturi, 33.

[i83] “We shall see afterwards that this man was Leonardo’s heir: he had carried back these writings and drawings from France to Milan.” Venturi, 34.

[i83] “We will see later that this man was Leonardo's successor: he brought these writings and drawings back from France to Milan.” Venturi, 34.

[i84] “This was in 1587.” Venturi, p. 34.

[i84] “This was in 1587.” Venturi, p. 34.

[i85] “J. Amb. Mazenta made himself a Barnabite in 1590.” Venturi, 34.

[i85] “J. Amb. Mazenta became a Barnabite in 1590.” Venturi, 34.

[i86] “The drawings and books of Vinci are come for the most part into the hands of Pompeo Leoni, who has obtained them from the son of Francisco Melzo. There are some also of these books in the possession of Guy Mazenta Lomazzo, Tempio della Pittura, in 4º, Milano 1590, page 17.” Venturi, 35.

[i86] “The drawings and books of Vinci have mostly ended up with Pompeo Leoni, who got them from Francisco Melzo's son. Some of these books are also held by Guy Mazenta Lomazzo, Tempio della Pittura, in 4º, Milano 1590, page 17.” Venturi, 35.

[i87] “It is volume C. There is printed on it in gold, Vidi Mazenta Patritii Mediolanensis liberalitate An. 1603.” Venturi, 35.

[i87] “It’s volume C. It has printed in gold, Vidi Mazenta Patritii Mediolanensis liberalitate An. 1603.” Venturi, 35.

[i88] “He died in 1613.” Venturi, 35.

[i88] “He passed away in 1613.” Venturi, 35.

[i89] “This is volume N, in the National Library. It is in folio, of a large size, and has 392 leaves: it bears on the cover this title: Disegni di Macchine delle Arti secreti et altre Cose di Leonardo da Vinci, raccolte da Pompeo Leoni.” Venturi, 35.

[i89] “This is volume N in the National Library. It's a large folio with 392 pages, and the cover features this title: Disegni di Macchine delle Arti secreti et altre Cose di Leonardo da Vinci, raccolte da Pompeo Leoni.” Venturi, 35.

[i90] P. 36.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ p. 36.

[i91] “A memorial is preserved of this liberality by an inscription.” Venturi, 36.

[i91] “A record of this generosity is kept through an inscription.” Venturi, 36.

[i92] “This is marked at p. 1 of the same volume.” Venturi, 36.

[i92] “This is noted on page 1 of the same volume.” Venturi, 36.

[i93] Venturi, 36.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Venturi, 36.

[i94] “Lettere Pittoriche, vol. ii.” Venturi, 36.

[i94] “Art Letters, vol. ii.” Venturi, 36.

[i95] P. 36. His authority is Gerli, Disegni del Vinci, Milano, 1784, fol.

[i95] P. 36. His source is Gerli, Designs of Vinci, Milan, 1784, fol.

[i96] P. 42.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ p. 42.

[i97] It is said, that this compilation is now in the Albani library. Venturi, 42.

[i97] It's said that this compilation is now in the Albani library. Venturi, 42.

[i98] The sketches to illustrate his meaning, were probably in Leonardo’s original manuscripts so slight as to require that more perfect drawings should be made from them before they could be fit for publication.

[i98] The sketches to explain his point were likely in Leonardo’s original manuscripts and were so rough that better drawings needed to be created from them before they could be suitable for publication.

[i99] The identical manuscript of this Treatise, formerly belonging to Mons. Chardin, one of the two copies from which the edition in Italian was printed, is now the property of Mr. Edwards of Pall Mall. Judging by the chapters as there numbered, it would appear to contain more than the printed edition; but this is merely owing to the circumstance that some of those which in the manuscript stand as distinct chapters, are in the printed edition consolidated together.

[i99] The exact manuscript of this Treatise, which used to belong to Mons. Chardin and is one of the two copies the Italian edition was printed from, is now owned by Mr. Edwards of Pall Mall. From the way the chapters are numbered, it seems to have more content than the printed edition; however, this is just because some of the chapters in the manuscript are combined in the printed edition.

[i100] Vasari, p. 37, gives the initials N. N.

[i100] Vasari, p. 37, mentions the initials N. N.

[i101] Which Venturi, p. 6, professes his intention of publishing from the manuscript collections of Leonardo.

[i101] Which Venturi, p. 6, states his plan to publish from the manuscript collections of Leonardo.

[i102] Bibliotheca Smithiana, 4to. Ven. 1755. Venturi, 44.

[i102] Bibliotheca Smithiana, 4to. Venice 1755. Venturi, 44.

[i103] Libreria Nani, 4to. Ven. 1776. Venturi, 44.

[i103] Nani Bookstore, 4to. Venice, 1776. Venturi, 44.

[i104] Gori Simbolæ literar. Flor. 1751, vol. viii. p. 66. Venturi, 44.

[i104] Gori Simbolæ literar. Flor. 1751, vol. viii. p. 66. Venturi, 44.

[i105] See his Traité des Pratiques Geometrales et Perspectives, 8vo. Paris, 1665.

[i105] See his Treatise on Geometrical Practices and Perspectives, 8vo. Paris, 1665.

[i106] P. 128.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ p. 128.

[i107] P. 134.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ p. 134.

[i108] He observed criminals when led to execution (Lett. Pitt. vol. ii. p. 182; on the authority of Lomazzo); noted down any countenance that struck him (Vasari, 29); in forming the animal for the shield, composed it of parts selected from different real animals (Vasari, p. 27); and when he wanted characteristic heads, resorted to Nature (Lett. Pitt. vol. ii. p. 181). All which methods are recommended by him in the course of the Treatise on Painting.

[i108] He paid attention to criminals being led to execution (Lett. Pitt. vol. ii. p. 182; based on Lomazzo's account); he took note of any expression that caught his eye (Vasari, 29); in creating the creature for the shield, he crafted it by combining parts from various real animals (Vasari, p. 27); and when he needed distinctive heads, he looked to Nature (Lett. Pitt. vol. ii. p. 181). All of these methods are recommended by him throughout the Treatise on Painting.

[i109] Du Fresne.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Du Fresne.

[i110] Venturi, 35, in a note.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Venturi, 35, in a note.

[i111] Vasari, 23.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Vasari, 23.

[i112] Vasari, 24.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Vasari, 24.

[i113] Suppl. in Vasari, 67.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Suppl. in Vasari, 67.

[i114] Vasari, 23.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Vasari, 23.

[i115] Ibid.

Ibid.

[i116] Vasari, 45.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Vasari, 45.

[i117] Additions to the life in Vasari, p. 47.

[i117] Additions to the life in Vasari, p. 47.

[i118] Suppl. in Vasari, 74.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Suppl. in Vasari, 74.

[i119] Vasari, 24.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Vasari, 24.

[i120] Vasari, 26.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Vasari, 26.

[i121] Vasari, 29.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Vasari, 29.

[i122] Additions to the life in Vasari, 61.

[i122] Updates to the life in Vasari, 61.

[i123] Lett. Pitt. vol. ii. 171.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Letter. Pitt. vol. 2. 171.

[i124] Vasari, 29.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Vasari, 29.

[i125] Ibid.

Ibid.

[i126] Ibid.

Ibid.

[i127] Venturi, 42.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Venturi, 42.

[i128] Vasari, 39. In a note in Lettere Pittoriche, vol. ii. p. 174, on the before cited letter of Mariette, it is said that Bernardino Lovino was a scholar of Leonardo, and had in his possession the carton of St. Ann, which Leonardo had made for a picture which he was to paint in the church della Nunziata, at Florence. Francis I. got possession of it, and was desirous that Leonardo should execute it when he came into France, but without effect. It is known it was not done, as this carton went to Milan. Lomazzo, lib. ii. cap. 17. Lett. Pitt. vol. ii. p. 174, in a note. A carton similar to this is now in the library of the Royal Academy, at London.

[i128] Vasari, 39. In a note in Lettere Pittoriche, vol. ii. p. 174, regarding the previously mentioned letter from Mariette, it's stated that Bernardino Lovino was a student of Leonardo and owned the cartoon of St. Ann, which Leonardo created for a painting he was supposed to make in the church della Nunziata in Florence. Francis I. acquired it and wanted Leonardo to complete it when he came to France, but that never happened. It's known that it was never completed, as this cartoon went to Milan. Lomazzo, lib. ii. cap. 17. Lett. Pitt. vol. ii. p. 174, in a note. A similar cartoon is currently in the library of the Royal Academy in London.

[i129] Vasari, p. 39, in a note.

[i129] Vasari, p. 39, in a note.

[i130] Vasari, 41. In the suppl. to the life, Vasari, 68, the subject painted in the council-chamber at Florence is said to be the wonderful battle against Attila.

[i130] Vasari, 41. In the supplement to the life, Vasari, 68, it's mentioned that the painting in the council chamber in Florence depicts the incredible battle against Attila.

[i131] Du Fresne. Vasari, 28.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Du Fresne. Vasari, 28.

[i132] Du Fresne.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Du Fresne.

[i133] Additions to the Life in Vasari, 48.

[i133] Updates to the Life in Vasari, 48.

[i134] Ibid.

Ibid.

[i135] Additions to the Life in Vasari, 60.

[i135] Updates to the Life in Vasari, 60.

[i136] Lett. Pitt. vol. ii. p. 198.

[i136] Lett. Pitt. vol. ii. p. 198.

[i137] Lett. Pitt. vol. ii. p. 200.

[i137] Letters. Pitt. vol. 2. p. 200.

[i138] Additions to the Life in Vasari, 68.

[i138] Additions to the Life in Vasari, 68.

[i139] Ibid.

Ibid.

[i140] Ibid.

Ibid.

[i141] Ibid.

Ibid.

[i142] Lett. Pitt. vol. ii. 198.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Letters Pitt. vol. ii. 198.

[i143] Vasari, 28.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Vasari, 28.

[i144] The Datary is the Pope’s officer who nominates to vacant benefices.

[i144] The Datary is the Pope’s official who appoints individuals to open benefices.

[i145] Vasari, 44.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Vasari, 44.

[i146] Du Fresne.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Du Fresne.

[i147] Du Fresne. Additions in Vasari, 60.

[i147] Du Fresne. Updates in Vasari, 60.

[i148] Lett. Pitt. vol. ii. 196.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Letters from Pitt, vol. ii, 196.

[i149] Du Fresne.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Du Fresne.

[i150] Du Fresne. Additions to Vasari, 60.

[i150] Du Fresne. Additions to Vasari, 60.

[i151] Additions to Vasari, 59.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Updates to Vasari, 59.

[i152] Additions to Vasari, 60.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Updates to Vasari, 60.

[i153] Additions to Vasari, 60.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Updates to Vasari, 60.

[i154] Additions in Vasari, 61.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Additions in Vasari, 61.

[i155] Suppl. in Vasari, 68.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Suppl. in Vasari, 68.

[i156] Du Fresne.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Du Fresne.

[i157] Additions to Vasari, 59.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Updates to Vasari, 59.

[i158] Vasari, 25.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Vasari, 25.

[i159] Vasari, 28.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Vasari, 28.

[i160] Vasari, 29.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Vasari, 29.

[i161] Vasari, 30. In p. 29, it is said in a note, that there is in the Medici gallery an Adoration of the Magi, by Leonardo, unfinished, which may probably be the picture of which Vasari speaks.

[i161] Vasari, 30. On page 29, there's a note mentioning that in the Medici gallery, there's an unfinished Adoration of the Magi by Leonardo, which might be the painting that Vasari refers to.

[i162] Vasari, 30.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Vasari, 30.

[i163] Lett. Pitt. vol. ii. 184. The real fact is known to be, that it was engraven from a drawing made by Rubens himself, who, as I am informed, had in it altered the back-ground.

[i163] Lett. Pitt. vol. ii. 184. The truth is, it was based on a drawing created by Rubens himself, who, as I’ve been told, changed the background.

[i164] Lett. Pitt. vol. ii. 195.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Lett. Pitt. vol. 2. 195.

[i165] Vasari, 30.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Vasari, 30.

[i166] Vasari, 33.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Vasari, 33.

[i167] Venturi, 4.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Venturi, 4.

[i168] Venturi, 37.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Venturi, 37.

[i169] Suppl. in Vasari, 68.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Supplement in Vasari, 68.

[i170] Vasari, 39.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Vasari, 39.

[i171] Ibid.

Ibid.

[i172] Suppl. in Vasari, 60.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Suppl. in Vasari, 60.

[i173] Vasari, 44.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Vasari, 44.

[i174] Du Fresne.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Du Fresne.

[i175] Du Fresne.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Du Fresne.

[i176] Suppl. in Vasari, 61.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Suppl. in Vasari, 61.

[i177] Ibid. 81.

Ibid. 81.

[i178] Du Fresne.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Du Fresne.

[i179] Du Fresne. Add. to the Life in Vasari, 60.

[i179] Du Fresne. Add. to the Life in Vasari, 60.

[i180] Suppl. in Vasari, 69.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Suppl. in Vasari, 69.

[i181] Du Fresne. Add. to Vasari, 60.

[i181] Du Fresne. Add. to Vasari, 60.

[i182] Du Fresne.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Du Fresne.

[i183] Add. in Vasari, 47.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Add. in Vasari, 47.

[i184] Add. to Vasari, 48.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Add. to Vasari, 48.

[i185] Add. in Vasari, 57.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Add. in Vasari, 57.

[i186] Add. to Vasari, 58.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Add. to Vasari, 58.

[i187] Add. to Vasari, 59.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Add. to Vasari, 59.

[i188] Ibid.

Ibid.

[i189] Ibid. This is the picture lately exhibited in Brook Street, Grosvenor Square, and is said to have been purchased by the Earl of Warwick.

[i189] Ibid. This is the painting recently displayed in Brook Street, Grosvenor Square, and it is reported to have been bought by the Earl of Warwick.

[i190] Add. to Vasari, 59.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Add. to Vasari, 59.

[i191] Ibid.

Ibid.

[i192] Ibid.

Ibid.

[i193] Ibid.

Ibid.

[i194] Ibid. 60.

Ibid. 60.

[i195] Ibid.

Ibid.

[i196] Ibid.

Ibid.

[i197] Ibid.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Same source.

[i198] Ibid.

Ibid.

[i199] Lett. Pitt. vol. ii. 197.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Letter. Pitt. vol. ii. 197.

[i200] Add. in Vasari, 60.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Add. in Vasari, 60.

[i201] Add. in Vasari, 61.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Add. in Vasari, 61.

[i202] Ibid.

Ibid.

[i203] Ibid.

Ibid.

[i204] Ibid.

Ibid.

[i205] Supp. in Vasari, 67.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Supp. in Vasari, 67.

[i206] Ibid. 68.

Ibid. 68.

[i207] Supp. in Vasari, 75.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Supp. in Vasari, 75.

[i208] Ibid.

Ibid.

[i209] Supp. in Vasari, 80.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Sup. in Vasari, 80.

[i210] Supp. in Vasari, 81.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Sup. in Vasari, 81.

[1] This passage has been by some persons much misunderstood, and supposed to require, that the student should be a deep proficient in perspective, before he commences the study of painting; but it is a knowledge of the leading principles only of perspective that the author here means, and without such a knowledge, which is easily to be acquired, the student will inevitably fall into errors, as gross as those humorously pointed out by Hogarth, in his Frontispiece to Kirby’s Perspective.

[1] Some people have greatly misunderstood this passage, thinking it suggests that a student must be highly skilled in perspective before starting to study painting. However, the author actually refers to a basic understanding of the key principles of perspective. Without this fundamental knowledge, which is easy to gain, students will likely make mistakes as obvious as the ones humorously highlighted by Hogarth in his Frontispiece to Kirby’s Perspective.

[2] See Chap. 351.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ See Chapter 351.

[3] Not to be found in this work.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Not included in this work.

[4] From this, and many other similar passages, it is evident, that the author intended at some future time to arrange his manuscript collections, and to publish them as separate treatises. That he did not do so is well known; but it is also a fact, that, in selecting from the whole mass of his collections the chapters of which the present work consists, great care appears in general to have been taken to extract also those to which there was any reference from any of the chapters intended for this work, or which from their subject were necessarily connected with them. Accordingly, the reader will find, in the notes to this translation, that all such chapters in any other part of the present work are uniformly pointed out, as have any relation to the respective passages in the text. This, which has never before been done, though indispensably necessary, will be found of singular use, and it was thought proper here, once for all, to notice it.

[4] From this, and many other similar excerpts, it’s clear that the author intended to organize his manuscript collections at some point and publish them as separate works. It's well known that this never happened; however, it’s also true that while selecting chapters for this work, great care was taken to include those that referenced other chapters intended for this text or that were logically related to them. Thus, the reader will find in the notes for this translation that all such chapters from any part of this work are consistently indicated, as they relate to specific passages in the main text. This has never been done before, even though it’s critically important, and it’s worth mentioning here.

In the present instance the chapters, referring to the subject in the text, are Chap. xvi. xvii. xviii. xix. xx. xxvi.; and though these do not afford complete information, yet it is to be remembered, that drawing from relievos is subject to the very same rules as drawing from Nature; and that, therefore, what is elsewhere said on that subject is also equally applicable to this.

In this case, the chapters that discuss the topic in the text are Chap. xvi. xvii. xviii. xix. xx. xxvi.; and while they may not provide complete information, it's important to remember that drawing from reliefs follows the same rules as drawing from nature. Therefore, what is said elsewhere about that topic also applies here.

[5] The meaning of this is, that the last touches of light, such as the shining parts (which are always narrow), must be given sparingly. In short, that the drawing must be kept in broad masses as much as possible.

[5] This means that the final highlights, like the shiny areas (which are always narrow), should be applied carefully. In short, the drawing should maintain broad shapes as much as possible.

[6] This is not an absolute rule, but it is a very good one for drawing of portraits.

[6] This isn't a hard rule, but it's a really good guideline for drawing portraits.

[7] See Chap. ci.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ See Ch. 101.

[8] See the preceding chapter.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ See the previous chapter.

[9] See the two preceding chapters.

[9] Check out the two previous chapters.

[10] Man being the highest of the animal creation, ought to be the chief object of study.

[10] Since humans are the most advanced of all animals, they should be the focus of study.

[11] An intended Treatise, as it seems, on Anatomy, which however never was published; but there are several chapters in the present work on the subject of Anatomy, most of which will be found under the present head of Anatomy; and of such as could not be placed there, because they also related to some other branch, the following is a list by which they may be found: Chapters vi. vii. x. xi. xxxiv. xxxv. xxxvi. xxxvii. xxxviii. xxxix. xl. xli. xlii. xliii. xliv. xlv. xlvi. xlviii. xlix. l. li. lii. cxxix.

[11] It looks like there was supposed to be a treatise on anatomy that was never published. However, there are several chapters in this current work about anatomy, most of which can be found under the section titled Anatomy. For those that couldn't be included there because they also pertain to other topics, here’s a list to help you locate them: Chapters vi. vii. x. xi. xxxiv. xxxv. xxxvi. xxxvii. xxxviii. xxxix. xl. xli. xlii. xliii. xliv. xlv. xlvi. xlviii. xlix. l. li. lii. cxxix.

[12] See chap. lxxxvii.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ See chapter 87.

[13] It does not appear that this intention was ever carried into execution; but there are many chapters in this work on the subject of motion, where all that is necessary for a painter in this branch will be found.

[13] It doesn't seem like this intention was ever put into action; however, there are many chapters in this work about motion, where you'll find everything a painter in this field needs.

[14] Anatomists have divided this muscle into four or five sections; but painters, following the ancient sculptors, shew only the three principal ones; and, in fact, we find that a greater number of them (as may often be observed in nature) gives a disagreeable meagreness to the subject. Beautiful nature does not shew more than three, though there may be more hid under the skin.

[14] Anatomists have split this muscle into four or five parts; however, artists, following the tradition of ancient sculptors, only depict the three main ones. In reality, we often see that a higher number of sections (as can frequently be noticed in nature) results in an unpleasant skinniness to the subject. Beautiful nature reveals no more than three, even if there might be more hidden beneath the skin.

[15] A treatise on weights, like many others, intended by this author, but never published.

[15] A written work on weights, similar to many others, intended by this author but never published.

[16] See the next chapter.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Check out the next chapter.

[17] It is believed that this treatise, like many others promised by the author, was never written; and to save the necessity of frequently repeating this fact, the reader is here informed, once for all, that in the life of the author prefixed to this edition, will be found an account of the works promised or projected by him, and how far his intentions have been carried into effect.

[17] It’s thought that this essay, along with many others the author promised, was never actually written. To avoid constantly repeating this, the reader is informed once and for all that in the author’s biography included in this edition, there will be a summary of the works he promised or planned, along with the extent to which his intentions were realized.

[18] See chap. lxiv.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ See chapter 64.

[19] See in this work from chap. lx. to lxxxi.

[19] See in this work from chap. 60 to 81.

[20] See chapters lxi. lxiv.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ See chapters 61-64.

[21] See chapters civ. cliv.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ See chapters 104-154.

[22] The author here means to compare the different quickness of the motion of the head and the heel, when employed in the same action of jumping; and he states the proportion of the former to be three times that of the latter. The reason he gives for this is in substance, that as the head has but one motion to make, while in fact the lower part of the figure has three successive operations to perform at the places he mentions, three times the velocity, or, in other words, three times the degree of effort, is necessary in the head, the prime mover, to give the power of influencing the other parts; and the rule deducible from this axiom is, that where two different parts of the body concur in the same action, and one of them has to perform one motion only, while the other is to have several, the proportion of velocity or effort in the former must be regulated by the number of operations necessary in the latter.

[22] The author is comparing how quickly the head and heel move during the same jumping action, saying that the head moves three times faster than the heel. He explains that while the head only has one movement to make, the lower part of the body has to perform three successive actions. Therefore, the head, being the primary mover, needs to exert three times the effort to influence the other parts. The takeaway from this principle is that when different parts of the body work together in the same action, if one part has only one movement to make while the other has several, the speed or effort of the first part should be adjusted based on how many actions the second part must perform.

[23] It is explained in this work, or at least there is something respecting it in the preceding chapter, and in chap. cli.

[23] This is discussed in this work, or at least there’s something about it in the previous chapter, and in chapter cli.

[24] The eyeball moving up and down to look at the hand, describes a part of a circle, from every point of which it sees it in an infinite variety of aspects. The hand also is moveable ad infinitum (for it can go round the whole circle—see chap. lxxxvii.), and consequently shew itself in an infinite variety of aspects, which it is impossible for any memory to retain.

[24] The eyeball moves up and down to look at the hand, tracing part of a circle, from which it observes the hand in countless different ways. The hand is also capable of moving ad infinitum (since it can go all the way around the circle—see chap. lxxxvii.), and therefore can present itself in an infinite variety of appearances that no memory could ever fully capture.

[25] See chap. xx. clv.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ See ch. xx. clv.

[26] About thirteen yards of our measure, the Florentine braccia, or cubit, by which the author measures, being 1 foot 10 inches 7-8ths English measure.

[26] About thirteen yards of our measure, the Florentine braccia, or cubit, by which the author measures, is 1 foot 10 inches 7-8ths in English units.

[27] See chap. cxxi. and cccv.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ See chap. 121 and 305.

[28] It is supposed that the figures are to appear of the natural size, and not bigger. In that case, the measure of the first, to be of the exact dimension, should have its feet resting upon the bottom line; but as you remove it from that, it should diminish.

[28] It’s assumed that the figures are meant to show their natural size and not bigger. In that case, the first figure, to be the exact size, should have its feet resting on the bottom line; but as you move it away from that line, it should get smaller.

No allusion is here intended to the distance at which a picture is to be placed from the eye.

No reference is meant here about how far away a picture should be from the viewer.

[29] The author does not mean here to say, that one historical picture cannot be hung over another. It certainly may, because, in viewing each, the spectator is at liberty (especially if they are subjects independent of each other) to shift his place so as to stand at the true point of sight for viewing every one of them; but in covering a wall with a succession of subjects from the same history, the author considers the whole as, in fact, but one picture, divided into compartments, and to be seen at one view, and which cannot therefore admit more than one point of sight. In the former case, the pictures are in fact so many distinct subjects unconnected with each other.

[29] The author doesn't mean to suggest that one historical picture can't be placed over another. It definitely can be, since when looking at each one, the viewer has the freedom (especially if they are unrelated subjects) to move around to find the best angle for viewing all of them. However, when filling a wall with a series of subjects from the same history, the author sees the entire display as just one picture, broken into sections that should be viewed all at once, and therefore can only have one viewpoint. In the first case, the pictures are essentially distinct subjects that don’t relate to each other.

[30] See chap. cccxlviii.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ See chapter 348.

This chapter is obscure, and may probably be made clear by merely stating it in other words. Leonardo objects to the use of both eyes, because, in viewing in that manner the objects here mentioned, two balls, one behind the other, the second is seen, which would not be the case, if the angle of the visual rays were not too big for the first object. Whoever is at all acquainted with optics, need not be told, that the visual rays commence in a single point in the centre, or nearly the centre of each eye, and continue diverging. But, in using both eyes, the visual rays proceed not from one and the same centre, but from a different centre in each eye, and intersecting each other, as they do a little before passing the first object, they become together broader than the extent of the first object, and consequently give a view of part of the second. On the contrary, in using but one eye, the visual rays proceed but from one centre; and as, therefore, there cannot be any intersection, the visual rays, when they reach the first object, are not broader than the first object, and the second is completely hidden. Properly speaking, therefore, in using both eyes we introduce more than one point of sight, which renders the perspective false in the painting; but in using one eye only, there can be, as there ought, but one point of sight. There is, however, this difference between viewing real objects and those represented in painting, that in looking at the former, whether we use one or both eyes, the objects, by being actually detached from the back ground, admit the visual rays to strike on them, so as to form a correct perspective, from whatever point they are viewed, and the eye accordingly forms a perspective of its own; but in viewing the latter, there is no possibility of varying the perspective; and, unless the picture is seen precisely under the same angle as it was painted under, the perspective in all other views must be false. This is observable in the perspective views painted for scenes at the playhouse. If the beholder is seated in the central line of the house, whether in the boxes or pit, the perspective is correct; but, in proportion as he is placed at a greater or less distance to the right or left of that line, the perspective appears to him more or less faulty. And hence arises the necessity of using but one eye in viewing a painting, in order thereby to reduce it to one point of sight.

This chapter is unclear and can probably be clarified by rephrasing it. Leonardo criticizes the use of both eyes because when looking at the objects mentioned here, two spheres—one behind the other—are seen. This wouldn't happen if the angle of the visual rays weren't too large for the first object. Anyone familiar with optics knows that visual rays start at a single point, or nearly the center, of each eye and diverge from there. However, when using both eyes, the visual rays don't come from the same center; they come from different centers in each eye. When they cross each other just before reaching the first object, they become wider than the first object, allowing some of the second object to be seen. In contrast, when using only one eye, the visual rays come from just one center, and since there's no intersection, when they reach the first object, they aren't wider than it, effectively hiding the second object. Therefore, using both eyes introduces multiple viewpoints, which distorts the perspective in the painting. But when using just one eye, there should be only one viewpoint. However, there's a key difference between viewing real objects and those in a painting: when looking at real objects—whether with one or both eyes—they are physically separate from the background, allowing visual rays to hit them correctly from any angle, resulting in a true perspective formed by the eye. In contrast, when viewing a painting, the perspective can't be changed; if the painting isn't viewed from the same angle it was created, the perspective will be incorrect. This is evident in perspective views painted for theater scenes. If the viewer is seated in the center line of the theater, whether in the boxes or the pit, the perspective is correct. But as they move further to the right or left of that line, the perspective appears increasingly distorted. This underscores the need to use just one eye when viewing a painting to reduce it to a single viewpoint.

[31] Chap. xcvi. and civ.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Ch. 96 and 104.

[32] See the Life of the Author prefixed, and chap. xx. and ci. of the present work.

[32] Check out the Author's Biography at the beginning and chapters 20 and 101 of this work.

[33] The author here speaks of unpolished Nature; and indeed it is from such subjects only, that the genuine and characteristic operations of Nature are to be learnt. It is the effect of education to correct the natural peculiarities and defects, and, by so doing, to assimilate one person to the rest of the world.

[33] The author talks about raw Nature, and it’s only from these kinds of subjects that we can truly understand the genuine and unique workings of Nature. Education tends to refine natural quirks and flaws, which helps to make one person more similar to everyone else in the world.

[34] See chap. cxxiii.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ See chapter 123.

[35] See chap. cclxiv.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ See chapter 264.

[36] See chapter cclxvii.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ See chapter 267.

[37] Sir Joshua Reynolds frequently inculcated these precepts in his lectures, and indeed they cannot be too often enforced.

[37] Sir Joshua Reynolds often emphasized these principles in his lectures, and they truly cannot be repeated too often.

[38] Probably this would have formed a part of his intended Treatise on Light and Shadow, but no such proposition occurs in the present work.

[38] This likely would have been included in his planned Treatise on Light and Shadow, but no such idea appears in the current work.

[39] See chapters cc. and ccix.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ See chapters 200 and 209.

[40] See chap. ccix.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ See chapter 209.

[41] This cannot be taken as an absolute rule; it must be left in a great measure to the judgment of the painter. For much graceful softness and grandeur is acquired, sometimes, by blending the lights of the figures with the light part of the ground; and so of the shadows; as Leonardo himself has observed in chapters cxciv. cxcv. and Sir Joshua Reynolds has often put in practice with success.

[41] This shouldn’t be considered a strict rule; it should largely depend on the painter's judgment. A lot of elegance and majesty can sometimes be achieved by mixing the highlights of the figures with the lighter areas of the background, and the same goes for the shadows. Leonardo himself noted this in chapters cxciv. cxcv., and Sir Joshua Reynolds has successfully applied it many times.

[42] See chap. cclxv.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ See chapter 265.

[43] See chap. cxcvi.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ See chapter 196.

[44] He means here to say, that in proportion as the body interposed between the eye and the object is more or less transparent, the greater or less quantity of the colour of the body interposed will be communicated to the object.

[44] He is saying that the more or less transparent the object is between the eye and the thing being looked at, the more or less of its color will be passed on to what is being observed.

[45] See the note to chap. cc.

[45] See the note to chap. cc.

[46] See the preceding chapter, and chap. cc.

[46] Check the previous chapter and chapter cc.

[47] The appearance of motion is lessened according to the distance, in the same proportion as objects diminish in size.

[47] The way things look like they’re moving decreases with distance, just like how objects look smaller as they get farther away.

[48] See chap. ccxvii. and ccxix.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ See chapters 217 and 219.

[49] See chap. ccxv. and ccxix.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ See chapters 215 and 219.

[50] This was intended to constitute a part of some book of Perspective, which we have not; but the rule here referred to will be found in chap. cccx. of the present work.

[50] This was meant to be part of a book on Perspective, which we do not have; however, the rule mentioned here can be found in chapter cccx of this work.

[51] See chap. ccxv. and ccxvii.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ See chapters 215 and 217.

[52] No such work was ever published, nor, for any thing that appears, ever written.

[52] No such work was ever published, nor, as far as anyone can tell, ever written.

[53] The French translation of 1716 has a note on this chapter, saying, that the invention of enamel painting found out since the time of Leonardo da Vinci, would better answer to the title of this chapter, and also be a better method of painting. I must beg leave, however, to dissent from this opinion, as the two kinds of painting are so different, that they cannot be compared. Leonardo treats of oil painting, but the other is vitrification. Leonardo is known to have spent a great deal of time in experiments, of which this is a specimen, and it may appear ridiculous to the practitioners of more modern date, as he does not enter more fully into a minute description of the materials, or the mode of employing them. The principle laid down in the text appears to me to be simply this: to make the oil entirely evaporate from the colours by the action of fire, and afterwards to prevent the action of the air by the means of a glass, which in itself is an excellent principle, but not applicable, any more than enamel painting to large works.

[53] The French translation from 1716 includes a note on this chapter, stating that the invention of enamel painting introduced since Leonardo da Vinci would be a better fit for the chapter title, and also a superior method of painting. However, I must respectfully disagree with this opinion, as the two types of painting are so different that they can’t be compared. Leonardo focuses on oil painting, while the other pertains to vitrification. It's known that Leonardo spent a lot of time experimenting, of which this is an example, and it may seem silly to modern practitioners since he doesn’t provide a detailed description of the materials or how to use them. The main idea in the text seems to be this: to completely evaporate the oil from the colors using heat, and then to protect against air exposure with glass. This is a solid principle, but it’s not suitable for large works, just as enamel painting is not.

[54] It is evident that distemper or size painting is here meant.

[54] It's clear that distemper or size painting is being referred to here.

[55] Indian ink.

Indian ink.

[56] This rule is not without exception: see chap. ccxxxiv.

[56] This rule does have exceptions: see chap. 234.

[57] See chap. ccxxxviii.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ See chapter 238.

[58] See chap. ccxxxvii.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ See chap. 237.

[59] See chapters ccxlvii. cclxxiv. in the present work. Probably they were intended to form a part of a distinct treatise, and to have been ranged as propositions in that, but at present they are not so placed.

[59] See chapters 247 and 274 in this work. They were probably meant to be part of a separate treatise and organized as propositions within it, but right now they aren’t arranged that way.

[60] See chap. ccxlviii.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ See chapter 248.

[61] See chap. cclxxiv.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ See chapter 274.

[62] Although the author seems to have designed that this, and many other propositions to which he refers, should have formed a part of some regular work, and he has accordingly referred to them whenever he has mentioned them, by their intended numerical situation in that work, whatever it might be, it does not appear that he ever carried this design into execution. There are, however, several chapters in the present work, viz. ccxciii. cclxxxix. cclxxxv. ccxcv. in which the principle in the text is recognised, and which probably would have been transferred into the projected treatise, if he had ever drawn it up.

[62] Although the author seems to have planned for this, along with many other ideas he mentions, to be part of a more formal work, and he has referenced them by their planned order in that work, it doesn't seem like he ever actually completed this plan. However, there are several chapters in the current work, namely ccxciii, cclxxxix, cclxxxv, and ccxcv, where the principle in the text is acknowledged, and these likely would have been included in the intended project if he had ever written it out.

[63] The note on the preceding chapter is in a great measure applicable to this, and the proposition mentioned in the text is also to be found in chapter ccxlvii. of the present work.

[63] The note from the previous chapter mostly applies to this one, and the suggestion mentioned in the text can also be found in chapter ccxlvii. of this work.

[64] See the note on the chapter next but one preceding. The proposition in the text occurs in chap. ccxlvii. of the present work.

[64] See the note in the chapter before the next one. The idea in the text appears in chapter ccxlvii. of this work.

[65] Not in this work.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Not in this work.

[66] I do not know a better comment on this passage than Felibien’s Examination of Le Brun’s Picture of the Tent of Darius. From this (which has been reprinted with an English translation, by Colonel Parsons in 1700, in folio) it will clearly appear, what the chain of connexion is between every colour there used, and its nearest neighbour, and consequently a rule may be formed from it with more certainty and precision than where the student is left to develope it for himself, from the mere inspection of different examples of colouring.

[66] I can't think of a better commentary on this passage than Felibien’s Examination of Le Brun’s Picture of the Tent of Darius. From this (which was reprinted with an English translation by Colonel Parsons in 1700, in folio), it will clearly show the connection between each color used and its closest neighbor, and therefore a rule can be established with more certainty and accuracy than if the student were left to figure it out on their own just by looking at different examples of coloring.

[67] See chap. ccxxiii. ccxxxvii. cclxxiv. cclxxxii. of the present work. We have before remarked, that the propositions so frequently referred to by the author, were never reduced into form, though apparently he intended a regular work in which they were to be included.

[67] See chap. 223, 237, 274, 282 of the current work. We have previously noted that the propositions the author frequently refers to were never organized into a formal structure, even though it seems he intended to include them in a systematic work.

[68] No where in this work.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Nowhere in this text.

[69] This is evident in many of Vandyke’s portraits, particularly of ladies, many of whom are dressed in black velvet; and this remark will in some measure account for the delicate fairness which he frequently gives to the female complexion.

[69] This is clear in many of Vandyke’s portraits, especially those of women, many of whom are wearing black velvet; and this observation somewhat explains the soft fairness he often depicts in female skin tones.

[70] These propositions, any more than the others mentioned in different parts of this work, were never digested into a regular treatise, as was evidently intended by the author, and consequently are not to be found, except perhaps in some of the volumes of the author’s manuscript collections.

[70] These ideas, just like the others referred to in various sections of this work, were never organized into a formal treatise, as the author clearly intended, and therefore cannot be found, except maybe in a few of the volumes of the author's manuscript collections.

[71] See chap. ccxciii. cccvii. cccviii.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ See chapters 93, 207, 208.

[72] See chap. cclxxxvii.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ See chap. 287.

[73] This book on perspective was never drawn up.

[73] This book on perspective was never created.

[74] See chap. ccxcii.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ See chapter 292.

[75] See chap. ccxii. ccxlviii. cclv.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ See ch. 212, 248, 255.

[76] There is no work of this author to which this can at present refer, but the principle is laid down in chapters cclxxxiv. cccvi. of the present treatise.

[76] There isn't a work by this author that this can currently refer to, but the principle is outlined in chapters 284 and 396 of this treatise.

[77] See chapters cccvii. cccxxii.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ See chapters 307, 322.

[78] See chap. cxvi. cxxi. cccv.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ See chapters 116, 121, 305.

[79] See chap. cccxiii. and cccxxiii.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ See chapters 213 and 223.

[80] To our obtaining a correct idea of the magnitude and distance of any object seen from afar, it is necessary that we consider how much of distinctness an object loses at a distance (from the mere interposition of the air), as well as what it loses in size; and these two considerations must unite before we can decidedly pronounce as to its distance or magnitude. This calculation, as to distinctness, must be made upon the idea that the air is clear, as, if by any accident it is otherwise, we shall (knowing the proportion in which clear air dims a prospect) be led to conclude this farther off than it is, and, to justify that conclusion, shall suppose its real magnitude correspondent with the distance, at which from its degree of distinctness it appears to be. In the circumstance remarked in the text there is, however, a great deception; the fact is, that the colour and the minute parts of the object are lost in the fog, while the size of it is not diminished in proportion; and the eye being accustomed to see objects diminished in size at a great distance, supposes this to be farther off than it is, and consequently imagines it larger.

[80] To accurately assess how big and far away something is that we see from a distance, we need to think about how much clarity the object loses due to the air between us and it, as well as how its size appears to change. We must take these two factors into account before we can confidently judge its distance or size. This clarity assessment should assume that the air is clear; if it’s not, we might mistakenly believe the object is farther away than it really is. This misjudgment occurs because we assume its actual size matches the distance it appears to be based on its clarity. However, in the situation noted in the text, there’s a significant illusion at play; the fog obscures the color and fine details of the object while its size remains unchanged. Since our eyes are used to seeing objects appear smaller when they are far away, we mistakenly think this object is further away and therefore assume it is larger.

[81] This proposition, though undoubtedly intended to form a part of some future work, which never was drawn up, makes no part of the present.

[81] This idea, although clearly meant to be included in a future project that was never completed, is not part of this one.

[82] See chap. cccvii.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ See ch. 307.

[83] Vide chap. ccxcii. ccciii.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ See chap. 292, 303.

[84] See chapter ccxcviii.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ See chapter 298.

[85] This was probably to have been a part of some other work, but it does not occur in this.

[85] This was likely meant to be part of another work, but it doesn't appear in this one.

[86] Cento braccia, or cubits. The Florence braccio is one foot ten inches seven eighths, English measure.

[86] A hundred arms, or cubits. The Florence braccio is one foot ten inches and seven-eighths in English measurement.

[87] Probably the Author here means yellow lilies, or fleurs de lis.

[87] The author likely means yellow lilies or fleur-de-lis.

[88] That point is always found in the horizon, and is called the point of sight, or the vanishing point.

[88] That point is always located on the horizon and is referred to as the point of sight or the vanishing point.

[89] See chap. cccxx.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ See chapter 280.

[90] See chap. cccxvii.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ See ch. 317.

[91] This position has been already laid down in chapter cxxiv. (and will also be found in chapter cccxlviii.); and the reader is referred to the note on that passage, which will also explain that in the text, for further illustration. It may, however, be proper to remark, that though the author has here supposed both objects conveyed to the eye by an angle of the same extent, they cannot, in fact, be so seen, unless one eye be shut; and the reason is this: if viewed with both eyes, there will be two points of sight, one in the centre of each eye; and the rays from each of these to the objects must of course be different, and will consequently form different angles.

[91] This idea has already been discussed in chapter cxxiv. (and will also be found in chapter cccxlviii.); the reader is referred to the note on that passage, which will further clarify the text. However, it’s important to note that although the author has assumed both objects are seen by an angle of the same size, they cannot actually be perceived that way unless one eye is closed. The reason for this is that if viewed with both eyes, there will be two points of sight, one in the center of each eye; and the light rays from each of these to the objects must be different, resulting in different angles.

[92] The braccio is one foot ten inches and seven eighths English measure.

[92] The braccio is one foot ten inches and seven-eighths in English measurement.

[93] i.e. To be abridged according to the rules of perspective.

[93] i.e. To be shortened based on the principles of perspective.

[94] See chap. cxxii.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ See chapter 122.

[95] The whole of this chapter, like the next but one preceding, depends on the circumstance of there being in fact two points of sight, one in the centre of each eye, when an object is viewed with both eyes. In natural objects the effect which this circumstance produces is, that the rays from each point of sight, diverging as they extend towards the object, take in not only that, but some part also of the distance behind it, till at length, at a certain distance behind it, they cross each other; whereas, in a painted representation, there being no real distance behind the object, but the whole being a flat surface, it is impossible that the rays from the points of sight should pass beyond that flat surface; and as the object itself is on that flat surface, which is the real extremity of the view, the eyes cannot acquire a sight of any thing beyond.

[95] This entire chapter, like the one before the next, relies on the fact that there are actually two points of view—one from the center of each eye—when looking at something with both eyes. In natural objects, this creates an effect where the rays from each point of view spread out as they reach the object, capturing not just the object itself but also part of the distance behind it. Eventually, the rays cross each other at a certain distance behind the object. However, in a painted image, there’s no real distance behind the object since it’s all on a flat surface, so the rays from the points of view can’t extend beyond that surface. And since the object itself is on that flat surface, which is the true limit of the view, the eyes can’t see anything beyond that.

[96] A well-known painter at Florence, contemporary with Leonardo da Vinci, who painted several altar-pieces and other public works.

[96] A famous painter in Florence, who lived at the same time as Leonardo da Vinci, known for creating several altarpieces and other public artworks.

[97] See chap. cxxiv. and cccxlviii.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ See ch. 124 and 348.

[98] See chap. x.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ See chapter x.

[99] See chap. cci.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ See chapter cci.

[100] Leonardo da Vinci was remarkably fond of this kind of invention, and is accused of having lost a great deal of time that way.

[100] Leonardo da Vinci had a strong passion for this type of invention and is said to have wasted a lot of time doing so.

[101] The method here recommended, was the general and common practice at that time, and continued so with little, if any variation, till lately. But about thirty years ago, the late Mr. Bacon invented an entirely new method, which, as better answering the purpose, he constantly used, and from him others have also adopted it into practice.

[101] The method suggested here was the usual and common practice at that time, and it remained largely unchanged until recently. However, about thirty years ago, the late Mr. Bacon developed a completely new method, which he consistently found to be more effective, and since then, others have also started using it.

[102] This may be a good method of dividing the figure for the purpose of reducing from large to small, or vice versâ; but it not being the method generally used by the painters for measuring their figures, as being too minute, this chapter was not introduced amongst those of general proportions.

[102] This might be a useful way to break down the figure to go from large to small, or vice versa; however, since this is not the common method used by artists to measure their figures, as it’s too detailed, this chapter wasn’t included among those discussing general proportions.

Transcriber’s Note:

Transcription Note:

This e-text is based on the 1802 edition. The original spelling has been retained, as well as inconsistencies, such as ‘musquetry’/‘musketry’, ‘Du Frêne’/‘du Fresne’, ‘Melzio’/‘Meltio’/‘Melzi’, etc. Uncommon or old-style spelling has not been altered, such as ‘opake’ (opaque), ‘verdegris’ (verdigris), ‘dutchess’ (duchess), etc. Errors due to bad print, as well as minor punctuation errors have been tacitly corrected.

This e-text is based on the 1802 edition. The original spelling has been kept, along with inconsistencies like ‘musquetry’/‘musketry’, ‘Du Frêne’/‘du Fresne’, ‘Melzio’/‘Meltio’/‘Melzi’, etc. Uncommon or outdated spelling hasn't been changed, such as ‘opake’ (opaque), ‘verdegris’ (verdigris), ‘dutchess’ (duchess), etc. Mistakes from poor printing, as well as minor punctuation errors, have been silently corrected.

In the text, the plates are referenced by using Roman numerals, whereas the captions of the plates show Arabic numerals; the same applies to the Table of Chapters and the chapter headings, respectively. This inconsistency has been retained.

In the text, the plates are referred to with Roman numerals, while the captions of the plates use Arabic numerals; the same goes for the Table of Chapters and the chapter headings. This inconsistency has been kept.

Footnotes related to itroductory chapters have been prefixed with the letter ‘i’ ([i1]–[i210]); footnotes in da Vinci’s own text, however, are shown as plain Arabic numerals ([1]–[102]).

Footnotes related to introductory chapters have been marked with the letter ‘i’ ([i1]–[i210]); footnotes in da Vinci’s own text, however, are indicated by plain Arabic numerals ([1]–[102]).

The following typographical errors have been corrected:

The following typos have been fixed:

# p. xviii: ‘overspead’ → ‘overspread’; ‘Vincius ast oculis’ → ‘Vincius est oculis’
# p. lxiii: ‘Vasari, 36, ’ → ‘Vasari, p. 36,’
# p. lxxxv: ‘Maestrodi’ → ‘Maestro di’
# p. xcii: ‘Fontainbleau’ → ‘Fontainebleau’
# p. 22: Plate 2: original caption points to page 2; corrected to page 22.
# p. 37: ‘pully’ → ‘pulley’
# p. 117: ‘andso’ → ‘and so’
# p. 156: ‘A B E D’ → ‘C B E D’
# p. 181: ‘that that’ → ‘than that’
# Footnote 62: ‘tranferred’ → ‘transferred’

# p. xviii: ‘overspead’ → ‘overspread’; ‘Vincius ast oculis’ → ‘Vincius est oculis’
# p. lxiii: ‘Vasari, 36, ’ → ‘Vasari, p. 36,’
# p. lxxxv: ‘Maestrodi’ → ‘Maestro di’
# p. xcii: ‘Fontainbleau’ → ‘Fontainebleau’
# p. 22: Plate 2: original caption points to page 2; corrected to page 22.
# p. 37: ‘pully’ → ‘pulley’
# p. 117: ‘andso’ → ‘and so’
# p. 156: ‘A B E D’ → ‘C B E D’
# p. 181: ‘that that’ → ‘than that’
# Footnote 62: ‘tranferred’ → ‘transferred’

The Table of Chapters has been moved to the beginning of the text for reasons of clarity and comprehensibility.

The Table of Chapters has been moved to the start of the text for clarity and ease of understanding.


Download ePUB

If you like this ebook, consider a donation!